Marine Engineering Regulations and Mater

Acerca de este libro
Esta es una copia digital de un libro que, durante generaciones, se ha conservado en las estanterías de una biblioteca, hasta que Google ha decidido
escanearlo como parte de un proyecto que pretende que sea posible descubrir en línea libros de todo el mundo.
Ha sobrevivido tantos años como para que los derechos de autor hayan expirado y el libro pase a ser de dominio público. El que un libro sea de
dominio público significa que nunca ha estado protegido por derechos de autor, o bien que el período legal de estos derechos ya ha expirado. Es
posible que una misma obra sea de dominio público en unos países y, sin embargo, no lo sea en otros. Los libros de dominio público son nuestras
puertas hacia el pasado, suponen un patrimonio histórico, cultural y de conocimientos que, a menudo, resulta difícil de descubrir.
Todas las anotaciones, marcas y otras señales en los márgenes que estén presentes en el volumen original aparecerán también en este archivo como
testimonio del largo viaje que el libro ha recorrido desde el editor hasta la biblioteca y, finalmente, hasta usted.
Normas de uso
Google se enorgullece de poder colaborar con distintas bibliotecas para digitalizar los materiales de dominio público a fin de hacerlos accesibles
a todo el mundo. Los libros de dominio público son patrimonio de todos, nosotros somos sus humildes guardianes. No obstante, se trata de un
trabajo caro. Por este motivo, y para poder ofrecer este recurso, hemos tomado medidas para evitar que se produzca un abuso por parte de terceros
con fines comerciales, y hemos incluido restricciones técnicas sobre las solicitudes automatizadas.
Asimismo, le pedimos que:
+ Haga un uso exclusivamente no comercial de estos archivos Hemos diseñado la Búsqueda de libros de Google para el uso de particulares;
como tal, le pedimos que utilice estos archivos con fines personales, y no comerciales.
+ No envíe solicitudes automatizadas Por favor, no envíe solicitudes automatizadas de ningún tipo al sistema de Google. Si está llevando a
cabo una investigación sobre traducción automática, reconocimiento óptico de caracteres u otros campos para los que resulte útil disfrutar
de acceso a una gran cantidad de texto, por favor, envíenos un mensaje. Fomentamos el uso de materiales de dominio público con estos
propósitos y seguro que podremos ayudarle.
+ Conserve la atribución La filigrana de Google que verá en todos los archivos es fundamental para informar a los usuarios sobre este proyecto
y ayudarles a encontrar materiales adicionales en la Búsqueda de libros de Google. Por favor, no la elimine.
+ Manténgase siempre dentro de la legalidad Sea cual sea el uso que haga de estos materiales, recuerde que es responsable de asegurarse de
que todo lo que hace es legal. No dé por sentado que, por el hecho de que una obra se considere de dominio público para los usuarios de
los Estados Unidos, lo será también para los usuarios de otros países. La legislación sobre derechos de autor varía de un país a otro, y no
podemos facilitar información sobre si está permitido un uso específico de algún libro. Por favor, no suponga que la aparición de un libro en
nuestro programa significa que se puede utilizar de igual manera en todo el mundo. La responsabilidad ante la infracción de los derechos de
autor puede ser muy grave.
Acerca de la Búsqueda de libros de Google
El objetivo de Google consiste en organizar información procedente de todo el mundo y hacerla accesible y útil de forma universal. El programa de
Búsqueda de libros de Google ayuda a los lectores a descubrir los libros de todo el mundo a la vez que ayuda a autores y editores a llegar a nuevas
audiencias. Podrá realizar búsquedas en el texto completo de este libro en la web, en la página http://books.google.com
This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized
by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the
information in books and make it universally accessible.
https://books.google.com
UNITED
\\ {
STATES.COAST GUARD
MARINE
ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
AND MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Materials, Construction, Installation, Inspection, and

Maintenance of Boilers, Unfired Pressure Vessels,
Appurtenances, Piping, Fusion Welding,
and Brazing
DECEMBER 1944
UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE

WASHINGton : 1944
J AM 235 -
UL 25
| 94.4
UNITED STATES CoAst GUARD HEADQUARTERs,

Washington, D. C., December 30, 1944.
The “Marine Engineering Regulations and Material Specifications,” contained in this
publication, set forth the requirements covering boilers, pressure vessels, and appurtenances,
which include castings, piping, valves, mountings, etc., and the design, construction, instal
lation, and inspection thereof. These regulations are applicable to merchant vessels, in
cluding tank vessels, subject to Title 52 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (sec
tions 4399–4500, inclusive), and acts amendatory thereof or supplementary thereto.
The regulations in this publication are principally requirements for peacetime opera
tions and the supplemental wartime regulations are contained in “Subchapter O—Regula
tions Applicable to Certain Wessels and Shipping During Emergency.” The regulations
contained in Parts 50 to 57 apply to installations made or contracted for on or after July
1, 1935, and Part 58 applies to installations made or contracted for prior to July 1, 1935.
This publication replaces the “Marine Engineering Regulations and Material Specifi
cations,” dated August 1943, and includes all amendments published in the Federal Register
through December 30, 1944.
General authority over and responsibility for the administration and enforcement of
the laws and regulations governing navigation and inspection of merchant marine vessels
in the several Coast Guard districts are vested in and imposed upon the District Coast
Guard Officers in charge of such districts.
Ship owners, operators, builders, vessels' operating forces, and other persons affected
py the navigation and inspection laws and regulations should familiarize themselves with
the provisions contained herein. To this end Coast Guard personnel concerned with the
administration and enforcement of these laws and regulations will extend every possible
assistance.
R. R. WAEscHE,
Vice Admiral, United States Coast Guard,
Commandant.
(II)
CONTENTS
SUBCHAPTER F-MARINE ENGINEERING
General provisions
Materials------------------------------
Construction...III-III-III-III-III-III-III-III-IIII
Installation
Inspection---------------------------
Piping systems
Fusion welding-----------------------
Supplementary data and requirements
Boiler plate; boilers and attachments
Index
TITLE 46–SHIPPING
CHAPTER I—CoAst GUARD: INSPECTION AND NAvigATION
SUBCHAPTER F-MARINE ENGINEERING
PART 50–GENERAL PROVISIONS

Sec. Sec.
50.1 Basis and application of rules. 50.2 Definition of terms.
Section 50.1 Basis and application of rules. This subchapter contains specifications
and requirements for materials, design, construction, installation, and inspection of boilers,
unfired pressure vessels and appurtenances thereof, also piping, valves, fittings, flanges,
safety valves, etc., upon the strength and efficiency of which safety of life is dependent,
and which are intended for maximum temperatures of 1,000°F. Parts 50 to 57, inclusive,
apply to installations contracted for or built on or after 1 July 1935. Part 58 applies only
to installations contracted for or built prior to 1 July 1935.
Where existing vessels are reboilered, the mountings and attachments, including feed
and blow-off valves and fittings, shall be renewed in accordance with the rules in Parts 50
to 57, inclusive, of this subchapter. The steam piping shall be gaged and examined by the
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, and if found to be of the thickness required at the
time the piping was installed may be continued in service: Provided, The Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, is satisfied that its condition is such as to warrant its continued use.
50.2 Definition of terms. Certain terms used in the rules in this subchapter are
defined as follows:
(a) Commandant means the Commandant of the Coast Guard.
(b) District Coast Guard Officer means an officer of the Coast Guard designated as
such by the Commandant to command all Coast Guard activities within his district, which
include the inspections, enforcement, and administration of Title 52, R. S., and acts amend
atory thereof or supplemental thereto, and rules and regulations thereunder.
(c) Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, means any person from the civilian or mili
tary branch of the Coast Guard designated as such by the Commandant and who under
the superintendence and direction of the District Coast Guard Officer is in charge of an
inspection district for the performance of duties with respect to the inspections, enforcement,
and administration of Title 52, R. S., and acts amendatory thereof or supplemental thereto,
and rules and regulations thereunder.
(d) Marine inspector or inspector means any person from the civilian or military branch
of the Coast Guard assigned under the superintendence and direction of an Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, or any other person as may be designated for the performance of duties
with respect to the inspections, enforcement, and the administration of Title 52, R. S., and
acts amendatory thereof or supplemental thereto, and rules and regulations thereunder.
(e) Requirements means process of manufacture, characteristics, physical and chemical
properties, tests, workmanship, and finish of materials.
(f) High temperature means temperature over 500°F.
§) Low and moderate temperature means temperature up to and including 500°F.
Maximum allowable working pressure within the meaning of the rules in this sub
chapter º to the gage pressure, or the pressure above the atmosphere in pounds per
square lnch.
§ Headquarter. means the Office of the Commandant, U. S. Coast Guard, Washing
ton, D. C.
(F–1)
· · · ·，≤ r ≤ ∞， -∞ … … …， ~~~~ … ：（ … … ：-）：w ： … …！！！ … … ~~~~ ~~~~ … ， …， …， …:…' ！！！
PART 51—MATERIALS
Sec. GENERAL LAP-WELDED AND SEAMLess Steel AND LAP-WELDED

51.1–1. Statutory requirements. IRON BOILER TUBES
51.1-2 Basic information requirements. Scope.
51.1–3 General classification of materials. Process.
51.1–4 Inspection and testing of class A material. Chemical composition.
51.1—5 Chemical analyses. Check analysis.
51.1–6 Certification of class B material. Flange tests.
51.1–7 Tension test. Flattening tests.
51. 1-8 Test reports. Crush test.
51. 1-9 Retests. Hydrostatic test.
51.1–10 Rejections. Etch test for charcoal iron tubes.
Appeals. Test specimens.
51.1–12 Process of steel manufacture. Number of tests.
51.1–13 Stamping plates and specimens. Retests.
51.1–14 Stock plates. Forming operations.
51.1–15
51.1–16
Workmanship and finish.
Heat treatment.
Fºible
inish.
variations in dimensions and weight.
51.1–17 Reclassification of materials. Marking.
51.1–18 Alternative materials.
ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED STEEL AND OPEN HEARTH
MARINE BOILER Steel PLATE IRON BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBES
51.2–1 Scope.
51.2–2 Chemical composition. 51.9a–1 Scope.
61.2–3 Tensile properties. 51. 9a–2 Process.
51.2–4 Modifications in elongation. 51. 9a–3 Manufacture.
51.2–5 Bending properties. Chemical composition;
51.2–6 Test specimens. 51. 9a–5 Check analysis.
51.2–7 Number of tests. 51. 9a–6 Flattening test.
51.98-7 Flange test.
51.2–8 Permissible variations in thickness and weight. 51.98-8
51.2–9 Finish. Crush test for grades A & B tubes.
51.2–10 Marking. Tensile properties.
51.9a–10 Flaring test for grade D tubes.
STAYBOLT STEEL 51.98–11 Hardness test for grade D tubes,
51.4-1 Scope. 51. 9a–12 Hydrostatic test.
51.4–2 Process.
51. 9a–13 Test specimens.
51.4–3 Chemical composition. 51. 9a–14 Number of tests.
51.4–4 Tensile properties. 51. 9a–15 Retests.
51.4–5 Bending properties. 51.9a–16 Forming operations:
51.4–6 Test specimens. 51.9a–17 Finish.
51.4-7 Number of tests. 51.9a–18
51.4–8 Permissible variations in diameter.
Marking.
51.4-9 Finish. SEAMLESS STEEL BOILER TUBE8 roR HIGH-PRESSURE
51.4–10 Marking. SERVICE; MEDIUM-CARBON SEAMLEss Steel BoILER
STEEL BARs AND SHAPES AND SUPERHEATER TUBE8; CARBON-Molybdenum
ALLOY-STEEL BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBES
51. 5–2 Chemical composition.
51. 5–3 Tension tests. Scope.
51.5–4. Modifications in elongation. Process.
51. 5–5 Bending properties. Manufacture.
51.5–6 Test speeimens. Chemical composition.
51. 5–7 Number of tests. Check analysis.
51. 5–8 Permissible variation in gage. Tensile properties.
Finish. Flattening test.
51.5–10 Marking. Flaring test.
Hardness test.
WROUGHT-IRoN BARs Foh STAYS AND STAY Bolts Hydrostatic test.
61. 6-1 Material. Test specimens.
Number of tests.
51.6–2 Definitions of terms. Retests.
51.6–3 Tensile properties. Retreatment.
51.6–4 Chemical composition and tests.
Forming operations.
51.6–5 Modifications in tensile properties. Fºible variations in dimensions and weight.
51.6–6 Bend tests. nism.
51. 6–7 Etch tests.
51.6–8 Number of tests. Marking.
51. 6-9 Finish. STEEL PIPE
51.6–10 Marking.
Scope.
RIVET STEEL Process.
51.7-1 Scope. Chemical composition.
Process.
Tensile requirements.
51. 7–3 Chemical composition, Bending proporties.
51. 7–4 Tensile properties. Flattening tests.
51. 7–5 Bending properties. Hydrostatic test.
51. 7–6 Test specimens. Test procedure.
51. 7–7 Tests of finished rivets.
51.7–8 Permissible variations in diameter.” and marking.
51. 7–9 Workmanship and finish. WELDED AND SEAMLESS STEEL PIPE
RIVET IRON Scope.
51.8–1. Material. Process.
51.8–2. Chemical composition. Chemical composition.
51.8–3 Tensile properties. Check analysis.
51.8–4. Bend tests. Tensile properties.
Bending properties.
Flattening test.
51.8-7 Micrographic tests. Hydrostatic test.
51.8–8 Physical properties and tests. Test specimens.
51. 8–9 Workinanship and finish. 51.11a–10 Number of tests.
51.8–10 Inspection. 51.11a–11 Retests.
51.8–11 Rejection. 51.11a–12 Standard Weights,
MLARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
Sec. CARBON AND ALLOY-STEEL NUTS FOR HIGH TEMPERA

51.11a–13 Permissible variations in weight and dimensions. TURE SERVICE
51. 11a–14 Lengths. 51. 16a–1 Scope.
51.11a–15 Workmanship. Process.
51.11a–16 Finish. Fabrication.
51. 11a–17 Marking. Stress relieving.
51.11a–18 Inspection. Chernical composition.
51.11a–19 Rejection. Hardness test.
Drift test.
ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED STEEL PIPE iºns test.
Finish.
51.11b-1 Scope. STEEL CASTINGS
51.11b-2 Process. Scope.
51.11b-3 Chemical composition. Process.
51.11b-4 Ladle analysis. Heat treatment.
51.11b-5 Check analysis. Chemical composition.
51.11b-6 Tensile properties. Tensile properties.
51.11b-7 Flattening test. Bending properties.
51.11b-8 Hydrostatic test. Hydrostatic tests.
51.11b-9 Test specimens. Test specimens.
51.11b-10 Number of tests. –9 Number of tests.
51.11b-11 Retests. 51.17–10 Retests.
51.11b-12 Permissible variations in weight and dimensions. 51.17–11 Workmanship.
51.11b-13 Lengths. 51.17–12 Finish.
51.11b-14 Workmanship. 51.17–13 Marking.
51.11b-15 Finish,
51.11b-16 Marking. GRAY IRoN CASTINGs Fort VALves, FLANGES, ANd PIPE FITTINGs
51.11b-17 Protective coating. 51.
18–1 Scope.
51.11b-18 Inspection. 51. 18–2 Process.
51.11b-19 Rejection. 51. 18–3 Chemical composition.
51. 18–4 Tensile properties.
WELDED WROUGHT-IRON PIPE 51. 18–5 Transverse test.
51.12–1. Material. 51. 18–6 Mold
51. 18–7 Test specimens.
51.12–1a Chemical composition.
51. 18–8 Tension test apparatus.
51. 12–2 Tensile properties.
51. 12–3 Fracture tests. 51. 18–9 Records.
51. 12–4 Bend tests. 51. 18–10 Workmanship and finish.
51. 18–11 Marking.
51.12–5 Test specimens.
51. 12–6 Number of tests. MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS
51. 12–7 Hydrostatic tests.
51. 12–8 Permissible variations and dimensions. 51. 19–1 Material and scope.
51. 19–2 Process.
51.12–9 Inspection and rejection. 51. 19–3 Tensile properties.
51.12–10 Marking. 51. 19–4 Test specimens.
SEAMLESs BRASS PIPE 51. 19–5 Number of tests.
51. 19–6 Special tests.
51. 13-1 Scope. 51. 19–7 Reannealing.
51. 13–2 Process. 51, 19–8 Workinanship and finish.
51.13–3 Temper. 51. 19–9 Marking.
51. 13–4 Chemical composition. 51. 19–10 Inspection and rejection.
51. 13–5 Sampling for chemical analysis.
51. 13–6 Expansion test. MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS FOR PIPE FITTINGS
51. 13–7 Strain test.
51. 19–11 Cupola malleable iron.
51. 13–8 Threading test. 51. 19–12 Grade B castings.
51. 13–9 Bending properties. 51. 19–13
51. 13–10 Hydrostatic test. Tensile properties.
51. 13–11 Number of tests.
51. 19–15 Requirements.
51. 13–12 Workmanship.
51. 13–13 Finish. 51. 19–16 Workmanship and finish.
51. 19–17 Marking.
51. 13–14 Rejection. BRONZE CASTINGS
SEAMLESS COPPER PIPE Materials and purposes.
51. 14-1 Scope. Manufacture.
51. 14–2 Process. Chemical composition.
51. 14–3 Condition or temper. Chemical analysis.
51. 14–4 Chemical composition. Tensile properties.
51. 14–5 Sampling for chemical analysis. Test specimens.
51. 14–6 Expansion test. Number of tests.
51. 14–7 Bending properties. Workmanship and finish.
51. 14–8 Microscopic examination. Marking.
51. 14—9 Hydrostatic test. Certification.
51.14–10 Number of tests. STEEL PLATEs (FLANGE AND FIREbox QUALITY)
STEEL ForgiN6s Scope.
Process.
51.15-1 Scope. Heat treatment.
51. 15–2 Process.
51. 15–3 Discard. Chemical composition.
51. 15–4 Manufacturing practice. Tensile properties.
51. 15–5 Heat treatment. Modifications in elongation.
51. 15–6 Chemical composition. Bending properties.
51.15-7 Tensile properties. Test specimens.
51. 15–8 Hydrostatic tests. Number of tests.
51. 21–10 Permissible variations in thickness and weight.
51. 15–10 Number of tests. 51. 21–11 Finish.
51. 15–11 Retests. 51. 21–12 Marking.
51. 15–12 Macro-etch tests, 51.21–13 Manufacturer's certification.
51. 15–13 Workmanship and finish. STEEL PLATEs For WELDING (FLANGE AND FIRE box QUALITY)
51.15–14 Marking.
51.22–1 Scope.
51.22–2 Process.
ALLOY-STEEL BOLTING MATERIAL 51.22–3 Chemical composition.
51. 16–1 Scope. 51.22—4 Tensile properties.
51. 16-2 Process. 51. 22–5 Bending properties.
51. 16–3 Heat treatment. 51.22—6 Test specimens.
51. 16–4 Chemical composition. 51.22–7 Number of tests.
51. 16–5 Tensile properties. 51.22—8 Permissible variations in thickness and weight.
51. 16–6 Prinell hardness test. 51.22–9 Finish.
51. 16–7 Workmanship and finish. 51.22–10 Marking.
51. 16–8 Nuts and washers. 51.22-11 Manufacturer's certification.
(F–4)
MATERIALS (51.1—3]
GENERAL
51.1—1 Statutory requirements. (a) Plates, bars, and shapes used as pressure parts
of boilers intended for marine service shall be tested, inspected, and stamped by an inspector
in accordance with the requirements of title 52 of the Revised Statutes of the United States.
(b) Material used for pressure parts in the construction of pressure vessels other than
boilers shall conform to the requirements of this part. Unfired pressure vessels designed for
a maximum allowable working pressure not exceeding 700 pounds per square inch and
temperatures not exceeding 500° # may be constructed of steel plate meeting the specifica
tions of sections 51.21–1 to 51.21–13 inclusive or sections 51.22–1 to 51.22–11 inclusive, pro
vided that such material is tested and stamped by the manufacturer. Plates for this purpose
are not required to be tested and inspected by a duly authorized inspector, but may be ac
cepted on the certification of the manufacturer as to their chemical and physical properties.
51.1–2 Basic information requirements. When ordering material for the construction
of boilers or pressure vessels to be installed on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the
Coast Guard, É. manufacturers shall, as far as practicable, furnish the following informa
tion to the manufacturer of the material and to the Commandant. -
(a) Name and location of manufacturer's works.

(b) Type and identifying dimensions of boiler or pressure vessel.
(c) Manufacturer's serial or shop number.
(d) Working pressure required.
(e) Inspection district in which the completed boiler or pressure vessel will be first
inspected after installation.
Name and address of builder of hull.
) Owner of hull.
(h) Name of builder's number of hull.
(i) Waters upon which the vessel is to be navigated.
(j) Home port.
51.1–3 General classification of materials. (a) The materials to be used in the
construction of boilers and pressure vessels, piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances as
hereinafter enumerated shall be of three general classes of which classes A an }. shall be used
for pressure parts and class C may be used for other parts as specified.
Class A: Tested materials manufactured under the supervision of the Coast Guard, tests
of which shall be witnessed by an inspector.
Class B: Certified materials tested by the manufacturers, and certified by them as
conforming to the requirements.
Class C: Materials for nonpressure parts of boilers or pressure vessels such as casings
for water-tube boilers, uptakes, furnace fronts, and operating equipment shall be of good
commercial quality. No detail requirements are herein specified for materials in this class.
Class C materials shall be º by inspectors without requiring tests or certification by
manufacturers.
(b) Except as may be otherwise required, the classification of materials under A and B
and the sections of this part in which they are specified, are as follows:
CLAss A
Sections
51.2–1 to 51.2–10 Marine boiler steel plate.
51.3–1 to 51.3–13 Deleted.
51.4–1 to 51.4–10 Staybolt steel.
51.5–1 to 51.5–10 Steel bars and shapes.
51.6–1 to 51.6–10 Wrought-iron bars for stays and staybolts.
51.7–1 to 51.7–9 Rivet steel.
51.8–1 to 51.8–11 Rivet iron.
CLAss B
51.9–1 to 51.9–16 Lap-welded and seamless steel and lap-welded iron boiler tubes.
51.9a–1 to 51.9a–18 Electric-resistance-welded steel and open-hearth iron boiler and superheater tubes.
51.10–1 to 51.10–18 Seamless steel boiler tubes for high-pressure service.
Medium-carbon seamless steel boiler and superheater tubes.
Carbon-molybdenum alloy-steel boiler and superheater tubes.
51.11–1 to 51.11–9 Steel pipe.
51.11a–1 to 51.11a–19 Welded and seamless steel pipe.
51.11b-1 to 51.11b-19 Electric-resistance-welded steel pipe.
51.12–1 to 51.12–10 Welded wrought-iron pipe.
51.13–1 to 51.13–14 Seamless brass pipe.
(F-5)
(51.1–4] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
Sections
51.14–1 to 51.14–10 Seamless copper pipe.
51.15–1 to 51.15–14 Steel forgings.
51.16–1 to 51.16–8 Alloy-steel bolting material.
51.16a–1 to 51.16a–9 Carbon and alloy-steel nuts for high-temperature service.
51.17–1 to 51.17–12 Steel castings.
51.18–1 to 51.18–10 Gray-iron castings.
51.19–1 to 51.19–16 Malleable-iron castings.
51.20–1 to 51.20–10 Bronze castings.
51.21–1 to 51.21–13 Steel plates (flange and firebox quality.)
51.22–1 to 51.22–11 Steel plates for welding (flange and firebox quality.)
51.1–4 Inspection and testing of class A material. Inspectors shall have free entry
at all times to those parts of the works where material subject to the rules in this part is being
manufactured. The manufacturer shall afford inspectors all reasonable facilities to satisfy
them that the material is being manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the
Commandant. Unless otherwise authorized, tests and inspection shall be made at the place
of manufacture prior to shipment and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the operation of the works. Inspectors shall assure themselves that test specimens are
marked for certain identification with the materials which they represent. Unless otherwise
specified, tests shall be made at ordinary temperature.
51.1–5 Chemical analyses. (a) A ladle analysis of each melt of steel for materials
comprised in class A shall be made by the manufacturer and a certified report thereof shall
be furnished by him to the inspector upon request. This analysis shall be made from a test
ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. The chemical composition thus determined shall
conform to the specified requirements. This requirement shall apply also to the following
materials comprised in Class B:
Steel forgings specified in sections 51.15–1 to 51.15–14.
Alloy-steel bolting material specified in sections 51.16–1 to 51.16–8.
Steel castings specified in sections 51.17–1 to 51.17–12.
Bronze castings specified in sections 51.20–1 to 51.20–10.
Steel plates, flange and firebox quality specified in sections 51.21–1 to 51.21–13.
Steel plates of flange and firebox º for welding specified in sections 51.22–1
to 51.22—11.
(b) A check analysis may be made at the discretion of the Commandant from test speci
mens representing material for which chemical composition is specified in any section of this
part, in either of Classes A or B. The chemical composition i. determined shall conform
to the requirements.
51.1—6 Certification of class B material. (a) Certification of chemical analyses and
physical tests of materials of Class B shall be an affidavit by the manufacturer on an officially
approved form certifying that all materials of this class supplied by him for marine service
do, or will conform to .# the requirements of the rules in this part applicable thereto.
(b) Materials in this class are not required to be tested in the presence of an inspector,
but whenever deemed necessary by the Commandant, he may detail an inspector to witness
such tests and satisfy himself that the requirements of the specification for Class B materials
are being complied with.
51.1–7 Tension tests. All tension tests shall be made on approved standard and
calibrated machines. The yield point in tension tests shall be determined by the drop of
the beam or the halt in the gage of the testing machine. Except where otherwise specified
in sections 51.15–1 to 51.15–14, 51.17–1 to 51.17–12, the speed of the cross head of the
machine shall not exceed three-fourths inch per minute. Figures M-1 to M-8, inclusive,
show particulars of test specimens, etc. The ends of all specimens shall be of form to fit the
holders of the testing machine in such a way that the load will be axial.
51.1–8 Test reports. Inspectors shall report the results of official tests on Form
NCG 934. Copies thereof shall be forwarded §
the District Coast Guard Officer in the
district where the material was manufactured to the District Coast Guard Officer in the
district where the material is to be fabricated. -
51.1—9 Retests. When the result of any of the physical tests specified for any of the
materials does not conform to the requirements, two additional specimens may, at the request
of the manufacturer, be taken from the same lot and tested in the manner specified, but in
such case, both of the specimens must conform to the requirements. In the case of tension
tests, this retest shall be allowed if the percentage of elongation obtained is less than required,
or if any part of the fracture is outside of the middle third of the gage length. If any test speci
men develops flaws, it shall be discarded and another specimen from the same lot be substituted.
(F–6)
MATERIALS (51.1—16]
51.1–10 Rejections. Failure of the tests (or retests) specified in the rules in this
subchapter for each particular material shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise re
quired, any rejection shall be reported by the inspector within 5 working days from the
receipt of the test specimen. Acceptance of material on results of tests at the place of manu
facture shall not prejudice the right to reject any of such material in which injurious defects
are subsequently discovered. The manufacturer shall be promptly notified of such subse
quent rejections, and the records shall be corrected.
51.1–11 Appeals. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of any test, the manu
facturer may, within 30 days from date of test report, appeal to the Commandant from the
inspector's decision. Tested specimens which represent rejected material shall be preserved
for at least 30 days.
51.1–12 Process of steel manufacture. Unless otherwise officially authorized by the
Commandant, all wrought steel to be used in the construction of boilers or other pressure
vessels to be installed on vessels shall be manufactured by either the open-hearth or electric
furnace process.
51.1–13 Stamping plates and specimens. (a) Plates shall be stamped by the manu
facturer, before they are tested, with his name or trade-mark, the word “Marine,” the letter
indicating the grade of the steel, and the minimum tensile strength of the plate per square
inch of cross-sectional area expressed in thousands. Inspectors shall permit cutting a plate
into two or more parts before testing, but each part shall be stamped or match-marked for
identification before cutting. All plates accepted by the inspector as conforming to the
requirements shall be stamped by him near the manufacturer's stamp with the official stam
of the Coast Guard, the initials of his name, and the serial number. All test specimens sh
be ring-stamped or match-marked for identification before being detached. Plates shall be
stamped lengthwise in two Fº on one long side about 18 inches from the edges at the cor
ners... Each butt strap shall be stamped lengthwise of the plate about the middle of the strap.
(b) The impression of the official stamp of the Coast Guard for stamping plates and
specimens shall É. as shown below:
51.1–14 Stock plates. Plates may be ordered to be carried in stock ashore or on

shipboard for repairs to boilers and other pressure vessels. Such plates shall be inspected
and tested at the place of manufacture and stamped for identification as stock plates. A
test j. for such plates shall be furnished to the District Coast Guard Officer of the dis
trict where the purchaser is located, with a copy to the purchaser. The District Coast Guard
Officer shall furnish a copy thereof to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the district
where the material is kept in stock, and if the material is to be used by persons other than the
original purchaser, they shall also be furnished with a copy of such report, for submittal by
them to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the district where the repairs are actually
to be made before the material may be used. Wessels carrying such stock plates shall obtain
and carry identification and test records of each plate. Where such plates are cut into pieces
for repairs, the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, shall, upon request, stamp each piece
SO ºwned for identification with the original plate and a record of such stamping shall be
Inacle.
51.1–15 Workmanship and finish. All materials within the scope of the rules in this
subchapter shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
51.1–16 Heat treatment. Some of the materials herein specified require heat treat
ment. This may consist of annealing, or of normalizing, or of normalizing followed by
annealing, or of normalizing followed by a draw back to a temperature below the critical
range. Annealing shall consist of allowing material to cool after forging or rolling to a
temperature below the critical range, then reheating it to proper temperature to refine
the grain and allowing it to cool in the furnace. Normalizing shall consist of allowing
(F–7)
material to cool after forging or rolling to a temperature below the critical range, then re
heating it to proper temperature to refine the grain and allowing it to cool in still air.
51.1–17 Reclassification of materials. When more than one grade is specified for any
material or purpose and tests of material of a superior grade fail to meet the requirements
such material may be reclassified and accepted as a specified lower grade if it fulfills the
specified requirements for the latter. In such cases, the material shall be restamped or
re-marked as required for proper identification, and revised records shall be made to cover it.
51.1–18 Alternative materials. If, in the development of industrial arts, other suitable
or improved materials differing from those specified in this part are developed, their use will
be given consideration, upon formal application to the Commandant with full information
as to the characteristics of the material, and such scientific data and facts as may be necessary
to establish the suitability and safety of the material for the use proposed. The material
requirements in this subchapter are minimum requirements and are not intended to bar
better materials.
MARINE BOILER STEEL PLATE
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations A 201—39, A 212–39, and A 204-39. Tested material—Class A.
51.2–1 Scope. (a) There shall be seven grades of marine boiler steel plates, subject
to Class A inspection. These grades are designated A, B, C, D, E, F, and G. Grades A
and B cover two ordinary tensile strength ranges in carbon-silicon steel plates; Grades C
and D cover two high tensile strength ranges in carbon-silicon steel plates; Grades E, F
and G cover three #.
tensile strength ranges in carbon-molybdenum steel plates. Ali
grades may be furnished in flange or firebox qualities. Plates of flange quality are limited
in thickness to 2 inches. Plates of firebox quality are limited in thickness as follows: Grades
A and B, to 6 inches; Grades C and D, to 4% inches; Grades E and F, to 6 inches; and Grade
G to 4 inches. Where forge welding is necessary, the carbon content of the steel shall not
exceed 0.22 percent.
(b) Steel plates for any part of a boiler subject to pressure and exposed to the fire or
products of combustion ºf be of firebox quality; steel plates for any part of a boiler
subject to pressure and not exposed to the fire or products of combustion shall be of flange
or firebox quality.
(c) of these grades may be fusion welded, but welding technique is of fundamental
importance. Fusion welding procedure shall be in accordance with sections 56.20–1 to
56.20–19.
(d) Sufficient discard from the top of each ingot shall be made, at any stage of the
manufacture, to secure freedom from piping and undue segregation in the finished product,
but in no case shall the amount of top discard be less than 30 percent.
(e) Heat treatment. (1) When plates are to be used in a boiler or pressure vessel
which is to be stress-relieved after welding, the test specimens for such plates shall be stress
relieved by gradually and uniformly heating them to 1,100°F. to 1,200° F., holding at that
temperature for a period of 1 hour per inch of thickness, and cooling in still atmosphere.
In such cases both the plates and the test specimens shall be stamped “S. R.” to show
that the tensile strength of the plate in the stress-relieved state is not less than the mini
mum specified.
(2) Plates over 2 inches in thickness, before being fabricated, shall be uniformly heat
treated to produce grain refinement. Heat treatment involving quenching in a liquid me
dium is not permitted. If this treatment is not done at the rolling mill the testing shall be
carried out in accordance with subparagraph (3).
(3) When a fabricator who is equipped to perform the work properly, elects to do the
required heat treatment for grain refinement he shall so indicate in his orders to the mill
and he shall accept the plates on the basis of the mill tests. The plate manufacturer shall
make the tests prescribed in these specifications, the tension and bend test specimens to be
prepared from full thickness pieces i. under conditions he considers appropriate
for grain refinement and to give the test requirements. The manufacturer shall inform the
fabricator of the procedure followed in treating the pieces at the mill for guidance in treat
ing the plates. The required physical properties shall be determined after heat treatment
of the plates on specimens prepared from pieces similarly and simultaneously, treated with
the plates. Pieces for two tension tests, one top and one bottom, shall be provided from each
plate as rolled.” These pieces shall be stamped by the inspector with his official stamp
for identification.
* The term “plate as rolled” used here and in sections 51.2–6 (c) and 51.2–7(a) refers to the unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from
an ingot in its relation to the location and number of specimens; not to its condition.
(F–8)
MATERIALS (51.2–3)
(4) In the case of plates over 2 inches in thickness which subsequently are to be stress
relieved, the test specimens for such plates shall, before testing, be stress relieved as specified
in subparagraph (1) following the heat treatment for grain refinement.
(5) Orders to the plate manufacturer shall specify when plates subject to the require
ments of this section are to be stress relieved and when they are to be heat treated for grain
refinement by the fabricator so that proper provision may be made for the treatment .# test
51.2–2 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
SDeClimens.
p
as to chemical composition: -
Grades
A B O D E F G
Carbon, max., percent:

For plates 1 inch and under in thickness- - -] 0.20 0.24 0.28 || 0.31 0.18 0.20 0.23
For plates over 1 to 2 inches inclusive, in
thickness----------------------------- 0.24 0.27 | 0.31 0.33 0.21 0.23 0.26
For plates over 2 to 4 inehes inclusive, in
thickness----------------------------- 0.27 | 0.30 || 0.33 || 0.35 | 0.23 || 0.25 || 0.28
For plates over 4 to 6 inches, inclusive, in
thickness---------------------------------- 0.31 | 0.35 |-------|------- 0.25 || 0.27 |_ _ _ _ _ _
0. 50 0. 50 0.50
Manganese, maximum percent---------------- 0.80 0.80 0. 90 0. 90 to to to
0.90 0.90 || 0 90
Phosphorous, maximum percent:
É. -- - - - - - - - - - -
Firebox--------------------------------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04
0.035 0.035 | 0.035 | 0.035 0.035 | 0.035 0.035
Sulphur, maximum percent:
Flange--------------------------------- 0.05 || 0.05 || 0.05 || 0.05 || 0.05 || 0.05 || 0.05
Firebox-------------------------------- 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04 || 0.04
0. 15 0. 15 || 0, 15 0.15 || 0. 15 || 0. 15 0, 15
Silicon, percent----------------------------- to to to to to to to
0.30 0.30 0.30 || 0.30 0.30 0.30 || 0.30
0.40 0.40 || 0.40
Molybdenum, percent------------------------------|-------|--- -- - - - - - - - - - to to to
0.60 0. 60 0. 60
51.2–3 Tensile properties—(a) Grades A and B.

(1) The material shall conform to the following requirements as to tensile properties:
Grade A Grade B
Tensile strength, psi----------------------------------------- 55,000 to 65,000 60,000 to 70,000

Yield point, min. psi----------------------------------------- 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. str.
Elongation in 8 inches min. percent:
*D8°------------------------------------------------- 1, 500,000 • 1, 500, 000 •
tens. Str. tens. Str.
Firebox------------------------------------------------ 1, 550, 000 a b 1, 550, 000 •b
tens. Str. tens. Str.
Elongation in 2 inches, min. percent; * firebox------------------- 1, 750, 000 d 1, 750, 000d
tens. str. tens. Str.
* See section 51.2–4 (a) (1) and (3).

b See subparagraph (3).
• When specimen shown in figure M-2 is used (See section 51.2–6 (f).)
* See section 51.2–4 (a) (2).
(2) Tensile strength only need be determined on the tension test specimen taken from
º of firebox plates, and it shall not exceed 67,000 psi. for grade A, nor 72,000 psi. for
8.016 hy.
(3) Should the formula in subparagraph (1) for minimum elongation in 8 inches for
firebox steel give a value of less than 25 percent for grade A material or 23 percent for grade
B material, the minimum allowable elongation shall be 25 and 23 percent for grades A and B
respectively, subject to the modifications of section 51.2–4 (a)(1).
(b) Grades C and D.
(F–9)
[51.2–4] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
Grade C Grade D
Tensile strength, psi------ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65,000 to 77,000 70,000 to 82,000

Yield point, min. psi----------------------------------------- 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. str.
****.*.*. 1,550,000- 1,550,000

tens. str. | tens. str.
Firebox------------------------------------------------ 1,600,000- | 1,600,000
tens. str. tens. str.
Elongation in 2 inches, min. percent, firebox-------------------- 1,750,000b 1,750,000b
tens. str. tens. str.
* See section 51.2–4 (b) § and (3).

* See section 51.2–4 (b) (2).
the top of firebox plates, and it shall not exceed 79,000 psi. for grade C, nor 84,000 psi. for
grade D.
(c) Grades E, F, and G.
Grade E Grade F Grade G
Tensile strength, psi----------------------- 65,000 to 77,000 || 70,000 to 82,000 75,000 to 87,000

Yield point, min. psi---------------------- | 0.55 tens. str. 0.55 tens. str. 0.55 tens. str.
but in no case less than------------------- 37,000 40,000 43,000
Elongation in 8 inches, min. percent:
Flange-------------------------------- | 1,600,000- 1,600,000- 1,600,000
tens. Str. tens. Str. tens. Str. -
Firebox------------------------------- 1,650,000- 1,650,000- 1,650,000
tens. str. tens. Str. tens. str.
Elongation in 2 inches, min. percent;b firebox-- 1,750,000° 1,750,000° 1,750,000°
tens. Str. tens. str. tens. Str.
* See section 51.2–4 (c) (1) and (3).

b When specimen shown in figure M-2 is used; see section 51.2–6(ſ).
• See section 51.2–4 (c) (2).
the top of firebox plates, and it shall not exceed 80,000 psi. for grade E, 85,000 psi. for grade
F, nor 90,000 psi. for grade G.
51.2–4 Modifications in elongation—(a) Grades A and B.
(1) For material over } inch in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elongation
in 8 inches specified in section 51.2–3 (a) (1) and (3) of 0.125 percent shall be made for each
increase of #2 inch of the specified thickness above 94 inch, to a minimum of 21 percent for
flange steel and 22 percent for firebox steel of grade A; and 20 percent for flange steel and
21 percent for firebox steel of grade B. -
(2) For material over 2% inches in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elonga
tion in 2 inches specified in section 51.2–3 (a)(1) of 0.5 percent shall be made for each increase
of 4 inch of the specified thickness above 2% inches.
(3) For material 4 inch and under in thickness, the elongation shall be measured on a
gage length of twenty-four times the thickness of the specimen.
(b) Grades C and D.
(1) For material over } inch in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elongation
in 8 inches specified in section 51.2–3 (b) (1) of 0.125 percent shall be made for each increase
of 34, inch of the specified thickness above 3% inch, to a minimum of 18 percent for flange
steel and 19 percent for firebox steel.
(2) For material over 2% inches in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elonga
tion in 2 inches specified in section 51.2–3 (b)(1) of 0.5 percent shall be made for each increase
of 34 inch of the specified thickness above 2% inches.
(F–10)
MATERLALS [51.2–6]
(3) For material % inch and under in thickness, the elongation shall be measured on a
gage length twenty-four times the thickness of the specimen.
(c) Grades E, F, and G.
(1) For plates over } inch in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elongation
in 8 inches prescribed in section 51.2–3 (c) (1) of 0.125 percent shall be made for each increase
of 42 inch of the specified thickness above #4 inch, to a minimum of 19 percent for grades E
and F, and 18 percent for grade G.
(2) For plates over 2% inches in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elongation
in 2 inches prescribed in section 51.2–3 (c) (1) of 0.5 percent shall be made for each increase
of 94 inch .Pthespecified thickness above 2% inches.
(3) For material 4 inch and under in thickness, the elongation shall be measured
on a gauge length twenty-four times the thickness of the specimen.
51.2–5 Bending properties. The bend test specimen shall stand being bent cold
through 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion around a pin the diameter
of which shall have the following relation to the thickness of the specimen. When the test
is made on a specimen reduced in thickness, the rolled surface shall be on the outer curve of
the bend.
Ratio of pin diameter to thickness of specimen

Thickness of material
Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
1 inch and under------------------------------------- % 1 1% 2

Over 1 to 1% in. incl----------------- - - - - -- - -- ---- -- - - 1 1% 2 2
Over 1% to 3 in. incl---------------------------------- 1% 2 2 2%
Over 3 to 4 in. incl------------------------------------ 2 2% 2% 3
Over 4 to 6 in. incl----------------------------------- 2% 3 --------------------
Grade E Grade F Grade G
1 inch and under------------------------------------------------ 1 1% 2

Over 1 to 2 in. incl---------------------------------------------- 1% 2 2%
Over 2 to 4 in. incl---------------------------------------------- 1% 2 3
Over 4 to 6 in. incl---------------------------------------------- 2 2% - - - -- - - - - -
51.2–6 Test specimens. (a) For plates 2 inches and under in thickness the test speci
mens shall be prepared for testing from the material in its rolled condition.
(b) For plates over 2 inches in thickness the test specimens shall be prepared from the
material in its heat-treated condition or from full thickness samples and simultaº
neously treated. See sections 51.2–1 (e) (2) and (3).
(c) Tension test specimens for firebox steel shall be taken from the top and bottom corners
of the plate as rolled (see note under section 51.2–1 (e) (3)), parallel to its longitudinal axis,
and for flange steel from the bottom corner of the plate only. Bend test specimens shall be
taken from the middle of the top of the plate as rolled, at right angles to its longitudinal axis.
§ For plates 2 inches and under in thickness, tension and bend test specimens shall be
the full thickness of the material and shall be machined to the form and dimensions shown
in figure M-1; or the bend test specimen may be machined with both edges parallel.
FIGURE M-1.
(F–11)
(e) For grade A and B plates up to 4 inches, inclusive, in thickness, tension test speci
mens may be the full thickness of the material and of the form shown in figure M-1; when
adequate testing machine capacity is available.
(f) For plates over 2 inches in thickness, except as permitted in paragraph (e), tension
test specimens shall be machined to the form and dimensions shown in figure M-2; and the
axis of each such specimen shall be located midway between the center and the top or bottom
surface of the plate. The bend test specimens shall be at least 1% inches in width, with both
ed d parallel, and may be reduced to two inches in thickness; but shall have one surface as
TOlleOl.
—ał
* I 2a-ſtoa, |
Radnofºssºmſ”
FIGURE M-2.
For simplicity of º it is recommended that the finished diameter of this test piece be made
.505 inch, which is equivalent to 0.2 of a square inch in area.
(g) The sides of the bend test specimens may have the corners rounded to a radius not
over }ſs inch for plates 2 inches and under in thickness, and not over } inch for plates over
2 inches in thickness.
51.2–7 Number of tests. (a) Two tension tests and one bend test shall be made
from each firebox steel plate as rolled. One tension test and one bend test shall be made
from each flange steel plate as rolled. (See note under section 51.2–1 (e) (3).)
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, it may be discarded
and another specimen substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that speci
fied in section 51.2–3 and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of the
gauge length of a two-inch specimen or is outside the middle third of the gauge length of an
8-inch specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a
retest shall be allowed.
51.2–8 Permissible variations in thickness and weight. No plate shall vary more than
0.01 inch under the thickness specified.
51.2–9 Finish. The finished plates shall be free from injurious defects and shall have
a workmanlike finish.
51.2–10 Marking. The quality classification to be marked on all Class. A plates in
accordance with section 51.1–13 shall be the word “Marine,” followed by the letter desig
nating the grade of the steel. -
STAYBOLT STEEL
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 31–40. Tested material—Class A.
51.4–1. Scope. These specifications cover two grades of staybolt steel to be used in
boilers and other pressure vessels.
51.4–2. Process. The steel shall be made by either or both of the following processes:
open-hearth or electric-furnace.
51.4—3 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
as to chemical composition:
Grade A Grade B
Carbon, maximum, percent-----------------------------------------|--------------- - 0.27

Manganese, percent------------------------------------------------ 0.30 to 0. 50 0.40 to 0.80
Phosphorous, maximum, percent------------------------------------ 0.04 0.04
Sulphur, maximum, percent----------------------- * - - - -
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.05 0.05
Silicon, maximum, percent------------------------------------------|-------------- 0.30
MATERIALS [51.4–8]
51.4-4 Tensile properties. The material shall conform to the following requirements
as to tensile properties:
Grade A Grade B
Tensile strength, psi----------------------------------------- 45,000 to 55,000 58,000 to 68,000

Yield point, minimum psi------------------------------------ 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. Str.
but in no case less than----------------------------------|----------------- 32,000
1,500,000 1,500,000
Elongation in 8 inches, minimum percent----------------------- | but
30.
Hºwed but #: * less
than 23.
51.4-5 Bending properties—(a) Cold-bent tests. The test specimen for Grade A
steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° flat on itself without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion.
The test specimen for grade B steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows: For material % inch and under in
diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to one-half the diameter of the speci
men; for material over 4 inch in diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to
the diameter of the specimen.
(b) Quench-bend tests. The test specimen for grade A steel when heated to a light
cherry red as seen in the dark (not less than 1,200°F.), and quenched at once in water the
temperature of which is between 80° and 90°F., shall stand being bent through 180° flat
on itself without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
The test specimen for grade B steel, when similarly heated and quenched, shall stand
being bent ...?'. 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows:
For material % inch and under in diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to
the diameter of the specimen; for material over } inch in diameter, around a pin the diameter
of which is equal to one and one-half times the diameter of the specimen.
51.4–6 Test specimens. Test specimens shall be the full diameter of the bars as rolled.
51.4–7 Number of tests. (a) Two tension, two cold-bend, and two quench-bend tests
shall be made from each melt. Each test shall conform to the requirements specified in
sections 51.4–4 to 51.4–5.
(b) If any test specimen develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that specified
in section 51.4–4 and any part of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage |...}.
i indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be
owed.
51.4–8 Permissible variations in diameter. The diameter of hot-finished staybolt
bars shall not vary from the size specified by more than the amounts prescribed in table I.
TABLE I. Permissible variations in the size of hot-rolled rounds and squares.
Variations from size, inches | Out of round

Specified size "ºſ"
Over Under
% inch and under---------------------------------------------- 0 005 0.005 0.008

Over 946 inch to 746 inch, inclusive--------------------------------- 0. 006 0 006 0 009
Over 746 inch to % inch, inclusive--------------------------------- 0 007 0. 007 0. 010
Over % inch to 7% inch, inclusive---------------------------------- 0 008 0 008 0. 012
Over 7% inch to 1 inch, inclusive----------------------------------- 0.009 0.009 0.013
Over 1 inch to 1% inches, inclusive-------------------------------- 0.010 0.010 0.015
Over 1% inches to 1% inches, inclusive----------------------------- 0.011 0. 011 0. 016
Over 1% inches to 1% inches, inclusive----------------------------- 0. 012 0. 012 0.018
Over 1% inches to 1% inches, inclusive- ---------------------------- 0.014 0.014 0. 021
Over 1% inches to 2 inches, inclusive------------------------------- %. }%. 0.023
619428°–45––2 (F–13)
51.4—9 Finish. The material shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a
workmanlike finish.
51.4–10 Marking. The staybolt bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly
separated and marked with the name or brand of the manufacturer and the melt number
for identification. The melt number shall be legibly marked on each test specimen.
STEEL BARs AND SHAPEs
NOTE: In substantial agreement with A. S. M. E. Specification No. S-7. Tested Material—Class A.
51.5–2 Chemical Composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Phosphorus, maximum, percent(.… §§
Sulphur, maximum, percent---------------------------------------- 0.05
51.5–3 Tension Tests. The material shall conform to the following requirements
Tensile strength 1b. per sq. in----------------------------- 55,000–65,000
Yield point, min. 1b. per sq. in - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0. 5 tens. Str.
Elongation in 8 in., min., percent--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1, 500,000
tens. Str.
Elongation in 2 in., min., percent-------------------------- 26
51.5–4 Modifications in elongation. For material over 3% inch in thickness, a deduc

tion from the percentages of elongation in 8 inches specified, of 0.25 percent shall be made
for each increase of 94, inch of the specified thickness above 94 inch.
through 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion around a pin the diameter
of which shall have the following relation to the thickness of the specimen:
Ratio of pin diameter to thickness
of specimen
Plates, sections, Eyebar flats
and bars unannealed
% inch and under------------------------------------------------------ % 1%

Over 3% to 1 inch, inclusive--------------------------------------------- 1 2%
Over 1 to 1% inch, inclusive-------------------------------------------- 1% 3
Over 1% to 2 inches, inclusive------------------------------------------- 2% 4
Over 2 inches--------------------------------------------------------- 3 4%
51.5–6 Test specimens. (a) Test specimens shall be of the full thickness or diameter
of material as rolled, except as specified in (b) and (c).
(b) Test specimens for shapes and flats may be machined to the form and dimensions
shown in figure M-1, or with both edges parallel.
(c) Test specimens for bars over 1% inch in thickness or diameter may be machined to
a thickness or diameter of at least 3% inch for a length of at least 9 inches; or tension test
specimens may conform to the dimensions shown in figure M-2. Bend test specimens may
be 1 by }} inch in section.
51.5–7 Number of tests. (a) One tension and one bend test shall be made from each
melt; except that if material from one melt differs 34 inch or more in thickness, one tension
and one bend test shall be made from both the thickest and the thinnest material rolled.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, it may be dis
carded and another specimen substituted.
(F–14)
in section 51.5–3 and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of the
gage length of a 2-inch specimen, or is outside the middle third of the gage length of an
8-inch specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a
51.5-8 Permissible variation in gage. The diameter of each bar shall not vary from
that specified more than the amount given in the following table:
Diameter Variation in diameter

(inches) (inches)
Over #. Under Over §
- - --- %. 0.007 0.007 0.010

% %g 0. 007 0.007 0. 011
% % 0.008 0.008 0.012
% % 0.009 0.009 0.014
% 1 0.010 0.010 0.015
1 1% 0. 012 0. 012 0.016
1% 1% 0.014 0.014 0.018
1% 1% 0.016 0.016 0.022
1% 1% 0.018 0.018 0.026
1% 2 0.022 0.022 0.030
2
2%
2%
3%
0
0
%g
%.
#:%.
51.5–9 Finish. The finished material shall be free from injurious defects and shall
have a workmanlike finish.
51.5–10 Marking. Bars shall, when loaded for shipment, be properly separated, and
marked with the name or brand of the manufacturer and melt number for identification.
The melt numbershall be legibly marked on each test specimen.
WRoughT-IRoN BARs For STAYS AND STAY Bolts

Norr: Insubstantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A84–39. Tested material—Class A.
51.6–1. Material. The bars shall be rolled from a slab pile, or box pile made from
reworked wrought iron or reworked knobbled charcoal iron. The original muck or knobbled
bars shall be twice piled and rerolled. All bars shall be the full length of the piles. The
wrought iron and the component parts of the slab pile, or box pile shall be free from any
admixture of iron scrap or steel.
51.6–2 Definitions of terms—(a) Wrought iron. Wrought iron, within the meaning
of this specification, is a ferrous material º:
from a solidifying mass of pasty particles
of highly refined metallic iron, with which, without subsequent fusion, is incorporated a
minutely and uniformly distributed quantity of slag.
(b) Slab pile. A slab pile is built up wholly of flat bars of iron all running the full
length of the pile.
(c) Box pile. A box pile is a pile, the sides, top, and bottom of which are formed of
flat bars, and the interior of a number of small bars, all bars running the full length of the pile.
(d) Scrap Iron. The term applies to foreign or bought scrap and does not include
local mill products free from foreign or bought scrap.
51.6–3. Tensile properties. The materials shall have the following tensile properties:
Tensile strength----------------------------lbs. per sq. in-- 47,000–52, 00
Yield point, min-------------------------------- tens. str-- 0.6
Elongation in 8 inches, minimum - - - - - - - - - --------- percent-- 30
Reduction of area, minimum------------------------- do---- 48
(F–15)
51.6–4 Chemical composition and tests. (a) The iron shall conform to the following
requirement as to chemical composition:
Manganese, not over 0.06 percent.
(b) If, in the judgment of the inspector it is necessary, an analysis may be made from a
broken test specimen representing each lot of bars to determine whether the chemical com
position is in compliance with the above requirement.
(c) Drillings for analysis shall be so taken as to represent the entire cross section of the
specimen.
51.6–5 Modifications in tensile properties. For bars 7% inch down to and includin
%, inch in diameter, the elongation shall be not less than 28 percent. For bars 5% inch an
under in diameter, the elongation shall be not less than 25 percent. For bars over 1% square
inches in sectional area, the following deductions from the minimum requirements specified
in section 51.6–3 shall be made for each square inch of nominal section above 1% square inches:
Tensile strength----------------------------------- 250 lbs., but not under 46,000 lbs. per sq. inch.
Reduction of area--------------------------------- 3 percent, but not under 40 percent.
51.6–6 Bend tests. (a) Bend tests may be made by pressure or blows; the test
specimen shall stand § bent cold through 180° flat on itself in both directions, without
fracture on the outside of the bent portions.
(b) The test specimen, when nicked 25 percent around with a tool having a 60° cutting
edge, to a depth of not less than 8 nor more than 16 percent of the diameter of the specimen
and broken, shall show a wholly fibrous fracture.
51.6–7 Etch tests. (a) The cross section of the test specimen shall be ground or
polished, and etched for a sufficient period to develop the structure. This test shall show the
material as follows: The material to have been rolled from a slab pile, or box pile and to be
uniform and free from steel.
NotE: A solution of 10 percent hydrochloric acid (sp. gr. 1.19), 30 percent sulphuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84), and 60 percent water; or 25 percent
nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.42), and 75 percent water, is recommended for the etch test.
(b) Tension-test specimens and bend-test specimens shall be of the full section of the
ºrial as rolled, if possible; otherwise the specimen shall be machined from the material as
I'OlleOl.
(c) Etch-test specimens shall be of the full section of material as rolled.

51.6–8 Number of tests. (a) All bars of a given grade and size shall be piled sepa
rately, sorted in lots of 100 each. Two bars shall be selected at random from each lot or
fraction thereof and tested as specified, but only one of these bars shall be tested as specified
in section 51.6–7. - -
(b) If any test specimen from the bars originally selected to represent a lot of material
contains surface defects not visible before testing but visible after testing, or if a tension-test
specimen breaks outside the middle third of the gage length, the individual bar shall be
rejected and one retest from a different bar will be allowed.
51.6–9 Finish. The bars shall be smoothly rolled and free from slivers, depressions,
crop ends, seams, and evidences of being burnt.
51.6–10 Marking. The bars shall be stamped or otherwise marked as designated by
the inspector.
RIVET STEEL
NOTE.-In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations Nos. A 31-40 and A 202—39. Tested Material—Class A.
51.7-1 Scope. These specifications cover two grades of low carbon steel rivets and
one grade of chrome-manganese-silicon alloy-steel rivets to be used in boilers and other
pressure vessels. These grades are designated A, B, and C respectively.
(F–16)
MATERIALS (51.7–6]
51.7-3 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Grade A Grade B Grade O
Carbon, maximum percent----------------------------------|------------ 0.27 0.17

Manganese, percent--------------------------------------- 0.30 to 0. 50 0.40 to 0.80 |1.05 to 1. 40
Phosphorous, maximum percent---------------------------- 0.04 0.04 0.035
Sulphur, maximum percent--------------------------------- 0.05 0.05 0.04
Silicon, maximum percent----------------------------------|------------ 0.30 |0. 60 to 0. 90
Chromium, percent----------------------------------------|------------|------------ 0.30 to 0. 60
51.7-4 Tensile properties. The material shall conform to the following requirements
Grade A Grade B Grade C
Tensile strength, psi------------------------ 45,000 to 55,000 || 58,000 to 68,000 75,000 to 90,000

Yield point, minimum psi------------------ 0. 5 tens. Str. 0. 5 tens. Str. 0. 60 tens. Str.
but in no case less than---------------------------------- 32,000 -----------------
1,500,000 1,500,000 1,600,000+
Elongation in 8 inches, minimum percent------ Tens. str. Tens. str. Tens. Str.
but need not ex- but in no case
ceed 30. less than 23.
*For grade C material over 34 inch in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elongation specified above of 0.125 percent shall be
made for each increase of 962 inch of the specified thickness above 34 inch to a minimum of 19 percent.
For grade C material 94 inch and under in thickness, the elongation shall be measured on a gage length of 24 times the thickness of the
ell.
51.7–5. Bending properties—(a) Cold-bend tests: (1) The test specimen for Grade
A steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° flat on itself without cracking on the outside
(2) The test specimen for Grade B steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° with
out cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows: For material three-fourths inch
and under in diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to one-half the diameter
of the specimen; for material over three-fourths inch in diameter, around a pin the diameter
of which is equal to the diameter of the specimen.
(3) The test specimen for Grade C steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° with
out cracking on the outside of the bent portion around a pin the diameter of which shall
have the following relation to the thickness of the specimen:
- Ratio of pin diameter to
Thickness of material: thickness of specimen
1 inch and under----------------------------------------------- 2
Over 1 to 1% inches, inclusive------------------------------------ 2%
Over 1% to 2 inches, inclusive------------------------------------ 3
(b) Quench-bend tests. (1) The test specimen for Grade A steel when heated to a
light cherry red as seen in the dark (not less than 1,200°F.), and quenched at once in water
the temperature of which is between 80° and 90°F., shall stand being bent through 180°
flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
(2) The test specimen for Grade B steel, when similarly heated and quenched, shall
stand being bent cold through 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion as
follows: For material % inch and under in diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is
equal to the diameter of the specimen; for material over } in. in diameter, around a pin the
diameter of which is equal to one and one-half times the diameter of the specimen.
51.7-6 Test specimens. (a) Test specimens shall be the full diameter of the bar as rolled
and, in the case of rivet bars which have been cold-drawn shall be normalized before testing.
(b) Two tension, two cold-bend, and two quench-bend tests where called for, shall be
made from each melt. Each test shall conform to the requirements specified in sections
51.7–4 and 51.7–5.
(F–17)
(c) If any test specimen develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
(d) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that specified
in section 51.7–4 and any part of the fracture is outside the middle third of the gage length,
as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be
allowed.
51.7–7 Tests of finished rivets—(a) Bending properties. (1) The rivet shank of
grade A steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° flat on itself as shown in figure M-3
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
(2) The rivet shank of grade B steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows: For material % inch and under in
diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to the diameter of the shank; for
material over } inch in diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to 1% times
the diameter of the shank.
(3) The rivet shank of grade C steel shall stand being bent cold through 180° without
cracking on the outside of the bent portion, as follows: For material 1 inch and under in
diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is equal to two and one-half times the diameter
of the shank; for material over one inch in diameter, around a pin the diameter of which is
equal to three times the diameter of the shank.
(b) Flattening tests. The rivet head shall stand being flattened, while hot, to a diam
eter two and one-half times the diameter of the shank, as shown in figure M-4, without
cracking at the edges.
(c) Number of tests. Three bend and three flattening tests shall be made from each
size in each lot of rivets offered for inspection. Each test shall conform to the requirements
specified in section 51.7–7.
51.7–8 Permissible variations in diameter. (a) Finished rivets. The diameter of
finished rivets, measured cold, shall not vary from the size specified by more than the amounts
prescribed in the following table:
Permissible variations in diameter, in
inches
Diameter specified
Snap gauge mea- Ring gauge mea
surement Surement
% inch and under-------------------------------------------------- 0.022 under 0.020 over

Over }% inch to 1 inch, inclusive------------------------------------- 0.025 under 0.030 over
Over 1 inch to 1% inches, inclusive- - - - - - - - - - ------------------------ 0.027 under 0.035 over
Over 1% inches to 1% inches, inclusive------------------------------- 0.030 under 0.040 over
Over 1% inches to 2 inches, inclusive--------------------------------- 0.037 under 0.040 over
(b) Snap gage measurement shall be made at the point of minimum diameter, but it
is not required that the rivet shall turn completely in the gage. Measurements of the
maximum tolerance shall be made with a ring gage, all rivets to slip full to the head in the
gage of the required size for the various diameters.
(c) Rivet heads. The dimensions of the rivet heads shall not vary from the size specified
by more than the amounts prescribed in the following table:
Specified size of rivets Permissible variations in diameter of head
Width Height
plus Ac inch minus 942 inch plus 942 inch.

-| plus 946 inch minus 942 inch -| plus 942 inch.
plus 346 inch minus 342 inch plus #2 inch.
plus 946 inch minus 42 inch plus 942 inch.
plus $64 inch minus 342 inch----------------------- plus 42 inch.
plus 364 inch minus 942 inch----------------------- plus 42 inch.
plus 364 inch minus 942 inch----------------------- plus 442 inch.
(F–18)
51.7–9 Workmanship and finish. The finished rivets shall be true to form and con
centric, shall be made in a workmanlike manner, and shall be free from injurious defects.
FIGURE M-3.−The FIGURE M-4.—The

bending test for rivets. flattening test for rivets.
RIVET IRON
Note:—In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation No. A 152—39. Tested material–Class A.
51.8—1 Material. The rivet bars shall be made of wrought iron which shall be free
from any admixture of iron scrap or steel.
Nore-wrought iron is a ferrous material, aggregated from a solidifying mass of pasty particles of highly refined metallic iron, with
which without subsequent fusion, is incorporated a minutely and uniformly distributed quantity of slag.
51.8–2 Chemical composition. The iron shall conform to the following requirement
Manganese, maximum, percent-- * ----0.06
51.8–3 Tensile properties. The material shall conform to the following requirements
Tensile strength, minimum, psi---------------------------------------- 47,000
Yield point, minimum, psi-------------------------------- tensile strength-- 0. 6
Elongation in 8 inches, minimum, percent:
ounds 4 to 746 inch, inclusive, in diameter--------------------------- 22
Rounds over 946 to 3% inch, inclusive, in diameter----------------------- 24
Rounds over 3% to 2 inches, inclusive, in diameter----------------------- 28
51.8–4 Bend Tests—(a) Quenched, cold-bend tests. A test specimen shall be heated
between 1,600° and 1,700°F., and quenched in cold water, after which it shall stand being
bent cold through 90° around a pin, the diameter of which is equal to the diameter of the
specimen without fracture on the outside of the bent portion.
(b) Nick-bend tests. A test specimen, when nicked 25 percent around the circumfer
ence with a tool having a 60° cutting edge, to a depth of not less than 8 nor more than 16
percent of the diameter or thickness of the specimen, and broken slowly, shall show a wholly
fibrous fracture.
(c) Hot-bend tests. A test specimen, when heated to a temperature between 1,700° and
1,800°F., shall stand being bent through 180° flat on itself without fracture on the outside
(d) Methods. Bend tests may be made by pressure or blows.
††
8S TOIle Ol.
Test specimens. All test specimens shall be of the full section of the material
51.8–6. Number of tests. (a) All bars of a given size shall be piled separately, sorted
in lots of 100 each. Two bars shall be selected at random from each lot or fraction thereof
and tested as specified in sections 51.8–3 to 51.8–5.
(b) If any of the specimens originally selected to represent a lot of material contains
surface defects not visible before testing, but visible after testing, or if a tension-test specimen
breaks outside the middle third of the gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked
on the specimen before testing, the #. specimen shall be rejected and one retest
from a different bar shall be allowed.
(F–19)
51.8–7 Micrographic tests. If doubt exists as to the presence of steel, the inspector
may make micrographic examination to assist in determining whether the material conforms
to the requirements of section 51.8–1.
51.8–8 Physical properties and tests. (a) Flattening tests. The rivet head shall
stand being flattened, while hot, to a diameter two times the diameter of the shank, as
shown in figure M-4, without cracking at the edges.
(b) Etch test. The rivet shall be split longitudinally through head and shank. After
grinding or polishing and etching in acid, the section ji show freedom of folds at base of
head, and the fiber lines shall show symmetrical displacement.
NOTE: A solution of 10 º hydrochloric acid (sp. gr. 1.19), 30 percent sulphuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84), and 60 percent water; or 25 percent
nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.42) and 75 percent water, is recommended for the etch test.
(c) Three flattening and three etch tests shall be made from each lot of 2,000 pounds
or less of any one diameter of rivets offered for inspection. Each test shall conform to the
requirements specified in paragraphs (a) and (b).
51.8–9 Workmanship and finish. The rivets shall be true to form and concentric,
shall be made in a workmanlike manner, and shall be free from injurious defects. The heads
shall not show cracks or splits on the edge but may contain a slight flash.
51.8–10 Inspection. All inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture prior
to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and the inspector shall have the right to reject all
rivets found to be not in compliance with the requirements of sections 51.8–1 to 51.8–11.
51.8–11 Rejection. Rivets which show defects subsequent to their acceptance at the
place of manufacture will be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified.
LAP-WELDED AND SEAMLEss STEEL AND LAP-WELDED IRoN BoILER TUBEs
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation No. A 83–40. Certified material—Class B.
51.9–1. Scope. These specifications cover lap-welded and seamless steel, and lap
welded iron, boiler tubes and boiler flues, including safe ends, stay tubes, and seamless
superheater and small boiler tubes.
51.9–2 Process. (a) The material for lap-welded or seamless steel tubes shall be
made by either or both of the following processes: open-hearth or electric furnace. The
material for open-hearth iron tubes shall be made by the open-hearth É.i. -
(b). The material for wrought-iron tubes shall be made by the knobbled, hammered
charcoal-iron process.
;:
iron tubes.
Chemical composition. (a) Chemical analysis will not be required for charcoal
§ Material made by the open-hearth or electric-furnace processes
the following requirements as to chemical composition:
shall conform to
º:
de As:
low Grade Pººn.hearth
Carbon, percent----------------------------------------------- 0.08 to 0.18 0.03 maximum

Manganese, percent-------------------------------------------- 0.30 to 0.60 0.03 maximum
Phosphorous, maximum percent--------------------------------- 0.04 0.02
Sulphur, maximum percent------------------------------------- 0.045 0.045
51.9–4 Check analysis. (a) An analysis of two tubes from each lot of 250 tubes or
fraction thereof, and from each lot of 2,000 feet or fraction thereof, of safe-end material may
be made by the inspector. Drillings for analysis shall be taken from several points around
each tube selected for analysis. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform
to the requirements specified in section 51.9–3 (b).
(b) If the analysis of either tube does not conform to the requirements specified, an
analysis of two additional tubes from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform
to the requirements specified in section 51.9–3 (b).
51.9–5 Flange tests. (a) For tubes having wall thicknesses” less than 10 percent of
their outside diameters, and providing the thickness does not exceed 0.200 inch, a section
not less than 4 inches in length shall É. capable of having a flange turned over at a right
* The term wall thickness shall be defined as the actual mean wall of the material used.
(F–20)
angle to the body of the tube without cracking or showing flaws. This flange as measured
from the outside of the tube shall be not less than % inch nor more than % inch. Within
these limits, the width of the flange shall be not less than the following:
Width of flange
Outside diameter of tube (inches)

Open-hearth or Electric-furnace Grades A and Charcoal-iron tubes
B tubes
2% and under------------- 15 percent of outside diameter- - - - - - 12.5 percent of outside diameter.

Over 2% to 3%------------ $ inch---------- - - -% inch.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Over 3% to 6-------------- 10 percent of outside diameter------ 10 percent of outside diameter.
(b) For tubes other than those specified in paragraph (a), the flange test shall not be
required. -
(c) In making the flange test, it is recommended that the flaring tool and die block
shown in figure M-5 be used:
Pºsition afferaeoſying flaring ſº
Æosition afterosins Fatreme-->
+-
$3 RAD § N
*, *. N
-kt N.
| g | * *— §§
"Azers
D
FLARING TOOL
A =Outside diameter of tubes less % inch.

B=Outside diameter of tubes less 36 inch.
C = Outside diameter of tubes plus 346 inch.
DIE BLOCK
D=Outside diameter of tube plus 342 inch.
FIGURE M-5.-Flaring Tool and Die Block for Flange Test.
51.9–6 Flattening tests. (a) For tubes having wall thicknesses not exceeding 10
percent of their outside diameters, and providing the thickness does not exceed 0.200 inch,
a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand being flattened between parallel plates,
without cracking or showing flaws, until the distance between the plates is as follows:
For seamless tubes—three times the wall thickness.
For lap-welded tubes—five times the wall thickness.
(b) For tubes other than specified in paragraph (a), a section not less than 2% inches in
length shall stand being flattened between parallel plates, without cracking or showing
flaws until the distance between the plates is as follows:
For seamless tubes—four times the wall thickness.
For lap-welded tubes—six times the wall thickness.
(F–21)
(51.9–7] . MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
(c) Superficial ruptures as a result of minor surface imperfections shall not be cause for
rejection.
Note: In the case of lap-welded charcoal-iron tubes over 0.200 inches in thickness the test shall be made with the weld 45 degrees away
from the point of maximum bend. For other lap-welded charcoal-iron tubes and for all steel lap-welded tubes covered by paragraphs (a) and
(b), the weld shall be placed in the line of maximum bend.
51.9—7 Crush test. When required by the inspector, crushing tests shall be made on
sections of tube 2% inches in length which shall stand crushing longitudinally, without
cracking, splitting, or opening at the weld, as follows. Slight surface checks shall not be cause
for rejection.
Height of crushed section, inches
Wall thickness of tubes, inches

Grades A and B | Charcoal-iron
tubes tubes
0.135 and under------------------------------------------------------- %, or until out- 1%

- side folds
are in con
tact.
Over 0.135----------------------------------------------------------- 1% 1%
51.9–8 Hydrostatic test. (a) Prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, bending, or

other forming operations, each tube shall be tested at the mill to the hydrostatic pressures
as follows: Tubes under 5 inches in diameter shall withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure
of 1,000 psi., and tubes 5 inches and over in diameter shall withstand an internal hydro
static pressure of 800 psi., provided the fiber stress corresponding to these pressures does
not exceed 16,000 psi., as determined by the following formula. Should the fiber stress
corresponding to these pressures exceed the above figures, the hydrostatic test pressure shall
be determined by the following formula:
2St
P=#
where
P=Hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per square inch;
S=Allowable fiber stress of 16,000 psi.,
t=Thickness of the tube wall in inches, and
D=Outside diameter of the tube in inches.
(b) Lap-welded tubes shall be struck near both ends, while under the test pressure,
with a 2-pound steel hand hammer or its equivalent.
51.9–9. Etch test for charcoal-iron tubes. To determine that a tube is charcoal-iron,
a cross section of the tube may be turned or ground to a true surface, polished free from dirt
or cracks, and etched “until ãº soft parts are sufficiently dissolved to show a decided ridged
surface, with the weld very distinct. A steel tube so etched would show an even or homo
geneous surface.
51.9–10 Test specimens. (a) Test specimens required for the flange and flattening
tests specified in sections 51.9–5 and 51.9–6 shall be taken from the ends of finished tubes
prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, or other forming operations, or being cut to length.
They shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs and flaws.
(b) All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
51.9–11 Number of tests. (a) One of each of the tests specified in sections 51.9–5,
51.9–6, and 51.9–7 shall be made on each of two tubes from each lot of 250 tubes or fraction
thereof, and from each 2,000 feet or fraction thereof, of safe-end material.
(b) Each tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in section 51.9–8.
51.9–12 Retests. If the results of the physical tests of either of the tubes selected
for test do not conform to the requirements specified in sections 51.9–5, 51.9–6, and 51.9–7,
retests shall be made on two additional tubes from the same lot, each of which shall conform
to the requirements specified.
• A solution of 10 percent hydrochloric acid (sp. gr. 1.19), 30 percent sulphuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84), and 60 percent water; or 25 percent nitric
aeid (sp. gr. 1.42) and 75 percent water, is recommended for the etch test.
(F–22)
MATERIALS [51.9a–1)
51.9–13 Forming operations. Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expanding
and beading without showing cracks or flaws, or opening at the weld. Superheater tubes
when properly manipulated shall stand all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary
for application without developing defects.
51.9–14 Permissible variations in dimensions and weight. Variations in outside
diameter, wall thickness, weight and length, from those specified, shall not exceed the amounts
prescribed in the following table:
PERMIssiblE WARIATIONs IN DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTs
Outsid --> Wall thickness, percent a, “

u e Cl 4. -
(including out of * |catiºnal

Size, outside
d diameter (inches) Found,ness),
inches a,b
--
0.095 inch |.9Yº.9.09:
and under
-
tº.." tºãº
-
.9Yºlº over
>
0.180
inch
:- i.
- r
º §.
Over Under Over º: Over §: Over # Over §: Over §: Over §:

HOT-FINISHED TUBES
4 and under--- - - - - - - - - - - - - %4 %2 40 || 0 | 35 | 0 || 33 || 0 || 28 || 0 | 16 | 0 || 346 0

Over 4-------------------- %4 %4 |--|--|--|--| 35 0 || 33 0 || 28 0 | 16 0 346 0
- - COLD-DRAWN TUBES
Over Under
Under 1-------------------| 0, 004 || 0.004 20 0 12 0 | }. 0

1 to 1%, inclusive- - - - - - - - - - 0.006 || 0, 006 20 0 12 0 | }; 0
Over 1% to 2, exclusive----. 0.008 || 0.008 22 0 13 0 | }% 0
2 to 2%, exclusive---------- 0.010 || 0.010 22 0 13 0 | }{6 0
2% to 3, exclusive---------- 0. 012 || 0. 012 22 0 13 || 0 || 346 0
3 to 4, inclusive------------ 0.015 0.015 22 0 13 0 | }{6 0
Over 4-------------------- 0.015 0.025 22 0 13 0 | }{6 0
* These permissible variations in outside diameter and wall thickness apply only to the tubes as rolled or drawn and before swaging,
expanding, bending, polishing, or other fabricating operations.
b Cold-drawn tubing, having a specified wall thickness which is 3 percent, or less than 3 percent, of the outside diameter cannot be straight
ened properly without a certain amount of ovality resulting in the diameter, consequently such tubes, while having an average outside diaIn
eter within the permissible variations prescribed in the table, will require an additional ovality permissible variation of plus or Ininus 0.5
percent of the outside diameter.
• On tubes 2 inches and over in outside diameter and 0.220 inch and over in thickness the variation in wall thickness in any one cross
section of any one tube shall not exceed plus or minus 10 percent of the actual average wall of that section. The actual average wall is defined
as the average of the thickest and thinnest wall in that section.
d The permissible variations in weight apply to lots of 50 tubes or more in sizes 4 inches and under in outside diameter, and to lots of 20
tubes or more in sizes over 4 inches in outside diameter. -
• Permissible variations in length apply to tubes before bending.
51.9–15 Finish. Finished tubes shall be reasonably straight and have smooth ends,
#. ſom burrs.
Sn.
They shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike
51.9–16 Marking. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the type of material
from which it is made, whether seamless or lap-welded, and whether steel or iron, together
with the hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per square inch, shall be legibly stenciled on each
tube 1% inches in outside diameter and over, provided the length is not under 3 feet.
(b) On tubes less than 1% inches in diameter and on all tubes under 3 feet in length, the
information specified in paragraph (a) shall be marked on a tag securely attached to the bundle
or box in which the tubes are shipped.
ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED STEEL AND OPEN-HEARTH IRoN BoILER AND SUPERHEATER
TUBES
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations A 178–40 and A226–40. Certified Material–Class B.
51.9a–1 Scope. (a) These specifications cover three grades of electric-resistance

welded tubes made of steel and open-hearth iron and intended for boiler tubes, boiler flues
superheater tubes, and safe ends; * and one grade of electric-resistance-welded silicon kille
* Grade C tubes are not suitable for safe-ending by forge welding.
(F–23)
(51.9a–2] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
steel boiler and superheater tubes. These grades shall be designated grade A, a low-carbon
steel tube; grade B, an open-hearth iron tube; grade C, a medium carbon-steel tube; and
grade D, a silicon-killed steel tube.
(b) Grade D tubes less than 2 inches in outside diameter shall have wall thicknesses of
not less than 8 percent of the outside diameter and in no case less than 0.085 inch. Grade D
. 2 inches and over in outside diameter shall have wall thicknesses of not less than 0.200
IIlCIl. -
(c) The type desired shall be specified in the order.

51.9a–2 Process. The material shall be made by either or both of the following
processes: open-hearth or electric-furnace. Grade D shall be a killed steel.
51.9a–3 Manufacture. Tubes shall be made by electric-resistance-welding and shall
be normalized at a temperature above the upper critical temperature.
51.9a–4 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D
Carbon, percent----------------------- - - - 0.08 to 0. 18

- - - - 1 0. 03 1 0. 35 0.08 to 0. 18
Manganese, percent-------------------------- 0.30 to 0. 60 1 0. 03 1 0. 80 0.30 to 0. 60
Phosphorous, maximum percent---------------- 0.04 0.02 0.04 0.04
Sulphur, maximum percent-------------------- 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045
Silicon, maximum percent---------------------|--------------|----------|---------- 0.25
1 Maximum.
51.9a–5 Check analysis—(a) Grades A, B, and C. An analysis of 2 tubes from each

lot of 250 tubes or fraction thereof, and from each lot of 2,000 feet or fraction thereof of
safe-end material, may be made by the inspector. Drillings for analysis shall be taken
from several points around each tube selected for analysis. The chemical composition thus
determined shall conform to the requirements prescribed in section 51.9a–4.
(b) Grade D. An analysis of 2 tubes from each lot of 100 tubes or fraction thereof may
be made by the inspector. Drillings for analysis shall be taken from several points around
each tube selected for analysis. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform
to the requirements prescribed in section 51.9a–4.
(c) All grades. If the analysis of either tube does not conform to the requirements
specified, an analysis of two additional tubes from the same lot shall be made, each of which
shall conform to the requirements specified in section 51.9a–4.
51.9a–6 Flattening test. (a) For grades A and B tubes having wall thicknesses not
exceeding 10 percent of their outside diameters, and providing the thickness does not exceed
0.200 inch, a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand being flattened between
parallel plates until the distance between the plates is three times the wall thickness without
cracking or showing flaws.
(b) For grades A and B tubes other than specified in paragraph (a), and for grade D
tubes, a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand being flattened between parallel
plates until the distance between the plates is four times the wall thickness, without cracking
or showing flaws.
(c) For grade C tubes, a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand being
flattened between parallel plates until opposite walls of the tube meet. No opening in the
weld shall take place until the distance between the plates is less than two-thirds of the
original outside diameter of the tube. No cracks or breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the
weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than one-third of the original
diameter of the tube. Evidence of laminations or burnt material shall not develop during
the entire flattening process.
(d) The weld shall be placed in the line of maximum bend for all grades.
(e) Superficial ruptures as a result of minor surface imperfections shall not be cause for
rejection.
51.9a–7 Flange test. (a) For grades A, B, and C tubes not more than 5 inches in
diameter and having wall thicknesses not exceeding 10 percent of their outside diameters,
and providing the thickness does not exceed 0.200 inch, a section not less than 4 inches in
(F–24)
MATERIALS [51.9a–11]
length shall be capable of having a flange turned over at a right angle to the body of the tube
without cracking or showing flaws. This flange as measured from the outside of the tube
shall not be less than % inch nor more than % inch. Within these limits the width of the flange
shall be not less than the following:
Width of flange
Outside diameter of tube (inches)

Grades A and B Grade C
2% and under----------------- 15 percent of outside diameter------------ 75 percent of that re

Over 2% to 3%---------------- % inch--------------------------------- for grades A and*ired
Over 3% to 5------------------ 10 percent of outside diameter------------- -
(b) For tubes other than specified in paragraph (a), the flange test shall not be required.
(c) In making the flange test, it is recommended that the flaring tool and die block
shown in figure M-5 be used.
51.9a–8 Crush test for grades A and B tubes. When required by the inspector, crush
ing tests shall be made on sections of tubes two and one-half inches in length which shall
stand crushing longitudinally without cracking, splitting, or opening at the weld, as follows:
Wall thickness of tubes (inches): Height of crushed section (inches)
0.135 and under------------------ %, or until outside folds are in con
tact.
Over 0.135---------------------- 1%.
Slight surface checks shall not be cause for rejection.

51.9a–9 Tensile properties. (a) Grade C tubes shall conform to the following require
ments as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, minimum, psi------------------------------------ 60,000
Yield point, minimum, psi---------------------------------------- 37,000
Elongation in 2 inches, minimum, percent-------------------------- 25
(b) No tensile properties are specified for Grade D tubes, but for purposes of design, the
following tensile properties may be assumed:
51.9a–10 Flaring test, for grade D tubes. A section of tube approximately 4 inches
in length shall stand being flared with a tool having a 60° included angle ...Y the tube
at the mouth of the flare has been expanded to the following percentages, without cracking
or showing flaws:
Minimum erpansion
of inside diameter
Ratio of inside diameter to outside diameter: - (percent)
0.9
51.9a–11 Hardness test, for grade D tubes. (a) For tubes 0.200 inch and over in
wall thickness the Brinell hardness test shall be used and on tubes having wall thicknesses
from 0.200 to 0.375 inches, exclusive, a 10-mm. ball with a 1,500-kg. load, or a 5-mm. ball
with a 750-kg. load may be used at the option of the inspector. For tubes less than 0.200
inch in wall thickness, the Rockwell hardness test shall be used.
(b) The Brinell hardness test may be made on the outside of the tube near the end or
on the outside of a specimen cut from the tube, at the option of the inspector. The Rockwell
hardness test shall be made on the inside of a specimen cut from the tube.
(c) The tubes shall have a Brinell hardness number not to exceed 125 and a Rockwell
hardness number not to exceed B72.
(F–25)
[51.9a–12] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
(d) In making the Brinell hardness test, reference should be made to the Standard
Method of Test for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials (A. S. T. M. Designation:
E 10) of the American Society for Testing Materials.
(e) In making the Rockwell hardness test, reference should be made to the Standard
Method of Test for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials (A. S. T. M. Designation:
E 18) of the American Society for Testing Materials.
51.9a–12 Hydrostatic test—(a) Grades A, B, and C tubes. Tubes under 5 inches
in diameter shall withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 1,000 psi., and tubes 5 inches
and over in diameter shall withstand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 800 psi., provided
the fiber stress corresponding to these pressures does not exceed 16,000 psi. for grades A and B,
and 18,000 psi. for grade C, as determined by the following formula. Should the fiber stress
corresponding to these pressures exceed the above figures, the hydrostatic test pressure shall
be determined by the following formula:
2St
P D
where
P=hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per square inch,
S=allowable fiber stress of 16,000 psi. for grades A and B tubes, 18,000 psi. for
grade C tubes, and 20,800 psi. for Grade D tubes.
t=thickness of the tube wall in inches, and
D=outside diameter of the tube in inches.
(b) Grade D tubes. ... Prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, bending, or other forming
operations, each tube shall be tested at the mill to the hydrostatic pressures prescribed in the
following table, provided that the fiber stress calculated in accordance with the following
formula does not exceed 20,800 psi.:
P _2St
T D
NotE: Letters in formula have same significance as in paragraph (a).
HYDRosTATIC TEST PRESSURE

Hydrostatic test
Size, outside diameter (inches): ;: ;
Under 1----------------------------------------------------- 1, 000
1 to 1%, exclusive-------------------------------------------- 1, 500
1% to 2, exclusive------------------------------------------- 2,000
2 and over-------------------------------------------------- 2,500
(c) All grade tubes. Tubes shall be struck near both ends, while under test pressure,
with a 2-pound steel hand hammer or its equivalent.
51.9a–13 Test specimens. (a) Test specimens required for the flattening, flange,
and flaring tests specified in sections 51.9a–6, 51.9a–7, 51.9a–10 shall be taken from the ends
of finished tubes prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, or other forming operations, or
being cut to .# They shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs and flaws.
(b) If desirable and practicable, tension tests may be made on full sections of the tubes
up to the capacity of the testing machine. For larger size tubes, the tension test specimen
shall consist of a strip cut longitudinally from the tube and not flattened between gage
marks. The sides of the specimen shall be parallel between gage marks; the width, irrespec
tive of the thickness, shall be 1 inch; the gage length shall be 2 inches.
(c) All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
51.9a–14 Number of tests. (a) For grades A and B, one of each of the tests specified
in sections 51.9a–6 (a), (b), (d), 51.9a–7, and 51.9a–8 shall be made on each of 2 tubes from
each lot of 250 tubes or fraction thereof, and from each 2,000 feet or fraction thereof of
safe-end material. For grade C, one of each of the tests specified in sections 51.9a–6 (c),
(d), 51.9a–7, and 51.9a–9 shall be made on each of 2 tubes from each lot of 250 tubes or
fraction thereof.
(b) If any of the test specimens specified in paragraph (a) shows defective machining
or develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
(F-26)
in section 51.9a–9 and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of the
gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall be allowed.
(d) For grade D tubes, 4 tubes shall be selected for test from each lot of 100 tubes.
From each end of 2 of these test tubes, the flattening test specified in section 51.9a–6 (b)
shall be made and from each end of the other 2 test tubes the flaring test specified in section
51.9a–10 shall be made.
(e) Five percent of all grade D tubes shall be selected and a hardness test shall be made
on each of these tubes as specified in section 51.9a–11.
(f) All tubes of all grades shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in section
51.98–12.
51.9a–15 Retests. If the results of the physical tests of any lot do not conform to the
requirements specified in sections 51.9a–6, 51.9a–7, 51.9a–8, 51.9a–9, 51.9a–10, 51.9a–11,
retests may be made on additional tubes of double the original number from the same lot,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
51.9a–16 Forming operations. Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expand
ing and beading without showing cracks or flaws, or opening at the weld. Superheater tubes
when properly manipulated j all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary
for application without developing defects.
51.9a–17 Finish. Finished tubes shall be reasonably straight and have smooth ends
ºfton burrs. They shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike
51.9a–18 Marking—(a) Grades A, B, and C tubes. The name or brand of the
manufacturer, the type of material from which it is made, the words Electric Resistance
Welded and whether steel or open-hearth iron, together with the hydrostatic test pressure
in pounds per square inch, shall be legibly stenciled on each tube 1% inches in outside
diameter and over, provided the length is not under 3 feet.
(b) Grade D tubes. The name or brand of the manufacturer, the words Electric Resist
ance Welded Steel, A. S. T. M. Specification A 226, together with the hydrostatic test
pressure in pounds per square inch, shall be legibly stenciled on each tube 1% inches and over
in outside diameter, provided the length is not under 3 feet.
(c) All grades of tubes. On tubes less than 1% inches in diameter and on all tubes under
3 feet in length, the information specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) shall be marked on a tag
securely attached to the bundle or box in which the tubes are shipped.
SEAMLESs STEEL BoILER TUBEs FoR HIGH-PREssurE SERVICE
MEDIUM-CARBON SEAMLESS STEEL BoILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBEs

CARBON-MoLYBDENUM ALLOY-STEEL BoILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBEs
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. designations A 192–40, A 210–40, and A 209–41T. Certified Material–Class B.
51.10–1. Scope. These specifications cover seamless steel boiler tubes for high-pressure
service, medium-carbon seamless steel boiler and superheater tubes, and seamless carbon
molybdenum alloy-steel boiler and superheater tubes.
51.10-2. Process. The steel shall be a killed steel and shall be made by either or both
of the following processes: open-hearth or electric-furnace.
51.10-3 Manufacture. (a) Tubes shall be made by the seamless process and shall
be either hot finished or cold-drawn, as specified.
(b) Cold drawn tubes shall be annealed after the final cold-draw pass.
b §. finished
y the purchaser.
tubes for high pressure service need not be annealed unless specified
(d) Hot finished medium carbon tubes shall be annealed by heating to at least 1,300°F.
(e) Hot finished carbon-molybdenum tubes shall be annealed or normalized and drawn.
(F–27)
51.10-4 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
High pressure Medium carbon
Carbon, percent------------------------------- _ _ ! 0.08 to 0.18 0.35

Manganese, percent-------------- __ ! 0.30 to 0. 60 0.80
Phosphorus, maximum, percent------------------------------------- 0.04 0.04
Sulphur, maximum, percent----------------------------------------- 0.045 0.045
Silicon, maximum, percent------------------------------------------ 0.25 l--------------
Silicon, minimum, percent------------------------------------------|-------------- 0. 10
Carbon molybdenum
Grade T1 Grade T1a
Carbon, percent--------------------------------------------------- 0. 10 to 0. 20 0. 15 to 0. 25
Manganese, percent------------------------------------------------| 0.30 to 0. 60 0.30 to 0. 60
Phosphorus, maximum, percent------------------------------------- 0.04 0.04
Sulphur, maximum, percent----------------------------------------- 0.05 0.05
Silicon, percent---------------------------------------------------- 0. 10 to 0. 50 0. 10 to 0. 50
Molybdenum, percent---------------------------------------------- 0. 45 to 0. 65 0. 45 to 0. 65
51.10–5 Check Analysis. (a) At the request of the inspector an analysis as specified in
the following table shall be made by the manufacturer on samples of finished tubing selected
at random and shall conform to the requirements specified in section 51.10-4. Drillings for
analysis shall be taken from several points around each tube selected for analysis.
Size of tube: Number of samples selected
2 inches and over in diameter and 0.200 inch and 2 from each lot of 100 tubes or fraction thereof.
over in wall thickness.
Less than 2 inches in diameter or any size less than 2 from each lot of 250 tubes or fraction thereof.
0.200 inch in wall thickness.
(b) If the analysis of either tube does not conform to the requirements specified, an
analysis of two additional tubes from the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform
to the requirements specified in section 51.10–4.
51.10–6 Tensile properties. (a) The material shall conform to the following require
Carbon molybdenum
Medium
carbon
Grade T1 Grade Tla
Tensile strength, minimum, psi----------------------------------- 60,000 55,000 60,000

Yield point, minimum, psi--------------------------------------- 37,000 30,000 32, 000
Elongation in 2 inches, minimum, percent-------------------------- 25 30 30
No tensile º: are specified for tubes for high-pressure service, but for purposes
of design, the following tensile properties may be assumed:
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the beam or halt in the gage of
the testing machine, or by the use of dividers or other approved method, at a crosshead
speed not to exceed 4 inch per minute. When a definite yield point is not exhibited, the
yield strength corresponding to a limited permanent offset of 0.2 percent of the gage length
of the specimen shall be reported instead.
51.10–7 Flattening test—(a) High-pressure boiler tubes. A section of tube 2% inches
in length shall stand being flattened between parallel plates, without cracking or showin
any flaw, until the distance between the plates is four times the wall thickness. Superfici
ruptures as a result of minor surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection.
(F–28)
MATERIALS * . . [51.10–9]
(b) Medium-carbon tubes. (1) For tubes having wall thicknesses, not exceeding 10
i." of their outside diameters, a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand
eing flattened between parallel plates until the distance between the plates is five times
the wall thickness, without cracking or showing flaws.
(2) For tubes having wall thicknesses exceeding 10 percent of their outside diameters,
a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand being flattened between parallel plates
until the distance between the plates is seven times the wall thickness, without cracking or
showing flaws.
(3) Superficial ruptures as a result of minor surface imperfections shall not be cause
for rejection.
- (c) Carbon-Molybdenum tubes. (1) For tubes having wall thicknesses not exceed
ing 10 percent of their outside diameters, a section not less than 2% inches in length shall
stand being flattened between parallel plates until the distance between the plates is three
times the wall thickness, without cracking or showing flaws.
(2) For tubes having wall thicknesses exceeding 10 percent of their outside diameters,
a section not less than 2% inches in length shall stand being flattened between parallel plates
until the distance between the plates is four times the wall thickness, without cracking or
showing flaws.
(3) Superficial ruptures as a result of minor surface imperfections shall not be cause for
rejection.
51.10–8 Flaring test. A section of tube approximately 4 inches in length shall stand
; flared with a tool having a 60° included angle until the tube at the mouth of the flare
has been expanded to the following percentages, without cracking or showing flaws:
Minimum expan
sion of inside diam
Ratio of inside diameter to outside diameter:” eter, percent
0.9----------------------------------------------------------- 20
-------------------------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 22
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - ---- - - - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - - 25
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----------------------------------------------- 30
0.5------------------------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 37
04----------------------------------------------------------- 50
03----------------------------------------------------------- 67
1 In determining the ratio of inside diameter to outside diameter, the inside diameter shall be defined as the actual inside diameter of
the material tested.
51.10–9 Hardness test. (a) For tubes 0.200 inch and over in wall thickness the
Brinell hardness test shall be used and on tubes having wall thicknesses from 0.200 to 0.375
inch, exclusive, a 10-mm. ball with 1,500-kg. load, or a 5-mm. ball with 750-kg. load may be
used, at the option of the manufacturer. For tubes less than 0.200 inch in wall thickness,
the Rockwell hardness test shall be used, except that for medium-carbon and carbon
molybdenum tubes with wall thicknesses of less than 0.065 inch in wall thickness, no hardness
tests are required.
(b) The Brinell hardness test may be made on the outside of the tube near the end or
on the outside of a specimen cut from the tube, at the option of the manufacturer. The
Rockwell hardness test shall be made on the inside of a specimen cut from the tube except
in the case of tubes furnished with upset, swaged, or otherwise formed ends in which case
it shall be made on the outside of the tubes near the end after forming operations.
(c) The tubes shall have a hardness number not to exceed the following:
TUBEs For HIGH-PREssure SERVICE
Brinell hardness num Rockwell hardness

ber (tubes 0.200 inch number (tubes less than
and over in wall 0.200 inch in wall
thickness) thickness)
Hot-finished tubes--------------------------------------------- 137 B77

Cold-drawn tubes--------------------------------------------- 125 B72
Hot-finished tubes (annealed)----------------------------------- 125 B72
619428°–45—8
MEDIUM-CARBON TUBEs
The tubes shall have a Brinell hardness number not to exceed 143 and a Rockwell
hardness number not to exceed B79.
CARBON-Molybde:NUM TUBEs
Brinell hardness num- || Rockwell hardness

ber (tubes 0.200 inch number (tubes less than
and over in wall 0.200 inch in wall
thickness) thickness)
Grade T1---------------------------------------------------- 137 B77

Grade Tla--------------------------------------------------- 143 B79
(d) In making the Brinell hardness test, reference should be made to the Standard
Method of Test for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials (A. S. T. M. Designation: E 10)
of the American Society for Testing Materials.
(e) In making the Rockwell hardness test, reference should be made to the Standard
Method of Test for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials (A. S. T. M. Designation:
E18) of the American Society for Testing Materials.
51.10–10 Hydrostatic test. Prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, bending, or other
forming operations, each tube shall be tested at the mill to the hydrostatic pressures pre
scribed in the following table, provided that the fiber stress calculated in accordance with
the following formula does not exceed 16,000 psi. in the case of tubes for high-pressure and
24,000 psi. for medium-carbon and carbon-molybdenum tubes:
_2St
D
where:
P=Hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per square inch,
sºil. fiber stress of 16,000 psi, for high-pressure tubes and 24,000 psi. for
medium-carbon and àºjī. tubes,
t=thickness of the tube wall in inches, and
D=outside diameter of the tube in inches.
HYDROSTATIC TEST PREssURE

- Hydrostatic test
Size, outside diameter, inches: pressure, psi.
Under 1----------------------------------------------------- 1,000
1 to 1%, exclusive--------------------- ------------------------ 1,500
1% to 2, exclusive--------------------------------------------- 2,000
2 and over--------------------------------------------------- 2,500
51.10–11 Test specimens—(a) Tubes for high-pressure service. (1) Test speci
mens required for the flattening and flaring tests specified in sections 51.10–7 and 51.10–8
shall be taken from the ends of finished tubes prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, or
other forming operations, or being cut to length. They shall be smooth on the ends and
free from burrs and flaws. -
(2) All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.

(b) Medium-carbon and carbon-molybdenum tubes. (1) Test specimens required for
the flattening and flaring tests specified in sections 51.10–7 and 51.10–8 shall be taken from
the ends of finished tubes prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, or other forming opera
tions, or being cut to length. They shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs and flaws.
(2) If desirable and practicable, tension tests may be made on full sections of the tubes
up to the capacity of the testing machine. For larger size tubes, the tension test specimen
shall consist of a strip cut longitudinally from the tube and not flattened between gage marks.
The sides of the specimen shall be parallel between gage marks; the width, irrespective of the
thickness shall be 1 inch; the gage length shall be 2 inches.
(3) On tubes furnished with upset, swaged, or otherwise formed ends, the hardness test
specified in section 51.10–9 shall be made on the outside of the tubes near the end after
the forming operations.
(F–30)
- (4) All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.

51.10-12 Number of tests. (a) Five percent of all tubes shall be selected and a
hardness test shall be made on each of these tubes as specified in section 51.10–9.
(b) Each tube shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in section 51.10–10.
(c) Flattening and flaring tests. (1) Tubes for high-pressure service. From each lot
of 100 tubes or fraction thereof, 4 tubes shall be selected for test. From each end of two of
these test tubes, the flattening test specified in section 51.10–7 shall be made and from each
end of the other two test tubes the flaring test specified in section 51.10–8 shall be made.
(2) Medium-carbon and carbon-molybdenum tubes. From each heat-treated lot of
finished tubes, two tubes shall be selected at random for the flattening and flaring tests
specified in sections 51.10–7 and 51.10–8. The flattening test shall be made on each end of
one of these tubes and the flaring test shall be made on each end of the remaining tube. For
the purpose of calculating the number of tests on tubes heat-treated by the continuous
process, the number of tubes in a heat-treated lot shall be determined from the size of the
tubes as follows: - . . . ..
Size of tube: Size of lot i

2 inches and over in outside diameter and 0.200 inch and over
in wall thickness------------------------------------- Not more than 50, tubes.
Less than 2 inches but over 1 inch in outside diameter or over - - -
1 inch in outside diameter and under 0.200 inch in wall - - -
thickness -------------------------------------------- Not more than 75 tubes.

1 inch or less in outside diameter------------------------- Not more than 125 tubes.
(d) Tension tests (where required). (1) From each group of 100 finished tubes or fraction
thereof, two tubes shall be selected at random for the tension test specified in section 51.10–6.
(2) If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, it may be dis
(3) If the percentage of elongation of any test specimen is less than that specified in
section 51.10–6 (a) and any part of the fracture is more than three-quarters inch from the
center of the gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before
allowed.
testing, a retest shall be * *
51.10–13 Retests. If the results of the physical tests of any lot do not conform to
the j. specified in sections 51.10–6, 51.10–7, 51.10–8, and 51.10–9, retests ma
be made on additional tubes of double the original number from the same lot, each of wº
shall conform to the requirements specified.
51.10–14 Retreatment. If individual tubes or tubes selected to represent any group
or lot of medium-carbon or carbon-molybdenum tubes fail to conform to the test requirements
specified in sections 51.10–6, 51.10–7, 51.10–8, and 51.10–9, the individual tubes or group or
lot represented may be re-treated and resubmitted for test. Only two reheat treatments will
be permitted.
51.10–15 . Forming operations. Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand expandin
and beading without showing cracks or flaws. Superheater tubes when properly manipulate
shall stand all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary for application without
developing defects. -
51.10–16 Permissible variations in dimensions and weight. Variations in outside

diameter, wall thickness, weight and length, from those specified, shall not exceed the
amounts prescribed in the table shown in section 51.9–14. - -
51.10–17 Finish. Finished tubes shall be reasonably straight and have smooth ends
free from burrs. They shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike
finish. Minor defects may be removed by grinding provided the wall thicknesses and the
outside diameters are not decreased to less than that permitted in section 51.10–16.
51.10–18 Marking. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the type of material
from which it is made (seamless steel, medium-carbon steel, or carbon-molybdenum steel,
as the case may be), together with the hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per square inch,
and whether hot-finished or cold-drawn, shall be legibly stenciled on each tube 1% inches in
outside diameter and over, provided the length is not under 3 feet. -
(b) On tubes less than 1% inches in diameter and on all tubes under 3 feet in length, the
information specified in paragraph (a) shall be marked on a tag securely attached to the
bundle or box in which the tubes are shipped. - - - . .”
(F–31)
STEEL PIPE
Norr: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations A 106–41 and A 206–41 T. Certified material—Class B.
51.11–1 Scope. These specifications cover one grade of lap-welded steel pipe, two
grades of seamless steel pipe, and one grade of seamless carbon-molybdenum alloy-steel pipe.
51.11-2 Process—(a) Material. The steel for lap-welded pipe shall be of good weld
able quality made by the open-hearth process. All seamless pipe shall be made of killed
steel by either or both of the following processes: open-hearth or electric-furnace.
(b) Welded pipe. Pipe 2 inches and over in nominal diameter may be made by the lap
weld process.
§ Seamless pipe. All pipe 1% inches and under in nominal diameter shall be made by
the seamless process and pipe more than 1% inches in nominal diameter may be made by
the seamless process. Seamless pipe shall be furnished either hot-finished or cold-drawn
and annealed.
(d) Carbon-molybdenum pipe. (1) Pipe under 2 inches in nominal diameter may be
furnished either hot-finished or cold-drawn and annealed. This anneal shall consist of heat
ing a furnace to from 1,200° to 1,300° F. followed by cooling in the furnace at a rate not
to exceed 50°F. per hour until below 1,000°F.
(2) Pipe 2 inches and over in nominal diameter shall be furnished hot-finished followed
by a stress-relief anneal. This stress-relief anneal shall consist of heating in a furnace to
approximately 1,200°F. followed by furnace cooling at a rate not to exceed 50°F. per hour
until below 1,000°F.
51.11–3 Chemical composition. (a) The steel shall conform to the following require
ments as to chemical composition:
Welded Grade A Grade B cºde.
Carbon, percent----------------------|-------------- 1 0. 25 1 0. 35 0. 10 to 0. 20
Manganese, percent------------------- 0. 30 to 0. 60 0.30 to 0. 90 0.35 to 1. 00 0.30 to 0. 60
Phosphorus, maximum, percent - - - - - - - - 0.045 0.04 0.04 0.04
Sulphur, maximum, percent------------ 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.05
Silicon, percent----------------------- |--------------|-------------- 2 0.10 0. 10 to 0. 50
Molybdenum, percent----------------- |---------------------------- -------------- 0. 45 to 0. 65
|
1 Maximum. * Minimum.
(b) Check analysis. (1) Analysis of two pipes from each lot, as specified below, shall
be made by the manufacturers from the finished pipe.
Nominal diameter (inches) Welded, A and B Carbon-molybdenum, Pl,
Under 2-------------------------------------------------------------- 400 or portion thereof.

2 to 5, inclusive--------------- 400 or fraction thereof.------------------- 200 or fraction thereof.
6 and over-------------------- 200 or fraction thereof.------------------- 100 or fraction thereof.
(2) Drillings for analysis shall be taken from several points around each pipe selected for
analysis. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
prescribed in paragraph (a).
51.11-4 Tensile requirements. (a) The material shall conform to the following
requirements as to tensile properties at room temperature:
Seamless Carbon
wººl ºpen most;
Grade A Grade B
Tensile strength, minimum psi------------------------- 45,000 148,000 | 160,000 | 55,900

Yield point, minimum psi------------------------------ 25,000 30, 000 35,000 30,000
Elongation, minimum percent:
8 inches----------------------------------------- 22 ------------------------------
2 inches-----------------------------------------|---------- 35 25 30
1 For transverse tension tests the material shall conform to these minimum tensile requirements except
that the elongation in 2 inches shall be 25 percent for grade A, 15 percent for grade B, and 20 percent for
carbon-molybdenum.
(F–32)
the testing machine, or by the use of dividers or other approved method, at a crosshead
speed not to exceed 4 inch per minute. When a definite yield point is not exhibited, the
yield strength, corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of 0.2 percent of thegage length of
the specimen shall be used instead. The tensile strength shall be determined at a crosshead
speed not to exceed 1% inches per minute.
51.11-5 Bending properties. Seamless pipe 2 inches and under in nominal diameter
shall stand being bent cold through 90° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which
is twelve times the nominal diameter of the pipe without developing cracks. When ordered
for close coiling, the pipe shall stand being §. cold through 180° around a cylindrical
º, the diameter of which is eight times the nominal diameter of the pipe, without
failure.
Carbon-molybdenum and grade A seamless steel pipe should be used for close coiling,
cold bending, or forge welding.
51.11-6 Flattening tests. (a) For welded pipe, the crop end cut from each end of
each length of pipe shall be flattened cold between parallel plates with the weld located 90°
from the line of direction of the applied force, until the opposite walls of the pipe meet. No
opening in the weld shall take place until the distance between the plates is less than two
thirds of the original outside diameter of the pipe. No cracks or breaks in the metal else
where than in the lap-weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than one
third of the original outside diameter of the pipe.
(b) For grade A seamless pipe over 2 inches in nominal diameter, a section of pipe not
less than 2% inches in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates until the opposite
walls of the pipe meet. No cracks or breaks in the metal shall occur until the distance between
the plates is less than one-third of the outside diameter of the pipe, but in no case shall the
distance be less than five times the thickness of the pipe wall.
(c) For grade B and alloy-steel seamless pipe over 2 inches in nominal diameter, a sec
tion of pipe not less than 2% inches in length shall be flattened cold between parallel plates
until the opposite walls of the pipe meet. No cracks or breaks in the metal shall occur
until the distance between the plates is less than one-half the outside diameter of the pipe
but in no case shall the distance be less than seven times the thickness of the pipe wall.
51.11-7 Hydrostatic test. (a) Each length of pipe shall be tested by the manu
facturer to a hydrostatic pressure which will produce in the pipe wall a stress of 50 percent
: ºnimum
Orinula:
specified yield point at room temperature, determined by the following
Where P=Hydrostatic test pressure pounds per square inch,

S=0.50 times the minimum specified yield point at room temperature in pounds
per square inch,
t=nominal wall thickness in inches, and
D=outside diameter in inches.
(b) The maximum hydrostatic test pressure shall not exceed 2,500 psi. for nominal
sizes 3 inches and under, or 2,800 psi. for aft nominal sizes over 3 inches. The test pressure
shall be maintained for not less than 5 seconds.
51.11–8 Test procedure—(a) Test specimens. (1) Specimens cut longitudinally or in
the case of seamless pipe, either longitudinally or transversely, shall be acceptable for the
tension test. Tension test specimens from welded pipe shall be taken at a point approx
imately 90° from the weld.
(2) The longitudinal tension test may be made in full section of the pipe up to the
capacity of the testing machine. For larger sizes, the tension test specimens shall consist
of strips cut from the pipe. The width of these specimens shall be 1% inches and they shall
have a gage length of 8 inches for welded pipe and 2 inches for seamless pipe. For seamless
ipe when the pipe wall thickness exceeds 3% inch, the tension test specimen shown in figure
M-2 shall be used. Longitudinal tension test specimens shall not be flattened between
gage marks. The sides of specimens shall be parallel between gage marks.
(3) The transverse tension test may be made on seamless pipe 8 inches and over in
nominal diameter. Specimens may be taken from a ring cut from the pipe or from sections
resulting from the flattening tests. The specimens shall consist of a strip cut transversely
(F–33)
from the pipe; the width of the specimen shall be 1% inches and its gage length 2 inches. When
the pipe wall thickness exceeds 3% inch, the tension test specimen shown in figure M-2 shall
be used. Specimens cut from the ring section shall be flattened cold and heat treated in the
same manner as the pipe and shall be parallel between gage marks. The transverse tension
test specimens may be machined off on either surface provided not over 15 percent of the
nominal thickness is removed from either side.
(4) Test specimens for the bend and flattening tests shall consist of sections cut from a
pipe. Specimens for flattening tests shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs, except
when made on crop ends.
(5) All routine check tests shall be made at room temperature.
(b) Number of tests. (1) Welded. The longitudinal tension test specified in section
51.11–4 shall be made on 1 length of pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of
each size under 6 inches, and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size 6
inches and over.
The flattening test specified in section 51.11–6 shall be made on both crop ends cut from
each length of welded pipe.
(2) Seamless pipe. One of either of the tests specified in section 51.11–4 shall be made
on 1 length of pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size under 6 inches,
and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size 6 inches and over.
The flattening test specified in section 51.11–6 (b) or (c) shall be made on 1 length of
pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over 2 inches up to but not
...; 6 inches and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size 6 inches
&nd OVer.
For grades A and B pipe, 2 inches and under in nominal diameter, the bend test specified
in º 51.11–5 shall be made on 1 pipe from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of
ea CIn SIZe.
(3) Carbon-molybdenum pipe. Tests shall be made as follows on one pipe from each
heat-treated lot, but in no case on less than 5 percent of the lot: .
The transverse or longitudinal tension test specified in section 51.11–4;
The bend test specified in section 51.11–5 for pipe 2 inches and under in nominal diame
ter; and -
d The flattening test specified in section 51.11-6 (c) for pipe over 2 inches in nominal
iameter.
For material heat treated by the continuous process, the tests specified in this paragraph
shall be made on each pipe in a lot constituting 5 percent of the pipe ordered, but on not less
than 2 pipes.
(4) Each length of welded, seamless, and carbon-molybdenum pipe shall be subjected
to the hydrostatic tests specified in section 51.11-7.
(5) If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, it may be dis
(6) If the percentage of elongation of any test specimen is less than that specified in
section 51.11–4 (a) and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of the
gage length of a 2-inch specimen, or is outside the middle third of the gage length of an 8
inch specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall º
allowed. If a specimen breaks in an inside or outside surface flaw, a retest shall be
allowed.
(c) Retests. (1) Welded and seamless steel pipe. If the results of any chemical or
physical tests of any lot * do not conform to the requirements specified in sections 51.11–3
51.11–4, 51.11–5, and 51.11–6, retests shall be made on additional pipe of double the original
number from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
Should a crop end of a finished welded or seamless pipe fail in the flattening test, one
retest may be made from the failed end. Pipe may be normalized either before or after the
first test, but pipe shall be subjected to only two normalizing treatments.
(2) Carbon–molybdenum pipe. If the result of the chemical analysis specified in section
51.11–3 (b) does not conform to the requirements of section 51.11–3 (a), an analysis of each
pipe º the same lot may be made, and all pipe conforming to the requirements shall be
accepted.
If the results of any physical tests of any lot do not conform to the requirements speci
fied in sections 51.11–4, 51.11–5, and 51.11–6, retests shall be made on additional pipes of
• A lot shall consist of all the pipe of the same size and wall thickness from any one melt.
(F–34)
MATERIALS (51.11a–4]
.* original number from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the requirements
specified.
If individual lengths of pipe selected to represent any lot fail to conform to the test
requirements specified in sections 51.11–4, 51.11–5, and 51.11–6, the lot may be re-heat
treated and resubmitted for test, except that any individual lengths which meet the re
quirements before re-treating will be accepted.
51.11–9 Finish and marking. (a) The finished pipe shall be reasonably free from
injurious defects, and shall have a workmanlike finish. Variations in outside diameter shall
not exceed the following: º
Permissible variation in outside diameter

(inches)
Nominal pipe size (inches)
Over Under
% to 1%, inclusive--------------------------------------------- %4 (0.015) %2 (0.031)

2 to 4, inclusive----------------------------------------------- %2 (0.031) %2 (0.031)
5 to 8, inclusive-------------------- - - - - - - - -- -- - - - -- - -- - - - -- - - - %6 (0.062) %2 (0.031)
The minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be more than 12.5 percent under the
nominal wall thickness specified.
(b) Each length of pipe manufactured in accordance with these specifications shall be
legibly marked, either by stenciling, stamping, or rolling, with the manufacturer's name or
i. together with the grade of material.
WELDED AND SEAMLEss STEEL PIPE
Note.—In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 53–42. Certified Material–Class B.
51.11a–1 Scope. (a) These specifications cover black and hot-dipped-galvanized welded
and seamless steel pipe. Pipe ordered under these specifications is intended for coiling, bend
ing, flanging, and other special purposes, and is suitable for fusion welding. , Butt-welded
pipe is not intended for flanging. The purposes for which the pipe is intended should be
stated in the order. When seamless or electric-resistance-welded pipe is ordered for close
coiling, cold bending, or for forge welding, Grade A shall be specified. -
§ Galvanized Pipe. When pipe ordered under these specifications is to be galvanized,

the tension, flattening, and bend tests shall be made on the base material before galvanizing.
NoTE.—If impracticable to make the physical tests on the base material before galvaniz
ing, such tests may be made on galvanized samples, and any flaking or cracking of the zinc
coating shall not §, considered cause for rejection.
51.11a–2 Process. (a) The steel for both welded and seamless pipe shall be made by
one or more of the following processes: open-hearth, electric-furnace, or acid-bessemer.”
The steel for furnace-welded pipe shall be of soft weldable quality.
(b) Furnace-welded pipe 2 inches and under in nominal diameter may be butt-welded,
H. ºrwise specified. Furnace-welded pipe over 2 inches in nominal diameter shall be
ap-welded.
51.11a–3 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following ladle analysis
requirement as to chemical composition:
Seamless or electric
Lap-welded resistance-welded
Phosphorus, max., percent:

Open-hearth or electric-furnace---------------------------------- 0.06 0.045
Acid-bessemer-------------------------------------------------|-------------- . 11
51.11a–4 Check analysis.-An analysis of two pipes from each lot of 500 lengths or
fraction thereof may be made by the inspector. Drillings for analysis shall be taken from
7 Pipe fabricated from steel manufactured by the acid-bessemer process may be used on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast
Guard when the E. does not exceed 350 pounds per square inch and/or the temperature does not exceed 450° F. and provided that
the*: is not to be bent, coiled, flanged or otherwise worked cold. However, acid-bessemer seamless pipe as well as Grade B seamless
open-hearth pipe may be fabricated by hot bending, hot flanging, or otherwise hot worked.
(F–35)
several points around each pipe selected for analysis. The phosphorus content of open
hearth or electric-furnace ...P. determined shall not exceed that specified in Section
51.11a–3 by more than 25 percent. For acid-bessemer seamless or electric-resistance-welded
steel pipe, the phosphorus content shall not exceed the maximum specified in Section 51.11a–3.
51.11a–5 Tensile properties. (a) The material shall conform to the requirements as to
tensile properties prescribed in table I. -
the testing machine, or other approved method. -
TABLE I.—TENSILE REQUIREMENTs
Furnace-welded Seamless orsººn
Open hearth
Acid-bessemer or electric Grade A Grade B
furnace
Tensile strength, min. psi----------------------- 50, 000 - - - - - - - 45,000 48,000 60,000

Yield point, min., psi--------------------------------- 30,000 25,000 30,000 35,000
Elongation in 8 in., min. percent----------------------- 1 18 "20 ----------|----------
Elongation in 2 in., min. percent-----------------------|---------- * 30 |---------- !----------
Elongation, minimum:
Basic min. elongation for walls 946 in. and over in
thickness, longitudinal strip tests, and for all small
sizes tested in full section------------------------|----------|---------- 35 30
When standard round 2-in. gage length test specimen
18 USeCl- - - - - - - - - - - - - -------------------------------------|---------- 28 22
For longitudinal strip tests a deduction for each 342 in.
decrease in wall thickness below %6 in. from the
basic minimum elongation of the following per- -
centage---------------------------------------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - a 1. 75 * 1. 50
1 Gage distances for measuring elongation on furnace-welded pipe of nominal sizes 34 in. and smaller shall be as follows:
Nominal size: Gage Length
34 and 3% in --------------------------------------------------------------------------6 in.
36 and 34 in ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4 in.
% in---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 in.
* When specimen shown in Fig. M-2 is used; see section 51.11a–9 (a).
* The following table gives the computed Ininimum values:
Elongation, min. percent

Wall thickness, inches
Grade A Grade B
35.00 30.00
33.25 28.50
31.50 27.00
29.75 25.50
28.00 24.00
26.25 22. 50
24. 50 21.00
22.75 19. 50
21.00 1 00
º -
51.11a–6 Bending properties. For pipe 2 in. and under in nominal diameter, a sufficient
length of pipe shall stand being bent cold through 90 deg. around a cylindrical mandrel,
the diameter of which is twelve times the nominal diameter of the pipe, without developing
cracks at any portion and without opening the weld. When ordered for close coiling, the
pipe shall stand being bent cold through 180 deg. around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter
of which is eight times the nominal diameter of the pipe, without failure. Double extra
strong pipe over 1% in. in diameter need not be subjected to the bend test.
51.11a–7 Flattening test. (a) The flattening test shall be made on standard weight and
extra strong pipe over 2 in. in nominal diameter. It shall not be required for double extra
strong pipe.
(F–36)
MATERIALS (51.11a–9]
(b) For lap-welded and butt-welded pipe the test section shall be 4 to 6 inches in length
and the weld shall be located 45 deg. from the line of direction of the applied force.
(c) For electric-resistance-welded pipe, the test section shall be 4 to 6 inches in length
and the weld shall be located 90 deg. from the line of direction of the applied force.
(d) For seamless pipe the test section shall not be less than 2% inches in length.
(e) The test shall consist in flattening a section of pipe between parallel plates until the
opposite walls meet. For welded pipe, no opening in the weld shall take place until the dis
tance between the plates is less than three-fourths of the original outside diameter for butt
weld, or two-thirds the outside diameter for lap-weld and electric-resistance-weld, and no
cracks or breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld shall occur until the distance between
the plates is less than shown below. For seamless pipe no breaks or cracks in the metal shall
occur until the distance between the plates is less than that shown below:
Kind of Pipe: Distance between plates “S”
For butt-welded pipe-------- 60 percent of outside diameter.
For lap-welded pipe--------- One-third of the outside diameter.
For electric-resistance-weld- One-third the outside diameter.
ed, pipe Grades A and B.
For seamless pipe, Grades A To distance “S” developed by the following formula:
and B. S= (1+e)t
Te-HID
Where:
S= Distance between flattening plates in inches,
t=Nominal wall thickness of pipe in inches,
D=Actual outside diameter of pipe in inches, and
e=Deformation per unit length (constant for a given
grade of steel, 0.09 for grade A and 0.07 for
grade B).
TABLE II.-HYDRosTATIC TEST PREssures For WELDED AND SEAMLESS STEEL PIPE 1
[Pressures expressed in pounds per square inch)
“Standard Weight” Pipe “Extra Strong” Pipe “Double Extra Strong” Pipe
*::::::: *
Imeter) incines Butt- LaD-Weld
p-weld- B Lap-Weld
p-weld- 4, Butt- LaD-Weld
p-weld
wººd gº, oradº w ...a gº, Grade B | W ...a º, Grade 5
% to 1, incl-------- 700 2 & 700 * 700 850 2 3850 3 850 1, 000 |2 = 1,000 • 1,000
1% to 3, incl------- 800 1,000 1, 100 1, 100 1, 500 1,600 1, 200 1, 800 1,900
3% to 6, incl-------|-------- 1, 200 1, 800 -------- 1, 700 1,800 |-------- 2,000 2, 100
8------------------------- 1, 200 1,300 |-------- 1, 700 2, 400 -------- 2,800 2,800
10 to 12, incl------|-------- 1,000 | 1, 200 -------- 1,600 | 1,900 --------|--------|--------
1 For pipe over 12 inches in nominal pipe size, the test pressures should be calculated by the formula P -*; ; where
P-Pressure in º: per square inch, S-fiber stress, 60 percent of the specified yield point, t-thickness of wall in inches, and D-outside
diameter in inches.
* Lap-welded pipe is not made below the 1% inch size.
* Seamless pipe º: these small sizes will probably need to be cold drawn.
51.11a–8 Hydrostatic test. Each length of pipe shall be tested at the mill to the
hydrostatic pressures prescribed in Table II. Welded pipe 2 in. and larger shall be jarred
near one end while under test pressure.
51.11a–9 Test specimens. (a) Tension test specimens shall be cut longitudinally from
the pipe and not flattened between gage marks. The sides of specimens shall be parallel
between gage marks. If desired, the tension test specimen may consist of a full section of the
ipe. When impracticable to pull a test specimen in full thickness the standard 2-in. gage
ength tension test specimen shown in Fig. M-2 may be used.
(b) Test specimens for the bend and flattening tests shall consist of sections cut from a
pipe. Specimens for flattening tests shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs, except
when made on crop ends taken from welded pipe.
(F–37)
51.11a–10 Number of tests. (a) One of each of the tests specified in Sections 51.11a–5,
51.11a–6, and 51.11a–7, shall be made on one length of pipe from each lot of 500 lengths or
fraction thereof of each size.
(b) In the case of welded pipe ordered for “flanging” the crop ends cut from each length
shall stand the flattening test specified in Section 51.11a–7(a).
(c) Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section
51.11a–8.
51.11a–11 Retests. (a) If the results of the physical tests of any lot do not conform to
the requirements specified in Sections 51.11a–5, 51.11a–6, and 51.11a–7, retests may be made
on additional pipe of double the original number from the same lot, each of which shall
conform to the requirements specified.
(b) If any section fails when flattening tests are made on the crop ends of each length of
welded pipe, other pieces from the length may be cut until satisfactory tests are obtained,
otherwise the length shall be rejected.
51.11a–12 Standard Weights. (a) The standard weights with the corresponding wall
thicknesses for pipe of various nominal inside diameters are prescribed in Table III.
(b) Nipples shall be cut from pipe of the same weight and quality described in these
specifications.
51.11a–13 Permissible Variations in Weight and Dimensions—(a) Weight. The
weight of the pipe shall not vary from that prescribed in Table III by more than plus or
minus 5 percent for standard weight and extra strong pipe nor more than plus or minus 10
percent for double extra strong pipe.
(b) Diameter. For pipe #.
and under in nominal diameter, the outside diameter at
any point shall not vary more than %4 in. over nor more than %2 in. under the standard
specified. For pipe 2 in. and over in nominal diameter, the outside diameter shall not vary
more than plus or minus 1 percent from the standard specified.
(c) Thickness. The minimum wall thickness at any point shall be not more than 12.5
percent under the nominal wall thickness specified.
51.11a–14 Lengths. Unless otherwise specified, pipe lengths shall be in accordance
with the following regular practice: (a) Standard weight pipe shall be in random lengths of
16 to 22 feet, but not more than 5 percent of the total number of lengths may be “Jointers,”
which are two pieces coupled together. When ordered with plain ends, 5 percent may be
in lengths of 12 to 16 feet.
§Extra strong and double extra strong pipe shall be in random lengths of 12 to 22
feet. Five percent may be in lengths of 6 to 12 feet.
51.11a–15 Workmanship. É. otherwise specified, pipe shall conform to the fol
lowing regular practice: (a) Ends. Each end of standard weight welded pipe shall be
threaded. Extra strong welded pipe and standard weight and extra strong seamless pipe
and all double extra strong pipe shall be furnished with plain ends.
(b) Threads. All threads shall be in accordance with the American Standard Pipe
Thread, and cut so as to make a tight joint when the pipe is tested at the mill to the specified
internal hydrostatic pressure. The variation from the standard, when tested with the
standard working gage, shall not exceed one and one-half turns either way.
(c) Couplings. Each length of threaded pipe shall be provided with one coupling
having clean-cut threads of such a pitch diameter as to make a tight joint. Couplings may
be of wrought iron or steel.
51.11a–16 Finish. The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and free from injurious
defects. All burrs at the ends of the pipe shall be removed.
51.11a–17 Marking. Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked by rolling, stamping,
or stenciling to show the name or brand of the manufacturer; the type of pipe (that is, lap
welded, electric-resistance-welded A, electric-resistance-welded B, seamless A, or seamless
B; where acid-bessemer steel is used in seamless or electric-resistance-welded pipe, the word
“bessemer” shall be added before the letter A or B); XS for extra strong, S for double
extra strong; ASTM A 53; the length, and, the hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per
square inch; except that for small diameter pipe which is bundled, this information may be
marked on a tag securely attached to each bundle.
51.11a–18 Inspection. The inspector shall have free entry, at all times while work is
being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works that concern the manufacture of
the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, without charge, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with
(F–38)
MATERIALS {51.11b -4]
these ºil. All tests (except check analysis) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted
as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works. * .
51.11a–19 Rejection. Each length of pipe that develops injurious defects during sho
working or application operations will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
TABLE III.-STANDARD WEIGHTS AND DIMENsions of WELDED AND SEAMLEss STEEL PIPE 1
NotE.-Where more than one weight is listed under the same size and class, the order should definitely specify the wall thickness desired
“Standard Weight” Pipe “Extra Strong” Pipe

“Double Extra
Strong”2 Pipe
Schedule 30 Schedule 40 Schedule 60 Schedule 80
Outside Number Weight weight

Size (nominal inside diam- of of pipe of pipe weight weight Weight
diameter), inches eter, threads per per of pipe of pipe of pipe
""" inches
sºlº. ººlºº.
...; inches ...; . . jà
; ; #
; ; #,
; c inches inches
cou- coul- ends, ends, ends,

plings, plings, lb. lb. lb.
lb. lb.
%--------------- 0.405 27 - - - - - - .-----| 0, 068| 0.25 - - - - --|------ 0.095 0.31|------|------

%--------------- . 540 18 || ------|------ . 088 . 43------|------ . 119 54------|------
%--------------- . 675 18 ------|------ . 0.91 . 571. -----|------ . 126 . 74------|------
%---------- - - - - -] . 840, 14 || ------|------ . . 109 . 85------|------ . 147| 1.09| 0.294. 1. 71
%--------------- 1.050 14 |--|--|--|--|--|--| . 113 1. 13|--|--|--|------ . 154| 1.47] .308| 2.44
1----------------| 1.315 11%|------|------ . 133| 1.68|--|--|--|------ . 179| 2. 17 . 358. 3. 66
1%-------------- 1. 660. 11%|------|------ . 140l 2, 28------|------ . 191 3.00 - 382 5. 21
1%-- - - - - - - - - - - - - | 1.900. 11%|------|-- - - - - . 145| 2.73 - - - - - -|------ . 200 3. 63 400 6, 41
2-------------- 2. 375] 11%|------|------ . 154! 3. 68|- - - - - - - - - - - - . 218, 5.02 436 9. 03
2%-------------- 2.875 8 ------------ 203 5. 82 _ _ _ _ _ _ ] . 276 7. 66 552. 13. 70
3------ - - - - - - - - - - 3. 500 8 ------------ 216| 7.62|------|------ . 300 10. 25 600 18. 58
3%-------------- 4. 000 8 ------|------ 226 9. 20------|------ . 318| 12. 51 636 22. 85
4------ - - - - - - - - - - 4.500 8 ------------ . 237 10.89 ------|------ . 337] 14. 98 . 674 27. 54
5---------------- 5. 563 8 |--|--|--|------ . 258! 14.81 - - - - - - - - - - - - . 375 20. 78 . 750 38. 55
6---------------- 6. 625 8 ------------ 280, 19. 19 - - - - - - - - - - - - 432 28. 57 864. 53. 16
8---------------- 8. 625 8 0.277. 25.00 .322 28.81|_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 500 43. 39 875 72.42
10°-------------- 10. 750 8 . 307| 35.00 .365. 41. 13 0.500. 54. 74------|------|------|------
12 *--------------|12, 750 8 . 330, 45.00. 4.375 50. 71. 4. 500 65. 41|– - - - - - - - - - - |------|------
l
1 Sizes larger than those shown in the table are measured by their outside diameter. These larger sizes will be furnished with plain ends,
unless otherwise specified. The weights will correspond to the manufacturers’ published standards although it is possible to calculate the
theoretical weights for any given size and wall thickness on the basis of 1 cu. in. of steel weighing 0.2833 lb. -
E 2 º American Standard for Wrought-Iron and Wrought-Steel Pipe (ASA No. B36.10–1939) has assigned no schedule number to “Double
xtra Strong” pipe.
ºndard weight pipe 10 in. in nominal size is also available with 0.279 in. wall thickness, but this wall is not covered by a schedule
number.
* Owing to a departure from the “Standard Weight” and “Extra Strong” wall thicknesses for the 12 in. nominal size Schedules 40 and 60,
in Table 2 of the American Standard for Wrought-Iron and Wrought-Steel Pipe (ASA No. B36,10–1939) the regular “Standard” and “Extra
Strong” wall thicknesses (0.375 in. and 0.500 in.) have been substituted.
ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE-WELDED STEEL PIPE

NotE.-In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 135–42. Certified Material—Class B.
51.11b-1 Scope. These specifications cover two grades of electric-resistance-welded

steel pipe 30 in. and under in diameter. The pipe is intended for conveying liquid, gas, or
vapor; and only grade A is adapted for flanging and bending. The suitability of pipe for
various purposes is somewhat dependent upon its dimensions, properties, and conditions of
service, so that the purpose for which the pipe is intended should be stated in the order.
51.11b-2 Process. Unless otherwise specified, the steel shall be made by either or
both of the following processes: open-hearth or electric-furnace.
51.11b-3 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following require
Phosphorus, max., percent------------------------------------------------- 0.045
Sulfur, max., percent------------------------------------------------------ . 060
51.11b-4 Ladle analysis. An analysis of each melt of steel shall be made by the
manufacturer to determine the percentages of the elements specified in Section 51.11b-3.
(F–39)
[51.11b-5] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
This analysis shall be made from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the melt. When
requested by the inspector, the chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to
the inspector and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 51.11b-3.
51.11b-5 Check Analysis. (a) Analyses of two pipes from each lot of 400 lengths or
fraction thereof of each size under 6 in., from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of
each size 6 to 20 in., and from each lot of 100 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over 20
to 30 in., may be made by the inspector from the finished pipe. By agreement between the
manufacturer and the inspector, the analysis may be made on the skelp and the number
shall be determined in the same manner as when taken from the finished pipe. Drillings
for analysis shall be taken from several points around each pipe, or across each piece of skelp,
selected for analysis. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the re
quirements specified in Section 51.11b-3.
(b) Retests. If the analysis of either length of pipe or length of skelp does not conform
to the requirements specified in Section 51.11b-3, analyses of two additional lengths from the
same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
51.11b-6 Tensile properties. (a) The material shall conform to the following require
Grade A Grade B
Tensile strength, min., psi------------------ 48,000 60,000

Yield point, min., psi---------------------- 30, 000 35,000
Elongation in 2 in., min., percent------------ 30 25
the testing machine, or other approved method.
(c) #. test specimen taken across the weld shall show a tensile strength not less than
the minimum tensile strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test will not be
required for pipe under 6 in. in outside diameter.
51.11b-7 Flattening test. Both crop ends from each length of pipe shall be flattened
between parallel plates with the weld at the point of maximum bending until opposite walls
of the pipe meet. No opening in the weld shall take place until the distance between the
lates is less than two-thirds of the original outside diameter of the pipe. No cracks or
reaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld shall occur until the distance between the
plates is less than one-third of the original outside diameter of the pipe, but in no case less
than five times the thickness of the pipe wall. Evidence of lamination or burnt material
. not develop during the entire flattening process, and the weld shall not show injurious
efects.
51.11b-8 Hydrostatic test. (a) Each length of pipe shall be tested at the mill to a
hydrostatic pressure calculated from the following formula, provided that in no case shall
the test pressure exceed 2,500 psi:
P=#
where:
P=minimum hydrostatic test pressure in pounds per square inch,
S=allowable #. stress (16,000 to 18,000 psi for grade A and 20,000 to 22,000
psi for grade B, but in no case shall the stress produced exceed 80 percent
of the specified yield point),
t=wall thickness in inches, and
(b) The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for not less than 5 sec. and while
under test pressure, the pipe shall be jarred near both ends with a 2-lb. hammer or its
equivalent.
51.11b-9 Test specimens. (a) The longitudinal tension test specimen shall be taken
from the end of the pipe, or by agreement between the manufacturer and the inspector may
be taken from the º , at a point approximately 90 deg. from the weld, and shall not be
flattened between gage marks. The transverse tension test specimen, if required by the
inspector, shall be taken across the weld and from the same end of the pipe as the longi
(F–40)
MATERIALS [51.11b-14)
tudinal test specimen. The sides of each specimen shall be parallel between gage marks.
When impracticable to pull a test specimen in full thickness the standard 2-in. gage len
tension test specimen shown in Fig. M-2 may be used. - t
(b) All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.

51.11b-10 Number of tests. (a) One longitudinal tension test shall be made on one
length from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size under 6 in., and one longi
tudinal and, if required by the inspector, one transverse tension test on one length from each
lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size 6 to 20 in., and on one length from each lot
of 100 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over 20 to 30 inches. . When taken from the
skelp the number of tests shall be determined in the same manner as when taken from the
finished pipe.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws not associated
with the welding, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
in Section 51.11b-6 (a) and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of
the gage length of a 2-inch specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the speci
men before testing, the specimen may be discarded and another substituted.
(d) The flattening test specified in Section 51.11b-7 shall be made on both crop ends
cut from each length of pipe.
(e) Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section
51.11b-8.
51.11b-11 Retests. (a) If the results of the tension tests of any lot do not conform
to the requirements specified in Section 51.11b-6, retests of two additional lengths from
the same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
(b) If any section fails when flattening tests are made on the crop ends of each length
of pipe, other pieces from the length may be cut until satisfactory tests are obtained, other
wise the i: shall be .# Precautions shall be taken so that crop ends may be
identified with respect to the length from which they were cut.
51.11b-12. Permissible variations in weights and dimensions—(a) Weight. The
weight of any length of pipe shall not vary more than 3.5 percent under or 10 percent over
that ſpecified, but the carload weight shall be not more than 1.75 percent under the nominal
weight.
(b) Diameter. The outside diameter shall not vary more than plus or minus 1 percent
from the nominal size specified.
(c) Thickness. The minimum wall thickness at any point shall be not more than 12.5
percent under the nominal wall thickness specified.
51.11b-13 Lengths. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall be furnished in lengths
averaging 38 ft. or over, with a minimum length of 20 feet, but not more than 5 percent
may be under 32 ft. Jointers made by welding are permissible. When threaded pipe is
ordered, jointers shall be made by threading and shall not exceed 5 percent of the order.
51.11b-14 Workmanship—(a) Ends, plain end pipe. Unless otherwise specified, plain
end pipe for use with the Dresser or Dayton, type coupling shall be reamed both outside
and inside sufficiently to remove all burrs. Plain end pipe for welding shall be beveled on
the outside to an angle of 37.5° with a width of flat at the end of the pipe of Ma-i-'42 inch.
When material is ordered beveled to any other than a 37.5° angle it should be understood
that the angle is to be measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
This means that a greater amount of material is removed with a 60° angle than with a
37.5° angle. Pipe shall be sufficiently free from indentations, projections, or roll marks
for a distance of 8 inches from the end of the pipe to make a tight joint with the rubber
gasket type of coupling. , All plain end pipe intended for Dresser or Dayton type joints or
for welding, sizes 10% inches and smaller in outside diameter, shall be not more than %,
inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter for a distance of 8 inches from the end of the
pipe and shall permit the passing for a distance of 8 inches of a ring gage which has a bore
% inch larger than the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. Sizes larger than 10% inches
in outside diameter shall be not more than %2 inch smaller than the nominal outside diameter
for a distance of 8 inches from the end of the pipe and shall permit the passing for a distance
: i. of a ring gage which has a bore #2 inch larger than the nominal outside diameter
of the pipe.
(b) Ends, threaded pipe. Each end of threaded pipe shall be reamed to remove all
burrs. All threads shall be in accordance with the American Standard Pipe Threads and
(F–41)
{51.11b -15], MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
cut so as to make a tight joint when the pipe is tested at the mill to the specified internal
hydrostatic pressure. The variation from the standard, when tested with the standard
working gage, shall not exceed one and one-half turns either way. Pipe shall not be rounded
out by hammering in order to get a full thread. There shall be not more than two black
threads for 3% inch taper among the perfect threads. Black threads should not be confused
with imperfect threads, such as those torn, shaven, or broken.
(c) Couplings. Each length of threaded pipe shall be provided with one coupling,
having clean-cut threads of such a pitch diameter as to make a tight joint. -
51.11b-15 Finish. (a) The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight and free from
injurious defects. Defects in excess of 12.5 percent of the nominal wall thickness shall be
considered injurious.
(b) Repair by welding. Injurious defects in the pipe wall, provided their depth does not
exceed one-third the specified wall thickness, shall be repaired by electric welding. Defects
in the welds such as sweats or leaks, unless otherwise specified, i. be repaired or the piece
rejected at the option of the manufacturer. Repairs of this nature shall be made by com
pletely removing the defect, cleaning the cavity, and then electric welding.
© All repaired pipe shall be retested §º in accordance with Section
51.11b-8.
51.11b-16 Marking. Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked with appropriate
symbols by stenciling, stamping, or rolling to show by whom manufactured, the grade of
pipe, and that it conforms to these specifications.
51.11b-17 Protective coating. After the pipe has been subjected to the hydrostatic
test, and if required by the inspector, it shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, grease,
loose scale, and rust; then dried, and given a protective coating of the kind and in the manner
specified by the inspector.
51.11b-18 Inspection. The inspector shall have free entry, at all times while work is
being performed, to all º of the manufacturer's works that concern the manufacture of
the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector, without charge, all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with
these P. All tests (except check analysis) and inspection shall be made at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted
as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
51.11b-19 Rejection. Each length of pipe that develops injurious defects during shop
working or application operations will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
WELDED WROUGHT-IRON PIPE
NoTE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 72–39. Certified material—Class B.
51.12–1 Material. There shall be but one grade. It may be required in any of the
commercial standard thicknesses according to purpose to be served. Butt-welded pipes
will not be accepted over 2 inches in diameter. All pipes may be lapwelded. The pipe shall
be made from wrought iron * free from any admixture of iron scrap or steel. The term
“scrap” applies only to foreign or bought scrap, and does not include local mill products
free from foreign or bought scrap. All pipe must be of coiling or bending All º
nipples furnished with pipe shall be of the same quality of material as the pipe. The finished
pipe shall be reasonably straight and free from injurious defects. All burrs at the ends of
pipe shall be removed. -
51.12–1a, Chemical composition. The iron shall conform to the following requirement
Manganese, maximum, percent-------- 0.05
51.12–2 Tensile properties. The material shall have the following tensile properties:
Tensile strength, minimum-----------------------------------------------lbs. per sq. in---- 40,000
Yield point, minimum------------------------------------------------------------- do---- 24, 000
Elongation in 8 inches, minimum------------------------------------------------- percent-- 12
51.12–3 Fracture tests. A section of pipe 6 inches in length shall be flattened until
broken by repeated light blows of a hammer or by pressure; the fracture developed shall have
a fibrous appearance.
s DErinition: wrought iron is a ferrous metal, aggregated from a solidifying mass of pasty, particles of highly refined metallic iron, with
which, without subsequent fusion, is incorporated a minutely and uniformly distributed quantity of slag.
(F–42)
51.12–4 Bend tests. For pipe 2 inches or under in diameter, a sufficient length of coil
ing or bending º shall stand being bent cold through 90°, around a cylindrical mandrel
the diameter of which is fifteen times the nominal diameter of the pipe, without developing
cracks at any portion and without opening the weld. Double extra strong pipe over 1%
inches in nominal size need not be subjected to the bend test.
51.12-5 Test specimens. (a) Tension test specimens may be of full section or strips
cut longitudinally from the pipe. The sides of specimens shall be parallel and not flattened
between gage marks.
(b) É. pipe up to and including 2 inches in nominal size, tension test specimens shall be
of the full section of the pipe. For pipe larger than 2 inches in nominal size, tension test
specimens may be strips not less than % inch in width, cut longitudinally from the pipe.
he sides of such specimens shall be parallel and not flattened between gage marks.
51.12–6 Number of tests. (a) One of each of the tests specified in sections 51.12–2 to
51.12–4, may be made on a length in each lot of 500 lengths or fraction thereof, of each size.
(b) Each length shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in section 51.12–7.
51.12–7 Hydrostatic tests. Each length of pipe shall be tested at the mill to a hydro
static test pressure specified in the following table. Pipe 2 inches and larger in diameter
shall be jarred near one end while under test pressure.
HYDROSTATIC PRESSUREs For WELDED WRoughT-IRON PIPE
[Pressures expressed in pounds per square inch]
“Standard weight” pipe “Extra strong” pipe “Double extra strong” pipe
Size (nominal Weight

i
of
pe per Weight of
inside diamº || ||...}.
eter), inches threaded Butt-weld Lap-weld pipe per
linear foot Butt-weld Lap-weld Butt-weld Lap-weld
and with plain ends
couplings (pounds)
(pounds)
NotE: For pipes over 12 inches in inside diameter, the test pressure should be calculated by the formula
P–% in which P=pressure in pounds per square inch; S-fiber stress=12,000 pounds per square inch;
t=thickness of wall in inches; D=outside diameter in inches.
51.12–8 Permissible variations and dimensions. For pipe 1% inches or under in

nominal size, the outside diameter at any point shall not be more than %, inch over nor
more than %, inch under the standard outside diameter. For pipe 2 inches or over in nom
inal size, the outside diameter shall not be more than 1 percent over or under the standard
outside diameter. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall conform to the following regular
practice:
(F–43)
(a) Standard weight pipe shall be in random lengths from 16 to 22 feet, but not more
than 5 percent of the total number of lengths may be “jointers,” which are two pieces coupled
together. When ordered with plain ends 5 percent may be in lengths of 12 to 16 feet.
(b) Extra strong pipe shall be in random lengths of 12 to 22 feet and 5 percent may be
in lengths of 6 to 12 feet.
(c) Each end of standard-weight pipe shall be threaded. Extra strong and double
extra strong pipe shall be furnished with plain ends.
(d) threads shall be in accordance with the American Standard Pipe Thread, cut so
as to make a tight joint when the pipe is tested at the mill to the specified internal hydrostatic
51.12–9 Inspection and rejection. Each length of pipe which develops injurious defects
P reSSure,
in shop working or application will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
51.12–10 Marking. The name and brand of the manufacturer, the words “wrought
iron” or approved abbreviation therefor, and the pressure in pounds at which it was tested
shall be legibly stenciled on each pipe.
SEAMLEss BRAss PIPE
Note: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation No. B 43–41. Certified material—Class B.
51.13-1 Scope. These specifications cover seamless muntz metal, high brass, admir
alty metal, and red brass pipe suitable for steam, water, compressed air, sanitary, and boiler
feed lines, and for similar purposes subject to temperatures not exceeding 406°F.
51.13–2 Process. The pipe shall be cold-drawn to size.
51.13–3 Temper. All pipe shall normally be furnished in the annealed condition.
The degree of anneal shall be sufficient to show complete recrystallization and to enable the
pipe to meet the test requirements.
51.13–4 Chemical composition. The material shall conform to the following re
quirements as to chemical composition:
Muntz metal High brass Admiralty metal Red brass
Copper, percent---------------------. 59.00 to 63.00 || 65. 00 to 68.00 || 70 00 to 73. 00 | 83.00 to 86.00

Lead, maximum percent--------------- 0. 50 0.80 0.075 0.06
Iron, maximum percent--------------- 0. 07 0. 07 0.06 0.05
Tin, percent---------------------- 0.90 to 1. 20 ! 0.15 maximum
---------------------------------
Zinc-------------------------------- Remainder Remainder Remainder Remainder
51.13–5 Sampling for chemical analysis. Drillings, millings, or clippings for analysis
shall be taken from pipe representing 0.5 percent of the shipment. Equal quantities shall
be taken from each pipe and thoroughly mixed together.
51.13–6 Expansion test. Annealed pipe shall stand an expansion of 25 percent of the
. diameter without cracking, when expanded by a tapered pin having a 60° included
51.13–7 Strain test. A test specimen 6 inches in length shall stand, without cracking
8.Ingle.
g
immersion for 15 minutes in an aqueous mercurous nitrate solution containing 100 grams 5:
mercurous nitrate and 13 milliliters of nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.42) per liter of solution.
51.13–8 Threading test. The pipe shall stand threading in a satisfactory manner.
51.13–9 Bending properties. In the case of pipe required for bending, annealed full
sections of the pipe shall stand being bent cold through 180° around a pin the diameter
of which is one and one-half times the inside diameter of the pipe, without cracking on the
outside of the bent portion.
51.13–10 Hydrostatic test. Each length of pipe shall stand, without showing weakness
or defects, an internal hydrostatic pressure sufficient to subject the material to a fiber stress
of 7,000 psi., determined by the following formula for thin hollow cylinders under tension.
No pipe shall be tested beyond 1,000 psi. unless so specified.
2St
P= D
Where
P=test pressure in psi.,
t=thickness of wall in inches,
D=outside diameter of pipe in inches, and
S=7,000.
(F–44)
51.13–11 Number of tests. A sufficient number of pipes for purpose of tests shall be
taken at random to constitute 0.5 percent of the shipment. One expansion test and one
strain test shall be made on each pipe so selected.
51.13–12 Workmanship. The pipe shall be commercially round and shall be free from
cracks, slivers, scale, and other surface defects.
51.13–13 Finish. All pipes shall be bright annealed or acid cleaned after final
annealing.
51.13–14 Rejection. (a) If a specimen of piping fails to meet the requirements of
sections 51.13–6 to 51.13–10, inclusive, two additional specimens may be taken, but both
of these specimens shall conform to these requirements, otherwise the pipe will be rejected.
(b) Pipes that show nonuniform annealing under handling shall be rejected from the lot.
SEAMLEss CoPPER PIPE
Nors: In substantial agreement with A.S.T. M. Designation B 42-ſit. Certified material—class B.
51.14-1 Scope. These specifications cover seamless copper tubing and seamless copper
pipe in all standard pipe sizes to be used at temperatures not exceeding 406°F. This material
is suitable for boiler-feed lines, blow-off lines, compressed air lines, salt and fresh water lines,
and for saturated steam lines for pressures not exceeding,180 pounds per square inch gauge
pressure. The pipe shall be commercially round and shall be free from cracks, seams, slivers,
scale, and other surface defects.
51.14–2 Process. The pipe shall be cold-drawn to size.
51.14–3 Condition or temper. (a) All pipe shall be normally furnished in the hard
drawn condition.
(b) When pipe is required for bending, the pipe shall be furnished with a proper bending
temper.
51.14–4 Chemical composition. The copper shall conform to the following require
Copper, minimum percent--------------------- 99.90
Phosphorous, maximum percent---------------- 0. 040
1 Silver counting as copper.
51.14–5 Sampling for chemical analysis. Drillings, millings, or clippings for analysis
shall be taken from pipe representing 0.5 percent of the shipment. Equal quantities shall
be taken from each pipe and thoroughly mixed.
51.14–6 Expansion test. Annealed pipe selected for test shall withstand an expansion of
25 percent of the inside diameter when expanded by a tapered pin having a 60° included angle.
51.14–7 Bending properties. In the case of pipe required for bending, annealed full
sections of the pipe shall stand being bent cold through 180° around a pin the diameter of
which is one and one-half times the inside diameter of the pipe, without cracking on the
outside of the bent portion. This test shall be made in addition to the expansion test speci
fied in section 51.14–6 and shall apply only to sizes 2 inches and under in outside diameter.
51.14–8 Microscopic examination. #. pipe shall be made from copper that is free
from cuprous oxide as determined by microscopic examination at a 75X magnification.
51.14—9 Hydrostatic test. Each length of pipe shall stand, without showing weakness
or defects, an internal hydrostatic pressure sufficient to subject the material to a fiber stress
of 6,000 psi. determined by the following formula for thin hollow cylinders under tension.
No pipe shall be tested beyond a hydrostatic pressure of 1,000 psi. unless so specified.
2St
P=#
Where
P=pressure in pounds per square inch,
t=thickness of pipe wall in inches,
D=outside diameter of the pipe in inches, and
S=allowable unit stress of the material, 6,000 psi.
51.14–10 Number of tests. (a) A sufficient number of pipes for purpose of tests shall
be taken at random to constitute 0.5 percent of the shipment. One expansion test shall be
made on each pipe so selected.
(b) If any specimen fails to conform to the requirements of sections 51.14–6 to 51.14–9,
inclusive, two additional specimens may be taken, each of which shall conform to the require
ments specified.
619428°–45—4 (F–45)
-- STEEL ForgiNgs
Nors: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations A 105-40 and A 182–40. Certified material–Class B.
51.15-1 Scope. (a) These specifications cover forged or rolled steel pipe flanges,
forged fittings, and valves and parts for high-temperature service. (Note). The term “forg
ings” used in these specifications shall be understood to cover one or all of the products
mentioned above, either forged or rolled. -
(b) Three grades of material are covered, designated grades A, B, and F1, respectively,
and are classified in accordance with their chemical and physical properties as specified in
sections 51.15–6 and 51.15–7 (a). - -
(c) Grades A and B material are suitable for use in connection with temperatures up
to and including 850° F. Grade F1 material is suitable for use in connection with tempera
tures up to and including 1,000°F.
51.15–2 Process. The steel may be made by the electric-furnace, open-hearth, or
other approved process.
51.15-3 Discard. A sufficient discard shall be made from each ingot to secure freedom
from injurious piping and undue segregation. In the case of F1 steel, it shall have a homo
geneous structure as shown by the macro-etch test in section 51.15–12.
51.15–4 Manufacturing practice. (a) Material for forgings shall consist of blooms,
billets, slabs, or bars either forged or rolled from an ingot, and cut to the required length by a
process that will not produce injurious defects in the forging.
(b) Forging or rolling operations may be performed either by hammering, pressing,
rolling, extruding, or upsetting. Forgings shall be brought as nearly as practicable to the
finished shape and size by hot working and shall be so processed as to cause metal flow during
the hot-working operation in the direction most favorable for resisting the stresses encoun
tered in service.
51.15-5 Heat treatment. (a) All forgings shall receive a heat treatment proper to
their design and chemical composition.
(b) Heat treatment shall be performed before machining except in instances where
reheat-treating is necessary.
(c) The steels may be full annealed, normalized, full annealed and normalized, or full
annealed and normalized followed by tempering.
(d) Full annealing. The procedure for full annealing shall consist in allowing the forg
ings, immediately after forging or rolling, to cool to a temperature below the critical range,
under suitable conditions to prevent injuries by too rapid cooling. They shall then be uni
formly reheated to the proper temperature and for the required time to refine the grain, and
cooled slowly thereafter in the furnace or in lime. The forgings shall not be removed from
the furnace or the lime until a metal temperature of approximately 500°F. has been attained.
(e) Normalizing. The procedure for normalizing shall consist in allowing the forgings,
immediately after forging or rolling, to cool to a temperature below the critical range, under
suitable conditions to prevent injuries by too rapid cooling. They shall then be uniformly
reheated to the F.P. temperature ...' held there a sufficient time to refine the grain (a
group thus reheated being known as a “normalizing charge”), followed by cooling in still
air at room temperature.
(f) Tempering or drawing. The procedure for tempering or drawing shall consist in
reheating the forgings to a temperature at least 100°F. above the temperature to be encoun
tered in service, but in no case shall the drawing temperature be lower than 850°F. The ma
terial shall be held at the required temperature for not less than 1 hour per inch of thickness
at the thickest section, followed by cooling in the furnace or in still air.
51.15–6 Chemical composition. The steels shall conform to the following requirements
Grades A and B Grade F1
Carbon, percent---------------------------- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (1) 0.35

Manganese, maximum, percent---------------------------------------- 0. 90 0.30 to 0. 80
Phosphorous, maximum, percent-------------------------------------- 0. 05 0. 04
Sulphur, maximum, percent------------------------------------------- 0.05 0.05
Silicon, percent------------------------------------------------------|------------ 0. 20 to 0. 50
Molybdenum, percent------------------------------------------------|------------ 0.40 to 0. 60
! When flanges will be subject to fusion welding, the carbon content shall not exceed 0.35 percent. When the carbon is restricted to 0.35
percent, maximum, it may be necessary to add silicon to the composition for grade B and for the heavier thicknesses of grade A flanges in order
to meet the required tensile properties. The silicon content shall not exceed 0.30 percent.
(F-46)
51.15-7 Tensile properties. (a) The material shall conform to the following require
h
Grade A Grade B Grade F1
Tensile strength, minimum, psi----------------------------------- 60,000 70,000 70,000

Yield point, minimum, psi--------------------------------------- 30, 000 36,000 45,000
Elongation in 2 inches, minimum percent-------------------------- 25 22 25
Reduction of area, minimum percent------------------------------ 38 30 35
the testing machine, or by the use of dividers at a crosshead speed not to exceed 9% inch
per minute. Where a definite yield point is not exhibited, in the case of F1 steel, the yield
strength corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of 0.2 percent of the gage length of
the specimen shall be used instead. The “offset method” of determining yield strength as
described in the Tentative Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials (A. S. T. M.
Designation: E 8) of the American Society for Testing Materials, shall be followed. The
tensile strength shall be determined at a speed of head not to exceed 1% inches per minute.
(c) The yield strength, where given shall be determined by an extensometer reading
to 0.0002 inch. The extensometer shall be attached to the specimen at the gage marks
and not to the shoulders of the specimen nor to any part of the testing machine.
51.15-8. Hydrostatic tests. Valve bodies or fittings and other pressure containing
arts º: tested after machining to the hydrostatic test pressures specified in tables
–10 and P-11.
51.15–9 Test specimens. (a) The tension test specimens taken from the forgings,
billets, or bars shall be machined to the form and dimensions shown in figure M-2 except
as specified in paragraph (b).
(b) In the case of small sections which will not permit of taking the standard test
specimen specified in paragraph (a), the tension test specimen shall be as large as feasible
and its dimensions shall be proportional to those shown in figure M-2. The gage length for
measuring elongation shall be four times the diameter of the specimen.
(c) For purposes of tests, the necessary extra forgings or test, bars shall be provided.
The test specimen if cut from a flange shall be cut tangentially from the flange portion approx
imately midway between the inner and outer surfaces and approximately midway between
the front and back faces. When it is impracticable to j}. extra forgings for test pur
poses, test bars may be made from the billet or bar, provided they are given approximately
the same reduction and heat treatment as the forgings.
51.15–10 Number of tests. (a) One tension test at room temperature shall be made
from each melt in each heat-treatment charge.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining, it may be discarded and another
specimen substituted from the same melt and heat-treatment charge.
(c) If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than that prescribed
in section 51.15–7 (a) and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of the
gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a
51.15–11 Retests. If any of the results of the physical tests of any test lot do not
conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer may re-treat such lots but not more
than twice and retests shall be made as in section 51.15–10 (a).
51.15–12 Macro-etch tests. In case of question as to the soundness of material in any
lot of forgings and its suitability for the intended service, a macro-etching test shall be made
for each i. present in the lot. Etching tests shall show sound and reasonably uniform
material, free from injurious laminations, cracks, segregations, and similar objectionable
defects. If on successive tests 10 percent of any melt fail to pass the requirements of the
macro-etch test, all forgings from that melt shall be rejected.
51.15–13 Workmanship and finish. (a) The forgings shall conform to the sizes and
shapes specified.
(b) They shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
51.15–14 Marking. Valves, flanges and fittings shall be marked as required by
section 55.19–3 (s) of this chapter.
(F–47)
(51.16–1] MLARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
ALLOY-STEEL BoLTING MATERIAL

Note: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 96-39. Certified material—Class B.
51.16–1 Scope. This specification covers alloy-steel bolting material for boiler and
pressure vessel parts or attachments, valves, flanges, and fittings for high-temperature
service to 1,000°F.
Three grades of material are covered, viz: A, B, and C, according to the chemical and
physical properties hereinafter specified. Any alloy conforming to these requirements
shall be acceptable.
51.16–2 Process. The steel shall be made by one or more of the following processes:
Open hearth, electric furnace, or crucible.
51.16–3 Heat treatment. (a) Heat treatment shall consist of quenching and tempering.
(b) Immediately after rolling or forging, the bolting material shall be allowed to cool
to a temperature below the critical range under suitable conditions to prevent injury by
too rapid cooling. For quenching and tempering, the material shall then be uniformly
reheated to the proper temperature to refine the grain, and quenched in some medium under
substantially uniform conditions for each quenching charge. The material shall then be
uniformly reheated to the proper temperature for tempering or “drawing back” and allowed
to cool uniformly.
51.16–4 Chemical composition.
Phosphorus, percent-------------------------------------- TNot over 0.045
Sulphur, percent----------------------------------------- Not over 0.05
NotE: It is recommended that the carbon content shall not be less than 0.20 nor more than 0.45 percent, and that the carbon ranges shall
be 0.10 percent of carbon.
51.16–5 Tensile properties. The bolting material, after final heat treatment, shall
conform to the following requirements as to minimum tensile properties:
Diameter in inches Grade A Grade B Grade C
2% and under, tensile strength---------------------- lbs. per sq. in -- 95,000 || 105,000 125,000
Yield point----------------------------------- lbs. per sq. in-- 70,000 80,000 105,000
Elongation in 2 inches------------------------------percent-- 20 20 16
Reduction of area---------------------------------- percent-- 50 50 50
Over 2% to 4, inclusive, tensile strength-------------- lbs. per sq. in-- 90, 000 100, 000 115,000
Yield point----------------------------------- lbs. per sq. in-- 65,000 75,000 95,000
Elongation in 2 inches------------------------------- percent-- 20 20 16
Over 4 to 7, inclusive, tensile strength--------------- lbs. per sq. in-- 90, 000 100,000 110, 000
Yield point-----------------------------------lbs. per sq. in-- 65,000 75,000 85,000
Elongation in 2 inches-------------------------------percent-- 20 20 16
51.16–6 Brinell hardness test. The bolting material, after final heat treatment,
shall conform to the following requirements: Brinell
rtºne
hardness
numbers
Grade A------------------------------------------------------- 190–250
Grade B------------------------------------------------------- 210–270
Grade C------------------------------------------------------- 260–320
51.16–7 Workmanship and finish. The bolting material shall be free from injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
51.16–8 Nuts and washers. Bolts and studs shall be equipped with nuts conforming
to the Standard Specifications for Carbon- and Alloy-Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Tem
perature Service to 1,000°F. as specified in sections 51.16a–1 to 51.16a–9. If washers are
used under nuts they shall be of forged or rolled steel. All washers shall be free from
injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
CARBON AND ALLOY-STEEL NUTS FoR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation. A 194-40. Certified material–Class B.
51.16a–1 Scope. (a) These specifications cover steel nuts for bolts used in high
temperature service up to 1,000°F.
(F–48)
MATERLALS [51.16a–9]
(b) Four classes of material are covered:

Class 1 for service temperatures not exceeding 750°F.
Classes 2 and 2H for service temperatures not exceeding 850° F.
Class 4 for service temperatures up to and including 1,000°F.
51.16a–2 Process. The steel shall be made by one or more of the following processes:
open-hearth, eleetric-furnace, or acid-bessemer.
51.16a–3 Fabrication. , (a) Classes 1 and 2 nuts shall be made by the hot-forged or
cold processes, or machined from hot-forged or hot-rolled bars.
(b) Classes 2H and 4 nuts shall be made by the hot-forged or cold processes, or machined
from hot-forged or hot-rolled bars and shall be heat treated to meet the required physical
properties. These classes of nuts shall be quenched and drawn at a temperature at least
100°F. above the service temperature, but in no case less than 850°F. for class 2H and not
less than 1,100°F. for class 4 nuts.
51.16a–4 Stress relieving. (a) Before tapping, all nuts made by the cold process
shall be heated in the process of manufacturing to a temperature of at least 1,000°F.
(b) Nuts made by the hot process or from hot-forged or hot-rolled bars need not be
subjected to this stress relieving.
51.16a–5 Chemical composition. Nuts shall conform to the following requirements
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTs
Classes 2 and
Class 1 *# an Class 4
Carbon, percent------------- 1 0 15 1 0, 40 0.40 to

- - - -- -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0. 50
Manganese, percent-----------------------------------------|----------|---------- 0. 50 to 0.95
Phosphorus, maximum percent-------------------------------- 0.05 0.05 || 0.04
Sulphur, maximum percent---- 0.05 0.05 || 0, 05 - - - -
Silicon, percent---------------------------------------------|----------|---------- 10 15
Molybdenum, percent------------ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10. 20
1 Minimum.
51.16a–6 Hardness test. Samples of each class of nuts shall show the Brinell hardness
specified below: (1) In the finished condition; (2) after the sample has been subjected for
24 hours to a temperature of 850°F. for class 1, 1,000°F. for classes 2 and 2H, and 1,100°F.
for class 4, and then cooled slowly:
BRINELL HARDNEss
Sample nut after

Class - Aniºmyº,
le nut
S
1 ---------------------------------------------------------------- 120 120

2 ---------------------------------------------------------------- 160 160
2H---------------------------------------------------------------- 248 to 352 180
4 ---------------------------------------------------------------- 248 to 352 200
51.16a–7 Drift test. Classes 2H and 4 nuts when machined from bar stock and all
other classes of nuts shall be capable of meeting the following drift test: A conical mandrel,
art of which has a diameter equal to the nominal nut size, shall be forced through the tapped
ole to the nominal nut size, cold, without cracking the body of the nut. The test may be
continued until the nut is broken for the examination of the structure.
51.16a–8 Stripping test. Nuts of all classes shall be capable of meeting the following
stripping test: A nut shall be assembled on a piece of bolting material held in a tension
testing machine so that a load is applied to the nut. The threads in the nut shall not strip
when subjected to a stress equal to 130,000 º per square inch for class 1, and 150,000
pounds per square inch for classes 2, 2H, and 4 figured from the mean diameter of the bolt.
51.iča-9 Finish. (a) Nuts shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a
workmanlike finish.
(F–49)
(b) Nuts shall be semifinished, hexagonal in shape and in accordance with the dimen
sions for the Regular or Heavy Series of the American Standard for Wrench-Head Bolts
and Nuts and Wrench Openings (ASA No.: B 18.2–1933).
(c) Nuts for use with alloy-steel bolts or bolt studs shall be threaded, unless otherwise
specified, in accordance with à. American Standard for Screw Threads (ASA No.: B 1.1–
1935); sizes 1 inch and smaller in diameter with the Coarse-Thread Series, and 1% inch and
larger in diameter with the 8-Pitch Thread Series.
STEEL CASTINGs
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations A 95-41 and A 157–41. Certified material–Class B.
51.17–1 Scope. These specifications cover steel castings for valves, flanges, fittings,
or other pressure containing parts, of carbon-steel for service temperatures up to and includ
ing 850°F. and carbon-molybdenum alloy steel for service temperatures to 1,000°F.
51.17–2 Process. The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, electric-furnace, or
crucible process.
51.17–3 Heat treatment. (a) All castings shall receive a heat treatment proper to
their design and chemical composition.
(b) Heat treatment shall consist of full annealing or of normalizing, or of normalizing
followed by full annealing, or of normalizing followed by drawing to a temperature below
the critical range. No castings which have been quenched in any liquid medium shall be
offered under these specifications.
(c) Full annealing. The procedure for full annealing shall consist in allowing the
castings to cool, after pouring, to a temperature below the critical range, reheating to the
proper temperature and for the required time to refine the grain, and cooling thereafter
slowly in the furnace. The castings shall not be removed from the furnace until the pyrom
eter shows that the furnace has fallen to a temperature below 500°F. (260° C.)
(d) Normalizing. The procedure for normalizing shall consist in allowing the cast
ings to cool, after pouring, to a temperature below the critical range, reheating to the proper
temperature and for the required time to refine the grain, and cooling in still air at room
temperature.
(e) Drawing or tempering. The procedure for drawing, or tempering, shall consist in
reheating the castings to a temperature at least 150°F. (85°C.) above the temperature to
be encountered in service, and holding at that temperature not less than 1% hours per inch
or less of section, followed by cooling in the furnace or in still air. When castings are used
for service at temperatures under 750° F., the minimum draw temperature shall be 800° F.
51.17–4 Chemical composition. The steel shall conform to the following requirements
as to the chemical composition:
Carbon steel cartºººn
Carbon percent-------------------------------- 0.15 to 0.45--------------------- 0.35 maximum.

Manganese percent---------------------------- 0.50 minimum------------------ 1.00 maximum.
Phosphorus percent---------------------------- 0.05 maximum------------------ 0.05 maximum.
Sulphur percent------------------------------- 0.06 maximum------------------ 0.06 maximum.
Silicon percent-------------------------------- 0.20 minimum- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0.20 minimum.
Molybdenum percent--------------------------|-------------------------------- 0.40 minimum.
51.17–5 Tensile properties. (a) Steel used for the castings shall conform to the follow
ing requirements as to tensile properties:
Carbon mo
Carbon steel lybdenum
alloy steel C1
Tensile strength, minimum psi---------------------------------------------- 70,000 70,000

Yield point, minimum psi- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36,000 45,000
Elongation 2 inches, minimum percent--------------------------------------- 22 22
Reduction of area, minimum percent-------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - - - - - - 30 35
(b). The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the beam or halt in the gage of
the testing machine, or by the use of dividers, at a crosshead speed not to exceed 4 inch per
minute. ere a definite yield point is not exhibited, the º
strength corresponding to
a limiting permanent offset of 0.2 percent of the º length of the specimen shall be used
instead. The “offset method” of determining yield strength as described in the Tentative
Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials (A. S. T. M. Designation: E-8) of
the American Society for Testing Materials shall be followed. The tensile strength shall be
determined at a speed of head not to exceed 1% inches per minute. *
51.17–6 Bending properties. The test specimens shall stand being bent cold through
an angle of 90° around a pin 1 inch in diameter without cracking on the outside of the bent
portion.
51.17–7 Hydrostatic tests. Each casting shall be tested after machining to the hydro
static pressure specified in table P-10 or P-11 and shall show no leaks.
51.17–8 Test specimens. (a) For castings having a net weight of not over 500
pounds, tension test specimens and, when specified, bend test specimens shall be taken from
test bars attached to special blocks. For castings having a net weight over 500 pounds, the
test specimens shall be taken from test bars attached to the castings where practicable. If
the design of the casting is such that test bars should not be attached to the castings, the test
bars shall be cast attached to special blocks. Test bars from which tension and bend test
specimens are to be taken shall remain attached to the castings or blocks they represent until
presented for inspection, and shall be heat-treated with the castings. Test bars shall be
provided in sufficient numbers to furnish specimens for the tests required in section 51.17–9.
b (b) Tension test specimens may be cut from heat-treated castings instead of from test
ars. º
(c) Tension test specimens shall be machined to the form and dimensions shown in
figure M-2.
(d) Bend test specimens shall be machined to 1 by }} inch in section with the corners
rounded to a radius not over }ſs inch.
51.17–9. Number of tests. (a) One tension test and one bend test shall be made from
each melt in each heat-treatment charge and from each casting weighing 500 pounds net or
OVer.
carded, and another specimen substituted from the same lot.
in section 51.17–5 (a) and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center of the
gage length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall be allowed.
51.17–10 Retests. (a) If the results of the physical tests for any lot do not conform
to the requirements specified such lot may be re-heat-treated, but not more than twice
Retests shall be made as specified in sections 51.17–5 and 51.17–6.
51.17–11 Workmanship. (a) The castings shall conform substantially to the shapes
and sizes indicated by the patterns and drawings submitted by the purchaser.
51.17–12 Finish. (a) The castings shall be clean and free from injurious defects.
(b) The castings shall not be peened or plugged to stop leaks.
(c) Repair by welding. Defects which do not impair the strength of the castings may be
welded by an approved process. The defects shall be cleaned out to solid metal, before
welding, and, when so required by the inspector, the castings in this condition shall be sub
mitted to him for his approval. castings shall be heat-treated after welding in accordance
with the requirements specified in section 51.17–3, except that with permission of the in
spector, castings with minor welds need only be drawn or tempered. In the case of major
repair welds, the inspector may require examination after reannealing with X-rays or gamma
rays to show the adequacy of the repair, the cost of X-raying or gamma-raying to be borne
by the manufacturer, notice of such to be given at the time permission is granted to weld.
51.17–13 Marking. Valves, flanges and fittings shall be marked as required by
section 55.19–3 (s) of this chapter.
GRAY IRoN CASTINGs For WALVES, FLANGEs, AND PIPE FITTINGs
NoTE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation. A 126–40. Certified material–Class B.
51.18—1 Scope. These specifications cover the following three grades of gray iron for
castings such as valve bodies, fittings, flanges, including parts to be assembled into valves.
(F–51)
[51.18—2] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
manufactured in advance and supplied for sale from stock by the manufacturer, jobber, or
other dealer:
Grade A–Regular gray iron.
Grade B-Hºrsth gray iron including the so-called semisteels used in valves and
Ings.
Grade C–High-test cast iron, whether regular or alloy composition.
51.18-2 Process. The iron shall be made by the cupola, air-furnace, electric-furnace,
or other approved process. The iron shall be produced under regular chemical and physical
control and shall be gray iron of high quality.
51.18–3 Chemical composition. Big taken from test ingots, broken test speci
mens, or from castings shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composi
tion:
Phosphorus, max., percent------------------------------------------ 0.75
Sulphur, max., percent--------------------------------------------- 0. 12
51.18–4 Tensile properties. (a) The tension test specimen shall conform to the follow
ing requirements as to tensile strength:
Tensile strength, minimum, psi----------------------------------- 21, 000 31, 000 41,000
(b) After reaching a stress of 15,000 pounds per square inch, the speed of the cross
head of the testing machine shall not exceed # i. per minute.
51.18—5 Transverse test. (a) The transverse test shall be optional. When transverse
tests are made, the transverse test specimen, when placed horizontally upon supports 12
inches apart and tested under a centrally applied load shall conform to the following require
ments:
Load at center, minimum, pounds-------------------------------- 2, 200 3,300 4,000

Deflection at center, minimum, inches----------------------------- 0. 10 0. 12 0. 12
(b) The rate of application of the load shall be such that a central deflection of 0.10
inch is produced in from 20 to 40 seconds.
(c) In case the transverse test specimen varies from the specified diameter of 1.20 inches,
a correction factor conforming to the following shall be applied: Correction
e
Diameter of transverse test specimen (inches): factor
1.10 . 770
. . 791
. 813
. 835
. 857
. 880
. 903
. 927
. 951
. 975
. 000
. 025
. 051
. 077
. . 103
. 130
. 158
1. 185
51.18–6 Mold. One mold containing one or more tension test specimens and, when
desired, one transverse test specimen shall be poured at least twice a day from each melt
from which castings are made under these specifications. The molds for these test speci
(F-52)
MATERIALS . [51.19–3]
mens shall be made from plate pattern, on a standard molding machine if possible, from the
same lot of sand and in the same general way as that in which molds for the castings are
made. . Each specimen shall be marked to show cupola or furnace number, date, and hour
when the mold is poured by either casting in the mold or stamping the specimens as soon as
possible after shaking out.
ſ
/
/
O /~
*/3
s &/º
5 *&
%/$ u.s. statutoARD
o /S THREAD.
|- # —l. 5# Iº.
| #
FIG. M-6.—Standard form of test specimen required for tension tests of gray iron casting material.
NotE.-The numbering on the test specimen shown in figure M-6 is intended simply to illustrate a method of designation. In the par
ticular method shown, 12/8 refers to December 8, B1 is the cupola number, and the numeral 1 which follows shows the hour cast.(1 p.m.)
51.18–7 Test specimens. Tension test specimens shall conform to the dimensions
shown in figure M-6, shall be reasonably smooth and round at breaking section, and shall be
tested without machining except that the enlarged ends shall be threaded (1% inches U. S.
standard threads are recommended). The cross-sectional area at the breaking section
shall be within plus or minus 5 percent of 1 square inch and the ultimate stress shall be cal
culated on the minimum cross-section.
51.18–8 Tension test apparatus. Ball and socket specimen holders or spherical-seated
bearings or other device which will insure that the specimen, when under load, will be as
nearly as possible in pure axial tension without transverse stress shall be used in making the
tension test.
51.18-9. Records. Records of the chemical composition of the iron and physical
properties of the test specimens shall be systematically made and maintained.
51.18–10 Workmanship and finish. The castings shall be sound, clean, free from sand,
of workmanlike finish, and soft enough to machine well.
51.18–11, Marking. Valves, flanges, and fittings shall be marked as required by sec
tion 55.19–3 (s) of this chapter.
MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGs
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. 8. T. M. Designation A 47–33. Certified material—Class B.
51.19-1, Material and scope. This specification covers malleable iron castings which
may be used for pipe fittings, valves, manifolds, connections, and miscellaneous appliances
for steam pressures not exceeding 250 pounds, and temperatures not exceeding 450°F., but
such castings shall not be used as pressure parts of boilers or pressure vessels. (Malleable
iron castings are designated as grade A and grade B.)
51.19-2 Process. (a) Grade A castings shall be made by the air-furnace, open hearth,
or electric furnace process.
(b) Irrespective of the process by which the castings are made they shall be free from
primary j. or what is known in the trade as a “frame” and the manufacturer shall
certify that no primary graphite is present in any part of the casting sections.
(c) Castings having a “frame” i. e., a hard surface shell shall be rejected.
Note: The normal structure of malleable iron consists of crystalline grains of ferrite throughout which are distributed small nodules of
temper carbon. At times, due to an incorrect annealing cycle, the castings will be surrounded by a more or less thick shell of metal in which
the carbon will be combined to form the constituent known as pearlite. As this constituent is much harder than ferrite, the shell of metal,
or “fraine” will be harder and more brittle than the core of metal it surrounds, and consequently less able to safely stand dynamic stresses.
51.19-3 Tensile properties. The tensile test specimens shall conform to the following
minimum requirements:
Tensile strength----------------------------------- lbs. per in -- 53,000 |
Yield point---------------------- ------------------------- o---- 35,000
Elongation in 2 inches----------------------------------- percent-- 18
51.19–4 Test specimens. The specimens shall be of the form shown in figure M-7.
§ºhº minimum diameter at the smallest section is less than 19/32 inch shall not
e accepted.
51.19–5 Number of tests. (a) A set of three tension-test specimens shall be cast
from each melt, without chills, using heavy risers of sufficient height to secure sound bars.
Each set of specimens so cast shall be annealed with the castings they represent.
(b) If the first specimen conforms to the specified requirements, or if, in the event of the
failure of the first specimen, the second and third specimens conform to the requirements, the
castings of the lot they represent shall be accepted, except that any casting may be rejected
if its test lug shows that it has not been properly annealed. If either the second or third
specimen fails to conform to the requirements, the entire lot of castings they represent shall
be rejected unless failure of one of the re-test specimens shall be due to a flaw, in which case
test specimens may, at the discretion of the inspector, be cut from castings in the lot for an
additional test.
51.19–6 Special tests. (a) All castings, if of sufficient size, shall have cast thereon test
lugs of a size proportional to the thickness of the casting, but not exceeding # inch, by
% inch in cross section. On castings which are 24 inches or over in length a test lug shall be
cast near each end. These lugs shall be attached to the casting at such a point that they will
not interfere with the assembling of the casting and shall be broken off by the inspector.
(b) If required by the inspector, a casting shall be tested to destruction. Such a casting
shall show good tough malleable iron.
51.19–7 Reannealing. Any castings rejected for insufficient annealing may be re
annealed once. The reannealed castings shall be inspected, and if the remaining test lugs, or
castings broken as specimens, show the castings to be thoroughly annealed, they shall be
accepted; if not, they shall be finally rejected.
51.19–8 Workmanship and finish. (a) The castings shall conform substantially to the
approved patterns or drawings, and also to gages which may be specified in individual cases,
The castings shall be made in a workmanlike manner. A variation of 94 inch per foot will
be permitted.
(b) The castings shall be free from injurious defects at surface or in any cross section.
51.19–9 Marking. Walves, flanges, and fittings shall be marked as required by section
55.19–3 (s) of this chapter.
51.19–10 Inspection and rejection. (a) The manufacturer shall be required to keep a
record of each melt from which castings are produced, showing tensile strength and elongation
of test specimens cast from such melts. These records shall be available and shown to the
inspector whenever required.
(b) Castings which show injurious defects subsequent to their acceptance at the manu
facturer's works may be rejected and, if rejected, the manufacturer shall be notified.
MALLEABLE IRoN CASTINGs For PIPE FITTINGs
NoTE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 197—39. Certified material—Class B.

51.19–11 Cupola malleable iron. This specification covers malleable iron for castings
such as flanges, pipe fittings, and valve parts, including parts to be assembled or manufactured
in advance and supplied from stock by the manufacturer, for pressures not exceeding 125
pounds, temperatures not exceeding 450° F., and diameters not exceeding 4 inches.
51.19–12 Grade B castings. Grade B castings may be manufactured by the cupola
process, and shall be produced under regular chemical and physical control.
51.19–13 Tensile properties. (a) The tensile test specimens shall conform to the
following requirements:
Tensile strength-----------------------------------lbs. per sq. in -- 40,000
Yield point----------------------------------------------- do---- 30,000
Elongation in 2 inches----------------------------------- percent-- 5.0
(b) The yield point shall be determined by the drop of the beam or the halt in the gage
of the testing machine.
(F–54)
51.19-14 Test specimens. (a) Tension test specimens shall be of the form and
dimensions as shown in figure M–7.
(b) Specimens whose mean diameter at the smallest section is less than 1%, inch shall
be discarded.
(c). Records. Manufacturers shall keep records of the chemical composition and physical
properties of the test specimens which shall be available to the inspectors.
7'4"
2á" 2#" 2#"
* EIWT
lºca-4:
Figure M-7–Standard form of test specimen required for tension tests of malleable casting material.
51.19-15. Requirements. The requirements of section 51.19–2 (b) relative to primary
graphite and “framed” castings shall apply to this process.
51.19-16 Workmanship and finish. (a) The castings shall conform substantially to
the approved patterns or drawings, and also to gages which may be specified in individual
cases. ...The castings shall be made in a workmanlike manner. A variation of 34 inch per
foot will be permitted. The castings shall be free from injurious surface or internal defects.
51.19–17 Marking. Valves, flanges, and fittings shall be marked as required by section
BRONZE CASTINGs
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designations B 62–41, B 61–41 and B 60–41. Certified material—Class B.
51.20–1. Materials and purposes. Three grades of castings shall be permissible, viz:
Grade A for pressure containing parts of valves and pipe fittings which are subjected
to working pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch or temperatures not exceeding 366°F.
Grade B for pressure containing parts of valves and pipe fittings, also boiler mountings,
expansion joints, and similar appliances which are subjected to steam pressures up to 300
pounds or temperatures not exceeding 450° F., and for hydraulic or compressed air service
at higher pressures where the temperature does not exceed 150°F.
Grade C for bolts, nuts ºplight-pressure vessels where comparatively great tensile
strength and resistance to saltwater corrosion are required.
51.20–2 Manufacture. (a) The alloy may be made by any approved method.
(b) The castings shall be of uniform quality.
51.20–3 Chemical composition. The alloy shall conform to the following requirements
CHEMICAL CoMPosition
Grade A Grade C
| - Grade B
Minimum | Desired Maximum Minimum | Desired Maximum
Copper, percent------------------- 84. 00 85.00 86. 00 1 86.5 86. 00 88. 00 89.00

Tin, percent---------------------- 4. 00 5. 00 6. 00 |5. 5 to 6.5 7. 50 8. 00 11. 00
Lead, percent-- 4. 00 5. 00 6.00 | 1.0 to 2.0 |_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ None 0.30
Zinc, percent--------------------- 4. 00 5. 00 6. 00 2 to 5 1. 50 4. 00 4. 50
Iron, percent---------------------|--------|-------- 0.25 * 0.25 --------|-------- 0.25
Nickel, percent-------------------|--------|-------- 1. 00 * 1.00 --------|-------- 1. 00
Phosphorus, percent---------------|--------|-------- 0.05 * 0.05 --------|-------- 0.05
1 Minimum. * Maximum.
51.20–4 Chemical analysis. The sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from
the test bars.
(F–55)
51.20-5 Tensile properties. (a) The alloy shall conform to the following require
ments as to tensile properties.
Tensile strength, minimum, pounds per square inch------------------ 30,000 34,000 38,000
Yield point, minimum pounds per square inch---------------------- 14,000 16,000 16,000
Elongation in 2 inches, minimum, percent-------------------------- 20 22 22
(b) The yield point in tension shall be determined as the stress producing an elongation
under load of 0.5 percent, that is, 0.01 inch in a gage length of 2 inches.
51.20–6 Test specimens. (a) The tension test specimen shall be machined from a
coupon to the form and dimensions shown in figure M-2.
(b) The coupon attached to the casting shall conform to the dimensions shown in figure
M–8 and it shall not be chilled. The fin gate along the side shall be not less than % inch
in thickness at any point along its length.
H 6 #" H r–
6" sº !-g"
J
l
N-I.
1
@
|- 1 3'- 24 —? - ?"—
-:
FIGURE M-8.-Standard form of test specimen coupon required for tension tests of bronze casting material,
51.20-7. Number of tests. (a) Each casting weighing 250 pounds or more shall have,
if practicable, at least one test coupon attached. The responsibility of furnishing sufficient
test specimens shall rest with the manufacturer.
(b) In the case of castings weighing less than 250 pounds each, at least one test coupon
shall, if practicable, be attached to one or more castings from each melt or from such groups
of melts as the inspector may specify, but in no case shall a group consist of more than 1,000
pounds of castings.
(c) In the case of castings where, in the opinion of the inspector it is impracticable to
attach a test coupon to the casting, bars shall be cast separately in sand. At least one test
bar shall be poured from each melt of metal, or such groups of melts as the inspector may
specify, but in no case shall a group consist of more than 1,000 pounds of castings. The bars
shall be cast from the first metal poured from the melt, and º: inspector shall witness the
pouring of the test mold.
(d) If any test specimen shows defective machining or reveals casting defects, it may be
discarded ...?replaced by another specimen selected by the inspector. If additional test
coupons are not available, the replacement specimen may be taken from the body of a cast
ing selected by the inspector to represent the lot.
51.20-8 Workmanship and Finish. (a) The castings shall be free from blow-holes,
porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects, or cracks, or other injurious defects and shall be
smooth and well cleaned, before inspection, by sand blasting, tumbling, chipping, or other
process approved by the inspector.
(b) #.
castings shall not be repaired, plugged, welded, or “burned in,” unless per
mission from the inspector has been previously secured. This permission will be given
only when the defects are such that after the approved repair the usefulness and strength
(F–56)
of the casting has not been impaired. Each such repair shall be encircled by a ring of white
paint at the time of shipment.
(c) All castings shall be true to pattern, free from swells, etc. Wall thickness shall be
uniform throughout the lot of castings and all cores shall be accurately set.
(d) Where thick and thin sections join, the manufacturer, shall be permitted to add
(where not previously provided) fillets of proper size to avoid cracking upon cooling, subject
to the approval of the inspector.
51.20–9 . Marking. Valves, flanges, and fittings shall be marked as required by section
51.20–10 Certification. Manufacturers are required to file certificates with the
Commandant that all castings intended for marine service will meet these specifications.
STEEL PLATEs (FLANGE AND FIREBox QUALITY)
NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 70-39. Certified material—Class B.
51.21-1 Scope. These specifications cover carbon-steel plates up to 4 inches inclusive,

in thickness; of flange and firebox qualities. This material is suitable for fusion welding.
51.21-2 Process. The steel shall be made by either or both of the following processes:
51.21–3 Heat treatment. (a) Plates over 2 inches in thickness, before being fabricated,
shall be uniformly heat treated to produce grain refinement. Heat treatment involving
quenching in a liquid medium is not permitted. If this treatment is not done at the rolling
mill the testing shall be carried out in accordance with (b).
(b) When a fabricator, who is properly equipped to perform the work, elects to do the
required heat treatment for grain refinement, he shall so indicate on his orders to the mill
and he shall accept the plates on the basis of the mill tests. The plate manufacturer shall
make the tests prescribed in these specifications, the tension and bend test specimens to
be prepared from full thickness pieces heat treated under conditions he considers appro
riate for grain refinement and to give the test requirements. The manufacturer shall
inform the fabricator of the procedure followed in treating the pieces at the mill for guid
ance in treating the plates. The required physical properties º be determined after heat
treatment of the plates on specimens prepared from pieces similarly and simultaneously
treated with the plates. Pieces for two tension tests, one top and one bottom, shall be
provided from each plate as rolled.
NotE.—The term “plate as rolled,” used here and in paragraphs 51.21–8 (c) and 51.21–9 (a), refers to the unit plate rolled from a slab or
directly from an ingot in its relation to the location and number of specimens; not to its condition.
51.21–4 Chemical Composition. The steel shall conform to the following require
– tº all Flange Firebox
nºoga
for plates 3% inch and under in thickness-----------------|----------
Carbon, max., percent; plates over 34 inch to 4 inches, inclusive, in thickness---|---------- 0.25
0.30
Manganese, maximum, percent----------------------------------- ----------- 0.80 0.80
Phosphorus, maximum, percent (j..…] §§ $3.5

Sulphur, maximum percent------------------------------------------------- 0.05 0.04
ºl
51.21-5 Tensile properties. (a) The material shall conform to the following require
Flange Firebox
Tensile strength, lb. per sq. in----------------------------------- 55,000–65, 000 55,000–65,000

Yield point, min. lb. per sq. in---------------------------------- 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. str.
- - - 1,500,000 1,550,000
Elongation in 8 in., min. percent-------------------------------- tens, str. tens, str.
Elongation in 2 in., min. percent--------------------------------

-> - -
1,700,000
tens. Str.
1,750,000
tens. Str.
(b) Tensile strength only need be determined on the tension test specimen taken from
the top of firebox plates, and it shall not exceed 70,000 lbs. per square inch.
(c) Should the rule in (a) for minimum elongation in 8 inches, for firebox steel give a
value of less than 25 percent, the minimum allowable elongation shall be 25 percent, subject
to the modifications of paragraph 51.21-6 (a).
51.21–6 Modifications in elongation. (a) For material over } to 2 inches, inclusive,
in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elongation in 8 inches, specified in para
graphs 51.21–5 (a) and (c) of 0.125 percent shall be made for each increase of #2 inch of the
specified thickness above 34 inch, to a minimum of 21 percent for flange steel and 22 percent
for firebox steel. -
(b) For material over 2% inches in thickness, a deduction from the percentage of elon
gation in 2 inches specified in paragraph 51.21–5 (a) of 0.5 percent shall be made for each
increase of 94 inch of the specified thickness, above 2% inches.
(c) For material #4 inch and under in thickness, the elongation shall be measured on a
gage length of twenty-four times the thickness of the specimen.
through 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion around a pin, the diam
eter of which shall have the following relation to the thickness of the specimen. When the
test is made on a specimen reduced in thickness, the rolled surface shall be on the outer
curve of the bend. The requirements for universal edge rolled plates apply only when such
plates are permitted for double butt-strap construction.
Ratio of pin diameter to
thickness of specimen
Sheared Universal Inill
plates plates
1 inch, and under------------------------------------------------------ 1 1%

Qver 1 to 1% inches, inclusive--- 1% 2%
Over 1% to 2 inches, inclusive--- 3
Over 2 to 3 inches, inclusive-------------------------------------------- 2 ------------
Over 3 to 4 inches, inclusive-------------------------------------------- 2%|------------
51.21–8 Test specimens. (a) For plates 2 inches and under in thickness, the test
specimens shall be prepared for testing from the material in its rolled condition.
(b) For plates over 2 inches in thickness, the test specimens shall be prepared from the
material in its heat-treated condition, or from full thickness samples sº and simulta
neously treated. (See section 51.21–3.)
(c) Tension test specimens for firebox steel shall be taken from the top and bottom
corners of the plate as rolled, parallel to its longitudinal axis, and for flange steel from the
bottom corner of the plate only. Bend test specimens shall be taken from the middle of the
top of
51.21–3.
* plate as rolled, at right angles to its longitudinal axis. (See note under section
- -
(d) For plates 2 inches and under in thickness, tension and bend test specimens shall
be the full thickness of the material and shall be machined to the form and thickness shown
(e) For plates over 2 inches in thickness, tension test specimens shall be machined to
the form .."dimensions shown in figure M-2, and the axis of each such specimen shall be
located midway between the center and the top or bottom surface of the plate. The bend
test specimen shall be at least 1% inches in width, with both edges parallel, and may be
reduced to 2 inches in thickness; but shall have one surface as rolled.
(f) The sides of the bend test specimens may have the corners rounded to a radius of
not over }{s inch for plates 2 inches and under in thickness, and to not over } inch for plates
over 2 inches in thickness. -
51.21–9 Number of tests. (a) Two tension and one bend test shall be made from
each firebox steel plate as rolled. One tension and one bend test shall be made from each
flange steel plate as rolled.
(F–58)
fied in section 51.21–5 and any part of the fracture is more than % inch from the center
of the gage length of a 2-inch specimen or is outside the middle third of the gage length
of an 8-inch specimen as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before test
ing, a retest shall be allowed.
51.21–10 Permissible variations in thickness and weight. No plate shall vary more
than 0.01 inch under the thickness specified.
51.21-11 Finish. The finished plates shall be free from injurious defects and shall
51.21–12 Marking. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the manufac
turer's test identification number, class, and lowest tensile strength specified shall be legibly
stamped on each finished plate in two places not less than 12 inches from the edges and on
each butt strap near the center line not less than 12 inches from each end. The manufac
turer's test identification number shall be legibly stamped on each test specimen.
(b) Plates shall be match-marked as defined in paragraph (c) so that the test specimens
representing them may be identified. When the plate j.
from a slab or ingot is cut
into two or more smaller plates, each shall be match-marked so that they may be identified
with the test specimens representing them.
(c) Each match-mark shall consist of two overlapping circles each not less than 1% inches
in *. placed upon the shear lines, and made by separate impressions of a single-circle
steel die.
(d) Match-marked º shall match with the sheets represented, and only those
which match properly shall be accepted.
51.21–13 Manufacturer’s certification. The manufacturer shall furnish the purchaser
with a certification for each order stating the manufacturer's number of the plate and the
chemical and physical properties as shown by the tests. Such material when furnished
for use in the construction of unfired pressure vessels designed for a maximum allowable
working pressure not exceeding 700 pounds per square inch and temperatures not exceeding
500°F. shall not be subject to inspection by a duly authorized inspector.
STEEL PLATEs For WELDING (FLANGE AND FIREBox QUALITY)

Note: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A89–39. Certified material–Class B.
51.22—1 Scope. These specifications cover two grades of carbon-steel plate of flange
and firebox qualities. . This material is suitable for fusion welding. It is also suitable for
forge welding when the requirements specified in section 51.22–3 (b) are applied. The
purchaser shall specify when material is to be used for forge welding.
Note: The term “forge welding” as used in these specifications refers to the process of heating with water gas, and hammering
mechanically, without the use of fluxes.
51.22—2 Process. The steel shall be made by either or both of the following processes:
open-hearth or electric-furnace. -
51.22—3 Chemical composition. (a) The steel shall conform to the requirements as
to chemical composition prescribed in table I.
(b) When these specifications are used for material that is to be forge welded, the
maximum quantity of either nickel or chromium shall not exceed 0.05 percent, and unless
otherwise specified, the silicon shall not exceed 0.05 percent.
51.22—4 Tensile properties. (a) The material shall conform to the requirements as
to tensile properties prescribed in table II. .
(b) Tensile strength only need be determined on the tension test specimen taken longi
tudinally from the top of firebox plates, and it shall not exceed 60,000 psi., for grade A,
nor 65,000 psi. for grade B.
(c) For material over } inch in thickness, a deduction from the percentages of elonga
tion in 8 inches prescribed in table II of 0.125 percent shall be made for each increase of
%, inch of the specified thickness above 3% inch.
(d) For material 4 inch and under in thickness, the elongation shall be measured on
a gage length of twenty-four times the thickness of the specimen.
(F–59)
TABLE 1.-CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTs
Flange Firebox
Grade A Grade B Grade A Grade B
Carbon maximum, percent:

For plates 3% inch and under in
thickness---------------------- 0, 15 0.20 0.15 0.20
For plates over 3% inch in thickness-- 0. 17 0.22 0. 17 0.22
Manganese, percent------------------- 0.35 to 0.60 || 0.35 to 0. 60 || 0.35 to 0, 60 || 0.35 to 0. 60
Phosphorus, maximum, percent:
cid---------------------------- 0.06 0.06 0.04 0.04
Basic--------------------------- 0.04 0.04 0.035 0.035
Sulphur, maximum, percent------------ 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04
TABLE 2.-TENSILE REQUIREMENTs º º
Flange Firebox º' ºn

—
Grade A Grade B Grade. A Grade B
Tensile strength, minimum pounds per

square inch------------------------ 45,000 50, 000 45,000 50,000
Yield point, minimum pounds per square ºf
inch------------------------------ 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. str. 0.5 tens. str. tº 0.5 tens. str.
But in no case less than----------- 24,000 27,000 24,000 ºf 27,000
ion in
Elongation in 8
8 inch
inches, minimum percent-
- - 1,tens.
500,000
Str. 1,tens.
500, Str.
000 1,tens.
550,000
Str. 1,tens.
550, Str.
000
Elongation in 2 inches, minimum percent- 1,600,000

tens. Str.
1, 600,000
tens. Str.
1, 650, 000
tens. Str.
1, 650, 000
tens. Str.
51.22–5 Bending Properties. The bend test specimen shall stand being bent cold
through 180° without cracking on the outside of the bent portion around a pin, the diameter
of which shall have the following relation to the thickness of the specimen:
Thickness of material:
* §gº;
oº: diameter
of
1 inch and under------------------------------------------------- 1

Over 1 inch------------------------------------------------------ 2
51.22-6 Test specimens. (a) Tension test specimens for firebox steel shall be taken from
the top and bottom corners of the plate as rolled, parallel to its longitudinal axis, and for
flange steel from the bottom corner of the plate §§.
Bend test specimens shall be taken
from the middle of the top of the plate as rolled, at right angles to its longitudinal axis.
(b) Tension and bend test specimens shall be the full thickness of the material as rolled,
except asSpººl in paragraph (c), and shall be machined to the form and dimensions shown
(c) For plates over 1% inches in thickness, tension test specimens may be machined to a
thickness or diameter of at least 3% inch for a length of at least 9 inches, or they may be
machined to the form and dimensions shown in figure M-2. The bend test specimens for
plates over 1% inches in thickness may be machined to a thickness of at least 3% inch or to
1 by }} inch in section.
(d) The sides of the bend test specimens may have the corners rounded to a radius not
over }ſs inch.
51.22–7 Number of tests. (a) Two tension tests and one bend test shall be made from
each firebox steel plate as rolled. One tension test and one bend test shall be made from
each flange steel plate as rolled.
fied in section 51.22–4 and any part of the fracture is more than three-fourths inch from the
center of the gage length of a 2-inch specimen or is outside the middle third of the gage length
(F–60)
of an 8-inch specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing,
a retest shall be allowed.
51.22—8 Permissible variations in thickness and weight. No plate shall vary more
than 0.01 inch under the thickness specified.
51.22–9 Finish. The finished plates shall be free from injurious defects and shall
51.22–10 Marking. (a) The name or brand of the manufacturer, the manufacturer's
test identification number, class, and lowest tensile strength for the grade specified in section
51.22—4 (a) shall be legibly stamped on each plate. The manufacturer's test identification
number shall be legibly stamped on each test specimen.
(b) Plates ... be match-marked as defined in paragraph (c) so that the test specimens
representing them may be identified. ... When the plate rolled from a slab or ingot is cut into
two or more smaller plates, each shall be match-marked so that they may all be identified
with the test specimens representing them.
(c) Each match-mark shall consist of two overlapping circles, each not less than 1% inches
in * placed upon the shear lines, and made by separate impressions of a single-circle
steel die.
(d) Match-marked coupons shall match with the sheets represented and only those
which match properly shall be accepted.
51.22–11 anufacturer’s certification. The manufacturer shall furnish the purchaser
with a certification for each order stating the manufacturer's number of the plate and the
chemical and physical properties as shown by the tests. Such material when furnished for
use in the construction of unfired pressure vessels designed for a maximum allowable working
pressure not exceeding 700 pounds per square inch and temperatures not exceeding 500°F.
shall not be subject to inspection by a duly authorized inspector.
619428°–45—5 (F–61)
PART 52—CONSTRUCTION
PROCEDURE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTs Sec.
Definitions. 52.8–4 Computations.
Drawings. 52.8–5 Detail requirements.
Computations.
Conditions for approval. TUBE SHEETS OF WATER-TUBE BOILERs
Appeals.
Affidavits of manufacturers. -
52.9–1 Definitions.
Certification required for duplicate boilers. 52.9–2 Computations for curved tube sheet.
Auxiliary, donkey, low-pressure and hot-water boilers. 52.9–3 Reinforcement of ligaments.
Materials and workmanship.
Inspection of boilers under construction. CoMBUstion CHAMBERs AND TUBE SHEETsor FIRE-TUBE
Boilers or pressure vessels of foreign vessels. BOILERs
52. 10–1 Definitions.
Foreign-built pressure vessels. 52. 10–2
Alternative materials or methods of construction. Materials.
Repairs, replacements, or alterations. 52. 10–3 Computations.
52. 10–4 Detail requirements.
Experimental determination of pressure rating.
Inspectors' decisions. FURNAcES AND FLUES
Boilers on barges.
Alternative procedures to govern new designs or methods Definitions.
of construction. Materials.
Computations.
CYLINDRICAL SHELLs Detail requirements.
Definitions. BOILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBEs
Computations and factors of safety. Definitions.
Seamless shells. Materials and workmanship.
Electric-resistance butt welded shells. Computations.
Cylindrical shells pierced for tubes. Detail requirements.
Externally fired boilers.
SUPERHEATERs, HEADERs, WATER WALLs, Economize Rs
SHELL Joints
Definitions.
Approved º: of joints. Drawings and specifications.
Materials.
Longitudinal riveted joints and computations. Computations.
Butt straps and computations. Detail requirements.
Circumſerential joints.
Welded joints. SAFETY WALVES AND RELIEF WALWEs
Definitions.
Dom Es AND STEAM CHIMNEYs
Design, material, and workmanship.
Definitions. Computations.
Materials and workmanship. Installation.
Computations. Detail requirements.
Steam chimney fittings. Marking of safety valves.
HEADS BOILER MOUNTINGS AND ATTACHMENTs

Definitions. Definitions.
Materials and workmanship. Materials and workmanship.
Computations. Main and auxiliary stop valves.
Manifolds.
OPENINGS AND REINFORCEMENTs Feed valves.
Blow-off valves.
Definitions. Dry pipes.
Detail requirements. Fusible plugs.
Materials and workmanship. Pressure gages.
Computations. 52. 15–11 Water indicators.
52.15–12 Salinometer cocks.
SURFACES REQUIRED TO BE STAYED OR REINFORCED
Evaporators, HEATERs, TRAPs, SEPARAtoRs, PRESSURE
52.7-1 Definitions. VEssels, AND MiscellANEous APPLIANCEs
52.7–2 Areas to be stayed.
52.7–3 Computations. Approval.
Definitions.
STAYS AND REINFORCEMENTs Materials and workmanship.
Computations.
52.8–1 Definitions. Bolting.
52.8–2 Materials. Detail requirements.
52.8–3 Workmanship. Safety valves for evaporators.
PROCEDURE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTs
Section 52.1–1 Definitions. Certain terms used in the various sections of this part
are hereby defined as follows: - -
(a) Main boiler is a steam boiler used for generating steam for propulsion purposes
on shipboard. - -
(b) Auxiliary boiler is a steam boiler used for all purposes on shipboard for which
steam may be required other than propulsion.
(c) Donkey boiler is a steam boiler installed on a vessel for occasional use for any
purpose for which steam is required other than propulsion.
(F–62)
CONSTRUCTION [52.1–4]
(d) Pressure vessel is an unfired vessel containing gases, vapors, or liquids under pressure.
Condenser shells and similar vessels subject to pressures not exceeding 30 pounds per square
inch and water vessels subject to temperatures not exceeding 180° F. are exempt from the
requirements of this part, provided such vessels are not used for the storage of noxious or
lethal gases. Vessels having diameters not exceeding 30 inches and subject to pressures
not in excess of 100 pounds, as specified in the Act of June 13, 1933 (48 Stat. 125; 46 U. S. C.
392, 406-412), are not considered pressure vessels within the meaning of the rules in this
subchapter. However, it is recommended, as a matter of safety, that the design and con
struction of such vessels shall be in accordance with the rules in this subchapter.
(e) Water-tube boiler is a steam boiler in which the boiler tubes contain water, and is
composed generally of drums, headers, and tubes.
(f) Internally fired fire-tube boiler is a steam boiler containing furnaces, one or more
combustion chambers and tubes or flues through which the products of combustion pass
from the furnace to the uptake. In such boilers no part of the shell is in contact with the
fire or products of combustion.
(g) Externally fired fire-tube or flue boiler is a steam boiler, part of the outer shell of
which is exposed to fire or to the products of combustion, and containing tubes or flues
throº which such products pass from the furnace to the uptake.
- (h) Factor of safety is the ratio of the ultimate strength of the material to the work
ing stress.
(i) Repair is the restoration of any damaged or impaired part to an effective and
safe condition.
(j) Alteration is a structural modification of or departure from an approved design or
existing construction. -
º Within the meaning of these rules, pressure refers to the gage pressure or the pres
sure above the º: in pounds per square inch. Design pressure is the theoretical
bursting pressure of the weakest part of a boiler, pressure vessel, or piping divided by its
factor of safety. The maximum allowable working pressure of a boiler .# its superheater
shall be considered as the highest setting of the safety valves on the drum.
52.1–2 Drawings. (a) Manufacturers intending to construct boilers, or other pressure
vessels consisting primarily of riveted, welded, or seamless shells, to be installed on vessels
subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard, shall submit to the Officer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, in whose district such boilers or pressure vessels are to be installed, duplicate
drawings in original form or prints which shall be fully descriptive of the boilers or pressure
vessels to be manufactured. These requirements also apply to the steam and water drums
of water-tube boilers.
(b) Manufacturers of water-tube boilers, or other types of F. vessels, or of pres
sure fittings or appliances, to be installed on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast
Guard, shall submit to the Commandant drawings either in original form or prints which
shall be fully descriptive of the boilers, pressure vessels, fittings, or appliances to be manu
factured. Such manufacturers shall also upon request furnish to the Commandant a tracing
of such drawings or a sufficient number of copies thereof for distribution by him to the offices
of all inspectors.
(c) The procedure specified in (a) and (b) shall apply also to proposed alterations.
52.1–3 Computations. It shall be the duty of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection,
upon receipt of drawings of a boiler or other pressure vessel, submitted to him for approval,
to have calculations made of each component part of such boiler or pressure vessel, usi
the formulas provided in the various sections of this part, and to make a record of .#
computations to be filed with said drawings. Such computations shall be headed with a
general description and identification of the boiler or pressure vessel. In making such com
putations, the minimum tensile strength of the specified range of the material shall be used.
52.1–4 . Conditions for approval. (a) The Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, shall
satisfy*: by examination of the drawings that the design is satisfactory in the following
particulars:
(1) That it conforms to all of the requirements of Parts 50 to 57, inclusive.
(2) That no feature thereof will produce unusual stresses which are not fully provided
for by proper material or construction.
(3) That manhole or other openings are adequate and so placed as to permit of easy
access to the interior for inspection or cleaning, and that no part of the interior construction
obstructs such openings.
(F–63)
(4) That each part is of sufficient strength for safe operation at the maximum working
pressure requested.
(5) That all joints are designed in accordance with good engineering practice.
(6) That the proposed water level is shown on the blueprint and conforms to the re
quirements of section 52.15–11.
(b) Upon ascertaining that the design of the boiler or pressure vessel complies with
all of the requirements herein specified, the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, shall
approve the drawings and record thereon the maximum allowable working pressure under
which the boiler or pressure vessel may be operated. He shall thereupon return one copy
to the manufacturer and file the other copy in his office with the record of computations.
If the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, is not satisfied that the design complies with
the specified requirements, he shall notify the manufacturer with a written statement, giving
his reasons for disapproval.
52.1–5 Appeals. In case the design is disapproved by the Officer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, the manufacturer may appeal to the District Coast Guard Officer of the district,
and should the District Coast Guard Officer sustain the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspec
tion, the manufacturer may appeal to the Commandant. The decision of the Commandant
shall be final.
52.1–6. Affidavits of manufacturers.'... (a) In requesting inspection of a new boiler or
}. vessel subject to inspection by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, manu
acturers shall file with such inspectors an affidavit duly executed on the approved form
applying thereto.
(b) Manufacturers of water-tube boilers, also manufacturers of other pressure vessels
or materials therefor, or fittings or appliances proposed for installation in conjunction there
with, on vessels subject to the jurisdiction º the Coast Guard, shall file at Headquarters
affidavits duly executed in approved form, certifying that such boilers, pressure vessels,
materials, fittings, or appliances will be manufactured in accordance with the requirements
of the rules in this .
52.1–7 Certification required for duplicate boilers. A manufacturer desiring to
construct any boiler or pressure vessel which is identical with a boiler or pressure vessel
previously approved by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, shall not be required to
resubmit drawings, but shall file with the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, a certificate
that the proposed boiler or pressure vessel conforms in every respect with drawings previously
approved. Such certificate shall contain the boiler or pressure vessel number, the drawing
number or numbers, and the date of approval. If, upon examination, the Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, ascertains that the said approved drawings meet the requirements speci
fied in section 52.1–4, the manufacture of such boiler or pressure vessel shall be authorized.
In case of disapproval of the request by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, the manu
facturer shall have the right of appeal, as specified in section 52.1–5.
52.1–8 Auxiliary, donkey, low-pressure and hot-water boilers. (a) All auxiliary and
donkey boilers shall be designed, constructed, installed, and inspected in accordance with the
... herein specified for main boilers, and shall be subject to the same initial pro
cedure and general requirements.
(b) Low-pressure steam boilers used exclusively for heating, and hot-water boilers
used exclusively for heating or for hot-water supply, the working pressure of which shall not
exceed 30 pounds per square inch, shall be of . types, designs, and construction as may be
in ºf by the Commandant. Boilers of this character, the working pressure of which
is to exceed 30 pounds per square inch, shall conform to the requirements specified in the
rules in this subchapter for pressure boilers.
52.1–9 Materials and workmanship. All materials to be used in any of the work
specified in the various sections of this part shall be free from injurious defects and shall
have a workmanlike finish. The construction work shall be executed in a workmanlike
manner with proper tools or appliances and shall be free from defects which would impair
strength or durability.
52.1–10 Inspection of boilers under construction. (a) When one or more boilers are
under construction manufacturers shall allow inspectors access to such boilers at such times
as the inspectors shall deem necessary, and it shall be the duty of such inspectors to deter
1 For typical forms of affidavits, see section 57.21–2.
(F–64)
CONSTRUCTION (52.1–16]
mine by actual observation or measurements that the boilers are being constructed in all
respects in accordance with the approved design and that the workmanship is good. The
inspectors shall make a record of the marks on the plates or furnaces which are being assembled
in the boilers, which record shall be filed with the computations referred to in section 52.1–3.
(b) Where boilers or pressure vessels are constructed in one inspection district for
installation on a vessel in another inspection district, the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspec
tion, in the former district shall, upon request of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection,
in the latter district, examine and report on such boilers or pressure vessels and ascertain
that the proper materials are being used, and that the workmanship is good. The inspectors'
report shall include a record of the markings on plates and furnaces and shall be filed with
the record of inspection in the district where the boilers or pressure vessels are to be installed.
52.1–11 Boilers or pressure vessels of foreign vessels. Boilers or pressure vessels of
foreign vessels admitted to American registry shall be inspected in the same manner as
boilers on American vessels. The hydrostatic test of such boilers or pressure vessels shall be
one and one-half times the maximum working pressure under which they have been operated
at the first United States inspection.
This working pressure shall be accepted as the basis for determining the maximum
allowable working pressure where it is not practicable or possible to secure a record of the
tests of the plates that entered into the construction of the boiler or pressure vessel. The
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, may reduce the working pressure if deemed necessa
after a close examination of the general conditions or design of the boiler or pressure .
52.1–12 Foreign-built pressure vessels. Where unfired pressure vessels or parts of
such pressure vessels are manufactured in foreign countries for installation on American
vessels, they shall be subject to the same inspection and tests as American-built pressure
vessels. Test specimens of the material marked in such manner as may be prescribed by the
Commandant to insure positive identification of the test specimen, with the shell or plate
from which it was detached, shall be submitted by the manufacturer, and such material shall
comply with all the requirements of part 51.
52.1–13 Alternative materials or methods of construction. If, in the development of
industrial arts, improved materials or methods of construction are developed, their use in
lieu of those specified will be given consideration upon formal application to }. Čommandant,
with full information as to their characteristics, together with such scientific data and
evidence as may be necessary to establish the suitability of such materials or methods of
construction for the purpose intended.
52.1–14 Repairs, replacements, or alterations. No repairs, replacements, or altera
tions, except emergency repairs, etc., shall be made to boilers, pressure vessels, their mount
ings or internal fittings, safety valves, piping systems, or pressure appliances without advance
approval by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection. In the case of vessels built subsequent
to the adoption of these rules, repairs, replacements, or alterations shall so far as practicable
be made with materials and in the manner specified for new construction. Boilers built and
installed prior to the adoption of these rules may be repaired with materials and in the
manner specified for new construction in the rules existing at the time the boilers were built,
except that the use of cast iron valves, mountings or attachments for repairs, replacements,
or alterations on existing boilers and steam lines operating at pressures exceeding 30 pounds
per square inch is prohibited. Emergency repairs, replacements, or alterations Jºli be
reported as soon as practicable to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the first
inspection district where the vessel may call after such repairs are made.
52.1–15 Experimental determination of pressure rating. Where approval is requested
for a boiler structure, pressure vessel or any part thereof which, due to its irregular form,
process of manufacture, or for any other reason, becomes a new or difficult subject of accurate
mathematical analysis, the Commandant may require a full-size specimen to be furnished
for the purpose of making any tests which he may consider necessary to determine a safe
and fair pressure rating for such pressure vessel or pressure part.
52.1–16 Inspectors’ decisions. When it becomes necessary for inspectors to make
decisions on certain matters covered by the rules in this subchapter, they shall in making
their report quote the section and paragraph number on ". their decision is based.
Whenever it is necessary to make decisions in matters not specifically covered by the rules
in this subchapter, they shall in making their report state clearly the reasons which caused
them to arrive at such decision.
(F–65)
52.1–17 Boilers on barges. Boilers on existing barges required to be inspected and

not built according to the specifications of the Commandant may be considered the same as
foreign-built boilers as specified in section 52.1–11, and treated as such.
52.1–18 Alternative procedures to govern new designs or methods of construction.
When new procedures, designs, or methods of construction are submitted for approval, the
Commandant is authorized to act regarding the approval or disapproval of such new develop
ments for which no rules have been provided.
CYLINDRICAL SHELLs
52.2–1 Definitions. (a) The term “cylindrical shell,” as used in the rules in this
subchapter means the thin, hollow cylinder forming the outer envelope of a boiler or other
pressure vessel, or of a drum which is a part of a boiler consisting of one or more plates prop
erly riveted, welded, or otherwise joined or of seamless construction as hereinafter specified.
(This does not include curved tube sheets for which see sections 52.9–1 to 52.9–3.)
(b) A course is a section of a cylindrical shell which comes between circumferential
joints.
52.2–2 Materials and workmanship. (a) The plates used shall be of marine boiler
steel conforming to the provisions of sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10, except, that cylindrical
shells of riveted construction not subject to the radiant heat of the fire and designed for
working pressures not exceeding 150 pounds per square inch may be constructed of steel
plates meeting the specifications of sections 51.21–1 to 51.21–13, and which are tested,
inspected, and stamped in accordance with section 51.1–1.
(b) Rivet holes shall be wholly and fairly drilled, preferably in position.
(c) The edges of all plates and straps of riveted joints shall be machined for calking and
shall be beveled to an angle of approximately 70° to łł. plane of the plate and burrs removed.
The material removed in machining the edges shall not be less than one-fourth of the thickness
of the plate and shall in no case be less than one-eighth of an inch.
52.2-3 Computations and factors of safety. (a) Cylindrical shells shall be in accordance
with the following relations of pressure and thickness, provided that shell plates for boilers
shall not be less than % inch thick. Where the thickness of the shell does not exceed 10 per
cent of the inside radius, Formula (1) shall be used; where the thickness exceeds 10 percent
of the inside radius Formula (2) may be used.
W_STE
T RF
(1)
W_SE (ſº-º) (2)

T F (R, +R”)
Where W-maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square inch.
S=minimum of the range of tensile strength of the shell material.
T=minimum thickness of the shell in inches.
R=inside radius of the shell in inches.
Re-outside radius of the shell in inches.
E=minimum efficiency of the longitudinal joint (or relative strength of ligament
between tube holes or other openings, whichever is least). (See paragraph
(b) and Sections 52.2–4 to 52.2–6 inclusive, 52.3–3, 52.8–4 (g), 52.9–2, 56.20–
4 (b), 56.20–6 (b), 56.20–7 (c) and 57.21–20.)
F=Factor of safety, which shall not be less than the following:
4.25 for steam or water drums of seamless steel pipe or electric-resistance
butt welded pipe not exceeding 18 inches in diameter not exposed to
fire or products of combustion, and for water drums of water tube
boilers, other than fusion-welded water drums.
4.5 for shells of the above-mentioned types, except water drums of water
tube boilers, which are exposed to fire or the products of combustion
whether bare or covered with heat-resisting material; also for fusion
welded drums for all purposes.
5.0 for shells of brazed construction.
(F–66)
CONSTRUCTION - [52.2–7]
6.0 for shells, the longitudinal joints of which are riveted lap construction.
10. 0 for cast steel for shells of unfired pressure vessels where the thickness is
not less than %s inch and does not exceed 2 inches.
12. 0 for cast iron for shells of unfired pressure vessels where the working
ressure does not exceed 30 pounds per square inch and the thickness
is not less than % inch.
(b) The efficiency factor E for riveted joints and for ligaments between tube holes or
other openings shall be calculated as set forth in Section 52.3–3(c). For other than riveted
joints, the applicable values of E listed below shall be used in the above formulas:
1.0 for seamless shells.
0.9 for Class I fusion-welded shells (Section 56.20–4), and for brazed unfired
ressure vessels (Sections 57.21–18 to 57.21–23, inclusive).
0.8 for Class II fusion-welded shells (Section 56.20–6).
0.7 for shells of electric-resistance butt welded pipe.
0.65 for Class III fusion-welded shells (Section 56.20–7) not less than % inch
thick where the longitudinal joint is of the double welded butt type.
0. 55 for Class III fusion-welded shells where the longitudinal joint is of the
single welded butt or double welded lap type.
52.2–4 Seamless shells. Shells may be of seamless construction with or without
integral heads, provided the material conforms to the requirements of sections 51.11–1 to
51.11–9 for seamless tubing. In such cases, the value of E in the formulas (1) and (2) shall
be taken as 1.0.
52.2–5 Electric-resistance butt welded shells. Shells not exceeding 18 inches in
diameter may be fabricated of electric-resistance butt welded pipe made of open-hearth or
electric-furnace steel, as specified in sections 51.11a–1 to 51.11a–19 or 51.11b-1 to 51.11b
19 of this chapter. The allowable working pressure and minimum thickness of the shells
shall be computed by Formulas (1) and (2), section 52.2–3, using 0.7 as the value of E.
Holes for tubes, º or other openings shall not be drilled in the weld.
52.2–6. Cylindrical shells pierced for tubes.” (a) Where cylindrical shells are pierced
by a single line of tubes, or by two or more lines well apart, the maximum allowable working
É. and minimum thickness shall be determined by formulas (1) and (2). For tube
ines other than those placed on the longitudinal joint, the shell shall, if necessary, be either
reinforced or thickened.
(b) The relative strength of the ligaments between tube holes which come in a single
line in a butt-strap joint or reinforced shell, shall be computed by the following formula:
P—d).T.
E-ſºº (3)
where
E=relative strength of ligament. (See also section 52.2–3.)
P=pitch of º
in inches. (For minimum width of ligament, see sections 52.9–1
to 52.9—3.
d=diameter of tube holes, in inches.
T=thickness of shell, in inches.
T=the *...* thickness of the two butt straps, or the shell and reinforcing plate,
In 1mcneS.
(c) Reinforcing plates used to strengthen the shell where pierced for tubes shall be
riveted to the . Inside of the calking edge, the spacing of the rivets shall be deter
mined as for stays for flat surfaces, as specified in sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3 and 52.8–1 to
52.8–5. The shearing strength of the rivets securing the reinforcing plate on each side of
the tube line shall be at least equal to the required strength of the ligament of the reinforc
ing plate between the tubes.
CRoss REFERENCE: For formulas (1) and (2), see section 52.2–3.
52.2–7. Externally fired boilers. The thickness of shell plates of externally fired
boilers shall not exceed 0.45 inch.
* Where nests of tubes are grouped together, as in drums of certain types of water-tube boilers, the plate shall be treated as a curved tube
sheet, as hereinafter defined in sections 52.9–1 to 52.9—3.
(F–67)
(52.3—1] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
SHELL Joints
52.3–1 . Approved types of joints. (a) Joints of shells of boilers or other pressure
vessels are classified as follows:
Riveted joints, which may be either lapped or butt-strapped.
Welded joints, which shall be made by the hammer-weld or other approved process.
(See sections 56.20–1 to 56.20–19.)
(b) The efficiency of riveted joints is the ratio which the strength of the joint bears to
the strength of the solid plate. -
52.3–2 Materials and workmanship. (a) The butt straps of riveted joints shall be
of steel conforming with the specifications and requirements for the shell plates.
(b) Rivets shall conform to the requirements of Part 51, as follows:
Steel rivets, sections 51.7–1 to 51.7–9.
Iron rivets, sections 51.8–1 to 51.8–11.
(c) Rivet holes shall be drilled wholly and fairly, preferably in position. After drilling,
plates and straps shall be disassembled, burrs removed, and edges of holes faired before the
plates are riveted together. Drifting of rivet holes is prohibited.
(d) Plates and straps shall be so closely fitted, metal to metal, as to require a minimum
of calking to obtain tightness. , Split calking is prohibited.
52.3–3 Longitudinal riveted joints and computations.” (a) The longitudinal joints of
drums and shells of all boilers the contract for construction of which is signed on or after
March 1, 1941, shall be of riveted double-butt strap construction, at least double-riveted.
(b) The longitudinal joints of externally fired fire-tube or flue boilers shall be located
above the fire line of the setting. -
(c) The efficiency of a riveted joint is determined by calculating the breaking strength of
a unit section of the joint, considering each possible mode of failure separately, and dividing
the lowest result by the breaking strength of the solid plate of a length equal to that of the
section considered. It shall be computed in accordance with the following formulas:
For plate section:
* P_
For rivet section:

E_\º:
~ PST - -
5
(5)
For combined efficiency of plate in second row and shearing strength of rivet in outer
TOW:
_p—d nas
For combined efficiency of plate in second row and crushing strength of butt strap in
front of rivet in outer row:
E_p—d
p + medt
psf. (7)
where
E=efficiency of riveted joint in ratio to solid plate.
P=pitch in inches of rivets in outer row.
p=pitch in inches of rivets in second row.
d=diameter of rivet hole, in inches.
N= total number of rivets per pitch P.
n=number of rivets in outer row per pitch P.
T=thickness of shell plate, in inches.
t=thickness of butt strap, in inches.
a=sectional area of the driven rivet, in square inches.
c=crushing strength of plate in front of rivets. (Assumed as 95,000 pounds per
square inch.)
S=tensile strength of plate in pounds per square inch.
* It is assumed that the joints are of the usual construction where the rivets are symmetrically spaced.
(F–68)
s=shearing strength of rivets per square inch of sectional area, assumed as follows:
Pounds
Iron rivets in single shear--------------------------------------------

Iron rivets in double shear-------------------------------------------
Steel rivets, Grade A, in single shear----------------------------------
Steel rivets, Grade A, in double shear---------------------------------
Steel rivets, Grade B, in single shear----------------------------------
Steel rivets, Grade B, in double shear---------------
Alloy-steel rivets, Grade C, in single shear
Alloy-steel rivets, Grade C, in double shear---------------------------- 120,000
(d) The maximum allowable pitch of rivets in longitudinal joints shall be such as to
insure good calking.
(e) The distance between the center lines of any two adjacent rows of rivets, or the
“back pitch,” measured at right angles to the direction of the joint, shall in no case be less
than twice the diameter of the rivet hole. The “back pitch” º the rivets shall be measured
either on the flat plate before rolling or on the middle line of the plate after rolling. The
diagonal ligaments between staggered rivets shall have the proper strength as determined
§. C–24.
(f) On longitudinal joints, the distance from the center of the rivet holes to the calking
edge of the plate before calking, except rivet holes in the ends of butt straps, shall be not less
i. one and one-half and not more than one and three-fourths times the diameter of the rivet
Oles.
(g) Where the drums of water-tube boilers are pierced through the longitudinal butt
strap joint for the purpose of inserting tubes to connect the headers to the drum, the com
bined thickness of both butt straps shall be taken in computing the efficiency of the ligament
between tube holes. This efficiency should in no case be less than that required for the riveted
Joint.
52.3–4 Butt straps and computations. (a) The thickness of butt straps shall be such
as to permit efficient calking of the edges. Where the pitch of the rivets is so great as to
make effective calking doubtful, as occurs in quadruple riveting, the edge should be scalloped
around the outer rivets.
(b) The thickness of the outer butt strap shall be not less than that determined by
the following formula, but it shall in no case be less than one-quarter inch:
_5T(P—d)
*-ārā-kā (8)
where
t=thickness of outer strap, in inches.
T=required thickness of shell plate, in inches.
P=pitch of rivets in outer rows, in inches.
d=diameter of rivet holes, in inches.
K=ratio of pitch of rivets in outer row to minimum pitch in inner rows.
(c) The thickness of the inner butt strap shall equal t plus 0.125 inch, but is not required
to exceed the thickness of the shell plate. -
(d) The thickness of butt straps on drums of water-tube boilers pierced for the purpose
of inserting tubes to connect the headers to the drums, shall be increased if necessary to main
tain the efficiency on which the working pressure is based.
(e) Butt straps shall be formed to the curvature of the shell by rolling or pressing.
52.3–5 Circumferential joints. (a) The minimum strength of circumferential joints
attaching shells to heads of boilers or other pressure vessels shall bear the following ratios
to that required for the longitudinal joints of the shell:
Fifty percent when no part of the load on the head is supported by either tubes or stays.
Forty percent when one-half or more of the load on the head is sustained by stay tubes,
flues, or stays; except that circumferential head joints of externally fired fire tube or flue
boilers exposed to fire or to the products of combustion, shall have a minimum strength of
not less than 50 percent of that of the longitudinal joint.
(b) The strength of the circumferential joints connecting courses of the shell shall be
not less than 75 percent of that required for the longitudinal joints of the shell except that in
the case of externally fired flue j the strength of circumferential joints need not exceed
60 percent of the strength of the longitudinal joint.
(F–69)
(c) Circumferential end joints of shell plates over 5% inch thick and circumferential
joints connecting courses of shells, the required thickness of which is over } inch, shall be at
east double riveted. Where the thickness of the shell plate exceeds 1% inches for single
ended boilers and 1% inches for double-ended boilers, the circumferential seams connecting
shell courses shall be triple riveted.
(d) The distance from the centers of rivet holes of circumferential joints to the calking
edges of the plate shall not be less than one and one-half times the diameter of the rivet holes.
52.3–6 Welded joints. (a) Welded joints shall be as specified in section 52.2–5 or
sections 56.20–1 to 56.20–19, inclusive.
(b) Fusion welding shall be allowed in the construction of boilers and other pressure
vessels for the purpose of securing tightness in parts of riveted joints which are otherwise
constructed fully in accordance with the rules in this subchapter.
Dom Es AND STEAM CHIMNEYs
52.4—1 Definitions. (a) Domes are superstructures to shells, attached by riveting or
other approved means. They generally consist of a cylindrical shell with one end flanged
for attachment to the main ji and the other end closed by a head which may be integral
with or riveted to the shell. The diameter of the dome shall not exceed five-tenths of the
diameter of the shell.
(b) Steam chimneys are superstructures of steam boilers which are fitted with a lining
inside of which the products of combustion pass to the smokestack. They may be constructed
in the form of a dome integral with the boiler or as independent steam vessels connected by
piping to the boiler. Their purpose is to supply dry and slightly superheated steam.
52.4—2 Materials and workmanship. (a) The steel plates used in the construction of
domes shall conform to the specifications and requirements for the shell plates. For steam
chimneys the steel plates used shall conform to the specifications and requirements of sections
51.2–1 to 51.2–10 or sections 51.21–1 to 51.21–13, and which are tested, inspected, and
stamped in accordance with section 51.1–1.
(b) Rivets shall conform to the requirements of Part 51 as follows:
Steel rivets------------------------------------ Sections 51.7–1 to 51.7–9
Iron rivets------------------------------------- Sections 51.8–1 to 51.8–11
(c) The inside radius of the bend of the flange attaching a steam dome or steam chimney
to the main shell shall not be less than three times the thickness of the plate.
52.4–3 Computations. (a) The maximum allowable working pressure on the shell of
domes and steam chimneys or the minimum thickness of shell required for any given working
pressure, also the efficiency of riveted joints, shall be computed in the manner specified for
cylindrical shells and joints in sections 52.2–1 to 52.2–7, 52.3–1 to 52.3–6.
(b) Flat surfaces of heads of domes and steam chimneys shall be stayed as specified for
surfaces to be stayed or reinforced in sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5.
(c) The maximum allowable working #. on unstayed steam chimney linings, or
the minimum thickness of such linings, shall depend upon their type and shall be computed
in accordance with the requirements for furnaces and flues º in sections 52.11–1 to
52.11–4. -
(d) A cylindrical surface exposed to external pressure and not entirely self-supporting
shall be stayed in accordance with the requirements of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to
52.8–5, specifically section 52.7–3 (g).
(e) #. strength of the rivets and of ligaments between rivets in the flange attaching a
dome or steam chimney to a main shell .#. sufficient to give a factor of safety of not less
than six against the É load acting on the head. This factor of safety may be º to not
less than four when not less than 50 percent of the load on the head is carried by stays secured
to the main shell.
52.4–4 Steam chimney fittings. Drain pipes shall be fitted to steam chimneys in
which water is likely to collect. Steam chimneys that are arranged to be disconnected from
main boilers shall be provided with a safety valve not less than 2% inches in diameter and
(F–70)
with a steam gage and shall be provided with manholes to enable inspectors to make a proper
examination of the interior.
HEADs
52.5–1 Definitions. (a). Unstayed heads are the ends of a pressure shell or vessel.
...Y may be either flat or dished.
Snell.
Heads may be integral with or riveted or welded to the
(b) Unstayed flat heads as here considered may be used to close shells not exceeding 20
inches inside diameter.
(c) Dished heads may be of circular or elliptical section and may be so placed in the
shell that the pressure jºi. either on the concave or on the convex surface.
b (d) Stayed heads are heads supported in whole or in part by stays, furnaces, flues,
tubes, etc.
52.5–2 Materials and workmanship. (a) The steel plates used in the construction of
heads shall be of one of the grades suitable for flanging under the general requirements and
specifications for the shell plates. After heads have been dished, flanged, or locally heated,
they shall be properly annealed.
(b) The inside radius of the bend of the flange formed on any head for attachment to
the shell shall be not less than three times the thickness of the head and shall in no case be
less than 6 percent of the diameter of the shell for unstayed heads.
(c) Dished heads having the pressure on the convex side shall be formed to a true surface
without flats.
(d) The heads here considered are of steel plate. Cast-steel heads may be used for
pressure vessels other than boilers, but only where specifically authorized by the Commandant.
(e) The edge of the flange formed on a head shall be machined to a true surface. Where
the flange is to be calked inside, the edge shall be beveled as specified for the edges of plates
. in section 52.2–2. Care shall be taken in calking to avoid damaging the surface
of the plate.
(f) The holes for rivets to attach the head to the shell shall, as far as practicable, be
drilled in position, and the shell and head shall be taken apart after the holes are drilled,
and burrs removed. In cases where holes cannot be drilled in position, the holes shall be
examined after assembly and faired by reaming where necessary. (The requirement to
take apart for removing burrs shall not apply to heads where the contact surfaces have been
machined and the heads shrunk in place.)
52.5–3 Computations. (a) Flat heads. The working pressure and minimum thick
ness of unstayed flat heads shall be determined by the following formulas:
ST:
W - - 9
.81D2 (9)
where
T-09DV; -
(10)
W=maximum allowable working pressure, in pounds per square inch.

T=minimum thickness of plate, in inches.
D=greatest internal diameter of the shell, in inches (not to exceed 20).
S=minimum tensile strength of the material, in pounds per square inch.
(b) Dished heads. The working pressure and thickness of an unstayed dished head,
without manhole or handholes, with the pressure on the concave side shall be calculated
by the following formulas:
2ST
W=# (11)
WRF
T=*. (12)
(F–71)
where
S=minimum tensile strength of the material, in pounds per square inch.
R=radius in inches to which the head is dished, measured on the concave side of the
head. Where two radii are used, the longer shall be taken as R.
F=8.33 for plate construction.
F=10.0 for cast steel.
F= 12.0 for cast iron.
NotE: Where the radius R, to which the head is dished is less than 80 percent of the inside diameter of the shell, the value of R used in
the formula shall be at least 80 percent of the value of the diameter of the shell.
(c) The radius to which the head is dished shall not be greater than the diameter of the
.
uSe(1.
to which the head is attached. This will apply to the longer radius where two radii are
-
(d). A circular head without manhole or handholes which is of a semielliptical section

in which half the minor axis (or the depth of the head not including the flange) is at least
equal to one-fourth of the inside diameter of the head, shall be made at least as thick as the
required thickness of a seamless shell of the same diameter.
(e) When dished heads are of lesser thickness than called for by formula (12) and as
modified by the preceding paragraphs, they shall be stayed. The stays shall be designed to
carry the excess working pressure on the projected area of the head over that considered in
formula (11).
(f) If a dished head is formed with a flattened spot or surface, the diameter of the flat
spot shall not exceed that allowable for flat heads as given by formulas (9) and (10) and the
minimum thickness shall be computed by these formulas.
(g) The maximum allowable working pressure and the minimum thickness of an
unstayed dished head without manhole or handholes with the pressure on the convex side
shall be calculated by formulas (11) and (12), but only 70 percent of the maximum working
pressure thus determined shall be allowed, or the plate shall be increased in thickness
40 percent. -
(h) The maximum working pressure and minimum thickness of dished, cast-steel heads,
where permitted, shall be calculated by formulas (11) and (12).
(i). When a dished head has a flanged-in manhole or other access opening exceeding 6
inches in any dimension, the thickness of the head shall be increased by not less than 15
percent of the required thickness for a head computed by formula (12) but in no case by less
than one-eighth inch. Such manholes or other access openings shall be flanged inwards to a
minimum radius measured on the inside of the plate of not less than seven-eighths inch for
plates up to and including 1% inches in thickness and for plates exceeding 1% inches thickness
the radius shall be increased proportionately. The minimum depth of the flange measured
from the outside of the plate at the ends of the major axis shall be determined by the following
formula: -
d=VTºp
where
d=depth of flange, measured from the outer face, in inches.
T=thickness of the plate, in inches.
w=minor axis of the opening, in inches.
(j) If more than one manhole or access opening is inserted in the head, the thickness of
which is calculated by this rule, the minimum distance between the openings shall be not less
than one-fourth of the outside diameter of the head.
(k) Where a dished head has a flanged opening supported by an attached flue, an increase
in thickness over that computed by formula (12) is not required.
(l) All other openings which require reinforcement placed in an unstayed dished head
or an ellipsoidal head, including all types of manholes, except those of the integral flanged-in
(F–72)
CONSTRUCTION - [52.6–2]
type, shall be reinforced in accordance with section 52.6–4 (b), (c), in the application of which
the head shall be treated as a shell of the same diameter, thickness, working pressure, and
material; and, when so reinforced, the thickness of an unstayed dished head may be the same
as for a blank unstayed dished head, and the thickness of an ellipsoidal head may be the same
as for a blank ellipsoidal head.
(m) Unreinforced openings in heads shall be governed by the following rules:
(1) The edge of any unreinforced opening, excluding rivet holes, shall come no closer to
the line bounding the spherical or ellipsoidal portion of the head around a manhole than the
distance equal to the thickness of the head, and in no case, except for water-column con
nections, shall it come within the part formed by the corner radius of a dished head.
(2) The maximum allowable diameter of any unreinforced opening in a head shall not
exceed that permitted by section 52.6–4 (a) for a shell of the same diameter, thickness, work
ing pressure and material, nor shall it exceed 8 inches in any case.
(3) The minimum distance between the centers of any two unreinforced openings, rivet
holes excepted, shall be determined by the following formula:
A-LB
L= 2(1–K) (13)
where
L=distance between the centers of the two openings, measured on the surface
of the head, in inches.
A and B-diameters of the two openings, in inches.
K=same as defined in section 52.6–4 (a) for the equivalent shell described in
subparagraph (2).
OPENINGS AND REINFORCEMENTS
52.6–1 Definitions. (a) Openings, as defined in this section, are holes cut in shells or
heads of boilers or other pressure vessels, including domes and steam chimneys, for the
purpose of construction, inspection, and cleaning. They may or may not require reinforce
ment.
NotE: Openings in the shells or heads of boilers or other pressure vessels, including domes and steam chimneys, for other purposes than above
defined º: pipe connections and mountings) are defined and necessary reinforcement is specified in section 52.6–3. F. maximum diam
eter not requiring reinforcement, see figures C-1 and C-2.
(b) Manholes shall be of elliptical form, the dimensions of which shall be not less than 10
by 16 inches or 11 by 15 inches. It is recommended that the size 12 by 16 inches be used
wherever practicable. Circular manholes having diameters of 15 inches may be permitted.
(c) Handholes may be of circular or elliptical form. The diameter of a circular handhole
or the minor axis of an ellipical handhole shall be not less than 4 inches. This requirement
does not apply to small access openings such as used in superheater headers.
(d) Inspection openings smaller than specified for handholes will be permissible where a
handhole opening is impracticable.
52.6–2. Detail requirements. (a) Where elliptical openings are made in the shell of a
ºil. or other pressure vessel, the minor axis shall, as far as practicable, be placed longitudi
naily.
(b) All manholes, handholes, and inspection openings shall be closed by readily removable
internal cover plates which shall be held by one or more girders or dogs and bolts. The cover
plates shall be formed with a projection to fit within the opening with a radial clearance not
exceeding one-sixteenth inch at any point. This projection may be in form of a spigot or a
lip which shall protrude straight out #. the joint face within the opening not less than one
half inch on manhole or three-eighths inch on smaller cover plates.
(c) Externally fired boilers shall be fitted with a manhole opening in the lower front head
beneath the flues. The minimum dimensions of such opening shall be 10 inches on the
minor axis and 16 inches on the major axis. When shells are less than 46 inches in diameter,
handholes 4 by 5 inches in size may be used in place of manholes.
(F–73)
52.6–3. Materials and workmanship. (a) The material for reinforcing plates around
openings shall conform to the requirements of the plate to be reinforced. en they are
locally heated for flanging or forming, they shall be properly annealed.
(b) A forged nozzle or forged flange, riveted to the plate, may be considered as reinforce
ºprovided
In OVed.
that such fittings are properly designed to compensate for the material re
(c) The cover plates for manholes shall be of steel conforming to the specifications and
requirements for the shell plates. Handhole covers may be made of steel conforming to the
specifications and requirements of the shell plates, or of steel conforming to the specifications
of sections 51.21–1 to 51.21–13, inclusive, or of properly designed steel forgings conforming
to the requirements of sections 51.15–1 to 51.15–14, or of properly designed steel castings
conforming to the requirements of sections 51.17–1 to 51.17–12.
(d) Manhole and handhole girders or dogs may be steel or iron forgings, pressed steel,
or steel castings of proper design.
(e) The material of bolts securing girders or dogs and cover plates shall conform to the
requirements of sections 51.4–1 to 51.4–10.
(f) Rivets used in securing reinforcing plates to the shell or other structural part shall
conform to the requirements of sections 51.7–1 to 51.7–9, 51.8–1 to 51.8–11.
(g) The inner radius of the bend of any flanged opening in heads (except manholes or
other access openings as specified in section 52.5–3 (.)) . be: For furnace attachments
not less than twice the thickness of the plate flanged. For flue attachments in externally
fired boilers, not less than one and one-half times the thickness of the plate flanged.
(h) The riveted joint of a reinforcing plate fitted to an opening in the shell or other
part of a boiler or other pressure vessel, shall be properly calked along the edge of the open
ing and the outer edge of the reinforcing plate as specified in sections 52.3–1 to 53.3–6 for
riveted shell joints.
(i) When handhole or other access openings are made, a margin of not less than one
quarter inch shall be left when punching operations are used, and not less than one-eighth
inch shall be left when machine burning methods are employed. Such margins shall be ma
chined or ground away to relieve the metal of any stresses which may be set up due to
burning or punching operations.
(j) The minimum width of bearing surface for a gasket on a manhole opening shall be
one-half inch. No gasket for use on a manhole or handhole of any boiler shall have a
thickness greater than one-fourth inch, when compressed.
52.6–4 Computations. (a) An opening in a shell or drum shall be reinforced if any
dimension of said opening exceeds 8 inches, or the value given by the following formula,
whichever is the least:
d=2.75°/DTOI-K) (14)
where
d=maximum diameter of unreinforced opening, in inches.
T=minimum thickness of shell plate, in inches. -

D=outside diameter of drum or shell, in inches.
S=one-fifth of the minimum of the specified range of tensile strength of the shell
plate, in pounds per square inch.
K=ratio of computed stress in the solid plate to one-fifth of the minimum of the
specified range of tensile strength of the shell plate.
WD
K=#. *
Where the value of K equals or exceeds unity use 0.99.
(F–74)
CONSTRUCTION ..[52.6–4]
The maximum diameter of unreinforced openings may be determined by use of diagrams,

figures C–1 and C-2:
To use the diagrams compute the value of (DT) and also the value of K as shown in the
preceding formula. Next find on the diagram the vertical line corresponding to the (DT)
value and follow this line vertically to the point where the line representing the K value
intersects. By projecting this point horizontally to the left-hand edge of the diagram, the
maximum diameter of an unreinforced opening may be read from the scale.
(b) Reinforcements of the riveted type shall consist of one or more reinforcing rings or
flanges riveted to the shell. The thickness of each independent riveted reinforcing flange
or ring shall not be less than given in table C-1. -
The outside diameter of a riveted reinforcing ring or flange shall not be less than one and
one-half times the diameter of the opening in the shell.
- -
IO
FIGURE C–1.—Drum diameter.Xthickness in inches (DT).
(F–75)
(52.6–4]. MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
For nozzle fittings having a bolting flange and an integral flange for riveting, thickness
of the flange attached to the vessel shall also be not less than the thickness of the neck of
the fitting.
(c) ºil circular or ellipsoidal openings of the reinforced type shall comply with the
following requirements:
(1) On a line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shell and passing approximately
through the center of the opening and through the weakest section of a riveted reinforcin
ring or flange (section view in fig, C–3), the total cross section in the complete reinforce
opening, including the shell and deducting for rivet holes, within the limits defined below
(defined by rectangle ABCD in the section view) shall be at least equal to the cross section
(EFGH plus JKLM) obtained by multiplying the shell thickness T required by section
52.2–3, using E=0.90, by twice the diameter d of the opening, less 2 inches. The above
mentioned limits are:
(i) A distance on each side of the center line of the opening equal to the actual inside
diameter d of the opening in the shell in the finished construction (lines AD and BC in the
sectional view).
Figure C–2.—Drum diameter × thickness in inches (DT).

(ii) A distance on each side of the middle line of the actual thickness m of the shell equal
to three times such actual thickness, except that in no case shall the limits extend along the
tubular portion of a connection beyond the surface NP of the reinforcement more than
two º
VleW).
one-half times the thickness n of the tubular portion (lines AB and DC in the sectional
When there are two or more adjacent openings, the limits (defined by AD and BC) for
the openings shall not be considered to overlap, and in no case shall any portion of a cross
section be considered to apply to more than one opening.
(2) On either side of }. line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shell, as determined
in paragraph 1, the strength of the attachment to the vessel of each separate part entering
into the fabrication of a reinforced opening shall be at least equal to the tensile strength of
the cross section of the reinforcing part .#. the above limits (within the rectangle ABCD),
or to the tensile strength of a cross-sectional area (QFGR plus JSTM) determined by multi
plying the shell thickness Trequired by section 52.2–3, using E=0.90, by the diameter d, less
(F–76)
bºº aſ ~f~ ºn tº
N tº ºi º ºn
Nº º iſ lººp ,
º N. º ºn tº
º d
-ºiliº
A.
º º ż, º' -
- 2—
-
ºn º
º, sº tºº tº
tº ºr ºn
ºn a
FIGURE C–3.
2 inches, of the opening in the shell in the finished construction, whichever tensile strength is
the smailer. For riveted construction, the strength of attachment is the shearing strength
of the rivets.
TABLE C–1.—MINIMUM THIcKNEss of INDEPENDENT RIvETED REINForcing RINGs or FLANGEs
| |
| Thickness of | Thickness of
Thickness of | Thickness of
ãº" | *ºns | neurºt. |*|†ºns
—— ji
Inch Inch i Inches Inch
% %—% %
%6 %6 % %
%–1942 % 1 '%6
%—1%z %c 1%–2 4
%a-1942 % Over 2 1
%–%g | %c
-- ---
619428"—45—6 (F–77)
(d) Manhole or other openings in a flat, stayed surface shall be deemed to be sufficiently
reinforced if the plate is flanged inwards to a depth to be determined by the following
formula: -
d= WTw (15)
where
d=depth to which plate is flanged inwards measured from the outer face.
T=thickness of the plate, in inches.
w=minor axis of the opening, in inches.
SURFACES REQUIRED To BE STAYED or REINForcFD
52.7–1. Definitions. , Surfaces to be stayed or reinforced include the following:

(a) Flat plates, heads or areas thereof, such as segments of heads, wrapper sheets,
furnace plates, side sheets, combustion chamber tops, etc., which are not self-supporting.
(b) Curved plates constituting the whole or parts of a cylinder subject to external
pressure which are not entirely self-supporting.
CRoss REFERENCEs: For unstayed flat heads not exceeding 20 inches in diameter, see Sections 52.5–1
to 52.5–3. For flat tube sheets, see sections 52.9–1 to 52.9–3, 52.10–1 to 52.10–4. For curved tube sheets
see sections 52.9–1 to 52.9–3. For flat surfaces of headers and manifolds, see sections 52.13–1 to 52.13–5.
52.7–2. Areas to be stayed. The area of a segment or other portion of a head to be
stayed shall be that inclosed by lines as follows:
(a) Where only plain tubes are used in the bounding rows, the line of area shall be at
one-half the diameter of the tube in inches, plus 2 inches from the center of the row of tubes.
(b) Where stay tubes are used in the bounding rows, the line of area shall be at one-half
the maximum allowable pitch of the stays required for the plate, measured from the center
of the row of stay tubes.
(c) On the side of the segments bounded by the shell or furnaces, the lines of area shall
be at a distance d from the shell, as shown by figures C-4, C-5, and C–6, the distance d to
be computed by the following formula:
5T
d—i, (16)
where
d=distance from shell, furnaces or flues considered self-supporting, in inches.
T=Thickness of plate, in sixteenths of an inch.
FIGURE C–4.
(F–78)
FIGURE C-5. FIGURE C–6.
Nots A: h =}4 diameter of tube plus 2 inches where only plain tubes are used in bounding row. Equals half the maximum allowable
pitch of the stays required for the plate where stay tubes are used. (See Section 52.7–2.) This note applies to figures C-4 and C-5 only.
NotE B: Where the exact area of a circular segment is not ascertained by other accepted methods, the following formula may be used,
using symbols as indicated below and on figure C-5.
4H2/2R
A à-VH-6 (17)
where
A=area of segment which requires support, in square inches.
H=height of segment to self-supporting line, in inches.
R=radius of segment to self-supporting line, in inches.
52.7–3 Computations. (a) The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum
thickness of plates supported by stays shall be determined by the following formulas:
Surfaces without doubling plates:
OT”
W–F#2 (18)
T-VWºr (19)
Surfaces fitted with doubling plates:
=#. - (20)
1-ywº (21)
NotE: Where doubling plates are used, the minimum allowable thickness shall be 0.67 and the maximum thickness shall not exceed
0.75 of the thickness of the plate reinforced.
The maximum allowable pitch for stays in either direction shall be computed by the
following formulas:
(1) Where stays are equally spaced in both directions:
P Or p-V; (22)
(2) Where the pitch in one direction is greater than that in the other direction:
P=2 ICT, BW (23)
and, with the greater pitch thus determined for one direction, the maximum pitch in the
other direction shall be computed by the formula:
OTT.
p-V º-P" (24)
(F–79)
(52.7–3) MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
In no case shall p be less than one-half P

where -

T=thickness of plate, in sixteenths of an inch.
=combined thickness of plate and doubler or washer, in sixteenths of an inch.
P=pitch of stays in one direction, in inches.
p=pitch of stays in the other direction, in inches.
C and C=coefficients based upon a minimum tensile strength of the plate, not less
than 55,000 pounds per square inch, the kind of service to which sub
- jected, and the method of construction, as follows:
Plates exposed to products of combustion:
C=238 for plates under Ås inch in thickness, fitted with screw stays with nuts or
*ś collars.
C=170 for plates, 7% inch and over in thickness, fitted with screw stays with riveted
heads.
C=250 for plates, 7% inch and over in thickness, fitted with screw stays with nuts or
welded collars.
C=190 for all plates fitted with stays secured by rivets.
C=275 for plates fitted with stay tubes screwed and expanded in nests of tubes.
C=320 º:
plates fitted with stay tubes screwed, expanded, and beaded in nests of
tubes.
C=185 for plates fitted with stay tubes screwed and expanded in bounding rows.
C=225 for plates fitted with stay tubes screwed, expanded, and beaded in
roWS. -
iºding
Plates not exposed to products of combustion:
C=274 for plates under Ås inch in thickness, fitted with screw stays with nuts or
welded collars.
C= * ºplates, 7% inch and over in thickness, fitted with screw stays with riveted
eadS.
C=290 for plates, 7% inch and over in thickness, fitted with screw stays with nuts or
welded collars.
C=212 for all plates fitted with stays secured by rivets.
c-sº plates fitted with through stays with nuts on both inside and outside of
plate.
C = 175 for plates fitted with through stays with nuts inside and outside and having
doubling plates covering the entire supported area.
C=145 for plates fitted with through stays, with nuts inside and outside and rein
forced by washers efficiently riveted to the outside of the plate, the diameter of
the washers to be not less than two-thirds the pitch of the stays.
C=155 for plates fitted with through stays, with inside and outside nuts and rein
forced by doubling strips through which the stays are inserted, the width of
the doubling strip to be not less than two-thirds of the pitch of the stays.
C-136 for plates fitted with screw stays and doubling strips between the rows of
stays, the width of the doubling strip to be not less than two-thirds of the pitch
of the stays.
efficients :*.
Note:for(1) When stays
a surface
shallisbe
supported by value
used as the various
of types of in
C or Ci stays
the for which different coefficients are pro vided, the average of the two co
formulas.
(2) Riveted
be fitted heads
with nuts are notcolla
or welded permissible on stays which are screwed into p
plates havingg a thickness of less than 74s
216 inch. Such stays
Stays must
rs.
(3) No plate less than %s inch in thickness shall be used in stayed surface construction.
º Where two sheets are connected by stays and only one of them requires staying,
the value of (C) or (C) is governed by the thickness of the sheet to be stayed and the types
of stays used.
(c) In determining the maximum distance between the center of a bounding line of tubes
and the centers of adjacent stays, the value of (C) or (C) given for the thickness of plate and
type of stay or stay tube, shall be used.
d) In determining themaximum distance between a flanged edge and the centers of stays
the pitch which ºp. to the thickness of the plate and the type of stay may be increase
up to 25 percent: Provided, That the increment shall not exceed the distance (d) determined,
by formula (16).
(F–80)
a/—- Z)" ºr •eyre es:
FIGURE C–7.—Pitch of staybolts adjacent to upper corner of fire boxes.

(e) Where stayed plates are riveted to a flange, the distance from the center of the outer
most stays to the center line of the rivets shall not exceed the pitch of the stays: Provided,
That, where staybolts are adjacent to reinforced edges, such as around furnace doors, bot
toms of fire boxes, etc., the maximum allowable pitch may be increased by the diameter of
the staybolt hole.
Where stays are fitted at the upper corners of fire boxes or combustion chambers, the
distance (d) from the staybolt nearest the corner to the point of tangency of the corner
curve, as shown by figure C–7, shall be determined by the following formula:
90T / C.
d= D V 2W (25)
where
C-applicable coefficient, as provided in paragraph (a).
d=distance from center of staybolt nearest the corner to the point of tangency of the
Curve.
T=thickness of plate, in sixteenths of an inch.
D=angle of tangents, in degrees.
(g) Curved surfaces subject to external pressure and not entirely self-supporting, shall
be stayed in accordance with the requirements of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5.
Due allowance, except in the case of combustion chamber sheets, may be made for the
*f; inherent in the cylindrical form in the following manner:
The maximum allowable working pressure on a stayed curved surface shall be the full
pressure computed from formula (18) in this section for stayed plates, plus one-half of the
pressure determined by formula for curved plates in section 52.11–3 (b); or the full pressure
allowable on the curved plate plus one-half of that allowed on the stayed surface, whichever
gives the lower value.
STAYS AND REINFORCEMENTS
52.8–1. Definitions. (a) Through stay is a solid bar extended through both heads of
a boiler and threaded at the ends for attachment by means of nuts. With this type of stay
the ends are usually upset to compensate for the threading. (See fig. C-8.)
(F–81)
(b) Solid staybolt is a threaded bar screwed through the plates, the ends being riveted
over or fitted jº nuts or welded collars. (See figs. C–9 and C–19.)
(c) Hollow staybolt is a hollow threaded bar screwed through the plates, the ends being
riveted over or fitted with nuts or welded collars. .(See fig. C-10.)
(d) Flexible staybolt is a bar made with a ball-and-socket joint on one end, the cup of
the socket being screwed into the outside sheet and covered with a removable cap, the plain
end of the staybolt, being threaded, screwed through the inside sheet and riveted over.
(See fig. C-11.)
(e) Sling stay is a flexible stay consisting of a solid bar having one or both ends forged for
fi!pº*
12.
-
to a crowfoot or other structural fitting secured to the stayed plate.
-
(See
(f), Crowfoot is a forged fitting with palms or lugs secured to the head to form a proper
connection with a sling stay. (See fig. C-13.)
(g) Crowfoot stay is a solid bar stay terminating in a forged fork with palms or lugs for
attachment to the plate. (See fig. C–14.)
(h) Diagonal stay is a bar or formed plate forged with palms or lugs for staying the head
of the boiler to the shell diagonally. (See fig. C-15.)
(i) Gusset stay is a triangular plate used for the same purpose as a diagonal stay and
attached to the head and the shell by angles, flanges, or other suitable means of attachment.
(See fig. C–16.)
(j) Dog stay is a staybolt, one end of which extends through a girder, dog, or bridge,
and is secured by a nut, the other end being screwed through the plate which it is supporting
and riveted over or fitted with a nut or welded collar. (See fig. C-17.) .
(k) Girder is a bridge, built up of plates or structural shapes separated by distance
pieces, a forging, or a formed plate, which spans an area requiring support, abutting thereon
and supporting the girder stays or staybolts. (See fig. C–18.)
(l) Reinforcement is a doubling plate, washer, structural shape, or other form for stiff
ening or strengthening a plate.
(m) Stay tube is a thick-walled tube used in fire-tube boilers to stay the tube sheets.
(n) Welded collar is a beveled ring formed around the end of a screw stay by means
of fusion welding. It is used in lieu of a nut. (See fig. C–19.)
(o) Telltale hole is a small hole having a diameter not less than three-sixteenths inch
drilled in the center of a solid stay and extending to at least one-half inch beyond the inside
surface of the sheet.
52.8–2. Materials. (a) Round bar stays which require no welding or forging other
than upsetting at the ends for threading or to form eyes for use in conjunction with crowfeet,
or similar fastenings, shall conform to the requirements of sections 51.4–1 to 51.4–10, 51.5–1
to 51.5—10 or sections 51.6–1 to 51.6–10.
(b) Crowfeet, lugs, and similar connections for stays shall be forgings without welds
conforming to the requirements of sections 51.15–1 to 51.15–14.
(c) Welded stays or parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of sections 51.6–1
to 51.6–10. All welds in the body of the stay must be made by the hammer-weld process.
(d) Stiffeners made of structural shapes shall conform to the requirements specified in
sections 51.5–1 to 51.5–10.
(e) Gusset and diagonal stays made of steel plate, also doubling plates and girders
shall conform to the i. specified in sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10.
(f) Stay tubes shall conform to the requirements of sections 51.9–1 to 51.9–16, sections
51.9a–1 to 51.9a–18, or sections 51.10–1 to 51.10–18.
(g) Rivets shall conform to the following requirements:
Steel rivets------------------------------------ sections 51.7–1 to 51.7–9
Iron rivets------------------------------------- sections 51.8–1 to 51.8–11
(h) Nuts for screw stays shall be made of steel, conforming to the requirements of
sections 51.15–1 to 51.15–14, or, refined wrought iron, conforming to the requirements of
sections 51.6–1 to 51.6–10.
52.8–3 Workmanship. (a) The ends of stay bars and stay tubes which are upset
for threading shall be subsequently annealed.
sº Holes for screw stays shall be drilled and tapped fair and true and shall have a full
(F–82)
(c) All holes for rivets shall be drilled and shall be slightly counter-sunk in order to form
a fillet at point and head. Rivets shall be of sufficient length to fill the rivet holes completely
and to form a head of proportionate strength to the body of the rivet.
&Z
PſG C-9
/ -
*ZZZZZZZZZZºº º
A&LOW37ADºlºſºp
º
AZAX/8/E 5724Y &
ÆGC+10 A/GC-1ſ
SLIMG STAY
F/Gº Cºſz É
CºOWFø07
º
|
[T]
F
*== 67 º zºmºzzzzzzº
CºMº.O.7
PſG. Cºſº;
;
Arſgº. Cº-ſG
doºray
ź
AgCº)
º Mºgaº
CºA.R.
(d). Holes for tubes or through stays may be made by punching a pilot hole in the center
i. shall be machined to size by a rotating cutter, or otherwise be drilled from the solid
plate.
(F–83)
(e) When jointed longitudinal stays are fitted between the back and front tube plates
and connected by pins, such pins may be fitted slack in the holes, but the total clearance on
both ends shall not exceed Ms inch.
(f) Where stay tubes are used for supporting flat surfaces they shall be fitted with threads
at both ends, screwed into the tube sheets and rolled tight with expanders, in addition to
which they may be beaded. Making such tubes tight by calking is not permissible.
52.8–4 Computations. (a) The maximum allowable working pressure and the
required area of direct stays shall be computed by the following formulas (in making compu
tations, the least sectional area of the stay shall be taken):
aC
W= i . (26)
where
A=area supported by the stay, in square inches.
a=required cross-sectional area of stay, in inches.
Cº-coefficients based on the minimum tensile strength of the material used, as
follows:
C=10,000 for solid steel through stays. *-
C-9,000 for solid steel screw stays having diameters of 1 inch and above.
C=9,000 for jointed steel stays.
c—sº for solid or hollow steel screw staybolts having diameters of 1 inch
Or IeSS.
C–8,000 for refined wrought-iron stays or staybolts having diameters of

1 inch and above.
C–8,000 for steel stays formed from plates without welds.
Cº-7,500 for wrought-iron or steel stay tubes.
C=7,500 for . screw staybolts.
C=7,500 º
refined wrought-iron screw staybolts having diameters less than
1 inch.
C-6,000 for welded refined wrought-iron stays.
(b) In computing the gross area supported by a stay, the pitch of the stays shall be used,
but the least sectional area of the stay may be deducted therefrom to obtain the net area.
(c) Where stays are adjacent to the outer edge of the surface to be stayed and special
allowances are made for the spacing, the area A shall be determined by deducting such parts
of the surface as may be considered self supporting in accordance with section 52.7–2.
(d) The required cross-sectional area of a diagonal stay shall be determined by the
following formula:
al-‘f (28)
where
a1 =required area of diagonal stay.
a =required area of direct stay computed by formula (27).
L=length of diagonal stay as shown by figure C–15.
l=length of line drawn at right angles to the surface to be supported, and extending
to the center of the first rivet in the diagonal stay as shown by figure C–15.
(e), The minimum sectional area of a gusset stay constructed of triangular plates secured
to single or double rolled shapes along the two sides, shall be 10 percent greater than that
determined by formula (28) for diagonal stays.
..(f) In determining the net cross-sectional area of drilled or hollow staybolts, the cross
ºnal
1I]CIl.
area of the hole shall be deducted if the diameter exceeds three-sixteenths of an
(g) Where a º shell is pierced by more than three holes for stays or other pur
poses on a line parallel with the axis of the shell, the relative strength of the ligaments between
such holes shall not be less than that of the ligaments in the outer row of rivets in the longi
tudinal joint. If the construction necessitates a lower relative strength, this must be used
(F–84)
CONSTRUCTION (52.9—2]
for the value of E in the formulas (1) and (2), section 52.2–3, for determining the maximum
allowable working pressure or minimum thickness of plate.
(h) The minimum sectional area of a pin subject to double shear shall be at least 80
percent of the required cross-sectional area of the stay.
(i) Each branch of a crowfoot or similar component part of a divided stay shall be pro
portioned to support at least two-thirds of the entire load.
(i) Eyes for pin connections shall be properly formed to the body of the stays. The
minimum outside diameter of the eye shall be one and three-fourths times that of the pin.
The minimum thickness of a single eye shall be the diameter of the pin; that of the double
eye shall be two-thirds of the diameter of the pin; the jº"area of any part of an
eye shall be such that the two sides of a single eye shall equal at least 1.25; and the four
sides of a forked eye shall equal at least one and one-half times the strength of the body of
a stay.
(k). The strength of the rivets connecting crowfoot braces, or any other type of reinforce
ment, shall equal one and one-half times the strength of the connecting stay.
(l) Palms, lugs, or flanges which are to be riveted, shall have a minimum width at the
rivet hole exceeding the diameter of the rivet head, and shall have a cross-sectional area
exclusive of the rivet hole not less than one and one-fourth times the required cross-sectional
area of the body of the stay. Where there are two or more rivets located in the longitudinal
axis of the stay, the strength of the palm or lug at the second or subsequent rivet hole may be
reduced to not less than one and one-fourth times the combined strength of the rivet at that
point and those beyond.
52.8–5 Detail requirements. (a) All screw staybolts, except flexible staybolts, shall
have a telltale hole in the center of each end not less than % inch diameter, extending not
less than % inch beyond the inside of the plate.
(b) Joining of steel stays in the body by any process of welding is not permissible.
(c) The length of staybolts shall not exceed 20 diameters.
(d) Where the length of a boiler exceeds 18 feet, the through stays shall be supported
in the middle.
(e) Where the heads of staybolts are riveted over, the end of the staybolt before rivetin
shall extend not less than % inch from the surface of the plate to jº. sufficient materi
for a substantial head.
(f) Where welded collars are used instead of nuts, the depth of the collar, measured
on the staybolt, and the width, measured on the plate, shall not be less than one-half the
diameter of the staybolt.
ºntorting or building up the heads of riveted staybolts by means of welding is not
permissible.
(h) The minimum thickness of nuts used in connection with screw stays shall be one
half of the diameter of the stay, but in no case less than three-fourths inch. The stays shall
be so placed in relation to the joints that the plates can be calked without removing the
nuts.
TUBE SHEETs of WATER-TUBE BoILERs
52.9–1. Definitions. (a) Curved tube sheet is a section of the shell of a boiler drum
formed to an arc of a circle and perforated for nests of tubes.
boil (b) Flat tube sheet is the tube plate of box headers of certain types of water-tube
Ollers.
(c) Longitudinal ligament is the minimum section of metal between two tube holes on
a line parallel with the axis of the drum. -
(d) Circumferential ligament is the minimum section of metal between two tube holes
on a line around the circumference of the drum.
(e) Diagonal ligament is the minimum section of metal between two tube holes in
adjacent rows, measured diagonally from one row to the other.
52.9–2 Computations for curved tube sheet. (a) The maximum allowable working
pressure and minimum thickness of a curved tube sheet shall be determined by formulas
(1) and (2), given in section 52.2–3, using the lowest value of E, derived as follows:
(b) When a shell is pierced for a single row of tubes or for two or more rows well apart,
as in a double butt-strap joint, or where reinforcing plates are fitted, the efficiency of the
ligament between tube ºf: shall be determined by formula (3), section 52.2–6 (b).
(F–85)
[52.9–2] MLARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
(c) When a shell is pierced for tubes in a series of rows parallel to its axis, the efficiency
of the ligament between the tube holes in any row shall be determined as follows:
(d) When the pitch of the tube holes in any row is uniform. (See fig. C–20.)
_Pi—d
E= −PI- (29)
(e) When the pitch of the tube holes in any row is not uniform (see figs. C–21 and C–22)
the calculations shall be made for a section of the row not exceeding the diameter of the
shell and
- -
Pi—nd 30
E=-p (30)
z A dh A. As A A dº A h 4, & 4. As A A
vTVTVTVTVTVTVTV v-v-Q7-v-VTVTvTwº
-º-Éº:#ft:1.
Žiž
#– –$4444
#6:3####
£ºft 3. 3º-Hºrſº
Alongſhaºna/Line—- £ongifudina/Line—-
FIGURE C–20.-Example of tube FIGURE C–21.-Example of tube
spacing with pitch of holes equal spacing with pitch of holes un
in every row. equal in every second row.
Twp, CCC
As an its an as a dº—d, dh dº
v-VTvTV W
—43–9–9 9–9–36) an an b
º
an
######## º
Alongſ/valina/Line---> Longiºvaſna/Line—-
FIGURE C–22.-Example of tube spacing FIGURE C–23.−Example of
with #. of holes varying in every tube spacing with holes on
second and third row. diagonal lines.
(f) When the holes in one row are placed so as to form diagonal ligaments with the
holes in an adjacent row (see fig. C–23) the efficiency of these ligaments shall be taken from
the diagram figure C–24. To use this diagram compute the value of and also the efficiency #
of the longitudinal ligament. Next find in the diagram the vertical line corresponding to
the longitudinal efficiency of the ligament and follow this line vertically to the point where
the diagonal line representing the ratio of
1.
#
intersects. By projecting this line horizontally
to the left on the edge of the diagram the diagonal efficiency of the ligament may be read
from the scale. If #, efficiency is less than that of the longitudinal ligament it shall be
}. in computing the working pressure. The symbols used in the above formulas are as
Ollows:
P=longitudinal pitch of tube holes, in inches.

Pa-diagonal pitch of tube holes, in inches.
Pl-length of section of the row considered, in inches.
d=diameter of tube holes, in inches.
n=number of tube holes in section Pi.
NoTE: The pitch of the tube holes shall be measured either on the flat plate before rolling or on the middle line of the plate after rolling.
(g) The strength of the circumferential ligaments between tube holes shall be at least
one-half the required strength of the longitudinal ligaments.
(h). When the tube holes are not normal to the plate, the plate thickness must be sufficient
to provide a parallel seating not less than % inch in depth between planes at right angles with
(F-86)
FIGURE C–24.
the axis of the tube for tubes 2% inches in diameter and under; for tubes having diameters
over 2% inches, the depth of the parallel seating shall be not less than one-half inch.
52.9–3 Reinforcement of ligaments. (a) Where reinforcing plates are applied to the
drums of water-tube boilers to strengthen the shell at the point where the tubes enter, they
shall be riveted to the shell, and where outside calking is used, the rivet spacing shall be
lºgº. to stay the plates in accordance with the requirements of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3,
52.8–1 to 52.8–5.
(b) The combined drum shell and reinforcing plate or plates and riveted connections
shall have a factor of safety of not less than 4.5 in the ligaments when calculated in accord
ance with section 52.9–2. en reinforcing plates or butt straps are exposed to the products
of combustion, the joints shall be j therefrom, when necessary.
CoMBUSTION CHAMBERs AND TUBE SHEETs of FIRE-TUBE BoILERs
. .. 52.10-1 Definitions. (a) Combustion chamber, within the meaning of this section,
is that part of an internally-fired boiler in which combustible gases may be burned after leav
ing the furnace.
(b) Separate combustion chamber is a combustion chamber which is connected to one
furnace only.
(c) Common combustion chamber is a combustion chamber connected to two or more
furnaces in a boiler.
(F–87)
(d) Crown or top plate is the top of a combustion chamber and is usually supported
by girder stays or by sling stays or braces.
(e) Wrapper sheet is the side plate of any type of combustion chamber and also the
bottom plate of a common combustion chamber.
Curved bottom plate is the bottom of a separate combustion chamber formed to an
arc of a circle and usually designed to be self-supporting.
(g) Combustion chamber tube sheet is the plate forming the end of a combustion chamber
in which the tubes are secured.
(h) Combustion chamber back sheet is the plate opposite the tube sheet forming the
back of the combustion chamber. It is usually stayed to the back head of the boiler by
means of screw stays, or, in the case of double-ended boilers, to the back of the combustion
chamber of the other end of the boiler.
(i) Girder is a bridge as defined in section 52.8–1 (k).
(j) Structural stiffeners are rolled shapes or flanged plates which are used to stiffen a
surface which is not entirely self-supporting.
52.10–2 Materials. (a) All }. forming parts of combustion chambers or fire
boxes shall conform to the general specifications for the shell plates.
(b) Structural shapes of any form used for stays and reinforcement shall conform to the
requirements of sections 51.5–1 to 51.5—10.
52.10–3 Computations—(a) Formulas. The maximum allowable working pressure
and minimum thickness of all stayed parts of combustion chambers shall be computed in
ºnce
follows:
with formulas provided in sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5, except as
(b) Tube sheets. When the crown plate of a combustion chamber is supported by
girders, transmitting the load to the tube plate and back sheet, thus subjecting the ligaments
of the tube sheet to a compressive stress, the maximum allowable working pressure shall be
determined by formulas in sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5, but must not exceed
that given by the following formula:
W=_2CT(P—d)
LPT (31)
nor shall the thickness be less than that given by formula:

LPW -
T-36 pºd, (32)

where
P=least horizontal pitch of tubes, in inches.
L=total length of combustion chamber over the tube sheet and back sheet, in inches.
T=thickness of tube plate, in inches.
C=13,300 (the allowable crushing stress per square inch of cross-sectional area).
d=inside diameter of plain tubes, in inches.
Where tubes are staggered, the vertical distance between the center lines of tubes in
adjacent rows must not be less than
%.V2d P-Edº (33)
(c) Curved bottom plate without reinforcement. The maximum allowable working
pressure and minimum thickness of curved, bottoms of separate combustion chambers
without reinforcement shall be computed by the following formulas:
=} (300T-1.03L) (34)
WR
T=
## 1.03L (35)
300
(d) Curved bottom plate with reinforcement. When the bottoms of combustion cham
bers are reinforced by structural stiffeners, such as angle or T. bars, the minimum thickness of
such bars must be equal to 80 percent of the thickness of the plate reinforced, and the
(F–88)
CONSTRUCTION [52.11-1]
depth of web must be equal to at least one-half the pitch of the stiffeners. The maximum
allowable working pressure and thickness shall be computed by the following formulas:
W–º (36)
T-wºw (37)
The symbols to be used in connection with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section are:
T=thickness of plate, in inches.
R=external radius to which plate is formed, in inches.
L=length of plate between supports measured on a line parallel to the axis of the
boiler, in inches.
The spacing and size of the rivets attaching the stiffeners to the plates shall comply
with the requirements of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5, for stayed surfaces.
(e) Girders or crown bars. The maximum allowable working pressure and the minimum
thickness of crown bars or girders supporting the tops of combustion chambers shall be
computed by the following formulas: -
Cd?T
W= (L–p)PL (38)
on WLP(L–p)
T=**Cº-º (39)
where
L=length of girder between supports (from inside ..? tube sheets to inside of com
bustion chamber back plate), in inches.
P=pitch between girders from center to center, in inches.
p=pitch of supporting bolts, in inches. (Not to exceed maximum allowable pitch
for plate §. see sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3.)
d=depth of girder, in inches.
T= º of girder, in inches (aggregate thickness where girder consists of 2
plates).
C=6,800 where girder is fitted with one supporting bolt.
C= 10,300 where girder is fitted with two or three supporting bolts.
C=11,400 where girder is fitted with four or five supporting bolts.
C= 12,200 where girder is fitted with six or more supporting bolts.
52.10-4 Detail requirements. (a) Where structural steel shapes or forged fittings are
used to form connections between stays and plates that are not self-supporting, the eyes
for rivet or pin connections in such fastenings shall comply with the requirements of section
52.8–4.
(b) Curved bottoms of common combustion chambers shall be considered a flat surface
and stayed in accordance with the requirements of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5.
(c) When plates are flanged to form the combustion chamber and back connections
including the landing for furnace or flue attachments, the minimum inner radius shall be
not less than one and one-half times the thickness of the plate flanged.
FURNACES AND FLUES
52.11-1 Definitions. (a) Furnace, within the meaning of sections 52.11–1 to 52.11–4,
is a fire box or a large flue in which the fuel is burned.
(b) Corrugated furnace is a cylindrical shell wherein corrugations are formed circum
ferentially for additional strength and to provide for expansion. (See figs. C–25, C–26,
C–27, C–28, and C–31.)
(c) Purves ribbed furnace is a cylindrical shell in which ribs or projections are formed
circumferentially to provide additional strength. (See fig. C-29.)
(d) Adamson ring furnace is a cylindrical shell made in short sections, the ends of the
sections being flanged and riveted together through a reinforcing ring. (See fig. C–30.)
(e) Plain furnace is a cylindrical shell usually made in sections united by means of
riveted joints. (See fig. C–32.)
(F–89)
(52.11-2] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
-º-º-º-º-º: - - -
tºº lººt-l.
Leeds Sºspension Bulb/ºrnace AMorison Adºrnace
FIGC-25 FIG.C-26
| 47-a-s, arº - -
i
Deyhion furnace Aox Atarnace
P/G.C-27 PIG.C-28
Avrves Ribbed Aurnace Adamson/ºny/ºrnace

FIG.C-29 PIG.C-30
Brown Furnace -
FIG.C-31
(f) Flues are cylindrical shells made of seamless or lapwelded tubing, or with a riveted
longitudinal joint, the ends being attached by rivets. Their purpose is to provide additional
heating surface and to form a path for the products of combustion. (See fig. C–32.)
52.11–2 Materials. (a) All furnaces shall be constructed of steel plates conforming
to the requirements for firebox quality steel as given in sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10.
(b) §. flues shall be made of firebox quality steel plates conforming to the require
ments of sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10.
(c) Welded flues may be constructed of firebox quality steel plates conforming to the
requirements of sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10 or of wrought iron or steel pipe conforming to
the requirements of sections 51.11–1 to 51.11–9, or 51.12–1 to 51.12–10.
(d) Seamless flues may be constructed of steel tubing conforming to the requirements of
sections 51.11–1 to 51.11–9.
52.11–3 Computations—(a) Corrugated or ribbed furnaces. The maximum allowable
working pressure and minimum thickness of corrugated or ribbed furnaces shall be com
puted by the following formulas:
W–% (40)
h
Where 1-#" (41)
(F–90)
D=external diameter of furnace at bottom of corrugations, in inches.

C=coefficients, as follows:
C=15,700 for Leeds suspension bulb furnace.
= 14,700 for Morison or Deighton furnace.
C=12,500 for Fox, Purves, or Brown furnace. º
Note: The spacing and depth of the corrugations shall be in accordance with figures C–25, C–26, C-27, C–28, C-29, and C-31, as shown in
section 52.11-1. ew furnaces shall be rolled to practically a true circle. The maximum distortion permissible from the true circle shall not
exceed $4 inch, and all new ſurnaces shall be measured by an inspector to ascertain that this tolerance has not been exceeded.
(b) Adamson ring or plain furnaces. The maximum allowable working pressure and
minimum thickness of furnaces of the Adamson ring or plain cylindrical types shall be com
puted by the following formulas:
W=; WD
(300T-103L) (42)
T__52. + 1.03L (43)
-T300
where
D=external diameter of furnace shell, in inches.
L=length of a section for Adamson ring furnaces or riveted flues, or total length
between centers of head rivet seams where the flues are made without circum
ferential ioints.
T=thickness º
plate,
in inches.
(c) Flues. The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum thickness of plain
riveted flues shall be computed by formulas provided in paragraph (b) of this section. For
seamless or welded flues not less than 6 nor more than 18 inches in outside diameter and
subject to external pressure, the following formulas shall be used:
_86670 T–1386D
W 5D (44)
T_D(5W:-1386)
T 86670
(45)
where -

T=thickness of flue, in inches.
D=external diameter of flue, in inches.
Note: Aa a matter of convenience, the following table is computed from the preceding formulas for seamless or welded flues.
TABLE C–2.—MAxIMUM ALLow ABLE WoRKING PREssure AND MINIMUM THICKNESs of SEAMLEss or
WELDED FLUEs SUBJECT To ExTERNAL PREssure
Maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square inch
Outside diameter of flue 100 120 140 160 180 200 zo

(Inches)
Thickness of flue, in inches
6-------------------- 0. 130 0. 137 0. 114 0. 151 0. 158 0. 165 0. 172
7--------------------| 0 152 | 0 161 0. 169 0.177 || 0, 185 0, 193 0. 201

8-------------------- 0.174 0. 184 0. 193 0.202 0.211 0.221 0. 229
9-------------------- 0. 196 0. 206 0.217 0. 228 0.238 0. 248 0.258
10------------------- 0.218 0. 229 0. 241 0. 253 0.264 0.276 0.287
11------------------- 0. 239, 0.252 0.265 0.278 0. 290 0.303 0. 316
12------------------- 0.261 0.275 0.289 0.303 0.317 0.331 0.344
13------------------- 0.283 0.298 0. 313 0.328 0.343 0.359 0.373
14------------------- 0. 305 0.321 0. 337 0.354 0.369 0.386 0. 402
15------------------- 0.326 0.344 0.361 0.379 0. 396 0.414 0. 430
16------------------- 0.348 0.367 0. 385 0.405 0. 422 0.441 0.459
17------------------- 0.370 0.390 0.409 0.430 0.448 0. 469 0. 488
18------------------- 0.392 0.413 0.433 0.455 0.475 0.497 0. 516
52.11–4 Detail requirements. (a) The minimum allowable thickness of furnaces

shall be #s inch, and the maximum allowable thickness %s inch.
(b) Where furnaces are constructed with riveted joints, the minimum efficiency of such
joints shall not be less than 50 percent of the solid plate. Such joints may be of the lap
riveted type provided the furnace does not exceed 36 inches in length or height. All longi
tudinal riveted ioints shall be located at the bottom of the furnace or flue.
(c) The thickness of corrugated and ribbed furnaces shall be ascertained by actual
measurements taken by a duly authorized inspector. Such furnaces shall be drilled by the
manufacturer for a 94-inch pipe tap and fitted with a screw plug which can be removed by
the inspector when taking measurements, the plug to be located as follows:
For Leeds, Morison, Deighton, For, and Brown types of furnaces. At the crest of the
waterside corrugation, not less than four corrugations from either end.
For Purves ribbed furnaces. At the center of the second flat from either end.
Furnaces shall be installed so that the test plug is located at the bottom.
(d) Adamson ring furnaces shall be made in sections not less than 18 inches and not
more than 24 inches in length. They shall be flanged with a radius measured on the fire
side of not less than three times the thickness of the plate and the flat portion of the flange
outside of the radius shall be at least three times the diameter of the rivet holes.
The distance from the edge of the rivet holes to the edge of the flange shall be not less
than the diameter of the rivet holes and the diameter of the rivets before driving shall be at
least 4 inch larger than the thickness of the plate.
The depth of the reinforcing ring between the flanges shall be not less than three times
the diameter of the rivet holes and the ring shall be substantially riveted to the flanges.
The fire edge of the ring shall terminate at or outside the point of tangency to the curve
of the flange and the thickness of the ring shall be not less than one-half inch.
(e) When furnaces are flanged for attachment to the front head or rear tube sheet, the
minimum inner radius shall be not less than twice the thickness of the furnace plate flanged.
(f) Where externally fired boilers are fitted with flues exceeding 5 inches in diameter
the minimum water space between the flues and/or between the wall of a flue and the shell
of the boiler, shall not be less than 3 inches, measured at the middle of the flue.
(g) Corrugated furnaces may be manufactured by any approved process of forge or
fusion welding. Where fusion welding is employed in making the longitudinal joints, the
following ºãº in the requirements for Class I fusion welding will be acceptable:
(1) The customary test plates need not be furnished, .# each furnace has suf
ficient material left on one end to obtain a satisfactory guided side bend specimen, which
shall not be detached until all work and heat treatment on the furnace has been completed.
(2) Radiographic examination of the furnace seam, either before or after corrugations
are formed, is not required, but will be accepted in lieu of the guided side bend specimen.
If radiographs are taken, they shall be examined by and acceptable to an inspector.
BoILER AND SUPERHEATER TUBEs
52.12–1 Definitions. (a) Tubes, within the meaning of sections 52.12–1 to 52.12–4,
are cylindrical shells of comparatively small diameter constituting the main part of the heat
ing surface of a boiler or superheater.
(b) Safe end is a short piece of boiler tube which is usually thicker than the ordinary
tube and is welded to an ordinary tube of lighter gage for the purpose of lengthening it.
(c) Seamless tube is a tube without any longitudinal joint.
(d) Electric-resistance-welded tube is a tube the longitudinal joint of which is made by
the electric-resistance butt welding process and the tube normalized after welding.
. . (e) Lapwelded tube is a tube made with a longitudinal rolled or hammered lapwelded
joint.
(f) Stay tube is a thick-walled tube, the end of which is usually thickened by upsetting
to compensate for threading. Such tubes are used for staying tube sheets into which they
are screwed and expanded.
(F–92)
b º Expanding is the process of enlarging the end of a tube to make it fit tightly in the
tube sheet.
(h) Beading is the process of turning over the protruding end of a tube after expanding
to form a supporting collar for the tube sheet.
(i) Bell-mouthing is the process of flaring the end of a tube beyond where it is expanded
in the tube sheet.
(j) Spirally fluted seamless tube is a tube made with a circular wall corrugated longitu
dinally and bent so that the corrugations run spirally throughout the length of the tube.
52.12–2 Materials and workmanship. (a) Seamless steel boiler tubes shall comply
with the requirements of sections 51.9–1 to 51.9–16 and sections 51.10–1 to 51.10–18 for
such tubes.
(b) Electric-resistance-welded steel and iron boiler tubes shall comply with the require
ments of sections 51.9a–1 to 51.9a–18 for such tubes.
(c) Lapwelded steel and wrought-iron boiler tubes shall comply with the requirements
of sections 51.9–1 to 51.9–16 for .# tubes.
(d) The ends of tubes used in fire-tube boilers shall not extend more than three-eighths
inch beyond the tube sheet. All such tubes shall be rolled tight in the sheet and the ends
shall be beaded over.
(e) (1) The ends of all tubes and nipples shall be expanded and flared not less than one
eighth inch over the diameter of the tube hole on all water tube boilers and headers, or they
may be flared not less than one-eighth inch, rolled and beaded, or flared, rolled and seal
welded, or rolled and seal welded without flaring provided the throat of the weld is not less
than three-sixteenths inch nor more than three-eighths inch.
(2) The ends of tubes or nipples of water tube boilers when not seal welded shall project
through the tube plates or headers not less than one-fourth inch nor more than one-half inch
before flaring. When the tubes enter at an angle, the maximum limit of one-half inch shall
apply only at the point of least projection. -
(3) If the tubes or nipples are welded, they shall be re-expanded to provide for shrinkage
after welding. Welding shall be done by qualified welders using approved electrodes of a
diameter not exceeding five-thirty-seconds inch. Carbon content of the plate, headers, and
tubes shall not exceed 0.35 percent and stress relieving shall not be used after welding.
(f) Spirally fluted or corrugated seamless tubes may be used in connection with fire tube
Or wº oilers, provided they are attached to the tube sheets in the same manner as
other tubes.
52.12–3 Computations. (a) The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum
thickness of seamless and electric-resistance butt-welded carbon and alloy steel boiler and
superheater tubes subject to internal pressure shall be computed by the formulas:
w_*}=009–so (46a)
w_*}=º0- 400 (46b)

2.3 ST S
W=*p, *-ā, (47)
Where
W= Maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square inch.
T=Minimum thickness of tube wall in inches.
D=External diameter of tube in inches.
S=Value in Table C–6 corresponding with operating temperature.
Note: (1) Formula (46a) shall be used for low carbon tubes and Formula (46b) for medium carbon tubes.
(2) No tube shall be allowed a working pressure in excess of that permitted by Formula (47) with the value of Staken from Table C–6,
for the material from which the tubes are made, at a temperature not less than the maximum mean wall temperature of the tube, but not less
than 750° F.
As a matter of convenience the following table has been computed from Formula (46a):
619428°–45—7 (F–93)
[52.12–3) MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
TABLE C–3.–MAXIMUM ALLow ABLE Working PREssure For SEAMLEss AND ELECTRIC-REsistance
WELDED Low CARBON STEEL TUBEs SUBJECT To INTERNAL PREssure
Maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square inch, nearest B. W. G. number and thickness
of tube wall in inches
Outside diameter in
inches
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 7
0.055 0.065 0.075 || 0.085 0.095 || 0.105 || 0.120 0.135 || 0.150 || 0.165 0.180 || 0.200 || 0.220 || 0.240
-50-------------- 330 740 1,150 1,570. 1,980|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----

.75-------------- 120 390 670 950 1,220, 1,500 1,910 -----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----
1.00------------------- 220 430 640 840 1,050. 1,360. 1,670. 1,980|-----|-----|--|--|-----|-----
1.125------------------ 160 350, 530 720 900 1,180 1,450 1,730, 2,000-----|----- - - - - - - -----
1.25 1,770 2,020 -----|-----|-----

1.50 1,430. 1,640. 1,910---...------
1.75 1,180 1,360, 1,600 1,830|-----
2.00 1,000 1,150 1,360, 1,570. 1,770
2.25 850 990 1,180) 1,360, 1,540
2.50 740 860 1,030, 1,200 1,360
2.75 650 760 910 1,060. 1,210
3.00 570 670, 810 950 1,080
3.25 500 600, 720 850, 980
3.50 440, 530, 650, 770 890
3.75 390 480 590 700, 810
4.00 350. 430, 530 640) 740
4.50 280 350 440. 530 620
5.00 220 280 370 450, 530
tubes.
Nors: Maximum allowable working pressures for superheater tubes shall be the same as for boiler
(b) The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum thickness of seamless or
welded boiler tubes less than 6 inches in diameter, and subject to external pressure, shall be
computed by the following formulas:
w_lºgº (48)
_ WD
T-in-0.065 (49)
where
W= maximum allowable working pressure, in pounds per square inch.
T=thickness of tube, in inches.
D=external diameter of tube, in inches.
f
OrmulaS:
: a matter of convenience, the following table has been computed from the preceding
TABLE C–4.—MAXIMUM ALLowABLE WoRKING PREssure AND MINIMUM THIcKNEss For SEAMLEss of:
WELDED BoILER TUBEs LEss THAN 6” IN DIAMETER AND SUBJECT To ExTERNAL PREssure
Maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square inch, nearest B. W. G. number and thickness
Outside diameter of tube in of tube wall in inches
inches
13 12 11 10 9 8 7
0.095 0.105 0.120 0.135 0.150 0.165 0.18
980 ------------------------------
660 800 940 ----------
570 680 800 920
490 600 700 810
430 530 630 720
400 480 560 650
330 400 470 540
310 370 430 500
280 340 400 460
250 300 350 410
220 270 320 360
200 240 280 330
---------- 230 270 300
- -- - ---- -- 220 260 300
TABLE C–5.—MAxIMUM ALLowABLE Working PREssure IN Pounds PER SquarE INCH, AND MINIMUM
WALL THICKNEss IN INCHES, FoR SPIRALLY FLUTED SEAMLEss TUBEs
Maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square

inch, and minimum wall thickness in inches
Nominal diameter inches
0.116 0.128 0.144 0.160 0.176
*--------------------------------------------------- 100 140 195 ----------------

*%-------------------------------------------------- 90 125 170 205 ||--------
2%------------------------------------------------- 80 115 150 195 ||--------
2%-------------------------------------------------- 70 105 140 180 - - - - - - - -
8----------------------------------------------------------- 90 125 165 195
8%--------------------------------------------------|-------- 85 115 150 180
8%--------------------------------------------------|-------- 75 105 140 170
TABLE C–6.—VALUES or “S”
Maximum operating temperatures degrees F

Type of material
650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1,000
51.9 Grade A Seamless------- 9, 400 9,000 8, 150 7, 150 5, 850 4, 400 2, 600 |-------
51.9a Grade A Welded------- 8,000 7, 650 6, 950 6, 100 4, 950 3, 750 2, 200 -------
51.9a Grade C Welded------- 10, 200 9,700 8, 450 7,050 5, 400 3, 750 2, 200 |-------
51.9a Grade D Welded------- 8,000 7, 650 7,300 6, 700 5, 800 4, 750 3, 250 1, 700
51.10 Low Carbon Seamless---| 9, 400 9,000 8,600 7, 900 6, 800 5, 600 3,800 2,000
51.10 Medium Carbon Seam
less---------------------- 12,000 11, 400 | 10, 400 9, 100 7, 400 5, 600 3,800 2,000
51.10 Grade T1-------------- 11,000 || 11, 000 || 11, 000 || 10, 750 10, 500 || 10, 000 8, 000 4, 400
51.10 Grade T1a------------- 12,000 | 12,000 | 12,000 11, 500 || 11, 000 | 10,000 8,000 4,400
52.12–4 Detail requirements. (a) Seamless or electric-resistance butt welded tubes

shall be used in all construction where the tubes are subject to internal pressure.
(b) It shall be permissible to weld on safe ends or lengthen superheater tubes, provided
that either the forge welding or electric-resistance butt welding method is employed.
SUPERHEATERs, HEADERs, WATER WALLs, EconoMIZERs
52.13-1 Definitions. (a) Superheaters, within the meaning of sections 52.13–1 to
52.13–5, are appliances for the purpose of increasing the temperature of steam.
(b) Header, a hollow forging or casting, or a pipe, serving as a manifold to which tubes
are connected.
(c) Water wall, a series of tubes or elements spaced along or integral with a wall of a
furnace to protect the wall and provide additional heating surface. -
(d) Economizer, a feed-water heater usually located in the uptake or casing of a boiler
to absorb heat from the waste gases.
52.13–2 Drawings and specifications. Manufacturers of superheaters, headers, water
walls, and economizers, not previously approved, shall submit drawings or blueprints and
specifications to the Commandant, and such drawings and specifications must be approved
by the Commandant before the apparatus can be installed on vessel subject to the jurisdic
tion of the Coast Guard. -
52.13–3 Materials. (a) Headers or fittings, used in connection with these appur
tenances, shall be constructed of wrought steel, in accordance with the requirements of
sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10, inclusive, or sections 51.11–1 to 51.11–9, inclusive, or of wrought
iron conforming to the requirements of sections 51.12–1 to 51.12–10, inclusive, or cast steel
made in conformance with the requirements of sections 51.17–1 to 51.17–12, inclusive.
Equivalent material may be used if approved by the Commandant. (See sections 51.1–18
and 52.1–13.) Ends of headers may be closed by plugs conforming to the requirements of
sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10, inclusive (Class A material), or sections 51.21–1 to 51.21–13,
inclusive, or sections 51.22–1 to 51.22–11, inclusive (Class B material).
(F–95)
(b) Tubes used in the construction of superheaters shall conform to the requirements
of sections 51.9–1 to 51.9–16, sections 51.9a–1 to 51.9a–18, or sections 51.10–1 to 51.10–18.
52.13–4 Computations. (a) The maximum allowable working pressure of cylindrical
headers shall be determined by Formulas (1) or (2).
(b) For flat surfaces of wrought iron, forged steel, or cast steel:
S(T-0.094)?
w—sº D2 (52)
W
T=0.004+DA gy (53)
where
T = thickness, in inches.
S =minimum tensile strength of material, in pounds per square inch.
D =distance between supports of flat surface, in inches.
C =0.7 for forged steel or wrought iron.
C =0.9 for cast steel.
C = 1.8 for bronze heads.
(c) The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum thickness of tubes shall
be in accordance with the tables and formulas provided in sections 52.12–1 to 52.12–4.
52.13–5 Detail requirements. (a) Where superheaters are fitted in conjunction with
water-tube boilers, they may be considered as a part of the boiler, provided all of the pipe
connections between boiler and superheater and §. superheaters be made of seamless
steel pipe having a minimum thickness computed by the formula specified for piping in
section 55.19–6 (b). Fittings used in making such connections shall be of ſº Or cast
steel. Superheaters connected to the boiler drum by a number of tubes spaced along the
drum may also be considered a part of the boiler. Under these conditions stop valves may
be located at the combined outlet from the superheaters instead of on the boiler drum.
The pipe connections shall be made as short as practicable to be consistent with proper
provision for expansion.
(b) An approved safety valve shall be installed on the outlet header of all superheaters,
the diameter of which shall be not less than 1% inches. Such safety valve may be set to
relieve at a pressure below the settings of the drum safety valves, and its relieving capacity
at the reduced pressure may be included in determining the total relieving capacity of the
safety valves for the boiler as a whole, provided there are no intervening valves between the
drum and the superheater and provided the discharge capacity of the safety valves on the
drum is at least 75 percent of the total required capacity for #.
entire boiler.
(c) Drains: Superheater headers in which it is possible for water to accumulate shall
be fitted with adequate means for draining the headers.
SAFETY WALVES AND RELIEF WALVES
52.14–1 Definitions. (a) Safety valve is a valve designed to open automatically to

relieve excess pressure in the boiler or pressure vessel to which it is attached.
(b) Spring-loaded safety valve is a safety valve fitted with a spring to hold the valve
against its seat and to allow it to open at a given pressure. This term applies to pop safety
valves of various forms. -
(c) Pressure loaded pilot actuated safety valve is one which is held in the closed position
by steam pressure and controlled in operation by a pilot actuator valve.
(d) Lever safety valve is a safety valve having the disk held on its seat by the action of
a weight hung on i. which is pivoted on a fulcrum.
(e) Safety valve body is that part of the safety valve which is in direct contact with
and subject to the working pressure.
(f) Relief valve is a valve constructed on the general design of safety valves to relieve
excess pressure. It may be used for service where an approved safety valve is not required
by the rules in this subchapter.
52.14–2 Design, material, and workmanship. (a) Manufacturers of safety valves
not previously approved shall submit drawings or blueprints and specifications to the Com
mandant, and such º and specifications must be approved by the Commandant
before the safety valve can be installed on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast
(F–96)
Guard. In the event of the approval of the safety valve by the Commandant, the manu
facturer shall upon request furnish such additional blueprints and specifications as may be
necessary for the use of each District Coast Guard Officer and cer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, and, unless the design of the safety valve is changed, no further blueprints and
specifications will be required.
(b) Bodies of safety valves having nominal diameters exceeding 2% inches shall be
made of forged steel, cast steel, or of such other equivalent materials as may be approved by
the Commandant.
(c) Bodies of safety valves having nominal diameters not exceeding 2% inches may be
made of bronze conforming to the requirements of sections 51.20–1 to 51.20–10, inclusive,
provided the steam temperature does not exceed 450° F.
(d) Lever or weighted safety valves now installed may be continued in use and may be
repaired, but, when renewals are necessary, lever or weighted safety valves shall not be used.
(e) Springs of safety valves shall be made of the best º spring steel, and the
length and number of free coils of such springs shall be such that, with the maximum lift of
the valve, it will be impossible to compress the spring solid. Such springs shall be capable
of withstanding a test of being closed solid for a period of 10 minutes, and, upon being
released, shall not show a permanent set of more than %s inch in the length of the spring.
f) Disks, seats, stems, adjusting rings, etc., shall be made of materials that possess
heat-resisting qualities suitable for the temperature to which they are exposed, and are
noncorrosive under service conditions.
52.14–3 Computations. (a) The minimum size of safety valves required for any
boiler shall be based upon their actual relieving capacity in pounds of steam per hour, but in
no case shall the inlet diameter be less than 1% inches or more than 4% inches.
(b) The total relieving capacity of the safety valves shall be such as not to permit the
pressure in the boiler to rise more than 6 percent above the safe working pressure allowed,
nor shall the combined relieving capacity of the safety valves, as certified to by the safety
valve manufacturer, be less than the maximum capacity of the boiler as certified to by the
boiler manufacturer. The boiler manufacturer shall certify the normal as well as the maxi
mum generating capacity of the boiler. In the absence of such certification the maximum
generating capacity of the boiler shall be determined by the formula:
E=HO
wherein
E=total evaporation of boiler, in pounds of steam per hour.
H=total steam generating surface of boiler, in square feet.
C=14 for water-tube boilers, using oil or pulverized coal as fuel.
C=11 for fire-tube boilers, using oil or pulverized coal as fuel.
O=8 for water-tube boilers, using coal as fuel.
C=6 for fire-tube boilers, using coal as fuel.
(c) The approval of safety valve installations by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspec
tion, shall, whenever practicable, be based upon an actual demonstration of the relieving
capacity of the valves after installation on the boiler.
(d) On boilers which are not fitted with superheaters, an accumulation test shall be
made by shutting off the steam outlets from the boiler, except such as may be necessary to
operate the boiler. The fires shall be forced to the maximum capacity for a period of 15
minutes for fire-tube boilers and 7 minutes for water-tube boilers. During this test period,
the steam pressure shall not at any time rise more than 6 percent above the maximum
allowable working pressure.
(e) In place of the accumulation test on boilers fitted with superheaters which may be
subject to damage through such test, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished by the boiler
manufacturer showing the maximum generating capacity of the boiler, or the capacity shall
be calculated in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.
(f) The total capacity of the safety valve installation as guaranteed by the manufac
turer, including the superheater safety valve subject to the provisions of Section 52.13–5 (b),
shall be not less than the manufacturer's guaranteed maximum º capacity of the
boiler, or the calculated capacity in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.
(g) Safety valves shall be set to relieve at a pressure not in excess of the maximum
working pressure allowed by the certificate of inspection, and, where this for any reason is
(F–97)
lower than the pressure for which the boiler and the safety valves were originally designed,
an accumulation test, except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, shall §: made to
insure that the relieving capacity of the safety valves is sufficient for the lower pressure.
(h) Safety valves certified in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this
section shall be accepted as to type, provided they have the same flow characteristics and
dimensions of orifice. Individual tests will not be necessary if the design and setting adjust
ments remain unchanged.
(i) In the event the maximum steam generating capacity of the boiler is increased by
any means, the relieving capacity of the safety valves shall be checked, and increased if
found necessary.
52.14–4 Installation. (a) The steam drum of every boiler shall be equipped with not
less than two safety valves of equal size. On those river steamers whose boilers are con
nected in batteries without means of shutting off one boiler from another, each battery of
boilers shall be treated as a single boiler and equipped with not less than two safety valves
of equal size.
(b) Safety valves shall be placed in an upright position with the stems vertical, except
in the case of specially designed and approved valves, and shall be fitted with an efficient
avity drain from the bottom of the discharge chamber, such drain to have a nominal
iameter of not less than %-inch pipe size.
(c) Safety valves shall be connected directly to the boiler, except that where conditions
of installation will not permit of direct connections, they may be attached to a forged or
cast steel fitting made as short as practicable. Safety valves are not to be connected to any
fittings which are equipped with outlets for any purpose other than the escape of steam
through the safety valves. This rule does not apply to superheater safety valves.
(d) Safety valves attached to the shell of the boiler or steam drum may be fitted with
internal dry pipes, provided such dry pipes have a wall thickness at least equal to standard
commercial pipe thickness for their diameter. The area of the openings in such dry pipes
shall be at least twice the nominal area of the dry pipe. Openings in dry pipes shall be as
near as practicable to the valve and shall be slotted or drilled, the width of the slots to be
not less than % inch, or the diameter of the holes to be not less than % inch. Where dry pipes
are used, they shall be provided with drains at each end to prevent an accumulation of water.
(e) Where two or more safety valves are connected to a common escape pipe, the area
of the escape pipe shall at least equal the combined area of all the outlets of the safety valves
discharging into it and in all cases this area shall be sufficient to provide for the escape of
steam within the 6-percent excess provided in section 52.14–3 (b). Where it is desired to
connect other piping into the safety-valve escape pipes, additional capacity shall be pro
vided. Adequate drains shall be fitted at the lowest point of all escape pipes, and such pipes
shall be led as directly as practicable without pockets. Escape pipes shall be supported so
that no stress of the pipe is transmitted to the § of the safety valve, and adequate means
provided to allow for expansion.
52.14–5 Detail requirements. (a) Safety valves shall be set under steam pressure
by duly authorized inspectors.
(b) It shall be the duty of inspectors at the annual inspection of all vessels subject to
the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard to check individually j. setting of each boiler safety
valve and make any adjustments that may be necessary to keep the boiler within the allow
able safe working pressure. After adjusting the boiler safety valves, the inspector shall seal
each valve separately with the official seal of the Coast Guard.
(c) Chief engineers are instructed that, in taking charge of the power plant of a vessel,
it is their duty to examine all the safety valves, and, if any seals are found broken, or there
is evidence that they have been tampered with, it shall be their duty to report the same in
writing to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in whose district the vessel happens to
be. #at any time it becomes necessary to break the seal on a safety valve for any purpose, it
shall be the duty of the chief engineer to advise the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in
writing at the next port of call, giving the reason for breaking the seal, and requesting that
the valve be examined and adjusted by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.
(d) Each safety valve separately mounted, and each E. of safety valves when mounted
on one body (duplex) or a Y base, shall be fitted with mechanical means of sufficient strength
to raise the valve from its seat with no pressure on the boiler. Such mechanism shall be
connected by suitable relieving gear so arranged that the valves may be lifted from their seats
from the fire-room or engine-room floor.
(F–98)
Where, on account of high pressures, it is impracticable to fit a relieving gear to raise the
safety valve from its seat in order to relieve the boiler of pressure, suitable piping, and a valve
having a relieving capacity of not less than that of the safety valve(s), may be connected from
the boiler to the escape pipe or condenser. The valve shall be arranged so that it can be
operated from the fire-room or engine-room floor.
(e) Each boiler safety valve shall be supplied with gags or clamps for holding the disk
on its seat when the hydrostatic pressure is being applied to the one boiler. These gags or
clamps shall be carried on board the vessel at all times. Gagging a safety valve by means of a
set screw through the top of the casing or by screwing down the compression or adjusting
screw to hold the valve on its seat while hydrostatic pressure is being applied is prohibited.
52.14–6 Marking of safety valves. Approved safety valves shall be marked by the
manufacturer either by means of a plate attached to the body of the safety valve or by
stamping or casting the following data on the valve casting itself:
1) Name or registered trade-mark of manufacturer.
(2) Serial number of safety valve.
(3) Inlet diameter of safety valve.
(4) Operating pressure and guaranteed discharge capacity—pounds of steam per hour
at that pressure.
(5) Safe working pressure of the body of the valve.
(6) Blow down, in pounds per square inch.
BoILER MoUNTINGs AND ATTACHMENTs
52.15–1 Definitions. (a) Mountings, within the meaning of the rules in this sub
chapter, are connections, distance pieces, valves, or fittings attached directly to the boiler.
(b) Main stop valve is a valve usually connected directly to the boiler for the purpose of
shutting off the steam from the main steam line.
(c) Auxiliary stop valve is a valve usually connected directly to the boiler for the purpose
of shutting off the steam from the auxiliary lines (including the whistle lines).
(d) Manifold is a fitting with two or more branches having valves either attached by
bolting or integral with the fitting.
(e) Feed valve is a valve in the feed-water line which controls the boiler feed.
(f) Blow-off valve is a valve connected directly to the boiler for the purpose of blowing
out water, scum, or sediment.
(g) Dry pipe is a perforated or slotted pipe placed in the highest part of the steam space
of a boiler to prevent priming.
(h) Water column is a fitting or tube equipped with a water glass attached to a boiler for
the purpose of indicating the water level.
(i) Test cocks are small cocks on a boiler for proving the water level.
º Salinometer cocks are cocks attached to a boiler for the purpose of drawing off a
sample of water for tests.
(k) Fusible plugs are plugs made with a bronze casing and a tin filling which melts at a
temperature of 450° to 500°F. They are intended to melt in the event of low water and thus
warn the engineer on watch.
52.15–2 Materials and workmanship. (a) Boiler mountings or attachments shall be
made of steel forgings conforming to the requirements of sections 51.15–1 to 51.15–14; steel
castings conforming to the requirements of sections 51.17–1 to 51.17–12; or, where the
temperature does not exceed 450° F., they may be made of bronze castings conforming to
the requirements of sections 51.20–1 to 51.20–10.
(b) Boiler mountings and attachments having diameters of 1% inches and over, must be
fitted with flanged ends and be bolted directly to the boiler.
(c) Where bolt holes extend through the plating of a boiler or pressure vessel, the plate
shall be threaded to receive the bolt. The bolt head, or, in the case of stud bolts, a nut with
washer and grommet, shall be fitted on the inside. Where stud bolts are used, with the holes
not extending through the plate, the stud shall be screwed into the plate a distance at least
equal to the diameter of the stud over the threads.
(d) Where the temperature exceeds 500°F., all bolting material shall conform to the
requirements of sections 51.16–1 to 51.16–8 and sections 51.16a–1 to 51.16a–9. For tem
peratures not in excess of 500°F., commercial bolting material conforming to the require
ments of A. S. T. M. Designation. A 107-40, or equivalent thereto may be used.
(F–99)
(e) The use of cast iron for mountings, fittings, valves, or cocks attached directly to
boilers operating at pressures exceeding 30 pounds per square inch is prohibited.
52.15–4 Main and auxiliary stop valves. (a) All valves shall be made by an approved
manufacturer and shall be marked as specified in section 55.19–3 (s).
(b) All valves shall close with a right-hand motion of the wheel when facing the end of
the stem, Stop valves of the globe or similar type shall be installed to seat against the pres
sure, and shall be designed to indicate at a glance whether they are opened or closed.
(c) Where the diameter of stop valves exceeds 6 inches, they shall be fitted with bypass
valves for the purpose of heating the line and equalizing the pressure before opening the valves.
(d) Inspectors are required to carefully examine all steam lines to satisfy themselves
* adequate and dependable drainage is provided to prevent an accumulation of water in
the piping. -
52.15–5 Manifolds. Manifolds shall comply with the requirements for other mount
ings or fittings specified in section 52.15–4.
52.15–6 Feed valves. (a) Feed stop valves shall be attached directly to the boiler
or its economizer. Where conditions of installation will not permit of direct attachment
forged or cast steel fittings made as short as practicable may be used.
(b) All feed lines shall be provided with a feed check valve adjacent to the feed stop
valve. An approved form of feed-water regulator may be interposed between the check
and the stop valve.
(c) All boilers’ except small donkey boilers and those in installations fitted with the
unit feed system, shall be equipped with two connections for supplying feed water, and,
where practicable, these connections shall be through separate openings.
(d) When the unit feed system is fitted, it shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) There shall be at least two boilers in the installation.
(2) Each boiler shall be provided with an independently driven main feed pump capable
of supplying the boiler at its normal required operating capacity.
(3) There shall also be provided an auxiliary, independently driven feed pump of
equal capacity with the main feed pump which can be operated in place of, and in conjunction
with, the main feed pump. In vessels having two boilers, there shall be provided one such
auxiliary pump for each boiler. In vessels where three or more boilers are installed not
more than two boilers are to be served by one of the auxiliary pumps.
(4) Feed check and stop valves and feed-water regulators, where fitted, shall be installed
in the feed lines as prescribed in paragraphs (a) and º -
(5) Feed-water heaters and feed-water regulators, where installed, shall be fitted with
bypasses. Feed-water regulator bypasses shall be fitted with stop and check valves or
combined stop-check valves or shall be so arranged that the regular stop and check valves
are in operation while the bypass is in use.
(6) No auxiliary feed line or connection need be fitted.
(e) Feed water shall not be discharged into a boiler in such a way that it will be delivered
directly against surfaces exposed to hot gases, or to the radiant heat of the fire, or close to
a riveted joint.
52.15-7 Blow-off valves. (a) Boilers shall be fitted with a surface and a bottom
blow-off valve or cock attached directly to the boiler or to a distance piece. The surface
blow-off valve shall be located within the permissible range of the water level, or fitted with
a scum pan or pipe at this level. The bottom blow-off valve shall be attached to the lowest
art of the boiler or fitted with an internal pipe leading to the lowest point inside the boiler:
rovided, That water-tube boilers designed for working pressures of 350 pounds per square
inch or over are not required to be fitted with a surface blow-off valve.
(b) Where blow-off pipes are exposed to direct heat from the fire, they shall be protected
by fire brick or other suitable heat-resisting material.
(c) Where such blow-off valves are connected to a common discharge from two or more
boilers, a nonreturn valve must be provided in the pipe from each boiler to prevent accidental
blowback in case the blow-off valve is left open.
52.15–8 Dry pipes. Dry pipes may be fitted to the stop valves. They shall comply
with the requirements in section 52.14–4 (d) for dry pipes fitted to safety valves.
52.15–9 Fusible plugs. All boilers, except water-tube boilers, and low-pressure heating
boilers operating at pressures not in excess of 30 pounds per square inch, shall be fitted with
approved fusible . located as follows: - -
(a) Wertical *. ers shall

be fitted with one fusible plug located in a tube not more
than 2 inches below the lowest gage cock.
(F–100)
(b) Externally fired, cylindrical boilers, with flues, shall have one plug fitted to the
shell immediately below the fire line not less than 4 feet from the front end.
(c) Fire box, Scotch, and other types of shell boilers not specifically provided for,
having a combustion chamber common to all furnaces, shall have one plug fitted at or near
the center of the crown sheet of the combustion chamber.
(d) Double-ended boilers having individual combustion chambers for each end, which
combustion chambers are common to all the furnaces in one end of the boiler, shall have
one plug fitted at or near the center of the crown sheet of each combustion chamber.
(e) Boilers constructed with a separate combustion chamber for each individual furnace
shall be fitted with a fusible plug in the center of the crown sheet of each combustion chamber.
(f) Boilers of types not herein provided for shall be fitted with at least one fusible plug
of such dimensions and located in a part of the boiler as will, in the judgment of the inspec
tor, best meet the purposes for which it is intended.
(g) Fusible plugs shall be so fitted that the smaller end of the filling is in direct contact
with the radiant heat of the fire, and shall be at least 1 inch higher on the water side than the
plate or flue in which they are fitted, and in no case less than 1 inch below the lowest per
missible water level as defined in paragraph (h).
(h) The lowest permissible water jº shall be determined as follows:
(1) Wertical fire-tube boilers, one-half of the length of the tubes above the lower tube
sheets.
(2) Wertical submerged tube boiler, 1 inch above the upper tube sheet.
(3) Internally-fired fire-tube boilers with combustion chambers integral with the boiler,
2 inches above the highest part of the combustion chamber.
.
of tubes.
Horizontal-return tubular and dry back Scotch boilers, 2 inches above the top row
(5) The lowest permissible water level for all water-tube boilers shall be determined at
the time drawings .Pthe boilers are submitted for approval.
(i) Fusible plugs shall be cleaned and examined . the inspector at each annual inspec
tion, and oftener if necessary, and if, in the inspector's opinion, the condition of the plugs
is satisfactory, they may be continued in use.
52.15–10 Pressure gages. (a) Each single-ended boiler shall be fitted with a reliable
steam gage, the dial of which shall be graduated to approximately double the pressure at
which the safety valve is set, but in no case less than one and one-half times this pressure.
Each double-ended boiler shall be fitted with two such pressure gages, one on either end
of the boiler. Gages must be located where º can be easily seen.
(b) The error in reading at any point to the maximum reading to which the scale is
graduated, shall not exceed 1% percent of the maximum reading to which the scale is gradu
ated; except that the error in reading at the graduation indicating the working pressure
shall not exceed one-half of 1 percent of the maximum reading to . the scale is graduated.
52.15–11 Water indicators. (a) Each boiler shall have two independent means of
indicating the water level in the boiler, one of which shall be a gage glass. The secondary
indicator may consist of a gage glass, or other device approved i.
the Commandant, or
where the allowable steam pressure does not exceed 250 pounds per square inch, three test
cocks attached directly to the head or shell of the boiler. Where the working pressure
exceeds 250 pounds per square inch, the gage glasses shall be of the flat type instead of the
common tubular type.
(b) Glass water gages shall be so located that the lowest visible part of the glass is not
lower than the lowest permissible water level, as determined by section 52.15–9 (h). The
lowest gage cock shall be located 2 inches higher than the lowest visible part of the gage
glass, except that for horizontal boilers 48 inches or less in diameter they may be located at
the lowest permissible water level.
(c) Double-ended fire-tube boilers shall be equipped as specified in paragraphs (a) and
(b), except that a water-gage glass, and three water-gage cocks must be installed on each
end of the boiler.
(d) Externally fired flue boilers, such as are used on central western river vessels, shall
be equipped as specified in paragraphs (a) and (b), except that float gages may be substituted
for gage glasses.
(e) Gage glasses shall be fitted with shut-off valves or cocks at the top and bottom and
shall have valved drains.
(F-101)
(f) When water columns are provided, they shall be fitted to the heads or shells of boilers
or drums with shut-off valves attached directly to the boilers or drums, or if necessary, con
nected thereto by an approved distance piece both at the top and bottom of the water
columns. Water column piping shall not be fitted inside the uptake, the smoke box, or the
casing.
52.15–12 Salinometer cocks. In vessels operating in salt water, each boiler shall be
equipped with a salinometer cock or valve which must be fitted directly to the boiler in a
convenient position. They must not be attached to the water gage or water column.
EvapoRATORS, HEATERs, TRAPs, SEPARATORs, PRESSURE WESSELs, AND MISCELLANEous
- APPLIANCES
52.16–1 Approval. (a) Evaporators, heaters, traps, valves and fittings, separators,
É. yessels, and miscellaneous appliances are subject to approval by the Commandant
efore being installed on vessels coming under the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard.
(b) Manufacturers desiring to obtain approval of such appurtenances are required to
submit detail drawings and specifications for consideration by the Commandant.
52.16–2 Definitions. (a) Evaporator is a pressure vessel fitted with steam coils or
other means of heating for the purpose of furnishing fresh water for boiler feed or other uses.
(b) Feed-water heater is a pressure vessel fitted with heating coils or other means of
heating feed water.
(c) Fuel-oil heater is a pressure vessel fitted with means for heating of fuel oil.
(d) Steam separator is a pressure vessel fitted in the steam-pipe line and equipped with
means for extracting the moisture from steam.
(e) Steam trap is a pressure vessel designed to trap and discharge water from steam
8,CeS.
52.16–3 Materials and workmanship. (a) If the º and appliances
covered by sections 52.16–1 to 52.16–7 are constructed of plates with riveted joints, they
shall conform to all the requirements contained in the º: in this subchapter for such
construction.
(b) The appurtenances and appliances covered by sections 52.16–1 to 52.16–7 may be
constructed of }. following materials:
Steel castings, conforming to the requirements of sections 51.17–1 to 51.17–12.
Bronze castings, conforming to the requirements of sections 51.20–1 to 51.20–10, pro
vided the temperature to which they are subjected does not exceed 450° F.
Cast iron, conforming to the requirements of sections 51.18–1 to 51.18–10, for appur
tenances and appliances not subject to shock, provided the maximum allowable working pres
sure does not exceed 30 pounds per square inch and the temperature is not in excess of 450°F.
This pressure limitation of 30 pounds per square inch does not apply to steam traps. For
pipe fittings and valves see section 55.19–3.
(c) Flanges cast integral with shells or heads shall have a fillet with a radius not less
than the thickness of the necks to which they are attached.
(d) Where manholes or other large openings are provided in castings, the structure
adjacent to the openings shall be reinforced by increasing the thickness of the material around
the opening, or by substantial ribs or webs to compensate for the material omitted in the
opening. The corners of rectangular openings shall have fillets with radii not less than
the thickness of the body of the material.
52.16–4 Computations. (a) The maximum allowable working pressure on cylindrical
shells of steel plate or cast steel shall be computed by formulas in Section 52.2 and the heads
by formulas in Section 52.5 of this Part.
(b) The maximum allowable working pressure for flat surfaces, such as ends, doors,
or covers, shall be computed by the following formula:
W–% - (60)
(F-102)
where
T=thickness of casting, in inches.
D=diameter of bolt circle of cover, in inches, for circular surfaces; or, maximum
C diagonal length to the bolt line for square or rectangular surfaces.
=20,000.
52.16–5 Bolting. (a) Bolting material used for securing heads, doors, or covers shall
comply with the requirements of A. S. T. M. Designation. A 107-40 provided the tempera
ture does not exceed 500° F.; if above 500° F., the bolting ºf shall conform to the
requirements of sections 51.16–1 to 51.16–8 and sections 51.16a–1 to 51.16a–9.
(b) In computing the total load on the bolts of the cover or door, the dimensions taken
shall be from center to center of the bolt hole.
(c) The maximum allowable stress due to the pressure on the effective area of the bolt
shall not exceed 6,000 pounds per square inch of cross-sectional area where the diameter
of the bolt is less than % inch; for diameters of 7% inch and over, the maximum allowable
stress shall be 7,000 pounds per square inch.
52.16–6 Detail requirements. (a) Evaporators and heaters shall be fitted with an
approved safety valve set to blow at their respective maximum allowable working pressures.
(b) Manufacturers of equipment covered by sections 52.16–1 to 52.16–7 are
required to stamp in a conspicuous place on such equipment the following data:
TEST PRESSURE DATE
(c) In addition to the safety valve, evaporators shall be equipped with an efficient
water-level indicator, a pressure gage, and a blow-down valve.
(d) Shells made of plate construction shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test equal
to one and one-half times the working pressure for which it is designed. All coils and all
cast shells shall be tested to twice their respective working pressures, these tests to be
witnessed by a duly authorized inspector.
52.16–7 Safety valves for evaporators. (a) The capacity of safety valves required
for use on evaporators shall be determined as follows:
(b) The steam inlet to the coils shall have an orifice the diameter of which does not
exceed that found by the following formula:
_T) |Pº.
d=DW;
where
d=diameter of steam inlet or orifice of coils, in inches.
D=required diameter of safety valve, in inches.
£º. working pressure on evaporator shell.
=absolute pressure of steam entering coils.
n=number of safety valves on evaporator.
(c) On new installations the safety valves shall be set to the working pressure, and
tested for accumulation in accordance with the requirements of section 52.14–3 (d) except
that the duration of tests shall be for a period of 5 minutes.
(F–103)
PART 53–INSTALLATION
Sec. Sec.
53.17–1. Foundations. 53.17–3 Dampers.
53.17–2 Protection of adjacent structure. 53.17–4#ºn of auxiliary or donkey boilers.
Section 53.17–1 Foundations. (a) Drawings or blueprints showing details of proposed
foundations, or saddles, for boilers and the proposed means of bracing j. in the vessel
shall be submitted to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the district where the in
stallation is being made, for his approval. Provision shall be made in such foundations for
expansion of the boilers when heated.
(b) Boilers shall be provided with chocks to prevent movement in the event of collision
unless a bolted or riveted construction satisfactorily provides for this contingency.
53.17-2 Protection of adjacent structure. (a) Boilers shall be so placed that all parts
may be readily accessible for inspection and repair.
(b) In vessels having a double bottom or other extensive surfaces directly below the
boiler, as in the case of keels and girders in wooden vessels, the distance between such surface
and a boiler shall in no case be less than 8 inches at the lowest part of a cylindrical boiler and
not less than 18 inches under the pans of water-tube boilers.
(c) In certain types of vessels where the boiler foundation forms the ash pit, such founda
tion must be efficiently ventilated, except in cases where the ash pit is partially filled with
water at all times.
(d) The pans of oil-burning, water-tube boilers shall be arranged to prevent oil from
leaking into th.
bilges and shall be lined with fire brick or other nonconducting material.
(e) In vessels built of wood or having wood structure adjacent to boilers or uptakes
such structure shall be protected by noncombustible, nonconducting material covered with
sheet metal, and the distance between the wooden structure and the uptakes and funnels
shall in no case be less than 12 inches.
The distance between a boiler and a compartment containing fuel oil shall not be
less than 24 inches at the back end of a boiler and 18 inches elsewhere, except that for a
cylindrical part of a boiler or a knuckle in the casing of a water-tube boiler, these distances
may be reduced to 18 and 12 inches, respectively, provided the requirements of paragraph
(a) are complied with. --
(g) Drip pans.—All oil-burning boilers shall be provided with oil-tight drip pans under
the burners and elsewhere where necessary to prevent oil draining into the bilges.
53.17–3 Dampers. Dampers should ordinarily not be installed in the funnels or up
takes of vessels using oil or pulverized coal as fuel, but where dampers are installed, they shall
be locked in a wide-open position when the boilers are in operation.
53.17–4 Installation of auxiliary or donkey boilers. The rules in this part for the
installation of boilers apply to all boilers installed on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of
the Coast Guard, including auxiliary or donkey boilers.
(F–105)
PART 54—INSPECTION
Sec. Sec.
54.18—1 Preparation of boilers for inspection. 54.18–8 Dangerous places.
54.18–2 Tests and inspection of new boilers. 54.18–9 Sea chests, sea valves, and strainers.
54.18–3 Tests and inspection of boilers in service. 54.18–10 Inspection of quarters.
54.18–4 Boilers and main steam pipes. 54.18–11 Trial-trip observance.
54.18—5 Inspection of mountings and attachments. 54.18–12 Unfired pressure vessels.
54.18—6 Fire-prevention inspection. 54.18–13 Inspectors not to accept statements.
54.18–7 Engine-room signals.
Section 54.18—1 Preparation of boilers for inspection. It shall be the duty of the
chief engineer to have the boilers which are to be inspected filled with water, safety valves
secured by gags or clamps, tubes swept, back connections and furnaces cleaned out, grate
bars and #.
walls removed, and to have the water in boilers at a temperature not more
than 180° F. for water-tube boilers and not more than 100°F. for fire-tube boilers.
54.18–2 Tests and inspection of new boilers. (a) When a new boiler is installed in a
vessel, a hydrostatic pressure equal to one and one-half times the working pressure shall be
applied before the boilers are covered, and it shall be the duty of the inspector to make a
careful examination of the exterior of the boiler, furnaces, back connections, tubes, and
of every part that can be examined while under test, in order to satisfy himself that there are
*. defects in workmanship or material, and that the boiler shows no signs of weakness under
the test.
(b) After the test, the boiler shall be emptied, manhole and handhole plates removed,
and, unless it is physically impossible to do so, the inspector shall enter the boiler and make a
thorough examination of the interior to satisfy himself that the workmanship is good, that
no defects have occurred due to the hydrostatic test, and that the boiler is safe for the maxi
mum worki ressure for which it was approved. Where it is not possible for the inspector
to enter the boiler, he shall specifically state in his report the reasons for not so doing.
(c) Upon completion of the hydrostatic test and the boiler examination under the pre
ceding paragraphs (a) and (b) and after the installation of the brick work and lagging, those
boilers that are to be operated at a pressure equal to or in excess of 400 pounds per square
inch gage, or at a steam temperature equal to or in excess of 700°F., may, at the request of
the owner or builder, be given an additional test under steam in accordance with the follow
Ing:
The steam pressure applied to the boilers and to the main and auxiliary steam piping
shall not exceed one and one-quarter times the maximum safe working pressure to be allowed.
Sufficient steam is to be bled from the superheater outlet, either by operating auxiliary ma
chinery, or discharging to the atmosphere, so that service temperatures will not be exceeded.
For this test the regular safety valve springs should be replaced by springs designed to operate
at the test pressure. After the conclusion of this test the test springs are to be replaced with
springs designed to operate at the maximum allowable working pressure.
The inspector shall during the test make a careful examination of all parts of the system,
and assure himself that the boilers may be operated safely at the pressure allowed. A nota
tion to that effect shall be entered on Form 840–B. The inscription on the boiler and the
boiler name plate, as required in paragraph 54.18–2 (d), shall then contain the following entry
for steam tests, which shall follow the notation for hydrostatic test, and precede the notation
for original working pressure: “Steam test'(------ pounds).”
§ Upon completing the inspection of a new boiler, the inspector, if fully satisfied that
the boiler is built in all respects in accordance with the hº
drawings or blue prints on
file, and that the workmanship and material are good and the boiler safe for the working
pressure for which it was approved, shall cause it to be stamped, preferably on the front head
in the case of fire-tube boilers, or on the drumhead in the case of the water-tube boilers, with
the following inscription, which must be legible:
U. S. C. G. No. ------
. S. (-------- )
Hydro. test (-------- )
Original W. P. (- - - - - - - - lbs.)
uilt by (----------------------------------)
Steel by (----------------------------------)
Date (--------------------)
Inspector's initials (--------)
[5.4.18–3] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
This inscription must not be obliterated during the life of the boiler. In the event that
the inscription is to be lagged over or otherwise covered, the data specified shall be transferred
to a name plate to be attached to the boiler outside of the covering, or to the uptake, which
name plate must be kept clean so that it can be easily read by inspectors at any time.
54.18–3 Tests and inspection of boilers in service. The boilers of all vessels under
the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard, and other equipment as stipulated in the succeeding
sections, shall be subjected to annual tests and inspection in accordance with the following
requirements.
54.18–4 Boilers and main steam pipes. (a) At each annual inspection thereafter,
boilers which can be satisfactorily examined internally, shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
test equal to one and one-quarter times the maximum working pressure; types of boilers
which due to design cannot be satisfactorily examined internally, shall be subjected to a
hydrostatic test equal to one and one-half times the maximum working pressure; also, boilers
to which extensive repairs have been made, or the strength of which the inspector has an
reason to doubt, shall be subjected to a hydrostatic test of one and one-half times the maxi
mum working pressure. It shall be the duty of the inspector, whenever he deems it neces
sary in the interest of safety, or whenever evidence of moisture or leakage appears, to have
part or all of the covering or lagging of the boiler removed so that a complete examination
of the exterior parts of the boiler may be made.
(b) In applying hydrostatic pressure to boilers, inspectors shall require such arrange
ments to be made as will guard against main and auxiliary stop valves being subjected at
the same time to hydrostatic pressure on one side and steam pressure on the opposite side.
Vessels on going out of service or laying up in winter quarters, and beginning the annual
inspection, may have the hydrostatic pressure applied to boilers at any time preceding the
date of the final inspection, but in no instance shall the vessel be navigated to exceed 12
months from the date of issue of the certificate of inspection without the application of the
yºtic pressure, except as provided in section 4421, U. S. Revised Statutes (46 U. S.
. 399).
(c) The hydrostatic test shall be witnessed by the inspectors, and they shall observe and
note the indication upon the gage, stating in their report the hydrostatic pressure applied
in pounds per square inch.
(d) The hydrostatic test shall be applied to the main steam º: from the boiler to
the throttle yº. in the same ratio as applied to the boiler. If the covering of the pipi
is not removed, a test pressure 15 percent in excess of the maximum working pressure sh
be held on the piping for a period of 10 minutes, and, if any evidence of moisture or leakage
is detected, the covering shall be removed and the pipe thoroughly examined. The inspector
may, however, order the covering removed at any time if he deems it necessary.
(e) It shall be the duty of i. inspector to subject such parts as stays, flues, furnaces,
and such other parts of the boiler as he deems necessary to a hammer test. . .
If the inspector has reason to believe that the boiler has deteriorated to any appre
ciable extent under the bottom where it rests on saddles or foundations, he shall cause the
boiler to be lifted to such position that it can be thoroughly examined, provided the exami
nation cannot be made otherwise. -
(g) In the inspection of water-tube boilers inspectors shall make a careful examination
of the ligaments between rivets and between tube holes to ascertain if any cracks have started.
(h) In the inspection of water-tube boilers, the inspector shall examine, in addition to
the pressure parts, the casing, brickwork, and baffles, and, if any part be found in bad
condition, he shall require such repairs or renewals as may be necessary.
(i) Inspectors shall examine the edges of manholes or other openings and the edges of
lap-riveted joints to ascertain if any cracks have started in the plate
(j) Inspectors may require a §: to be drilled to determine the actual thickness at
any time if they are doubtful as to its safety. However, after a boiler shall have been installed
for 10 years, it shall be the duty of the inspector, at the first annual inspection thereafter,
and at such subsequent periods as may be deemed necessary, to cause the boiler to be drilled
at or near the water line and bottom, and at such other places as he may deem necessary,
for the purpose of gaging the shell to determine if it has deteriorated. If the thickness
found by actual measurement is less than the original thickness, the boiler shall be recalcu
ºnd
OUIn Ol.
the maximum allowable working pressure shall be based on the least thickness
(F-108)
INSPECTION [54.18–10]
54.18—5 Inspection of mountings and attachments—(a) Examination of boiler stop

valves and mountings. It shall be the duty of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, to
require all valves on boilers to be opened up every four years at the time of annual inspection
or at the next regular drydocking period thereafter. All valves shall be removed from the
boiler at least once in every eight years to determine the condition of the stud bolts con
necting the valves to the boiler. These examinations may be made at intermediate periods
if there is any evidence to indicate that defects have started or excessive corrosion is existent.
A record of the inspection of the valves shall be made on Form 840–B, and a notation made
on the certificate of inspection, this notation to be carried on each certificate until the next
period for the regular examinations arrives.
(b) Safety valves. Safety valves shall be set under steam pressure by duly authorized
inspectors.
(c) Examination of fusible plugs. It shall be the duty of the inspector to examine
fusible plugs when inspecting the boilers, and, provided they have been renewed prior to
his visit, to report the number of such plugs inserted in each boiler, the manufacturer's
name and the heat number, in Form 840–B. It shall be the duty of the chief engineer to
report the renewal of such plugs on Form 945 to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in
the district in which the inspection is being made. In the event that it should become
necessary to install new plugs between annual inspections, it shall be the duty of the chief
engineer to report same on Form 945, and, under the heading, “Remarks,” to give the
reason why such renewal was necessary.
(d) Water columns, test cocks, and water gages. Water columns, test cocks, and water
gages shall be carefully examined, tested, and checked by the inspector at each inspection.
(e) Steam gages. All steam gages connected to boilers or main steam lines shall be
carefully checked for accuracy.
(f) Safety valves on reduced-pressure lines, evaporators. Inspectors are required to
give the same attention and inspection to safety valves installed on reduced-pressure lines,
evaporators, superheaters, feed-water heaters, etc., as to the safety valves installed on the
main boilers; that is, such valves shall be subjected to operating tests when installed to
determine that they have sufficient capacity to serve as a warning in the event of the failure
of the reducing valve, and also to prevent building up a dangerous excess pressure before
the shut-off valve can be closed. The setting of such valves shall be carefully checked at
each annual inspection and adjusted if necessary.
54.18—6 Fire-prevention inspection. (a) Examination of bilges and tank tops. When
inspecting oil-burning vessels, either internal-combustion type or steam-driven type, the
inspector shall examine the tank tops and bilges in the fireroom and engine room to see that
there is no accumulation of oil which might create a fire hazard.
(b) The examination of the fire-fighting equipment shall be made by inspectors. This
applies to fire pumps, hose, chemical fire extinguishers, axes, and steam or gas smothering
lines to cargo holds and compartments.
(c) The inspectors shall examine the fire-fighting apparatus P. for the fireroom
and engine room to ascertain if it conforms to the requirements of the rules and regulations
and is in good condition for immediate use.
(d) At the annual inspection or periodical reinspections the inspectors shall examine the
water-sprinkling system, when fitted, to ascertain if it is in good condition and ready for
immediate use.
54.18–7 Engine-room signals. Signals between engine room and pilothouse, whether
they be telegraph, bell, whistle, telephone, or voice tubes, shall be examined and tested at
each inspection.
54.18–8 Dangerous places. Inspectors shall examine all places where there is a
possibility of a person being caught in the machinery to see that they are provided with
substantial º over such mechanisms as gearings and couplings; also flywheels of electric
generators, refrigerating machines, etc.
54.18–9 Sea chests, sea valves, and strainers. Sea chests, sea valves, and strainers
shall be carefully examined by the inspector when the vessel is in dry dock, and, if he deems
it necessary, he may order them opened up for internal examination. This also applies to
bilge injection valves.
54.18–10 Inspection of quarters. It shall be the duty of the inspector to examine
passengers' and crews' quarters to see that they are kept in a sanitary condition, and to
report any deficiencies in Form 840–B.
619428°–45—8 (F-109)
[5.4.18–11] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
54.18–11 Trial-trip observance. On the trial trip of each new vessel an inspector
shall be present to observe, from a standpoint of safety, the operation of boilers, engines,
steering gear, and auxiliaries; and, if not satisfied with the performance of such boilers and
machinery, he shall make such requirements as in his judgment will overcome any deficiencies
which may have come under his observation.
54.18–12 Unfired pressure vessels. (a) (1) After the Officer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, has satisfied himself that a new unfired pressure vessel, as defined in section
52.1–1, is of suitable design, is constructed in all other respects in conformity with the rules
of this subchapter, and withstands the tests prescribed, he shall, where space will permit,
cause such pressure vessel to be stamped on the head with the manufacturer's name and also
the following inscription, which must be legible. Where there is insufficient space on the
head to make such stamping, a name plate having the following lettering may be substituted
or it may be stamped on some other part of the vessel.
* * * P V N O + :: *k
S T * >k -k S D * +
H T zº x :* H R -k +
T S < * * * * MTL CL * GR *
T P + + + LBS SWP * * * LBS
USCG xk + #
× 4: #* *::
NOTES:
***PW —WLD, BRZ, or RIV Pressure Wessel.
NO+++ —USCG number assigned to pressure vessel.
ST+** —Shell thickness in inches.
SD** —Shell diameter in inches.
HT*** —Head thickness in inches.
HR** —Head radius in inches.
TS***** —Tensile strength of material in pounds.
MTL —Material.
CL* —Class of material.
GR* —Grade of material.
TP***LBS —Test pressure in pounds per square inch.
SWP***LBS —Safe working pressure in §º. per square inch.
USCG +** —U. S. Coast Guard, USCG symbol, and initials of inspector.
** + k >kºk —Month, day, and year tested.
foll (2) Thereafter such unfired pressure vessels shall be tested and examined biennially as
OLIOWS: -
(b) Pressure vessels which are equipped with manholes or inspection openings so that
they can be satisfactorily examined internally, shall be opened up biennially at the regular
inspection and thoroughly examined i. and externally.
(c) Pressure vessels which have neither manholes nor inspection openings and cannot be
satisfactorily examined, shall be tested biennially at the regular inspection to a hydrostatic
test equal to one and one-quarter times the maximum allowable working pressure.
54.18–13 Inspectors not to accept statements. Inspectors shall be guided by condi
tions as actually found by them, and in no case shall they be justified in accepting the
statements of others.
(F–110)
PART 55–PIPING SYSTEMS
Sec. Sec.
55.19–1 Scope 55.19–11 Class II piping.
55.19–2. General requirements. 55.19–12 Bilge and ballast piping.
55.19–3 Detail requirements. 55.19–13 Pumping arrangements.
55.19–5 Installation. 55.19–14 Independent fuel piping and tanks (emergency units).
55.19–6 Class I piping. 55.19–15 Oil transfer and filling systems.
55.19–8 Flange standards. 55.19–16 Sounding pipes.
55.19–9 Bolting. 55.19-17 Welded sea chests. -
55.19–10 Detail requirements—Class I piping.
Section 55.19–1 Scope. Piping, within the meaning of this part, is divided into two
classes: Class I piping and class II piping.
55.19–2 General requirements. All vessels shall be provided with the necessary
piping systems and pumping arrangements for safe operation in the service for which they
are intended, and piping shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) Drawings or blueprints. Drawings or blueprints showing the piping systems
shall be submitted to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the district where they are
being installed. The working pressures of the various systems shall be clearly indicated on
the drawings, also the sizes, thickness, and material of the piping, and the type, size, and
3. of valves and fittings, indicating the working pressure for which they have been
esigned.
(b) Piping: definition. The word “piping,” within the meaning of the rules in this
subchapter, refers to fabricated pipe or tubes with flanges and fittings attached, for the
conveyance of gases or liquids, regardless of whether the diameter is measured on the inside
or the outside.
(c) Nominal diameter. The term “nominal diameter,” as used in this part except in
section 55.19–6 (b), means the commercial diameter of the piping.
55.19–3. Detail requirements. (a) Manufacturers of piping, valves, fittings, and
flanges shall file with the Commandant an affidavit, duly executed on approved form,
that the product furnished by them for use on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the
Coast Guard conforms to all requirements of the rules in this subchapter.
(b) Materials used in pipes, valves, fittings, and flanges shall conform to the require
ments of this part as herein specified, and jº
with the respective specifications of
Part 51 unless otherwise approved by the Commandant.
(c) Seamless drawn steel pipe may be used for all purposes and is required for services
defined in sections 52.13–5 (a) and 55.19–6 (d) of this chapter. (See paragraph (d) of this
section.)
(d) Lap-welded steel or iron pipe without diameter limitation or furnace butt-welded
steel or iron pipe of not over 2 inches nominal pipe size may be used where the pressure does
not exceed 350 pounds per square inch and the temperature does not exceed 450° F. Elec
tric-resistance-welded steel pipe may be used where the pressure does not exceed 350 pounds
per square inch and the temperature does not exceed 650° F. (See paragraph (c) of this
section.)
Note: Where steel or wrought-iron pipe is used for salt water service, it is recommended that it be galvanized or otherwise protected
against corrosive action.
(e) Seamless drawn copper pipe may be used for all purposes where the temperature
does not exceed 406°F. but shall not be permitted in connection with superheated steam
nor in any system where it comes in contact with fuel oil, either internally or externally,
except that short flexible copper connections of approved construction may be used for
oil burners. Where copper piping is used it must be properly annealed before installation.
(F-111)
(f) Copper pipe fabricated with brazed longitudinal joints is permitted for water and
nonsuperheated steam service for pressures not to exceed 75 pounds per square inch.
(g) Seamless drawn brass pipe may be used where the temperature does not exceed
406°F., but is not permitted for use in connection with superheated steam.
(h) Lead pipe may be used for salt-water supply lines to plumbing fixtures and plumbin
drains, also for bilge lines outside of the machinery spaces, but in i cases such pipe ji
be properly protected against mechanical injury.
(i) If it is desired to use special alloys and other materials not mentioned in preceding
paragraphs, a request to use such material must be submitted to the Commandant for
special consideration.
(j) Forged steel, or cast steel conforming to the requirements of sections 51.15–1 to
51.15–14, 51.17–1 to 51.17–12, may be used in the construction of valves and fittings for
any system and for all pressures and temperatures covered by the rules in this subchapter.
(k) Bronze castings conforming to the requirements of sections 51.20–1 to 5120–10,
grade º pºy be used in the construction of valves and fittings for temperatures not exceed
ing 450° F.
(l) Malleable iron conforming to the requirements of sections 51.19–1 to 51.19–16,
inclusive, of this chapter, for Grade A material, may be used in the construction of valves
and fittings for pressures not to exceed 250 pounds per square inch and temperatures not to
exceed 450°F. Grade B malleable iron may be used for pressures not to exceed 125 pounds
per square inch, temperatures not to exceed 450° F. and diameters not to exceed 4 inches.
Cast iron conforming to the requirements of sections 51.18–1 to 51.18–10, inclusive, of this
chapter may be used in the construction of valves and fittings for pressures not to exceed
125 pounds per square inch and temperatures not to exceed 450° F. All these materials
shall meet the requirements for the individual piping systems provided for in this part.
(m) Discs, or disc faces, seats, stems and other wearing parts of valves shall be made
of material which is noncorrosive under service conditions and which possesses heat-resisting
qualities suitable for the temperature to which it is exposed.
(n) All valves exceeding 2 inches nominal pipe size used for Class I piping shall have
flanged ends and bolted bonnets, except as noted in section 55.19–3. (w) of this chapter.
(For boiler mountings see section 52.15–2 (b) of this chapter.)
(o) Cast-iron ... with screwed bonnets will not be permitted for any service. . . .
. . (p) Screwed bonnets, where permitted, shall be of the union bonnet type for Class I
plping.
(q) All valves shall be made to close with a right-hand (clockwise) motion of the wheel,
facing the end of the stem of the valve.
(r) Valves shall be of the rising-stem type, preferably with outside yoke or specially
approved valves designed to show clearly whether they are open or closed.
(s) (1) All steel valves, flanges and fittings shall be legibly marked with the manufac
turer's name or registered trade-mark, and the primary service pressure rating for which he
guarantees them. -
(2) All cast iron valves, flanges, and fittings shall be legibly marked with the manufac
turer's name or registered trade-mark, and in addition all such valves and flanged fittings
shall be marked with the primary service pressure rating for which he guarantees them.
(3) All malleable iron valves, flanges, and fittings shall be legibly marked with the manu
facturer's name or registered trade-mark and the primary service pressure rating for which he
guarantees them except that 150-pound pressure screwed fittings (Federal Specifications
WW-P–521a) need not carry a service pressure marking.
(4) All bronze valves, flanges, and fittings shall be fall
marked with the manufac
turer's name or registered trade-mark and in addition all such valves and flanged fittings
shall be marked with the primary service pressure rating for which he guarantees them.
Bronze screwed fittings may be identified as to pressure class by the type of reinforcing bands
at the inlet and outlet. The 125-pound fittings (Federal Specification WW-P-448) have
narrow bands widely separated at the fitting crotches. The 250-pound fittings (Federal
Specification WW-P–461) have wide heavy bands which meet at and fill the crotches.
b º small
e InarkeCI.
finished or polished nonferrous products such as trycocks or petcocks need not
-
(F–112)
PIPING SYSTEMS [55.19–5]
(6) Steel valves and fittings shall be tested by their manufacturer to a hydrostatic
pressure in accordance with the requirements of Tables P-10 and P-11. Bronze, cast iron, or
malleable iron valves and fittings for steam service or other services at temperatures ex
ceeding 150°F. shall be tested by their manufacturer to a hydrostatic pressure of not less
than 2% times their steam working pressure. Bronze valves and fittings for high-pressure
hydraulic or air service at temperatures not exceeding 150°F. shall be tested by their manu
facturer to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 1% times their hydraulic or air working
pressure.
(t) Provision shall be made for expansion either by expansion bends, slip joints, or
other approved means.
(u) All steam pipes shall be fitted with adequate means for draining the pipe at all
points where there is a possibility of water accumulating.
(v) For temperatures not exceeding 500° F., steel bolting material conforming to the
requirements of º
S. T. M. Designation A 107–40 or equivalent thereto may be used. For
temperatures above 500°F., alloy-steel boltin º as specified in sections 51.16–1 to
51.16–8 and sections 51.16a–1 to 51.16a–9 shall be used.
(w) Forged-steel welding fittings, valves, or flanges, known as the socket type, wherein
the º is attached by entering the pipe into the socket and securing it to the fitting with
a single fillet weld, may be used where the diameter of the pipe does not exceed 2% inches
nominal pipe size for Class I piping and without diameter limitation for Class II piping,
provided the welding is done by certificated welding operators.
(z) Soldered fittings. Fittings, valves, or flanges made of nonferrous metal may be
attached to nonferrous pipe by means of soldering the wall of the pipe to the fitting where
the pressure does not exceed 100 pounds per square inch and the temperature does not
exceed 240° F. When it is desired to use such fittings for higher pressures or temperatures
the kind of solder or metal used for alloying the wall of the pipe to the fittings must be ap
proved by the Commandant.
(y) Superheater outlet flanges and superheated and desuperheated steam piping direct
from the boiler shall be designed for not less than the maximum pressure and temperature
to which they may be exposed in service under normal sustained operating conditions.
Occasional increases in pressure and/or temperature are unavoidable and may be permitted
without changing the normal design, provided the increase of stress in the piping due to the
temporary conditions does not exceed 15 percent during 10 percent of the operating period or
20 percent during 1 percent of the operating period.
55.19–5 Installation. Piping shall be installed in accordance with the following
requirements:
(a) Piping shall not be located above switchboards or other electrical equipment if
practicable; but, where it cannot be avoided, means shall be provided to prevent water from
dripping upon and injuring the equipment.
(b) Reduced ...i. shall be fitted with efficient reducing valves, pressure gages
and relief valves installed on the low pressure side having sufficient discharge capacity to
prevent the pressure exceeding that for which the lines are designed.
(c) Piping shall be provided with means of support sufficient to take all the weight of
the piping off the valves and fittings. Hangers, supports, and anchorage shall be so ar
ranged as not to interfere with the expansion and contraction of the piping.
(d) Where pipes are led through water-tight bulkheads, flanges or special 3-flange bulk
head fittings shall be used, and in no case shall it be permissible for the plating of a bulkhead
to form a part of the joint.
(e) Stuffing boxes should not be permitted on deep-tank bulkheads, double bottoms,
or in any place where they cannot be readily examined. This does not apply to Great Lakes
cargo vessels or oil tankers.
(f) Under no circumstances shall piping, fittings, or connections be installed in such
manner that the operation of the safety valve will be impaired.
(g) Where vessels are equipped with more than one boiler, the auxiliary piping shall be
so arranged that the steam whistle, steering gear, and electric-lighting plant can be operated
from either of two boilers at any time.
(F–113)
(h) Pipelines may be run through deep tanks or fuel tanks, provided a tunnel is installed.
Where a pipe tunnel is installed, the watertight integrity of the bulkheads shall be main
tained, and if the tunnel is not of sufficient size to afford easy access, no valves or fittings
shall be located therein. Single pipes, other than steam or exhaust, may be run through
such tanks without using a pipe tunnel, where the pipe used is extra heavy, expansion bends
are provided, and all joints within the tank are welded.
(i) Where pipes are run through cargo spaces and coal bunkers, they shall be substan
tially cased or guarded to protect them from mechanical injury. In coal bunkers such casings
shall be made of steel.
(j) The faces of flanges shall be parallel before being bolted together.
55.19–6 Class I piping—(a) Scope. Class I piping shall include all piping as follows:
(1) Operating at pressures exceeding 150 pounds gage per square inch.
(2) Operating at temperatures of vapors, gases, and liquids exceeding the following:
(i) Steam, gas and air—370° F.
(ii) Oil—150°F.
(iii) Water—200°F.
(3) Conveying lethal gases or lethal liquids regardless of pressure or temperature.
(b) Computations. The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum thickness
of pipe shall {. computed by the following formulas:
W=
2S(T-C) (61)
D
WD
where
W=maximum allowable working pressure, in pounds per square inch, except as pro
vided in subparagraph (c), for feed and blow-off piping.
T=thickness of pipe, in inches.
D=actual external diameter of pipe, in inches.
S=allowable fiber stress, in pounds per square inch of cross sectional area.
C=Allowance for threading, mechanical strength and/or corrosion in inches. .
C=0.065 for plain end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing for sizes above 1 inch.
C=0.05 for plain end steel or wrought-iron pipe or tubing for sizes 1 inch and below.
C=0.05 for threaded pipe 3% inch and smaller.
C=Depth of thread “h” for threaded pipe } inch and larger.
C=Depth of groove for grooved pipe.
C=0.00 for plain end, nonferrous pipe or tubing.
Note 1: Plain end pipe or tubing includes that joined by flared compression couplings, lap (Van Stone) joints, brazing, and by welding
i.e., by any method which does not reduce the wall thickness at the joint.
NotE 2: The depth of thread “h” may be determined by the formula h-0.8/n where n=the number of threads per inch, “h” =.100",
.0696”, and .0571” for 8, 11%, and 14 threads per inch, respectively.
NotE 3: The value of W in the formula shall not be taken at less than 150 pounds for any condition of service or material.
TABLE P-1.-MAXIMUM ALLow ABLE WoRKING STREsses for PIPING IN Pounds PER SquarE INCH !
- For temperature not exceeding *F.”

Specification section Grade Mº, **
- 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1,000
Seamless:
51.11----------- A 48,000 || 7, 200 6, 800 6, 100 5,400 || 4, 300 3, 300 | 1,900 -------
51.11----------- B 60,000 || 9,000 | 8, 500 7, 800 6, 800 5,500 4, 200 2,800 1, 500
51.11 C–Mo - - - - Pl 55,000 | 8, 200 8, 200 8, 200 8, 000 || 7, 800 7, 500 6, 0 3,700
51.11a---------- A 48,000 || 7, 200 || 6, 800 || 6, 100 |-------|-------|-------|-------|-------
51.11a---------- B 60,000 || 9,000 || 8,500 7,400 -------|-------|-------|-------|-------
1 Seamless medium-carbon steel pipe may be used for the construction of drum shells, and shall be computed in accordance with the formu
las provided in sections 52.2–3 and 52.2–6 for cylindrical shells.
* Intermediate values of S may be obtained by interpolation.
S=85 percent of above values for eletric-resistance-welded steel pipe, sections 51.11a and 51.11b (temperature not to exceed 650°F.).
S=4,800 for ſurnace welded steel pipe, sections 51.11 and 51.11a (temperature not to exceed 450°F.).
S=4,400 for welded iron pipe, section 51.12 (temperature not to exceed 450° F.).
S=3,500 for seamless copper pipe, section 51.14 and seamless brass pipe, section 51.13 (temperature not to exceed 406°F.).
S=2,625 for brazed copper pipe (temperature not to exceed 406° #}
(F–114)
(c) Feed-water and blow-off piping external to the boiler shall be designed to withstand
a pressure of 20 percent in excess of the maximum allowable working pressure.
(d) Fuel-oil service-discharge piping connecting the pumps to the burners shall be of
seamless steel pipe of a thickness not less than that required for what is commercially known
as extra-strong pipe.
(e) Where a welded pipe is pierced with holes, such holes shall be outside of the weld,
and in any pipe the unit stress in the ligaments shall not exceed one-fifth of the specified
range of tensile strength of the material, and in no case shall the pressure exceed that given by
the above formula.
Pipes intended for º
shall be of a thickness sufficient to compensate for the
thinning in the outer walls of the bend. The radius of curvature at the center line of the
pipe shall not be less than twice the external diameter of the pipe.
(g) Seamless or welded fittings fabricated from plate or seamless steel pipe conforming
with the appropriate section of Part 51 may be used if welded in accordance with the re
quirements of Part 56.
55.19–8 Flange standards. Flanges within the meaning of this part are companion
flanges which may be either bolted together or used singly in connection with flanged valves
or fittings, and shall conform to the following requirements:
(a) Flanges for steel or wrought-iron piping for Class I service shall be of forged steel,
cast steel, or alloy steels, which have been approved by the Commandant.
(b) Flanges used in connection with copper pipe shall be made of bronze, forged steel,
or cast steel.
(c) Cast-iron flanges are not permissible in connection with Class I piping.
(d) Flanges for class I piping shall conform in strength at least to the dimensional
standards in the following tables:
TABLE P-2.-BRONzE FLANGED FITTINGs AND CoMPANION FLANGEs
150 pounds
- Metal
Nominal pipe “ (nº | }. tºº. ºf sº
of flange (minimum)1 of bolts circle sººt
. | tº:
of fitting lºft.
mum) Dºth thru hub
(inches) (inches) (inches) Guº (º) dº | quº

3%
3%
%5
1%2
2%
2%
4
4
%
%
%
%.
1%6
1%
1%2
5
4% % 3% 4 % % 11%g 1%6
4% 1%2 3% 4 % %4 2%6 1%6
5 %6 3% 4 % %2 2%g %
6 % 4% 4 % %6 3%6 1
7 %6 5% 4 % 1%.4 3%, 1%
7% % 6 4 § %, 4% 1%6
8% 1%6 7 8 % % 41% 1%
9 1%6 7% 8 % 1%4| 5%6 1%,
10 % 8% 8 % 1%. 6% 1%6
11 1%6 9% 8 % *%. 7%6 1946
13% 1%6 11% 8 % 1%2 91%6 1%
16 1 14% 12 % *}4, 12 11%6
19 1%6 17 12 % %6 | 1.4% 2%6
1 The “flange thickness (minimum)” as shown in the table is the dimension from back of flange to gasket contact face. Blind flanges
may be recessed M6 inch with a diameter equal to the inside diaIneter of the flange fitting.
(F–115)
TABLE P-2A.—BRoNZE FLANGED FITTINGs AND ComPANION FLANGEs
250 and 300 pounds
Nominal *|†.
minal pipe size (inches) ||
Outside Fº#" | Dumet.
Ill of bolt - | Number §§ ºil.
*** - | hub (mini- | tº:
Diameter Depth
of flange circle of bolts &n. (#) mum) hub
(inches) || 250 pounds |300 pounds (inches) ) #;"| (inches) (inches)
(inches) (inches)
%---------------- 3% 1%2 % 2% 4 % % 1%6 1%2

%---------------- 4% %6 1%2 3% 4 % %2 1% %
1----------------- 4% % 1%2 3% 4 % 1%4 11%6 1%a
1%--------------- 5% 1%2 % 3% 4 % %6 2%6 1%6
1%--------------- 6% %6 *%6 4% 4 % *%4 2%g %
2----------------- 6% % % 5 8 % % 3%g 1
2%--------------- 7%. 1%g 1%g 5% 8 % $, 3%. iſ;
3----------------- 8% % 2%2 6% 8 4 2%4 4% 1%6
8%--------------- 9 1%6 *%2 7% 8 % 2%. 41%6 1%
4----------------- 10 % 1%6 77 8 %| 1%2 5%6 1%6
5----------------- 11 1%6 1% 9% 8 % *%4 6%6 1%6
6----------------- 12% 1 1%6 10% 12 # %g 7%g 1%6
8----------------- 15 1% 1% 13 12 % *%2 91%6 1%
1 The “flange thickness (minimum)” as shown in the table is the dimension from back of flange to gasket contact face. Blind flanges
may be recessed Me inch with a diameter equal to the inside diameter of the flange fitting.
TABLE P-3.−STEEL FLANGED FITTINGS AND ComPANIon FLANGEs

[For maximum steam service pressure at a temperature of 500°F.]
150 pounds
Thickness of flange Face-to

Nominal pipe size (inches) Metal face
Number Size thickness dimension
Outside Steel Flanged Diameter of bolts of bolts of fitting of length
diameter flange fittings of bolt minimum of tee
of flange minimum1 minimum? circle
Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches

%------------------------- 3% % -------- 2% 4 %l----------------
%------------------------- 3% % -------- 2% 4 %----------------
1------------------------- 4% %g %g 3% 4 % % 7
1%------------------------ 4% % % 3% 4 % % 7%
1%------------------------ 5 1% %g 3% 4 % % 8
2------------------------- 6 % % 4% 4 % % 9
2%------------------------ 7 % 1%6 5% 4 % % 10
3------------------------- 7% 1%g % 6 4 % % 11
3%------------------------ 8% 1%g 1%6 7 8 % % 12
4------------------------- 9 1%g 1%6 7% 8 % % 13
5------------------------- 10 1%6 1%6 8% 8 % %2 15
6------------------------- 11 1 1 9% 8 % %2 16
8------------------------- 13% 1% 1% 11% 8 ź %g 18
10------------------------ 16 1%g 1%g 14% 12 % *%2 22
12------------------------ 19 1% 1% 17 12 % % 24
14 O. D------------------- 21 1% 1% 18% 12 1 1%2 28
16 O. D.---------- - -- 23% 1%6 1%g 21% 16 1 %g 30
18 O. D.----------- 25 1% a 1946 22% 16 1% *%2 33
200. D------------------- 27% 1%a 1%g 25 20 1% % 36
24 O. D.------------------- 32 1% 1% 29% 20 1% %g 44
1 The raised face of M6 inch is included in “thickness of flange minimum” and in “length through hub.”
* A raised face of Me inch is provided on the flange of each opening of these fittings and is included in (a) “thickness of flange, minimum,”
(b) “center to contact surface,” and (c) “contact surface to contact surface” dimensions.
(F–116)
TABLE P-4.—STEEL FLANGED FITTINGs AND CoMPANIon FLANGEs

360 pounds
|
Nominal pipe size (inches) aſº. Thickness

of flange ciº.e Number | Size of bolts
Metal
# thick- || Face-to
.."
flange (inches) *Hºº 1. (inches) of bolts (inches) º §§
|
%------------------- 3% %6 2% 4 % % 6%
%------------------- 4% % 3% 4 % % 7%
!-------------------- 4% *%6 3% 4 % % 8
1%------------------ 5% % 3% 4 % % 8%
1%------------------ 6% 1%g 4} 4 % % 9
2-------------------- 6% % 5 8 % % 10
2%------------------ 7% 1 5% 8 % % 11
8-------------------- 8% 1% 6% 8 % %2 12
8%------------------ 9 1%6 7% 8 % %2 13
4-------------------- 10 1% 7% 8 % %6 14
5-------------------- 11 }% 9% 8 % % 16
6-------------------- 12% 1%6 10% 12 % % 17
8-------------------- 15 1% 13 12 % %g 20
10------------------- 17% 17 15% 16 1 % 23
12------------------- 20% 2 17% 16 1% %6 26
14 O. D-------------- 23 2% 20% 20 1% % 30
16 O. D-------------- 25% 2% 22% 20 1% *%s 33
18 O. D-------------- 28 2% 24% 24 1% % 36
20 O. D-------------- 30% 2% 27 24 1% 1%6 39
24 O. D-------------- 36 2% 32 24 1% 1%6 45
1 NoTE: The raised face of Me inch is included in “thickness of flange minimum” and in length through hub.
TABLE P-5.—STEEL FLANGED FITTINGs AND ComPANIon FLANGEs

400 pounds
i
Nominal pipe size (inches) alºſ º:
Thickn
of º* Number of size of bolts ". ºk
Metal thick- || ...”
Face-to-fa
flange minimum (inches) bolts (inches) fittings mini: of length of

ches (inches) mum (inches) | tee (inches)
3% %6 2% 4 % % 6%
# % 3% 4 % % 7%
4% *%6 3 4 % % 8%
5% 1%g 3% 4 % % 9
#
7% 1%
*| #|
5%
||
8
||
4
4|
%
6 3:
13
8% 1% 6% 8 4 % 14
9 1% 7% 8 % %g 15
10 1% 7% 8 % % 16
11 1% 9% 8 % %6 18
12% }% 10% 12 % %a 19%
15 1% 13 12 1 %g 23%
17% 2% 15% 16 1% *%6 26%
20% 2% 17% 16 1% % 30
23 2% 20% 20 1% 1% 32%
25% 2% 22% 20 1% % 35%
28 2% 24% 24 1% 1%6. 38%
30% 2% 27 24 1% 1%6 41%
36 3 32 24 1% 1%6 48%
1 NoTE: A raised face of 34 inch is not included in the minimum thickness of flanges.
(F–117)
TABLE P-6.-STEEL FLANGED FITTINGs AND ComPANIon FIANGEs

600 pounds
i Metal thick- || Face-to-face

**** | *; mº
ºf Rººt | Nºmbroſ | shººtball, tº #:
f inches) (inches) (inches) bolts (inches) minimum l length of tee
ange ( (inches) (inches)
%--------------------
%-------------------
3%
4%
: 8
2%
3%
4
4
%
%
%
%
6%
7%
1-------------------- 4% *%6 3% 4 % % 8%
1%------------------ 5% 1%6 3% 4 % % 9
1%------------------ 6% % 4% 4 % % 9%
2-------------------- 6% 1 5 8 % %6 11%
2%------------------ 7% 1% 5% 8 % % 13
3-------------------- 8% 1% 6% 8 % % 14
3%------------------ 9 1% 7% 8 % %6 15
4-------------------- 10% 1% 8% 8 % % 17
5-------------------- 13 1% 10% 8 1 %6 20
6-------------------- 14 1% 11% 12 1 % 22
8-------------------- 16% 2%6 13% 12 1% % 26
10------------------- 20 2% 17 16 1% % 31
12------------------- 22 2% 19% 20 1% 1 33
14 O. D-------------- 23% 2% 20% 20 1% 1% 35
16 O. D-------------- 27 3 2334 20 1% 1% 39
18 O. D-------------- 29% 3% 25% 20 1% 1% 43
20 O. D-------------- 32 3% 28% 24 1 1% 47
24 O. D-------------. 37 4 33 24 1% 1% 55 :
* Note: A raised face of 34 inch is not included in the minimum thickness of flanges.
TABLE P-7.-STEEL FLANGED FITTINGs AND ComPANIon FLANGEs

[For maximum steam service pressure at a temperature of 750° F.]
900 pounds
Nominal plp
pipe size (inches
( ) º: § Hº! Hº! Number of Metal
Size of bolts |ness of thick-
fittings|| dimension
Face-to-face
of
flange (inches)|mum 1 (inches) (inches) bolts (inches) º * º”
%------------------- 4% % 3% 4 % %g 8%
%------------------- 5% 1 3% 4 4 %e 9
1------------------- 5% 1% 4 4 % % 10
1%------------------ 6% 1% # 4 % % 11
1%------------------ 7 1% 4% 4 1 % 12
-------------------- 8% 1% 6% 8 % %g 14%
2%------------------ 9% 1% 7% 8 1 *%6 16%
#: -- - - - - - - ----- -- - - - 9% 1% 7% 8 % % 15
4-------------------- 11% 1% 9% 8 1% % 18
5-------------------- 13% 2 11 8 1% % 22
6-------------------- 15 2%6 12% 12 1% 1340 24
8-------------------- 18% 2% 15% 12 1% 1%g 29
10------------------- 21% 2% 18% 16 1% 1% 33
12------------------- 24 3% 21 20 1% 1%6 38
14 O. D-------------- 25% 3% 22 20 1} 1%g 40%
16 O. D-------------- 27% 3% 24% 20 1% 11%6 44%
18 O. D-------------- 31 4 27 20 i; 2 48
20 O. D-------------- 33% 4% 29% 20 2 2% 52
24 O. D-------...------ 41 5% 35% 20 2% 2% 61
* Note: A raised face of $4 inch is not included in the minimum thickness of flanges.
(F–118)
TABLE P-8.-STEEL FLANGED FITTINGs. AND ComPANIon FLANGEs

Nominal pipe size (inches) Face-to-face

Size of bolts dimension of
length of tee
(inches)
8%
: 9
%;i
: 6
1 NoTE: A raised face of 34 inch is not included in the minimum thickness of flanges.
TABLE P-9.-STEEL FLANGED FITTINGs AND ComPANIon FLANGEs

Nominal pipe size (inches) Face-to-face

Size of bolts dimension of
length of tee
(inches)
1
:
1%
1
1%
1%
1%
1%
2
; %
2%
1 NotE: The raised face of 34 inch is not included in “thickness of flange minimum” nor in “length through hub” nor in “thread length.”
TABLE P-10.—SERVICE PREsst, RE RATINGS FOR STEEL PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS
Carbon stºl flanges and flanged fittings at tempera- Carbon steel flanges and flanged fittings at tem
ºniº” with standard facings 850° º §. #º
Primary service pressure
ratings------------------ 150 300 400| 600 900 1,500 2,500 150 300 400 600 900 1,500 2,500
Maximum hydrostatic
shell test pressures 1----| 350, 750 1,000 1,500 2,000 3,500 6,000 350, 750 1,000 1,500 2,000 3,500 6,000
Service temperatures Maximum, nonshock, service pressure ratings at Maximum, nonshock, service pressure ratings at
(°F.) temperatures from 100° to 850°F. temperatures from 100° to 850°F.
230
100-------- 500 6701,000 1,500 2, 500 4, 170 275 600 800 1, 2001,800 3,000 5,000
220
150-------- 480) 640, 960, 1,440 2,400. 4,000. 255 575, 765. 1, 1501,725] 2,875 4, 790
210|
200-------- 465 620. 930, 1,395 2, 325 3,875. 240 550 730. 1, 1001,650 2,750. 4, 580
Fluid 250-------- 200. 450 600 900 1, 350 2, 250, 3,750 225 525 700 1,050.1, 575 2,625. 4, 375
300-------- 190| 435. 580 870) 1,305 2, 175 3,625, 210 500 670 1,000 1,500 2, 500 4, 170
350-------- 1SO 420 560 840. 1, 260 2, 100 3, 500 195 475 635 9501,425 2, 375 3,960
400-------- 170 405 540 810 1, 215 2,025 3, 375, 180. 450 600 9001, 350 2, 250 3, 750
Water 450-------- 160 390. 520 780. 1, 170 1,950, 3, 250 165. 425 565 850.
1, 275] 2, 125 3, 540
500-------- *150 375 500 750 1, 125 1,875 3, 125|*150. 400 530 8001, 200 2,000 3, 330
550-------- 140 360 480. 720 1,080 1,800 3,000 140 380 505 760.
1, 140. 1, 900 3, 165
600-------- 130 345 460 690 1,035. 1, 725] 2,875. 130 360 480 720,
1,080 1, 800 3,000
Steam 650-------- 120 330, 440 660 990. 1, 650 2,750 120 340 450 6801,020, 1,700 2,830
700-------- 110 315 420 630 945. 1, 575 2,625 110 320, 425 640 960 1,600 2, 665
750-------- 100+300+400+600 *900 +1, 500|*2, 500 100+300|*400] *600 *900+1, 500|*2, 500
800-------- 85 250 335 500 750 1, 250 2,085 85 250 335 500 750 1, 250 2,085
850-------- 70 w 270 400 600 1,000 1,670 70 200 270 400 600 1,000 1,670
All pressures are in pounds per square inch (gage).
1 All tests shall be made with water at a temperature not to exceed 125° F.
*Primary service pressure rating.
TABLE P-11.-SERVICE PRESSURE RATINGS For STEEL PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGs
Cº.º.º.º.º.º.º.
%. jº below with standard facings Carbon-molybdenum and
peratures 1,000°F. equivalent
and alloy
below with steels
ring attem
joints
Primary service pressure

ratings---------------- 300 400 600 900 1,500 2,500 300 400 600 900 1,500 2,500
Maximum hydrostatic
shell test pressures 1--- 900 1, 200 1,800 2,400 4, 200 7,200 900 1,200 1,800 2,400 4,200 7,200
Service temperatures Maximum, nonshock, service pressure ratings at Maximum, nonshock service pressure ratings at
(°F.) temperatures from 100° to 1,000°F. temperatures from 100° to 1,000°F.
100------- 600 800 1, 200 1,800 3,000 5,000 720 960 1,440 2, 160 3, 600 6,000
150------- 590 775. 1, 180 1, 770 2,950. 4, 905 700 925 1, 400 2, 100 3, 500 5, 825
200------- 580 750 1, 160 1,740 2, 900. 4, 810 675 900 1, 350 2,025 3, 375 5, 625
250------- 560 725 1, 120 1, 680, 2,800. 4, 645 650 875. 1,300. 1, 950, 3, 250, 5,425
300------- 540 700 1,080 1,620 2,700. 4,480 625 825 1, 250, 1,875 3, 125 5, 200
Fluid 350------- 520 675|| 1,040 1, 560 2, 600 4, 315 600 800 1, 200 1,800 3,000 5,000
400-- - - - - - 500 650 1,000 1, 500 2, 500 4, 150 575 775. 1, 150 1,725 2,875, 4, 800
450------- 480 625 960 1,440 2,400 3,985 550 725 1, 100 1,650 2,750. 4, 575
500------- 460 600 920, 1,380 2, 300 3,820 525 700 1,050. 1, 575 2,625. 4, 375
Water 550------- 440 575 880 1, 320, 2, 200 3, 655 500 675. 1, 000 1,500 2,500. 4, 175
600------- 420 550 840. 1, 260 2, 100 3, 490 475 625 950, 1,425 2, 375 3, 950
650------- 400 525 800 1, 200 2, 000 3, 325 450 600 900 1, 350 2, 250, 3, 750
700------- 380 500 760. 1, 140. 1, 900, 3, 160 425 575 850 1, 275] 2, 125 3, 550
Steam 750------- 360 475 720 1,080 1,800. 2, 995 400 525 800 1, 200 2,000 3, 325
800------- 340 450 680 1,020, 1,700 2,830 375 500 750 1, 125 1, 875 3, 125
850------- 320 425 640 960 1,600 2, 665 350 475 700 1,050, 1,750 2, 925
900--- - - - - *300 *400 *600 +900+1, 500|*2, 500 325 425 650 975 1,625 2,700
950------- 265 350 530 795. 1, 325 2, 205 *300 *400] *600) *900+1, 500|*2, 500
1,000------ 190 250 380 570 950 1,580 200 275 400 600 1, o 1, 675
All pressures are in pounds per square inch (gage).
* All tests shall be made with water at a temperature not to exceed 125° F.
*Primary service pressure ratings.
(e) Methods of attachments: Flanges shall be attached to the piping by the following
approved methods, as shown in figures P-1 to P-10, inclusive.
(F–120)
P-7 P-8
P-9 P-1 O
(F–121)
FIGURE P-1.—Screwed threads may be used for Class I piping having diameters not exceeding 2 inches
nominal pipe size. For Class II piping, screwed threads may be used without diameter limitations.
FIGURE P-2.-Slip-on flanges may be used for Class I piping having diameters not exceeding 2% inches
nominal pipe size and for Class II piping without diameter limitations. . The face of the flange shall
extend beyond the end of the ºf a distance at least equal to the thickness of the piping, and shall
be secured to the pipe by a full fillet weld. The neck of the flange shall also be secured to the pipe by
a full fillet weld.
FIGURE P-3.−Copper pipe may be expanded into grooves in the hub of a flange and the end flanged over
into a recess in the face of the flange, the width of the flange on the edge of the pipe to be at least three
times the thickness of the pipe. This flange to be used for Class II piping only.
FIGURE P-4.—Pipe may be attached to high hub flanges by means of screw threads where the end of the
pipe and the bore of the flange are machined to a snug fit and the lip of the hub is fillet welded to the
pipe.
FIGURE P-5.—Pipe may be connected by means of loose flanges (Van Stone), provided the flange is turned
at a temperature of approximately 1,700°F. by machinery, operated by trained personnel, so that the
flange can be turned at one operation. The width of the flange shall be at least three times the thick
ness of the pipe and the end of the pipe shall be º
stress relieved after the flanging operation.
For Class II piping, stress relief of the pipe will not required. Manufacturers desiring to use this
type of joint will be required to certify that they are equipped to make the joint in accordance with
this specification.
FIGURE P-6.-Welding neck flanges may be used for all piping provided the Fº is butt welded to the
flange. The butt joint shall be either double welded or single V welded with a backing-up strip on the
inside. For Class II piping when the single V joint is used, the backing-up strip may be omitted
provided the weld is chipped or ground off flush on the root side of the weld.
FIGURE P-7.-Pipe may be attached to high hub flanges by jºin; the flange on to the end of the pipe
and flaring the end of the pipe to an angle of not less than 20°. If used for Class I piping, a fillet weld
with throat of not less than % inch shall be used to attach the hub of the flange to the wall of the pipe.
This flange is limited to a maximum pressure of 250 pounds per square inch at a temperature not ex
ceeding 450° F. For Class II piping, the fillet weld may be omitted.
FIGURE P-8.-Pipe may be attached to flanges by expanding the pipe into grooves in the bore of the flange,
and flaring the end of the pipe to an angle of not less than 20°. This flange limited to a maximum
pressure of 250 pounds per square inch and a temperature not exceeding 500°F. For Class II piping,
it will not be necessary to flare the ends of the pipe.
FIGURE P-9.-Copper or brass º: and valves, and fittings of the same material or of bronze alloys, for use
in Class I piping service may be joined by the braze-weld method shown in figure P-9 for steam pressures
not exceeding 150 pounds per square inch at temperatures not exceeding 406°F., or for other services
at higher pressures at temperatures not exceeding 150° F. The bore of the valve or fitting shall be
machined to the depth required for a threaded fitting, leaving a shoulder for the end of the pipe to butt
against. An annular groove equal to the depth of the thread for a threaded pipe of the same t and
size shall be machined in the wall of the valve or fitting. A preinserted ring of brazing jº.
a fusion point of not less than 1,000°F., and of sufficient quantity to twice fill the clearance between the
pipe and the wall of the fitting shall be inserted in the groove, after which the pipe shall be placed in the
fitting and sufficient heat shall be applied to the outside to melt the brazing metal until it completely
fills the clearance between the wall of the fitting and the pipe. To insure a good joint a suitable flux
shall be applied to the surfaces to be joined.
FIGURE P-10.-Copper pipe may be attached to flanges by i. i*pipe in the flange and beading the
edge of the pipe over into a recess in the face of the flange. The width of the flange on the edge of
the pipe to be not less than three times the thickness of the pipe after which the pipe shall be securely
brazed to the wall of the flange. This flange limited to use at a maximum temperature of 406° F.
It is not allowed to be used in connection with superheated steam and is limited to use with saturated
steam of not over 180 pounds per square inch. For hydraulic service at temperatures of not over 150°
F., it may be used for pressures not exceeding 1,000 pounds per square inch.
Where it is desired to use other methods for attaching flanges to piping, the matter
shall first be given consideration by the Commandant.
55.19–9 Bolting. (a) Bolts used in connection with valves, fittings and flanges shall
comply with the standards given in Tables P-2 to P-9, inclusive. If the requirements of
these tables are not practicable, the stress shall be calculated as required by Section 52.16–5
using the smallest cross-sectional area of the bolt.
(b) The use of double-ended stud bolts with a continuous thread, or bolts with the solid
section reduced to the same diameter as that at the root of the thread, is recommended where
§: ºperature exceeds 500°F. to provide equal expansion throughout the entire length of
the bolt.
(c) American Standard heavy nuts are required on Class I piping.
CRoss-REFERENCE: For tables P-3 to P-9, see $55.19–8.
55.19–10 Detail Requirements—Class I piping. All Class I piping shall be installed

in accordance with the following detail requirements.
(a) Copper º
shall be properly stress-relieved before installation.
(b) (Rescinded.)
(F–122)
PIPING SYSTEMS (55.19–11]
(c) Where the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, is not otherwise satisfied, each
length of piping having a diameter exceeding 4 inches shall be drilled, for the purpose of
gaging, and fitted with a screw plug to extend beyond the pipe covering. Where bends are
used, the test holes shall be drilled in the outer wall of the bend: Provided, That the drilling
of such pipes may be omitted where pipes which are intended for bending comply with sec
tion 55.19–6 (f).
(d) Valves and cocks shall be located so as to be easily accessible.
(e) Where the blow-off piping discharges above the load line of the vessel, it shall be
arranged so that the discharge is deflected downward as it leaves the opening in order to
protect persons who may be alongside the vessel.
(f) Ordinary cocks, where the plug is held in the body of the cock by a single nut, are
not permitted in connection with piping.
(g) Valves of such type or design as to form pockets in which sediment may collect
shall not be used for blow-off purposes.
(h) Where cocks are used, they shall be marked in a straight line with the body to
indicate whether they are open or closed.
(i) Sections of main and auxiliary steam piping subject to boiler pressure, also feed
piping, shall be tested hydrostatically with flanges attached before installation to a test
pressure equal to twice the maximum allowable working pressure of the boilers. This test
shall be witnessed and certified to by a duly authorized inspector or on certification of the
chief engineer, provided the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, is satisfied to accept such
certification.
(j) Where pipes are screwed into the plating of the boiler, the minimum number of pipe
threads permitted shall be in accordance with the following table:
TABLE P-12. MINIMUM NUMBER OF PIPE THREADS For ConnecTIONs To BoILERs
Size of pipe connection, inches---------------------------------------------------------- 1 and 1%

Number of threads per inch------------------------------------------------------------ 11%
Minimum number of threads required in opening--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -------------- 4
Minimum thickness of material required to give above number of threads, inches-------------- 0.348
55.19–11 Class II piping—(a) Scope. Class II piping within the meaning of this part
shall include all piping for pressures and temperatures not requiring Class I piping.
(b) Computations. Piping of steel or wrought iron shall have a nominal wall thickness
equal to commercial standard weight, and for severe service, such as ash-ejector discharge,
a thickness not less than commercial extra-strong standard weight shall be used. Piping of
other materials shall have a wall thickness consistent with good engineering practice, and
when screwed into flanges or fittings, the thickness shall not be less than for standard iron
pipe of the same size.
(c) Pipe fittings. Pipe fittings for the various services specified as Class II piping shall
conform to the following requirements:
(1) Pipe fittings of forged or cast steel, bronze, malleable or cast iron, or such other
equivalent material as may be approved by the Commandant, shall in all cases conform
to the requirements of the appropriate section of Part 51.
(d) Flanges. Flanges shall at least conform to the following requirements:
(1) Flanges shall be made of forged or cast steel, wrought iron, bronze, malleable or
cast iron, or such other equivalent material as may be approved by the Commandant.
(2) All steel flanges shall conform with the minimum standards given in Tables P-3
to P-9, inclusive. Bronze flanges shall conform with the minimum standards given in
Tables P-2 and P-2A. Cast iron flanges shall conform at least with the standards given
in Tables P-13 and P-14.
(3) Flanges may be attached by any of the methods specified in figures P-1 to P-10,
inclusive, and, in addition, the following methods may be employed:
(i) (Rescinded.) -
di (ii) Flanges may be attached by standard screw threads without limitation as to

iameter.
(F–123)
(iii) Copper pipe may be attached by means of using loose flanges and flanging thethan
end
of the pipe into a recess on the face of the flange, the width of the flange to be ...
three times the thickness of the pipe.
(4) Flanges for Class II piping shall conform in strength at least to the dimensional
standards in the following tables:
TABLE P-13.−DIMENSIONs of ScrewED ComPANIon AND BLIND FLANGEs
[125-pound cast-iron flanged fittings. All dimensions given in inches]
Nominal pipe size a Pº of .

Thick f
Mºlſº Pºiº* Length
º#: of hub
!------------------------------ 4% % ------------ 11%6 0.68

1%----------------------------- 4% % ------------ 2%6 0.76
#-----------------------------
--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
; :* ------------
*8 - - - - - - - - - - - - #: 6 *;-
#-----------------------------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - #. }*:::::::::::
4 - -- -- ---- - -- #: 4 łł-
3%---------------------------- §§ %al------------ 41%6 1. 25

4------------------------------- %al------------ 5%6 1. 30
5------------------------------- !9 1%------------- %: 1. 41
::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: #, i;4 |III-IIII biš. ##

10------------------------------ 16 1%al------------ 11.1% 1.93
#5. D.........................
16 Ö. D.III.I.I.I.I.I.III.
º
23%
#:
iž. 1*
%. #"
# ##
§ {}
18 O. D------------------------- 25 1%, 1%6 19% 2. 65
#3: B------------------------- ;: #. #: #% #;
30 O. DIII.I.I.I.I.I.I.I.I.III. 38% 3% iž, ......:"...l........” “
36 O. D------------------------- 46 2% 1% l------------------------
42 O. D------------------------- 53 2% 1%al------------------------
48 O. D------------------------- 59% 2% 2 ------------------------
1 All 125-pound standard flanges have a plain face.

* Sizes 14 inches and larger are to be used with O. D. pipe of the same sizes.
3 All blind flanges for sizes 12 inches (19 inches O. D.) and larger must be dished, with inside radius equal to the port diameter.
4 This column is the same as column for effective thread (E) in Table 1 of the American Pipe Thread Standard, published by the American
Engineering Standards Committee, except in sizes 1%, 1%, and 2 inches.
TABLE P-14.—DIMENSIONs of Screw Ed ComPANIon AND BLIND FLANGEs 1
[250-pound cast-iron flanges. All dimensions given in inches]
Thickness | Metal Diameter | th

*h Length | Diameter
Nominal pipe size
- Di
º; Diamet
#: &#,G#,G#m. *...**
i. º "ºº"
!------------------------- 1 4% %al-------- 2%6 % 0.68 21%

1%------------------------ 1% 5% % -------- 2% 1 0.76 3%a
1%--------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1% % %ial-------- 3. 1% 0.87 3%6
2------------------------- 2 6% % -------- 3%6 1% 1. 00 4%6
#------------------------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - * } 4 }}, … -------- § 6 {}: ##| #:
16 - x6
3%------------------------ 3% 9 1% l-------- 5% 1% 1. 25 6%6

:-------------------------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
: | | | }}; --------
78 - - - -- --- % #| | | .
Ž - 716
§:…
- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - || }} };"|--------
8 ----- --- 1% |4 }. 716#| |}}: - 6
{}------------------------
14 O. DIIII
§iá;4| ;
33°
;
3%
ſº
iy,
#|
ič.
#| ##| #:
Žiš, ; 25 | isſº.
16 Ö. DIII-III-III-III. 15% 25% 2% 1% išš; 3% 2, 45 21%
18 O. D------------------- 17 28 2% 1% 20% 3% 2. 65 23%6
20 O. D------------------- 19 30% 2% 1% 22% 3%6 2.85 25%.
24 O. D------------------- 23 36 2% 1% 27% 31%g 3.25 30%6
30 O. D------------------- 29 43 8 || 2 |--------|---------------- 37%6
aim All 250-pound cast-iron standard flanges have a ¥6-inch raised face. This raised face is included in the minimum Tººls of flange
enslons.
* Sizes 14 inches and larger are to be used with O. D. pipe of the same sizes.
* All blind ſlanges for sizes 10 inches (17% inches O. D.) and larger must be dished, with inside radius equal to the port diameter.
* This column is the same as column for effective thread (E) in Table 1 of the American Pipe Thread Standard, published by the American
Engineering Standards Committee, except in sizes 1%, 1%, and 2 inches.
( F–124)
55.19–12 Bilge and ballast piping. (a) All vessels shall be provided with an efficient
pumping plant, capable of pumping from and draining any water-tight compartment under
all practicable conditions, whether the vessel is upright or listed. For this purpose wing
suctions will generally be necessary, except in narrow compartments at the ends of the vessel.
Where close ceiling is fitted over tank tops or bilges, arrangements shall be made whereby
water in the compartment may find its way to the suction pipes. Efficient means shall be
provided for the proper drainage of all tank tops, other water-tight flats, and insulated holds.
Pumping arrangements shall be provided, as follows:
(1) Large ocean-going passenger vessels. In the case of ocean-going passenger vessels
navigating more than 200 miles offshore, and which are 300 feet or more in length on the load
water line, three power pumps are required on a bilge system, at least two of which shall be
independent of the propelling unit. One of the power pumps shall be an emergency pump
of a reliable, submersible type. The source of power situated above the bulkhead deck
shall be available for this pump in any case of emergency. The necessary cocks and valves
for controlling the bilge suctions in each compartment shall be so arranged and operated
from the bulkhead deck that, in the event of flooding, the emergency pump may be operated
on any compartment. -
(2) Small ocean-going passenger vessels. The foregoing requirements shall also apply
to ocean-going passenger vessels of less than 300 feet in length on the load water line, except
that two #. pumps may be substituted for one of the power pumps.
(3) Cargo vessels. Wessels above 180 feet in length on the load water line shall be
provided with three power pumps; and below 180 feet on the load water line, two power
pumps. One of the required power pumps may be attached to the main engine. For all
tank vessels having a i. pump located in the forward end of the vessel, this pump may be
considered one of the required power pumps.
(4) Inland and other vessels. For vessels engaged in inland water service and other
vessels not exceeding 180 feet in length on the load water line, steam syphons may be substi
tuted for pumps attached to the main propelling unit, but where used they shall be made a
permanent fixture in the vessel, and at least one shall be installed in each hold or compart
ment where bilge suctions are required. The capacity of such syphons must be satisfactory
to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the district where installed.
(b) Great Lakes cargo vessels are required to be provided with ample means for pumping
and draining water-tight compartments, but in view of their peculiar construction to suit
service conditions under which they operate, they are not required to meet the requirements
of this section.
55.19-13 Pumping arrangements. (a) Where practicable, the power bilge pumps
shall be placed in separate, water-tight compartments.
(b) Sanitary, ballast, and general service pumps may be accepted as independent power
bilge pumps if fitted with the necessary connections to the bilge-pumping system.
(c) The independent power bilge pumps required by section 55.19–12 (a) (1) shall be
capable of drawing the water through their suction pipes at a velocity of not less than 400 feet
per minute under ordinary working conditions.
(d) Bilge suctions shall be led from manifolds, which shall be arranged to be controlled
above the floor plating of the compartment in which they are located, and shall be easily
accessible at all times. Each individual bilge suction shall be provided with a suitable
strainer and, in addition thereto, a mud box or basket strainer shall be provided in suitable
location between the manifold and the pump.
(e) On passenger vessels provision . be made to prevent the compartment served
by any bilge suction pipe being flooded in the event of the pipe being severed or otherwise
damaged by collision or grounding in any other compartment. For this purpose, where the
pipe is in any part situated near the side or in a ductkeel, there shall be fitted to a pipe, in
the compartment which it serves, either a screw-down valve or a stop-check lift valve,
either of which shall be capable of being operated from above the bulkhead deck.
All sea cocks or other fittings attached to the plating of a vessel shall be arranged
to be operated in an accessible place above the level of the floor plating of the compartment
in which they are located.
(g) The internal diameter of bilge suction pipes shall be determined by the following
formulas, except that the nearest commercial size not more than one-fourth inch under the
required diameter may be used.
619428°–45—9 (F–125)
For suctions to each main bilge pump:

a-V|L(BTD) 2,500
, ;
+ 1 inch (63)
For branch suctions to cargo and machinery spaces:

|l (B+D) -
where
L=length of vessel, in feet on load water line.
B=breadth of vessel, in feet.
D=molded depth to bulkhead deck, in feet.
l=length of compartment, in feet.
d=required internal diameter of suction pipe, in inches.
NotE: For tankers L may be reduced by the combined length of the cargo oil tanks.
No main suction piping shall be less than 2% inches internal diameter. No branch
piping need be more than 4 inches nor less than 2 inches in diameter, except for drainage of
small pockets or spaces in which case 1%-inch diameter may be used.
(h) The number, location, and size of bilge suctions in the boiler and machinery com
partments shall be determined by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the district
where the vessel is being built when the piping arrangement is submitted for approval and
shall be based upon the size of the compartments and the drainage arrangements. One of
the independent bilge pumps shall have a suction of a diameter not less than that given by
formula (64), from the engine-room bilge, entirely independent of the bilge main, and on
ocean-going passenger vessels each of the independent bilge pumps shall have such a suction
from the compartment in which it is located.
(i) Lead pipes shall not be used under coal bunkers or oil-fuel storage tanks, nor in boiler
or machinery spaces, including motor rooms in which oil-settling tanks or oil-fuel pump units
are situated. ere such piping is permitted, it shall be adequately protected.
(j) Main circulating pumps jºbe fitted with direct suction connections provided with
nonreturn valves in the machinery space. The diameter of such suction pipes shall be not
less than two-thirds of the diameter of the main sea inlet. Where coal is used as fuel and no
water-tight bulkhead is provided between the engine and boiler rooms, a direct discharge
overboard shall be fitted from at least one circulating pump, or a by-pass may be fitted to the
circulating discharge.
(k) For internal-combustion engine installations, the emergency bilge suction shall be
connected to the largest available pump in the engine room and shall have an area equal to
the full suction inlet of the pump. This requirement is in addition to the independent bilge
suction stipulated in paragraph (h).
(l) ºf pipes required for draining cargo or machinery spaces shall be separate from
pipes which are used for filling or emptying spaces where water or oil is carried, and shall be
controlled by separate valves at the pumps so arranged as to preclude the entrance of water
and oil into cargo and machinery spaces.
55.19–14 Independent fuel piping and tanks (Emergency units)—(a) Scope. Vessels
carrying passengers shall be allowed to carry such quantities of gasoline or any of the products
of petroleum as may be necessary to supply the emergency lighting and/or wireless system
when contained in tanks constructed and installed in accordance with the following require
ments: The supply of gasoline for emergency units shall be limited to 40 gallons and the
suppº of heavier fuel oils shall be limited to 15 long tons (2,240 pounds).
(b) Gasoline tanks. (1) Construction. º lindrical form and may
The tanks shall be
be constructed of . of the following materials:
Wrought iron, mild steel, or of corrosion
resistant alloys suitable for the purpose, and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch.
Tanks constructed of ferrous metals less than 0.1875 inch in thickness shall be galvanized b
the hot-dipped process both inside and outside. Joints shall be riveted, brazed, or welded,
except that soldered joints may be used on small tanks of 20 gallons or less capacity, provided
the solder used has a melting point of not less than 450° F. All spuds for pipe connections
shall be securely riveted, welded, brazed, or soldered to the tank. No tubular gauge glasses
or try-cocks shall be fitted to tanks.
(F–126)
(2) Installation. The tanks shall be located on the uppermost deck outside the engine
compartment as close to the engine as practicable and so arranged as to permit a free circula
tion of air all around them. When installed, longitudinal seams shall be located as near the
top of tank as practicable. The tanks shall be properly secured and accessible for complete
external examination.
(3) Tests. Tanks shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 15 pounds per square inch
gage after installation.
(c) Heavy oil tanks. (1) Construction. The tanks may be of either cylindrical or
rectangular form and may be constructed of any of the following materials: Wrought iron,
mild steel, or of any corrosion-resistant alloys suitable for the purpose. Tanks designed for
capacities of 40 gallons or less shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0625 inch. Tanks de
signed for capacities of over 40 gallons shall have a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch. Joints
shall be riveted, brazed, or welded, except that soldered joints may be used on small tanks
of 20 gallons or less capacity provided that the solder used has a melting point of not less
than 450°F. Tanks shall be provided with swash plates and braces where necessary. The
material used shall be the same as the tank. All spuds for pipe connections shall be securel
riveted, welded, brazed, or soldered to the tank. No tubular gauge glasses or try-cocks sha
be fitted to tanks.
(2) Installation. The tanks shall be located in an adequately ventilated steel or iron
compartment on the deck above the weather deck. Tanks exposed to a temperature in
excess of 100°F. shall be properly insulated, provided that no tank shall be located in an
compartment where the temperature exceeds 150°F. When cylindrical tanks are installed,
longitudinal seams shall be located as near the top of the tank as practicable. The tanks
. be properly secured and accessible for complete internal and external examination.
(3) Tests. Tanks shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 10 pounds per square inch
gage after installation.
(d) Outage. When filling the tanks with gasoline or other pretroleum products, an
outage of 2 percent shall be provided.
(e) Piping connections. (1) The fuel piping for all tanks shall comply with section
55.19 C. F. R. and in addition it shall also comply with the following requirements:
(2) It shall be run in sight wherever practicable, but protected from mechanical injury
and effectively secured against vibration.
(3) The filling pipe shall enter the top of the tank. If the filling pipe is run nearly to
the bottom of the tank, it may serve as a combined filling and sounding pipe.
(4) The sº pipe to the engine shall enter the top of the tank and extend . to
the bottom of the tank. The return pipe from the engine shall enter the top of the tan
(5) Shut-off valves or cocks of a suitable type ji be installed in supply lines and
located in accessible positions at the tank.
(6) Similar shut-off valves shall be located in the supply lines close to the carburetor
or fuel pumps.
(7). No outlets for drawing fuel shall be permitted in engine compartments.
(8) Open drains for removing water from the fuel tanks are not permitted.
(f) Filling and sounding connections. Filling and sounding pipes for fuel tanks shall
terminate on deck and be fitted with suitable shut-off valves or deck plugs.
(g) Vents. Each tank shall be fitted with a vent the cross-sectional area of which shall
be not less than the area of the º pipe. The vents shall terminate in the atmosphere at
least 2 feet above the deck and not less than 3 feet from any opening into living quarters.
All vent pipes shall terminate with U-bends and shall be fitted with flame screens or approved
flame arresters.
55.19–15 Oil transfer and filling systems. Oil transfer and filling systems shall con
form to the following requirements:
(a) Application to the Commandant for permission to use petroleum or other mineral
oils as fuel shall be made in triplicate on the prescribed blank form, and shall be forwarded
through the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, of the district where the installation is to
be made. Plans in triplicate of the complete installation shall be submitted to the Comman
dant. The plans shall receive approval of the Commandant before permission can be
granted to use oil as fuel on vessels.
(b) Oil-piping systems for the transfer or ºf: of cargo or fuel oil shall be separate
from other piping systems as far as practicable, and dependable means shall be provided
to prevent dangerous interconnection in service.
(F–127)
(c) Manifolds and valves shall be located in accessible places, preferably on the bulk
heads, and shall be distinctly and permanently marked to indicate the tank or compartment
to which they are connected.
(d) Filling pipes may be led directly from the deck into the tanks, or to a manifold in an
accessible location from which the oil can be distributed to the various tanks through branch
pipes or the tank suctions.
(e) Where filling or suction pipes enter deep tanks, peak tanks, or settling tanks at a
level where the pipe may be exposed to a head pressure from the tank, shut-off valves shall
be installed at the bulkhead, preferably on the inside of the tank, but such valves may be
installed on the outside of the tank provided they are made of forged or cast steel and properly
riveted or bolted to the tank, and adequately protected against mechanical injury by steel
guards. All such valves shall be fitted with an efficient mechanical means for operating
from an open and accessible space on deck outside of the machinery and boiler casing, the
operating rods to be properly protected.
(f) The intake end of filling pipes shall be fitted with a shut-off valve and a blank
flange or screwed cap which shall be kept closed when not in use.
(g) Where heating coils are necessary, they shall be made of seamless or extra heavy
steel piping. For piping at the bulkhead, bolted flanged joints are required. All other joints
within tanks are recommended to be welded.
(h) In fuel-oil tanks, sections of piping for heating the oil may be joined by welding in
lieu of flange connections. The two sections to be joined shall be butted and a sleeve shall
cover the joint. The sleeve shall be of the same material, its length shall be at least one
half inch more than the diameter of the pipe and it shall be located with the joint midway of
its length. The ends of the sleeve shall be welded to the pipe. An a ºd form of saddle
butt-welded joint may be used in lieu of the sleeve joint. The welding shall be done by
welders certificated by the Coast Guard to weld pipe or plate.
(i) Went pipes. All tanks used for carrying fuel oil shall be fitted with vent pipes in
accordance with the following requirements:
(1) Fuel oil settling tanks and similar tanks having a comparatively small surface shall
be fitted with at least one vent pipe. Tanks having a comparatively large surface shall be
fitted with at least two vent pipes, one of which shall be located at the highest part of the
tank. Where fuel-oil tanks are filled by pump pressure or by gravity of exceptional head,
the aggregate area of vent pipes shall be at least equal to the ñº.connection at the tank
unless other overflows are provided. In no case shall the diameter of any vent pipe be less
than 2% inches.
(2) Went pipes shall terminate in an open space on deck and shall be equipped with
U-bends fitted with a wire-gauze diaphragm. Approved means for closing vent pipes in an
emergency shall be provided where necessary.
§ §. pipes shall be led as direct as practicable and the inclination in all cases shall
not be less than 30° from the horizontal, except where both ends are adequately drained to
a tank. -
(j) Overflow pipes. Where overflow pipes are fitted to fuel-oil tanks, they shall conform
to the following requirements:
(1) The area of the overflow pipe for fuel-oil tanks shall equal at least the area of the
filling connection to the tank.
(2), Overflow pipes equipped to discharge through the ship's side shall be located as far
above the load line as practicable, and shall be provided with nonreturn valves located on
the ship's side. For ocean-going passenger vessels there shall be provided in addition to the
aforementioned nonreturn valve an efficient accessible and positive means for preventing
water from passing inboard. Such means may consist of another nonreturn valve in an
accessible position above the deepest load line.
(k) Fuel-oil service º Fuel-oil service piping (that is, pressure piping from the
pumps to the burners) shall conform to the following requirements: *
(1) All discharge piping from the pumps to the burners shall be of extra heavy seamless
steel conforming to the requirements of sections 51.11–1 to 51.11–9.
(2) All valves and fittings used on fuel-oil .# lines shall be extra strong. Cast
iron valves and fittings are not permitted for discharge lines in the service system.
(3) All fuel-oil discharge piping, after being assembled, shall be subjected to a hydro
static pressure of not less than 500 pounds per square inch. This test i be witnessed and
certified to by a duly authorized inspector.
(F–128)
PIPING SYSTEMS (55.19–17]
(4) Bushings and street ells shall not be used in connection with fuel-oil discharge piping.
(5) Where screwed bonnet valves are used for this service, they shall be of the union
bonnet type.
(6) On all ocean and coastwise vessels, two separate pumping units are required to
supply oil to the burners.
(7). The discharge piping from pumps to burners shall be fitted with an approved relief
... which shall be in closed circuit; that is, discharged into the suction line, or back into
the tank.
(8) Service oil pumps shall be equipped with means of control from a readily accessible
position outside of the boiler room which will always be accessible in the event of fire occurring
in the compartment in which they are located.
55.19–16 Sounding pipes. (a) Sounding pipes not less than 1% inches inside diam
eter, shall be fitted to all tanks and hold compartments which are not at all times accessible.
(b) The pipes shall be led as straight as possible from within 2 inches of the lowest
part of the tank or compartment to the bulkhead deck or other position which is always
accessible. Where sounding pipes terminate below the bulkhead deck they shall be pro
vided with a valve at the top. In passenger vessels a self-closing valve shall be required;
in cargo vessels a gate valve may be used.
(c) The upper ends of sounding pipes terminating at a deck shall be protected by a
. cap or #. No perforations or openings will be permitted throughout the length of
the pipe.
} Striking Fº or approved fittings shall be provided under the sounding pipes to
protect the hull plate from injury.
55.19–17 Welded sea "hºis. Sea chests may be constructed by fusion welding.
(F–129)
PART 56—FUSION WELDING 1
Sec. Sec.
56.20–1 Scope. 56.20–9 Preparation for welding.
56.20–2 Definitions. 56.20–10 Joints.
56.20-3 Qualification tests for welders. 56.20–11 Dished heads.
56.20–12 Reinforced fusion-welded connections.
RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION or FUsion WELDED DRUMS 56.20–13 Stress relieving.
OR SHELLS OF MARINE BOILERS AND PREssure V Essels 56.20–14 Hydrostatic and hammer tests.
56.20–15 Inspection.
56.20–4 Class I - 56.20–16 Distortion.
56.20–5 Nondestructive tests. 56.20–17 Manufacturer's data report for Classes II and III test
56:20-6 glass II: requirements.
56.20–7 Class III. 56.20–18 §§ report of individual welding operators.
56.20–8 Material. 56.20–19 Welded piping.
Section 56.20–1 Scope. (a) The rules in this part apply to new construction and to
repairs as prescribed in section 57.21–4.
(b) Drums or shells of boilers and pressure vessels may be fabricated by means of fusion
welding, or by the submerged melt electric welding process as deſined in section 56.20–2 (b),
in accordance with the rules of this section.
(c) In preparing drawings of welded structures for approval, the welding symbols
º by the American Welding Society shall be used to designate the type and class of
welding.
(d) Where the submerged melt electric welding process is employed, special process
approval tests are required to be made by the manufacturer to determine whether he F. the
proper equipment and personnel to produce sound dependable joints.
(e) the submerged melt electric welding process the weld may be laid in two or more
passes, preferably laying the smaller pass first, then turning the plate over and chipping or
machining the first pass to remove defects and to form a clean backing surface for the weld
metal which may be laid in one or more passes.
(f) Longitudinal joints of corrugated furnaces may be made by any approved process
of fusion welding, provided the welding complies with the requirements of section 56.20–4
for Class I welding as modified by the provisions of section 52.11-4 (g).
56.20–2 Definitions—(a) Fusion welding. A process of welding metals in the molten,
or molten and vaporous, state without the application of mechanical pressure or blows.
(b) Submerged melt electric welding process. This is a process employing a bare
electrode and a granulated welding composition to accomplish fusion by passing an electric
current between the electrode and the work through the granulated ºfwhich completely
.. the end of the electrode and protects the fused metal from contact with air or other out
Side gases.
(c) Fillet weld. A fusion weld of approximately triangular cross section whose throat
lines in a plane disposed approximately 45° with respect to the surfaces of the parts joined.
(d) Throat. The minimum thickness of a weld along a straight line passing through the
bottom of the cross-sectional space provided to contain a fusion weld.
(e) Double-weld butt joint. A joint formed by the fusion of two abutting edges with a
filler metal added from both sides of the joint and with reinforcement on both sides.
(f) Single-welded butt joint. A joint formed by the fusion of two abutting edges with
all the filler metal added from one side of the joint with a reinforcement on the side from which
the filler metal is added.
Note: A joint with filler metal added from only one side may be considered equivalent to a double-welded butt joint when and iſ satis
factory means are provided for accomplishing complete penetration and reinforcement on both sides of the joint.
(g) Welder. A person who operates welding equipment, either manual or automatic,
other than an operator of submerged melt electric welding equipment.
56.20–3 Qualification tests for welders. (a) Before being permitted to make welds
subject to inspection by the Coast Guard each welder shall pass the applicable tests specified
1 The rules in this part are based on those prepared by a subcommittee of the committee on welding in marine construction of the American
Welding Society, which in turn were based on those prepared by the boiler code committee of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
with the cooperation of the American Welding Society.
(F–131)
in table W-1. The tests shall be made with the same equipment to be used in production or
with equipment equivalent thereto. The welding and testing of the specimens required
shall be witnessed by an inspector.
NotE.—The tests specified herein bear the same number as, and are identical with, tests acceptable to the American Bureau of Shipping
and the Bureau of Ships of the Navy Department. Welders qualified in accordance with these tests by an inspector of the American Bureau
of Shipping, the Bureau of Ships of the Navy Department, or the Coast Guard will be acceptable to the Coast Guard.
(b) A welder doing satisfactory welding work continuously will not be required to be
retested. A welder who has not been engaged in actual use of the welding process for which
he was qualified for a period exceeding three months shall be required to pass the applicable
tests before being permitted to resume work. A welder may be required the inspector to §
repeat and pass the tests at any time if, in the inspector's opinion, the welder's work indicates
a reasonable doubt as to his ability.
(c) All welders shall pass the qualification tests for the type and thickness of material,
the kind of welding and position of work involved as specified in table W-1.
TABLE W-1.-REQUIRED QUALIFICATION TESTs
Positions in which welded joints are located on job
Flat, horizontal,
overheadvertical and Flat and vertical Flat position only
On plate % inch or less in thick- | Test No. 1 in vertical and over- Test No. 1 in vertical position.--| Test No. 1 in flat position.
ness. 12 head positions.
On material of unlimited thick- Test No. 2 in vertical and hori- Test No. 2 in vertical position---| Test No. 2 in flat position.
ness.” zontal positions.
On piping or tubing 346 inch or Test No. 3 with axis of pipe in horizontal and vertical fixed posi- Test No. 3 with axis of pipe in hori
less in thickness." tions, provided welder has previously passed Tests Nos. 1 or 2 in zontal position and rolled pro
vertical and overhead positions. vided welder has previously been
qualified by tests Nos. 1 or 2 for
the flat position.
On piping or tubing of unlimited | Test No. 4 in horizontal and vertical fixed positions---------------- Test No. 4 in horizontal position
thickness.4 * * and rolled.
For tack welders 7----------------- Test No. 5 in vertical and over- Test No. 5 in vertical position---
head positions.
On material of unlimited thick- Test No. 6 in vertical and over- Test No. 6 in vertical position | Test No. 6 in flat position (arc or
ness (for base metals of high con- head positions (for gas weld- (for gas welding only). gas). -
ductivity). ing only).
1 Where the maximum thickness of material on which a welder may have occasion to work throughout a period governed by a test is
indeterminate, the inspector may, iſ desired, require the welder to qualify under unlimited thickness requirements.
2. Where the maximum plate thickness to be welded in production is less than 34” the contractor may, with the permission of the inspector,
use the following modification of Test No. 1: The test plate thickness shall be the maximum to be welded in production, but shall not be less
than 346”. The root opening shall be not more than the diameter of the welding rod or electrode core wire to be used. The backing strap thick
ness shall not be less than %".
3 Where the maximum plate thickness to be welded in production is between 34” and 1%”, Test No. 2 may, with the permission of the
inspector, be conducted on plate of such maximum thickness.
4 Tests Nos. 3 and 4 welded in the shop in the flat (downhand) position need not be welded in a confined space. A welder qualified to
weld on plate in the vertical position may be permitted to weld on pipe in the flat position.
* Welders qualified under the requirements of test No. 4 will be considered as qualified to make welds governed by tests Nos. 1, 2, and 3
for the same positions.
* The macro specimen indicated in Figure W-1C for Test No. 4 may be required at the option of the inspector and may be taken at any
location in the joint.
7 Tack welding may be done by any welder qualified in accordance with Tests Nos. 1, 2, 3, or 4.
(d) Qualification tests Nos. 1, 2,4, 5, and 6 shall be the welding of specimens in accord
ance with figures W-1, W-1A, W–1C, W–1D, and W-1E respectively. Qualification
test No. 3 shall be the welding, hydraulic testing and visual inspection of pipe assemblies or,
as an alternate, removal of specimens for macroscopic inspection in accordance with figure
W–1B.
(F–132)
FUSION WELDING (56.20–3]
DIRECTION OF ROLLING
<º
- f
DISCARD
- - - -
- - - ff
FAC E B EN D *—rou
# ALLLowed
CUTS
For ALL
D- - - --
R O OT BEND
;
*_jou
DISCARD
IO ~!
--
60°
o
WARPING 5* MAX. DIAMETER OF WELDING ROD OR
ELECTRODE CORE WIRE
EAH |
rººt # win.
ldi Arc
weiolin
yºu. shall be made with the maximum size of electrodes to be used in production. Gas welds shall be made with Me" diameter
rools -
2. §ne reinforcement and backing strap flush. Do not remove any undercutting.
. Machining shall be done transverse to weld.
. All specimens shall be machined or sawed from plate.
. Backing strap shall be contiguous with plates.
i Arc welds made in the vertical position shall be welded upwards.

. . Welding shall be done from one side only.
. Round edges of specimens to a radius .# maximum.
FIGURE W-1.-Welder's qualification test No. 1.
(F–138)
©
DISCARD
!
!
ro
|--- -
—f-
TITSBETEEN5 - -
'ALLowed FOR
J
r -ºf–
-
ALL CUTS
DISCARD º o
! ----
TsIEIBENDI +
: J. ſ
Tºf
----
DISCARD
WARPING 5° MAx. SEE NOTE NO. I
\
|
ſº -- " MIN.
-
1. when welding in the flat and vertical positions of welding the groove angle shall be 25°; when welding in the horizontal position the
groove angle shall be 35° and the unbeveled plate shall be located on the top side of the joint.
2. Backing strap shall be contiguous with plates.
3. Each pass of the weld shall be made with the same size of welding rod or electrode to be used in production.
Arc welds made in the vertical position shall be welded upwards.
:. . Welding shall be done from one side only.
#. Machine reinforcement and backing strap flush. Do not remove any undercutting.
. All specimens shall be machined or sawed ſron plate.
8. Machining shall be done transverse to weld.
9. Round edges of specimens to a radius of F maximum.
Figure W-1A.—Welder's qualification test No. 2.
(F–134)
FUSION WELDING [56.20–3]
(Tx2T) [- 4 to 41 45
X 3-s. Tº M4 I/
2:…is SNNNN
T +
N-J
§ For 3 to 2'size
I" For 24" to 4"size *— l"—d
USE MI N. SIZE PIPING USE MIN. SIZE PIPING USE 3. PIPING

USED IN PRODUCTION USED IN PRODUCTION
H---—- T
A PPE TAP Foſt waſ ER ! |− Floor For verticAL Position
CONNECTIONS }<-T TSN
º -- 7 TACK WELD OR CLAMP N
*— 6 —- 3. L. 6" - N
% 135° -- 8 - SEE NOTE º - N
N
% |--|->|--|-- |N
Z - WALL ---- : -- N
Z an - N
- –H– — q. - - N
º w *—cu : TN
+ -
4 Pººj : ) || || – ––––– N
1 225-–Z |-4
º L 3." | N
º |6 - N
%*N_ WALL -
FLOOR FOR WHORIZODATAL ºn 2
º º º ºv-Z - - - - 7
[Position in which specimens are welded. One assembly in horizontal fixed position. One assembly in vertical fixed position.]
1. When slip-on sleeves and plain type backing rings are used in production, plain type backing rings shall be used in this test. When
all three types are used in production, flare-type backing rings shall be used in this test.
2. Parts shall be galvanized where required.
Weld shall be deposited in a minimum of two layers.
. Saw cut after pressure test for visual inspection.
No icicles or reduction of area of §:
shall be permitted.
Omit end plates “A” and “B” when etch test is used in lieu of hydrostatic test.
Remove macro specimens from 45°, 135°, 225° and 315° points of the welded butt joints as indicated. (For etch test only.)
. Mark top and front of piping to insure proper location of specimens when etch test is used in lieu of hydrostatic test.
Welding shall be done from one side only.
1. . For arc welding use the maximum size of electrode to be used in production. For gas welding use }{” diameter welding rod.
FIGURE W-1B.-Welder's qualification test No. 3.
(F–135)
| role l _2
-- *****Nº,
ALLOWED 6" 6"

FOR ALL %
CUT's FOR HORIZONTAL
POSITION SEE ſº
~~ DETAiL º
- - - - - - ---- -H---------------
2
º
º
º
M
- - -
º
%
º
TACK WELD º
| OR CLAMP %
- - - ------- -------------12
MACRO SPECIME N (OPTIONAL) Floor For verticAL Position -2 Nº.

ſ.
C
[Position in which specimens are welded. One assembly in horizontal fixed position. One assembly in vertical fixed position]
1 . Each pass of the weld shall be made with the same size of welding rod or electrode that will be used in production.
2 Machine reinforcement and backing strap flush. Do not remove any undercutting. -

4. All specimens shall be machined or sawed from piping.
5. Round edges of bend specimens to a radius of max.
6. of piping to insure proper
Mark top and frontspecimens location of specimens;
7. Remove face-bend from 45° and 225°points, and root-bend specimens from 135° and 315°points as indicated.
8. . Welding shall be done from one side only:
9 Ifpiping of greaterwall thickness than 0.380"isused in this test, º: may be machined to 0.350” to 0.380” before welding, or the bend
ing jig may be made in accordance with the actual thickness, T, of p p used.
Figure W-1C.—Welder's qualification test No. 4.
(F–136)
ºt
." !
–4–1.
SINGLE BEADS
o
. . }%” diameter electrode shall be used.

º shall be contiguous with plates.
. Backing
i . All welds welded in the vertical position shall be welded upwards.

- §. shall be bent in one piece with backing strap in place and face of weld in tension.
. . Weld fractures shall exhibit no unfused areas on backing strap or sides of groove throughout length of each tack.
FIGURE W-1D.—Welder's qualification test No. 5.
(F–137)
- DIRECTION OF ROLLING - 60".
3.
16
WELD NEED EXTEND DISCARD
FOR 6" ONLY IF
DESIRED i- =
: \l ly º
# ALLowed For * Toko
ALL CUTS --
k— " — f
- -- -- 2-I-T--- ! SAME MATERIAL
º --- - -- - AS PLATES
- co FACE BEND : -"
| -- -- -
i ROOT BEND
+:
! *_J^J t
DISCARD ALTERNATE JOINT FOR

ARC WELDING
WARPING 5 ° MAX.
16"
SEE DETAIL "ro 3"
Y-so'y
[+ tº * * **— \/ I fºr TN/T]
-T-
[NO BACKING STRAP FOR
GAS WELDING )
i 1.... shall be made on the maximum thickness plate, within limits indicated, with maximum size welding rod or electrode to be used
n production.
2. For gas welding machine reinforcement on both sides flush. For arc welding machine reinforcement and backing strap flush. Do not
remove any undercutting.
4. All specimens shall be machined or sawed from plates.
5. Backing strap shall be contiguous with plates.
6. Arc welds welded in the vertical position shall be welded upwards.
7. Welding shall be done from one side only.
8. Round edges of specimens to a radius of F maximum.
FIGURE W–1E.—Welder's qualification test No. 6.
(F–138)
TAPPED HOLE FOR BOLT, FOR

HOLDING JIG IN TESTING MACHINE
*—AS REQUIRED —- Hº-As REQUIRED
–3/4"
2 tº wº
: V"
-
. - .
! ! | (2T)
_2" FOR ALL THICK- N
_ſ NESSES OF SPECIMEN. 3/4
--
†-fº/8 -- Sºukº's HARDENED

AND GREASED.
..
1V2 We"
-- #t",F#-
(4T)
T
- Hº-1/4" º:
Qo I
2%
- (FOR TEST
No. 6 ONLY)
- ºr|- 23 + 27
t cul- .S. ſº- 3–
->
<!- s toſs º sº -
(For TEST-A \ ^3 &

---------- —l No. 6 on LY)
#4
34 . ---
- | 2 3/8"
: ! ! (ST-FI/s")
| 7; --
(s;" For
V"
TEST No. 6)
(20 T)
9" ( to" For TEST No. 6)

(24 Ty
1. T-thickness of test specimens.
2. #. dimensions are for 36” tests cimens.
2 dened rolls may be used on shoulders if desired.
FIGURE W-1F.—Standard qualification test bending jig.
(F–139)
(e) Specimens for tests Nos. 1, 2, and 4 shall be bent to the full capacity of the jig shown
in figure W-1F for 34” specimens. The plate for test No. 5 shall be bent to fracture of the
tack welds in the standard jig for 94" specimens. Specimens for test No. 1, modified (see
note No. 2 of table W-1), and for test No. 4 modified (see note No. 9 of figure W-1C) shall
be bent to the full capacity of a jig having a contour proportional to the thickness of the test
specimens involved as indicated in figure W-1F. Specimens for test No. 6 shall be bent to
the full capacity of a jig having a contour proportional to the thickness of the test specimens
involved and having the j. dimensions shown in figure W-1F for test No. 6.
(f) Tube specimens for test No. 3 shall remain tight when subjected to a hydrostatic
test pressure necessary to impose a hoop stress of 30,000 pounds p. s. i. as calculated by the
following formula:
SXT
P=*f;
When P is the required hydrostatic test pressure; S is 30,000 pounds per square inch; T is
the wall thickness of the tube in inches not to exceed 0.120 inches; and R is the inside radius of
the tube in inches. As an alternate for the hydrostatic test, four transverse specimens may
be removed from the welded joint of test No. 3 at 45°, 135°, 225° and 315° points for macro
scopic inspection consisting of etching and visual inspection with a magnifying glass. Mac
roscopic examination shall show complete penetration into the root of the weld and freedom
from cracks, slag inclusions, porosity, or other defects.
(g) Root bend specimens shall be bent with the root of the weld in tension; face bend
specimens with the face of the weld in tension; and side bend specimens with that side sus
pected of being the worse of the two, in tension. In testing a specimen the two members of
the jig shall be forced together until the specimen conforms to a U-shape, and until a 42"
i. wire cannot be placed between the specimen and any point on the curvature of the
(h) Any specimen for tests Nos. 1, 2, 4, and 6 in which a crack or opening exists before
p unger.
the bending, or results from the bending, exceeding #" measured in any direction shall be
rejected. No elongation data are required.
(i) No preheating shall be done in any of the tests, and the temperature of previously
flºited weld metal shall not be over 212°F. at time of deposition of subsequent bead or
ayer.
(i) No peening shall be done in tests Nos. 1,3,4, 5, and 6. Peening may be done on each
layer in test No. 2 except the first and last layers.
(k) No stress relieving shall be done on tests Nos. 1, 3, 5, and 6. On test No. 2, before
machining specimens from the joint, the plate shall be stress relieved by maintaining it at
1,150°F. (+50°F.) for one hour per inch of thickness followed by slow cooling in the furnace
to a temperature below 500°F. Stress relieving, as outlined for test No. 2 above, may be
done on test No. 4, provided such procedure is being used in production work.
(l) Tests Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 are applicable for either metal arc welders or gas welders.
Test No. 5 is for arc welders only. For arc welding, the passing of these tests with direct
current equipment shall qualify the welder for using direct-current equipment only and the
passing of these tests º alternating current equipment shall qualify the welder for using
alternating-current equipment only. Passing of these tests with direct-current equipment
using either straight polarity or reverse polarity shall qualify the welder for both polarities.
(m) Results of qualification tests shall be entered and maintained in ink on a record card,
the face and back of which shall be similar to figures W-1G and W-1H, respectively.
(F–140)
RECORD CARD OF WELDER'S QUALIFICATION TESTS
Name: -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Employer: --------------------------------------------------------------------
Approved for: -----------------------------------------------------------------
o # s.3
Z ź= | 3 #5 ~
Date of Signature of inspector P-,
#
*: ź 3 :3## test Q)
q2 -- to
& & | 3 à || 3 ||3: <
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----------------------------------
FIGURE W–1G.
Date of birth: ----------------------------
Place of birth: ---------------------------
Symbol for marking work:------------------

Employed as a welder under
Test No. From To
(Photograph)
FIGURE W-1H.
619428°–45—10 (F–141)
(n) Approval of welding rods and electrodes. Welding rods or electrodes are required to
be approved by the Commandant before they can be used in the fabrication of boilers,
ressure vessels, and engineering equipment on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the
É. Guard.
(o) To obtain approval of welding rods or electrodes manufacturers shall submit to the
Commandant, for test at the National Bureau of Standards, specimens of deposited metal
made in the presence of an inspector. Scientific data and facts shall also be submitted to
show that dependable sound welds can be made with the products on which approval is
desired. Instructions for the preparation of test coupons may be obtained upon application
to the Commandant.
RULES FOR Construction of FUsion WELDED DRUMs or SHELLs of MARINE BoILERs

AND PREssure VEssELs
56.20–4 Class I. (a) This class includes pressure parts of all boilers, the working
pressure of which exceeds 30 pounds per square inch, and for all other pressure vessels whose
construction is not permitted under the rules for class II or class III vessels.
Ry { We/a/reinforcemenſ ma
$ Gº (**º º
%.4 ſ!"where #ſseyva/roarſessman/ºch

W.Approximately /" where t is grafer than Aſſoch
(a)
FULLSECTION TEST SPECIMEN REQUIRED
FOR TENSION TEST OF WELDED JOINT
If Capons have been ºv/apart & aſsion process
ſhe ſwrimea/‘. ore/obe/Machinea/offashakaſed.
§
*
Edge of Weld. .*s,
•ºſ--Hº zzº
~tº Zºº -kºzºvsy
Machining of his Jechon Y- W-Approxima/e/y Aineh
ź.?:% &e cone |
Aſ/ng. Boſh faces of
...” retisezvaſſa or
Aless ſham Aſn.c4.
euweldore ſo be mach, Wºroximofey/in where?
f/ushwiſh ſhe Plafe. (b) is greater ſham Ainch.
REDUCEDSECTION TEST SPECIMEN REQUIRED
FOR TENSION TEST OF WELDED JOINT
FIGURE W-2.
(b) The joint efficiency E for this class shall be taken as 90 percent.
(c) Test plates for longitudinal seams. For drums having one or more longitudinal
seams, at least one set of test plates shall be provided for each drum when welded separately,
or for each 50 feet of aggregate longitudinal seams when a number of shells of the same design
(F–142)
and grade of material are welded in succession on the same order and by the same welder or
welders. The test plates shall be attached to one end of one longitudinal seam being welded
as shown in figure W-5 (a) so that the weld metal in the test plates is deposited continuously
with that in the drum seams. Drums of Grades E, F, or G marine boiler plate, however,
shall be welded separately and shall be provided with at least one set of test plates for each
drum except for cases covered by paragraph (d).
(d) Test plates for circumferential seams. For drums having circumferential seams but
no longitudinal seams, at least one set of test plates welded separately shall be provided for
each drum or for each 50 feet of aggregate circumferential seams of drums of the same grade
of material being welded in succession whose plate thicknesses fall within a range of #.
and whose diameters vary by not more than 6 inches.
THIS SURFACE TO BE REASONABLY SMOOTH. ºf COUPONs HAVE BEEN CUT APART
ANY TOOL MARKS REMAINING MUST BE BY A Fusion PROCESS, THE BURNED
LENGTHWISE OF SPECIMEN EDGES TO BE MACHINED OFF AS
- INDICATED.
Round corners nor over #, t
-*—
-low *
7
PRick PUNCH *= l /
f rºse of wello s
*4- /
-
£
-In —
/" 2."
#—" º- *-73
- - la l ~l- 4. -l- f
f INDICATES LighT T #4. T # 4. T #4
FINISH CUT. WELD M -
REINFORCEMEMENT to
BE REMoved. .*
w = $t *—2–~~ ºn-se:
FIGURE W-3. Specimen for free-bend test.
(e) The test plates shall be welded by the same welder or welders employed on the drums.
They shall be of the same thickness as the plates being welded and . be of sufficient size
to provide two specimens of each type required except that in the case of drums having no
longitudinal seams, the test plates need be long enough to provide only one set of specimens
and in the case retests are required, an additional set of plates may be welded separately.
(f) For plates 34 inch or less in thickness one reduced section specimen and two free
bend specimens shall be tested. For plates over } inch in thickness one reduced section
tensile specimen, one free-bend specimen, and one guided side bend specimen shall be tested.
(g) The test plates shall be so supported that the warping due to welding shall not throw
the finished test plate out of line by an angle of over 5°.
(h) Where the welding has warped the test plates, they shall be straightened before
being stress relieved. The test plates shall be subjected to the same stress-relieving opera
tion, as required by section 56.20–13. At no time shall the test plates be heated to a tempera
ture higher than that used for stress relieving the vessel.
(i) In submitting the samples for tests, the manufacturer shall state the minimum and
maximum tensile range of the base metal. If this information is not available, he shall
submit a test coupon of the solid plate machined to form as described in figure W-2 (a).
(j) The bend specimens shall be taken from opposite sides of the reduced section tensile
specimen in their respective test plates as shown in figures W-5 (b) and W-5 (c).
(F–143)
A
| [Zº
:*::::::iºn
£5 & -
Tſ|--—- TN 4-
Ax
*
A= cRoss section THRU
TENSION SPECIMIEN. 4–
43s cross section THRU
TENSION SPECIMENS ON \ 7
VERY THIGK PLATE. -
CROSS SECTION OF BEND• TEST

SPECI MENS FROM VERY THICK PUATE.
FIGURE W-4.
73.5//º/afes
AP EIILTUF=----------------- 7Gsf/ºaſes fo/be
'e/aforcing&rs e5?? 7.7ſes ſo
c/ampeo'oraebºd A/'07 She/ Žc4%/ded;6 .
fo AacArof7Gs/ fºe.She/oroſherwise
* ––––––––––––––––– Jºaorfeo/fr.
Aosifon.
7estPafe_--~~~
•
) -R
~~~Jºsfrare
TSs
21 2. Reinforcing Bars TS ^ N
Se/2 openºel
FIGURE W-5 (A).
(k), Type of joint. For these test requirements, the type of joint shall be of the double
welded butt joint. The preparation of the edges of the test plate for welding shall be the
same as that to be employed in construction.
(l) Procedure of welding. The test plates shall be welded under the same procedure as
to be employed for construction. The process of welding, size and type of welding rod,
number of welding layers, position in which the welding is i. etc., º be the equivalent
of that to be used for construction. Only such accessories to, or supplements of, the welding
(F–144)
DiscARD l THIS PIECE
F--------------------- --
free ben D
FREE BEND sPEGIMEN
sPECI MEN
FREE BEND
of sGARD this PIEGE
TEST PLATES FOR MATERIAL 3/4 INCH OR LESS IN THICKN ESS
FIGURE W–5 (B).
DISCARD this Pie CE
TTTTTTguideo side send T LI

REDUCED section
FREE BEND
T T TT GUIDED TsIDETEEND TTTTT
REDUCED SECTION
free BE No
H-----------------
DISCARD This Piece
TEST PLATES FOR MATERIAL OVER 3/4 INCH IN THICKNESS

FIGURE W-5 (C).
procedure as will be required for construction (for example, the employment of weld backing
up strips or reheating of the test plates for stress relief or heat treatment), shall be employed
in the production of the test plates.
(m) The external appearances of the welds and the amount of weld reinforcement shall
conform to the requirements for construction, and the maximum reinforcement for the test
plates shall not exceed the minimum required for construction.
(F–145)
(n) The tension-test specimen shall be transverse to the welded joint and shall be the
full thickness of the plate after the weld reinforcement has been machined flush. The
form and dimensions shall be as shown in figure W-2 (b). When the capacity of the avail
able testing machine does not permit testing a specimen of the full thickness of the plate,
the specimen may be cut with a thin saw into as many portions of the thickness as are neces
sary, as shown in figure W-4, each of which shall meet the requirements. The tensile
strength shall not be less than the minimum of the specified tensile range of the plate used.
(o) The free bend specimens shall be of the form and dimensions shown in figure W-3.
For plates of 3% inch or less in thickness one of the specimens shall be bent with the face of
the weld in tension and the other with the root of the weld in tension. The free bend speci
men for plates over } inch in thickness shall be bent with the face of the weld in tension.
Each free bend specimen shall be bent cold under free-bending conditions until the elongation
measured within or across approximately the entire weld on the outer surface of the bend
is at least 30 percent. When the capacity of the available testing machine will not permit
testing a full thickness specimen, the specimen may be cut with a thin saw into as many
portions of the thickness as necessary, as shown in figure W-4, provided each such piece
retains the proportion of 1% to 1 width to thickness, each of which shall meet the require
ments. Cracks at the corners of the specimens or small defects in the convex surface, the
greatest dimensions of which do not exceed #6 inch need not be considered as failures.
(p). The guided bend specimen shall be bent with the side of the weld in tension. Its
width shall be equal to the full thickness of the plate and its thickness, after machining,
shall be 0.350 inch to 0.380 inch to permit bending in a jig having the contour of the standard
jig shown in figure W-1F. The specimen shall withstand being bent cold to the full capacity
of the jig without developing any crack exceeding 3% inch in any direction. Where the plate
thickness exceeds 2 inches, the specimen shall be cut in two so that each portion does not
exceed 2 inches in width. Each such portion shall be tested and shall meet the requirements.
(q) One retest shall be made for each of the original specimens which fails to meet the
requirements. Should the retests fail to meet the requirements, the welds which they
represent must be chipped out, rewelded, and new test plates provided. This will apply to
each shell in cases where a number of shells of the same design and grade of material are
placed end to end and the longitudinal seams are welded continuously.
CRoss-REFERENCE: For regulations concerning Class II and Class III vessels, see $$ 56.20–6, 56.20–7.
56.20–5 Nondestructive tests. (a) All longitudinal and circumferential welded joints
of the structure shall be examined throughout their entire length by X-ray or gamma-ray
method of radiography.
(b) The films obtained by the use of X-rays shall be known as “exographs,” and those
obtained by the use of gamma rays, as “gammagraphs.” Both types of films shall be gen
erally termed “radiographs.” -
(c) The weld shall be radiographed with a technique which will determine quantita
tively the size of defects with thickness equal to and greater than 2 percent of the thickness
of the base metal. To determine whether the radiographic technique employed in detecting
defects of a thickness equal to and greater than 2 percent of the thickness of the base metal,
suitable thickness gages or penetrameters shall be used in the following manner:
(d) Where excess weld metal is removed flush, a penetrameter shall be placed at each
end of exposed interval of weld with gage parallel to weld and at least one-fourth inch from
edge of weld. Two ranges of penetrameters shall be available; these shall be stepped as
follows: 0.005 to 0.04 inch for plate thicknesses up to 2 inches and 0.04 to 0.09 inch for plate
thicknesses from 2 to 4% inches, as shown in figure W-5 A (a).
(e) Where excess weld metal is not removed, a penetrameter.” of the type shown in
figure W-5 A (b) shall be placed at each end of exposed interval of weld, on or within one
eighth inch of plate surface, parallel to weld and at least one-fourth inch from edge of weld.
The penetrameter shall be one-half inch wide and of two thicknesses, 0.136 inch (+0.001
§: *A
º penetrameter is a wedge-shaped gage in which small holes are drilled, used for the purpose of being placed adjacent to the weld in order
image will be shown on the radiograph for the purpose of detecting whether the X-ray equipment is accurately indicating flaws or
ects.
(F–146)
inch) thick for welds up to 2 inches and 0.194 inch (+0.001 inch) thick for welds 2 to 4%
inches. Slots of thicknesses shown in figure W-5A (b) shall be present. When necessary,
steel strips five-eighths inch wide shall be placed below the penetrameter, the thickness of
the strip used being sufficient to make the total thickness of penetrameter, strip, and plate
equal to the average thickness of weld, as shown in figure W-5A (b). The object of this
requirement is to º the same film density for the images of the weld and penetrameter.
In every case the thickness gages” or penetrameters should be so placed that the thin edge
of the gage or shallow groove of the penetrameter will be adjacent to the end of the exposed
section .# the weld.
(f) The film during exposure shall be as close to the surface of the weld as is practicable.
*-------length of £rposed Aortion of weſaſ---------
FIGURE W-5A.—Details of thickness gages or penetrameters.
The distance of the film from the surface of the weld on the side opposite the source of radia
tion shall, if possible, be not greater than 1 inch. With the film not more than 1 inch from
the weld surface, the minimum distance between source of radiation and the back of weld
shall be as follows:
Minimum distance from
source of radiation
to back of weld
Plate thickness (inches): (inches)
Up to 1------------------------------------------------------- 14
1 to 2--------------------------------------------------------- 21
2 to 3--------------------------------------------------------- 28
3 to 4--------------------------------------------------------- 36
4 to 4%------------------------------------------------------- 38
If it is necessary to expose the film at a distance greater than 1 inch from the weld, the
following ratio of distance from source of radiation to weld surface toward radiation —-
distance from weld surface toward radiation to film shall be at least 7 to 1. These conditions
* A* gage is a steel gage made with slots of varying depths, and is used in the same manner and for the same purpose as a pene
(F–147)
are imposed so as to obtain a practical maximum allowable distortion and magnification of

any defects in the welded seam.
(g) All radiographs shall be free from excessive mechanical processing defects which
would interfere with proper interpretation of the radiographs. -
(h) Identification markers whose images will appear on the film shall be placed adjacent
to the weld and their location accurately and permanently stamped near the weld on the
outside surface of the drum or shell, so that a defect appearing on the radiograph may be
accurately located in the actual weld.
(i) There should also be a plain indication on each film showing the job number, the
drum, and seam, as well as the manufacturer's identification symbol or name.
(j) Radiograph number 1, figure W-6, shows the desired type in which the presence of
the welded joint can be detected only with great difficulty. This type represents excellent
weld metal with a specific gravity of 7.80 to 7.85.
- (k) Radiograph number 2, figure W-7, shows the presence of some porosity of the weld
metal in the joint. This porosity, however, is not excessive, and welds of this type shall be
acceptable.
(l) Radiograph number 3, figure W-8, shows a porous condition in the weld metal which
is not acceptable.
(m) Radiograph number 4, figure W-9, shows a serious defect in a welded joint. This
defect represents a slag inclusion or cavity, extending longitudinally along the wall of the
joint. A radiograph of this kind indicates a weld that is not acceptable. However, a
radiograph showing a defect of this kind in which the length of the defect is less than % T,
where T is the thickness of the joint and where these defects are º: from each other
by at least 2 T of solid weld metal, indicates a weld that should be acceptable, provided
such defects do not average more than one per foot for any one jº.
(n) The radiographs shall be submitted to the inspector. If the inspector requests, the
following data shalſ be submitted with the radiographs: (1) The thickness of the base metal,
(2) the distance of the film from the surface of the weld, (3) the distance of the film from
the source of radiation.
(o) Welds in which the radiographs show elongated slag inclusions or cavities shall be
unacceptable if the length of any such imperfection is greater than % T, where T is the
º
thickness of the weld. If the lengths of such are less than % T and are sepa
rated from each other by at least 6 L of acceptable weld metal, where L is the length of the
longest imperfection, the weld shall be §. acceptable if the sum of the lengths of such
imperfections is not more than T in a weld length of 12 T.
(p). Welds in which the radiographs show any type of crack or zones of incomplete
fusion shall be unacceptable.
(q) Welds in which the radiographs show porosity shall be judged as acceptable or
unacceptable by comparison with the standard set of radiographs.
(r). A complete set of radiographs for each job shall be retained by the Coast Guard
and kept on file during the life of the boiler.
(s) The locations of the reference markers, the images of which appear on the film,
shall be accurately and permanently stamped on the outside surface of the vessel near the
weld, so that a defect appearing on the X-ray film may be accurately located in the actual
welded joint.
(t) To determine whether the X-ray, technique employed is detecting defects of a
thickness 2 percent or greater than the thickness of the base plate, a piece of sheet steel of a
thickness equal to 2 percent of the base plate and containing a hole shall be placed alongside
of the welded joint so that its image is obtained on the X-ray film but still does not interfere
with the image of the welded joint. The image of the hole in the sheet should be obtained
on the X-ray film. Any approved equivalent method may be used. Radiographs obtained
by means of gamma ray may be used in place of those secured by the X-ray provided the
technique ...i requirements follow as closely as possible those specified for the X-ray; this
involves the determination of defects of a thickness greater than 2 percent of the thickness
of the base plate as in the X-ray requirements. -
56.20–6 Class II. (a) vessels other than boilers operating at pressures of 30
pounds per square inch above atmosphere or over, covered by this part may be included in
this class, excepting those containing lethal gases or lethal liquids and/or those containing
liquids operating at a temperature of 300° F., or above. The maximum pressure at which
(F–148)
FIGURE W-6.
FIGURE W-7.
619428°-15–11
º
~~ ~~tº :-）： №_:：:*** ！！！！！！ :，: | ſ= - № - №· × ± ſae£. № |-… ;） &#. št.. :（ - ſº± … !-- * ， º 57 ±, ±7,，…， ¿ſ ..（, ，，，，，
FIGURE W-9.
FIGURE W-8.
FUSION WELDING - (56.20–9]
any vessel in this class may be º is 400 pounds per square inch, and/or the maximum
temperature is 700°F., and the plate thickness as required by the permissible stress allowance
shall not exceed 1% inches. This pressure limitation does not º to vessels operated under
hydraulic pressure at atmospheric temperature.
(b) The joint efficiency for this class shall be taken at 80 percent.
(c) For class II pressure vessels test plates shall be provided as required for class I
pressure vessels except that when there are several vessels of the same grade of material
being welded in succession whose plate thicknesses fall within a range of 9% inch and whose
diameters vary by not more than 6 inches, no more than one set of test plates need be provided
for each 300 lineal feet of either or both longitudinal and girth joints.
(d) For class II pressure vessels, the minimum elongation for free bend specimens shall
be 20 percent.
56.20–7 Class III. (a) This class includes unfired pressure vessels containing steam
or air in which the pressure does not exceed 30 pounds per square inch and pressure vessels
containing liquids in which the pressure does not exceed 200 pounds per square inch and/or
the temperature does not º 250°F. The plate thickness for vessels of this class shall
not exceed 9% inch. Class III pressure vessels º
not be used for the storage of lethal or
noxious gases or lethal or noxious liquids.
(b) The type of joints shall be as required by sections 56.20–10 (b) and (d).
(c) The maximum allowable working pressure of vessels of this class shall be computed
by formula (1) of section 52.2–3 (b) using an efficiency, E, of 0.65 for joints of the double
welded butt type where the plate thickness is not less than % inch, and 0.55 for joints of the
single welded butt or welded lap types.
(d) Lap joints as provided for in section 56.20–10 (b) shall not be used in the construc
tion of vessels for the storage of gases of any kind at pressures in excess of 100 pounds per
square inch nor for the storage .#any liquid at a temperature exceeding its boiling point at
atmospheric pressure.
(e) Test plates are not required for class III welded pressure vessels.
56.20–8 Material. (a) The materials used in the construction of any fusion-welded
pressure vessel covered by this part shall conform to the requirements of the appropriate
section of part 51 specified for such material. The carbon content of all such material shall
not exceed 0.35 percent.
(b) Material for manhole frames, nozzles; and other pressure connections which are to
be joined to the shell or heads by fusion welding shall, when forged or rolled, comply with the
specifications given for shell plate and heads as to chemical and physical properties, and be of
good weldable quality. Steel castings and commercial nozzles may be used only when the
material has been proved to be of good weldable quality.
(c) If, in the development of the art of welding, other materials than those herein
described become available, specifications may be submitted for consideration.
56.20–9 Preparation for welding... (a) The plates or sheets, to be joined shall be
accurately cut to size and formed. In all cases the forming shall be done by pressure and not
by blows, including the edges of the plates forming longitudinal joints of cylindrical vessels.
(b) Particular care should be taken in the layout of joints in which fillet welds are to
be used so as to make possible the fusion of the weld metal at the bottom of the fillet.
Great care must also be exercised in the deposition of the weld metal so as to secure
satisfactory penetration.
(c) If the thickness of the flange of a head to be attached to a cylindrical shell by a butt
joint exceeds the shell thickness by more than 25 É. (maximum 4 inch), the flange
thickness shall be reduced at the abutting edges as shown in figure W-10.
(d) The edges of the plates at the joints shall not have an offset from each other at any
point in excess of one-quarter of the thickness of the plate, except for plates in excess of
% inch in thickness, in which the offset shall not be more than 10 percent (maximum }; inch)
for longitudinal joints, or 25 percent (maximum 4 inch) for girth joints. In all cases where
plates of unequal thicknesses are abutted, the edge of the thicker plate shall be reduced in
some manner so that it is approximately the same thickness as the other plate.
(e) The design of welded vessels shall be such that bending stresses are not brought
directly upon the welded joint. Corner welds shall be avoided unless the plates forming the
corner are properly supported independently of such welds.
Bars, jacks, clamps, or other appropriate tools may be used to hold the edges to be
welded in line. The edges of butt joints shall be so held that they will not overlap during
619428°–45–12 (F–149)
welding. Where fillet welds are used, the lapped plates shall fit closely and be kept together
during welding. (See figs. W-11 (a) and (b).)
(g) The surfaces of the sheets or plates to be welded shall be cleaned thoroughly of
all scale, rust, oil, or grease for a distance of not less than % inch from the welding edge.
Grease or oil may be removed with gasoline, lye, or the equivalent. A steel-wire scratch
brush may be used for removing light rust or scale, but for heavy scale, slag, and the like
a grinder, chisel, air hammer, or other suitable tool shall be used to obtain clean and bright
metal. When it is necessary to deposit metal over a previously welded surface, any scale
or slag therefrom shall be removed º
a roughing tool, a chisel, an air-chipping hammer
or other suitable means to prevent inclusion of impurities in the weld metal.
(h) The dimensions and shape of the edges to be joined shall be such as to allow thorough
fusion and complete penetration.
A/6. W-ff (b)
WELDED HEAD ATTACHMENTS

(i) For double-welded butt joints the reversed sides shall be chipped, ground, or melted
out, so as to secure a clean surface of the originally deposited weld metal, prior to the appli
cation of the first bead of welding on the second side. Such chipping, grinding, or melting
out shall be done in a manner that will insure proper fusion of the weld metal.
(j) If the welding is stopped for any reason, extra care shall be taken in restarting to
get full penetration to the bottom of the joint and thorough fusion between the weld metal
and the plates, and to the weld metal previously deposited.
(k) ere single-welded butt joints are used, particular care shall be taken in aligning
and separating the edges to be joined so that complete penetration and fusion at the bottom
of the joint will be assured. º
56.20–10 Joints. (a) Longitudinal. Longitudinal joints on Class I and Class II

vessels shall be of the double-welded butt type and shall be reinforced at the center of the
weld on each side of the plate by at least Me-inch up to and including %-inch plate, and u
to 9% inch for heavier plates. The reinforcement may be removed, but if not removed º
be built up uniformly from the surface of the plate to a maximum at the center of the weld.
Particular attention is called, however, to the importance of the provision that there shall be *
no valley or groove along the edge nor in the center of the weld, but that the deposited
º
(F–150)
metal must be fused smoothly and uniformly into the plate surface at the top of the joint.
The finish of the welded joint shall be reasonably smooth and free from irregularities,
grooves, or depressions. The reinforcement for a single-welded butt joint shall be not less
than %s inch. The reinforcement may be machined off, if so desired.
(b) The longitudinal joints of class III vessels may be of the double-welded butt type
for thicknesses of 34 inch or less, or of the double-welded lap type for thicknesses of 3% inch or
less, or of the single-welded butt type for thicknesses of X, inch or less. If of the lap type
the throat dimension of each of the welds shall not be less than % T, where T represents
the thickness of the plate. Both edges of the lap shall be welded and the surface overlap
shall not be less than 4 T.
(c) [Revoked].
(d) Circumferential. Circumferential joints on class I vessels shall be of the double
welded butt type. Circumferential joints on class II vessels shall be of the double-welded
butt type except for thicknesses of 5% inch or less, in which case they may be of the single
welded butt type. Circumferential joints on class III vessels may be of the butt or la
type. The details of all these joints shall conform to the requirements for lºſiº
joints, as given in (a).
(e) Dished heads concave to the pressure when used on class III vessels may be inserted
with a driving fit and fillet welded inside and outside, except that for vessels 20 inches in
diameter or less the heads may be welded on the outside only. The welds shall be located
on the flange of the head at a distance not less than twice the thickness of the head from the
point of tangency of the knuckle. -
(f) Heads concave to the F. and/or plate edges at girth joints to be attached by
butt joints shall be aligned so that the deviations are not more than permitted by the limita
tions of section 56.20–9, but, if greater, correction shall be made by reforming the shell or
head, whichever is out of true, until the errors are within the limits specified. The edges
of head and girth joints shall be kept separated at the point of welding enough to insure
thorough penetration of the weld metal.
(g) Holes. (1) Unreinforced holes may be machine-cut through welded seams which
have been stress relieved and radiographed. The joint efficiency as well as the ligament
efficiency shall be considered in calculating the required thickness.
(2) Tubes may be rolled and expanded in such unreinforced holes, or such holes may be
threaded: Provided, That in the portion of the welded joint in which the holes are cut the fol
lowing additional requirements are fulfilled: *
(i) The welds shall be examined by the paramagnetic powder method on both sides
and found to be satisfactory.
(ii) The weld shall contain no slag inclusion or defect longer than 0.15T (where T is
the thickness of the weld), but in no case greater than % inch.
(3) If either or both items (i) and (ii) are not complied with, the unreinforced holes
for threaded connections or for rolled or expanded tubes may not be placed closer than %”
to the edge of the fused metal, and no deduction need be made in the maximum allowable
working pressure computed for the same tube layout without a circumferential weld.
56.20–11 Dished heads. (a) Dished heads convex to the pressure shall have a flange
not less than 1% inches long and shall be inserted into the shell with a driving fit and welded
as shown in figure W-11(b).
(b) Dished heads concave to the pressure shall have a length of flange not less than 1
inch for shells not over 24 inches in diameter. For vessels over 24 inches in diameter this
length shall be not less than 1% inches. -
56.20–12, Reinforced fusion-welded connections. (a). An opening in the shell or

spherical portions of the head of a boiler or pressure vessel with a diameter greater than the
maximum unreinforced opening permitted by section 52.6–4, shall be provided with rein
forcement. Openings of the fusion-welded reinforced type shall consist of one or more rein
forcing rings or flanges welded to the shell and/or a tube or pipe extension or fitting welded
to the jºi. welded to or integral with the reinforcing flange.
(b) The thickness of a tube or pipe extension welded to the shell and/or a reinforcing
ring or flange shall not be less than that required by sections 55.19-6 (b), 55.19-8.
(c) All circular or elliptical openings of the fusion welded reinforced type shall comply
with the following requirements: -
(d) On a line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shell and passing through the
center of the opening (see fig. C–3), the total cross section in the complete reinforced opening,
(F–151)
including the shell and cross section of fusion welds, within the limits defined below (defined
by the rectangle ABCD in the sectional views) shall be at least equal to the cross section
(EFGH plus JKLM) obtained by multiplying the shell thickness Trequired by section 52.2–3
using E=0.90, by twice the diameter d of the opening less 2 inches. The above-mentioned
limits are:
(e) A distance on each side of the center line of the opening equal to the actual inside
diameter d of the opening in the shell in the finished construction (lines AD and BC in the
sectional views). -
(f) A distance on each side of the middle line of the actual thickness m of the shell equal
to three times such actual thickness, except that in no case shall the limits extend along the
tubular portion of a connection beyond the surface NP of the shell, or of the reinforcement,
if any, more than two and one-half times the thickness n of the tubular portion (lines AB
and DC in the sectional views).
(g) Where there are two or more adjacent openings, the limits (defined by AD and BC)
for the openings shall not be considered to overlap, and in no case shall any portion of a
cross section be considered to apply to more than one opening.
(h) On either side of the line parallel to the longitudinal axis of the shell, as determined
in paragraph (d) the strength of the fusion-welded attachment to the vessel of each separate
part entering into the fabrication of a reinforced opening shall be at least equal either to the
tensile strength of the cross section of the reinforcing part within the above limits (within
the rectangle ABCD), or to the tensile strength of a cross-sectional area (QFGR plus JSTM)
determined by multiplying the shell thickness T required by section 52.2–3, using E=0.90,
by the diameter d, less 2 inches of the opening in the shell in the finished construction
whichever tensile strength is the smaller. The strength of attachment for fusion-welded
construction is the strength of the weld in shear or in tension, whichever is the smaller.
(i) The unit working shear stress of a weld shall not exceed 0.8 times the allowable work
ing *
suitable.
in tension for the class of fusion-welded vessel for which the welding process is
(j) For fusion-welded connections, in addition to complying with the rules given above
in paragraph (h) the additional requirements shown in figures W-12 to W-30 shall be met.
(k). Where the thickness t of the thinner of the two parts being joined is three-fourths
inch or less, the dimensions of the welds shall not be less than the requirements given by the
formula in figures W-26 to W–30, inclusive.
(l) Where the thickness t is greater than % inch, the dimensions of the welds shall not
be less than the requirements given in figures W-26 to W–30, inclusive, using a value of
% inch for t in the formulas.
(m) Materials for fusion-welded connections shall be in accordance with section
56.20–8. All welding for fusion-welded connections shall be equivalent to that required
for the particular class of vessel to which the connection is attached.
(n). On class I vessels all connections after being attached by fusion welding shall be
stress relieved.
(o) Qn class II vessels requiring stress relief, all connections after being attached by
fusion welding shall also be stress relieved.
(p). On class II vessels which do not require stress relief, all connections after being
attached by fusion welding shall be stress relieved except the following:
(1) Connections formed by welding a plain-end pipe, welding neck or nipple directly
to the vessel without the attachment of additional material, the diameter of the opening
of which does not exceed 10 percent of the outside diameter of the shell. (Some such con
nections are illustrated in figs. W-12 to W-14, inclusive.)
(2) Connections formed by welding to such yessels an hydraulic coupling or special
forging for a threaded connection not to exceed 2%-inch pipe size.
(q) On class III vessels
be stress relieved. t
connections after being attached by fusion welding need not
(r) All connections attached by fusion welding to vessels fabricated by other means
shall be stress relieved in accordance with the requirements for connections on class II
vessels. If any such vessels are to be used for service equivalent to class I pressure vessels,
any fusion-welded connection must be stress relieved.
Fusion-welded connections which require stress relieving and which are attached to
vessels whose seams are of riveted construction shall be fabricated and stress relieved prior
to the making up or attachment of the courses by riveting. If they do not require stress
(F–152)
relieving and are attached after riveting, the welds shall be located at a distance from the
riveted seam at least equal to the diameter of the opening plus four times the plate thickness
of the shell. Figures W-12 to W-30, inclusive, illustrate some types of fusion-welded connec
tions which are acceptable.
(s) Seal and tack welding. Seal welding, i. e., the laying of a single bead of welding on
the calking edge of a plate may be permitted, provided the welding rod or electrode has a
diameter not exceeding % inch. Tack welding, for the purpose of attaching internal baffles,
strainers, or external lugs for securing lagging and similar purposes, will be permitted, pro
vided the welds do not exceed 4 inch in depth and 2 inches in length and are spaced
at least 2 inches apart or made continuous. In both cases, however, it is required that the
work be done by qualified welding operators using approved welding rods or electrodes.
Praw-12 arez.w-us arº. w—yº. Frew—ts
ºt
9 y
Pig.W-22 arºw-43
W-Mºw WDTH OF CRCUMFERENTAL

BANDARoundTHEDRumor SMELL FOR
STRESSRELIEVING.
DiMENSlows Pro-6AREMinimum values
Whºrf-7//cºw/ESS of 7/ANNERPART
Joined (ts or ºn)
*
- - -*/ºw. :
&vie-AftAj * #º. *...*.*.*. - 3 #: #;%3

ACCEPTABLE TYPES OFFUSOWWELDEDMOZZLE CONSTRUCTION
56.20–13 Stress relieving. (a) All class I fusion-welded vessels shall be stress relieved.
(b) Class II fusion-welded vessels shall be stress relieved where the thickness exceeds
1% inch, or where both the wall thickness is greater than 0.58 inch and the shell diameter
less than 20 inches, and for other wall thicknesses and shell diameters where the diameter
in inches is less than 120t—50, where t is the thickness in inches. (See fig. W-31)
(c) Where stress relieving is required, it shall be done by heating uniformly to at least
1,100°F., and up to 1,200°F., or higher, if this can be done without distortion. The struc
ture or parts of the structure shall be brought slowly up to the specified temperature and held
at that temperature for a period of at least 1 hour per inch of thickness, and shall be allowed
to cool slowly in a still atmosphere.
(d) All connections attached by fusion welding shall be stress relieved on vessels requiring
stress relief and as required by paragraph (e).
(F-153)
(e) The structure shall be stress relieved by any of the following methods:
Heating the complete vessel as a unit.
) Heating a complete section of the vessel (head or course) containing the part or parts
to be stress relieved before attachment to other sections of the vessel.
(h) In cases where the vessel is stress relieved in sections, the final girth joints shall be
stress relieved by heating uniformly a circumferential band having a minimum width of six
times the plate thickness on each side of the welded seam in such a manner that the entire
band shall be brought up to the proper temperature simultaneously and held for the time
specified above for stress relieving.
(i) Nozzles and other welded attachments for which stress relief is required may be
locally stress relieved by heating a circumferential band around the entire shell with the
2OO
190
RULE FOR STRESS RELIEVING CLASS 2 VESSELS
18O
IO
|
STRESS RELIEVE
ALL VESSELS TO
2O RIGHT OF CURVE
IO
+O L5
. .2 .3 .4 6 .7 .. 8 .9 I.O. l. l.2 1.3 I,4
Thickness/ INCHES
attachment at the middle of the band and with the width of the band at least 12 times the
shell thickness plus the width of the attachment.
§ ) All vessels for lethal or noxious gases or lethal or noxious liquids shall be stress relieved.
6.20–14 Hydrostatic and hammer tests. (a) All fusion-welded pressure vessels shall
be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of one and one-half times the maximum allowable
working pressure and while subjected to this pressure shall be given a thorough hammer
or impact test. This impact test shall consist of striking the plate at 6-inch intervals on both
sides of the welded joint and for the full length of all welded joints. The weight of the ham
mer in pounds il approximately equal the thickness of the shell in tenths of an inch, but
not to exceed 10 pounds, and the plate shall be struck with a sharp swinging blow. The
edges of the hammer shall be rounded so as to prevent defacing the plates.
(F–154)
(b) Following this test the pressure shall be raised to not less than twice the maximum
allowable working pressure and É. there for a sufficient length of time to enable an inspec
tion to be made of all joints and connections.
(c) The maximum allowable working pressure for the hydrostatic tests shall be that for
which the vessel is suitable at atmospheric temperature based on the actual dimensions and
plate thicknesses of the vessel.
(d) Pinholes, cracks, or other defects shall be repaired only by chipping, machining, or
burning out the defect and rewelding. For gas welding the metal around the defects shall
be preheated to a dull red for a distance of at least 4 inches all around. Any preheating
means may be used, such as a flange fire, gas or oil burner, or a welding torch. The preheating
shall be done slowly, so the heat will get well back into the plate and expand it thoroughly.
After welding, the vessel should be reheated in the vicinity of such weld until the heat has
equalized in the dull-red spot, and then slowly cooled. For metallic arc welding preheating
or reheating is not required.
(e) Wessels requiring stress relieving shall be stress relieved after any welding repairs
have been made.
After repairs have been made the vessel shall again be tested in the regular way,
and if it passes the test, the inspector shall accept it. If it does not pass the test, the inspector
can order supplementary repairs, or, if in his judgment the vessel is not suitable for service,
he may permanently reject it.
56.20-15. Inspection. , (a) The inspector may designate stages of the work at which
he wishes to inspect the welded joints of a class I vessel, and the manufacturer shall either
submit the vessel for inspection in such partly completed condition, or as an alternative he
may permit the inspector to witness stages of the welding operation at such times as the
inspector may select.
(b) For class II vessels the first inspection shall be made during the welding of the
longitudinal joint. . At this time the inspector shall inspect the plate material and the “fit-up”
of the work, and observe the workmen to see that only welding operators who have passed
the test requirements are employed on the work of welding.
(c) A second inspection shall be made during the welding of the circumferential joints.
At this time the inspector shall check any new material being used which may not have been
examined at the time of the first inspection, also the fit-up of the vessel at this stage of con
struction, and again, observe the welding operators to see that only those who have passed
the test requirements are employed.
(d). For class III vessels one inspection shall be made during the welding of the longi
tudinal joint. If there is no longitudinal joint, the inspection shall be made during the weld
ing of a circumferential or a head joint. At this time the inspector shall check the plate
material and the fit-up of the work and observe the workmen to see that only welding operators
who have passed the test requirements are employed.
(e) The manufacturer shall certify that the welding on the vessel has been done only by
welding operators who have passed the test requirements and that the same material and
technique used in making the tests were employed in fabricating the vessel.
56.20-16 Distortion. The cylinder or barrel of a vessel shall be circular at any section
within a limit of 1 percent, and, if necessary to meet this requirement, shall be re-heated,
re-rolled, or re-formed. -
56.20–17 Manufacturer’s data report for Classes II and III test requirements.
56.20–18 Inspectors’ report of individual welding operators.
56.20-19 Welded piping. (a) Piping may be connected by means of fusion welding
for any pressure and for temperatures not exceeding 1,000°F., provided it is done in accord
ance º the rules in this section.
(b) The rules in this section apply to Class I piping only.
(c) Qualification of welding processes: (1) Before a contractor may weld piping under
these rules an inspector shall visit the part of his works in which welding is done for the
purpose of inspecting the welding plant to make sure he has suitable equipment and to
witness the series of tests outlined in subparagraph (2) below.
(2) The tests for qualifying a welding process shall be those embodied in the rules in
section 56.20–3 for the testing of welding operators for piping.
(F–155)
(d) Design of piping. The º shall be designed to avoid excessive strains due to
expansion and the working of the ship.
(e) Layout and dimensions of piping. Prints showing the layout and dimensions of the
piping shall be forwarded to the &ndº for approval. Sections of the pipe shall be
welded in the shop as far as practicable. All welded joints made on shipboard shall be in
positions where there is sufficient space to allow proper access for the welding, and such welds
shall be definitely indicated on the plans by the use of appropriate American Welding Society
weld symbols or details of the welds. A sufficient number of detachable joints shall be used
in installing the piping to facilitate removals. Valves and other fittings may have either
flanged or welded connections to the pipes, but flanged joints shall be used where necessary
to facilitate overhauling of machinery or the valves themselves.
(f) Types of welded joints to be used. Butt joints shall be used for pipes over 2% inches
nominal pipe size and shall be either double-welded or welded with a backing-up strip on the
inside of the pipe. , Pipes not over 2% inches nominal pipe size may be connected by ferrules
fitted over the ends of the pipe and attached by circumferential fillet welds to the pipe, or
by using bell-and-spigot joints and uniting the end of the bell to the outside of the pipe by
a circumferential fillet weld. -
(g) Stress relieving. (1) All piping, except high pressure, high temperature water lines
used in tank cleaning operations, shall have all welded joints stress-relieved if the nominal
pipe size exceeds 2% inches. -
(2) The welds of plain carbon-steel pipe and adjacent piping for a length of six times
the wall thickness of the pipe shall be heated uniformly to at least 1,150°F. and up to 1,250°F.
The weld and adjacent piping shall be brought slowly up to within the specified temper
ature range and held at that temperature for a period of time proportioned on the basis of
at least 1 hour per inch of pipe wall thickness and shall be allowed to cool slowly in a still
atmosphere. T. shall be no cooling other than by the still air around the weld and adja
cent parts being stress-relieved in order to assure a gradual fall of temperature along the
i: of the pipe. For alloy steel piping the stress-relieving and/or heat treatment shall
be done in a way demonstrated to be satisfactory.
(3) Where piping is welded to valves it may be impossible to heat the part next to the
valve to a uniform º: for a length of six times the wall thickness without overheat
ing the valve. In such a case the heated zone shall extend to at least 2 inches on the
i. side from the line of fusion of the joint and the temperature shall be allowed to di
minish gradually toward the valve.
(4) All complicated connections, such as manifolds, shall be stress-relieved as a whole
in a furnace provided for the purpose before being taken on shipboard.
(5) The piping shall be so designed that it will be free to expand in a longitudinal direc
tion when the joints are stress-relieved, thus eliminating stresses that might result through
contraction of the piping after the stress-relieving.
(h) Nondestructive tests. (1) All welded joints on pipe exceeding 2% inches nominal pipe
size, except high pressure, high temperature water lines used in tank cleaning operations,
shall be tested either by radiography or by paramagnetic powder dusted over the weld area
to insure there are no cracks or other defects. If the quality of a weld is questioned by an
inspector, the defect shall be cut out and the joint rewelded.
(2) All welds shall be of smooth contour and free of grooves, depressions, and ripples.
(i) Hydrostatic tests. Hydrostatic tests shall be made on the piping at twice the
maximum pressure to which the piping will be subjected in service.
(j) General requirements: Before any qualification tests of welding operators are
conducted, each manufacturer shall prepare for test the types of test specimens hereinafter
specified for the purpose of qualifying his welding process.
(k) Manufacturer's record of process. A complete record of the manufacturer's process
shall be made in the form shown in figure W-34 to establish the definite limits of all essential
variables involved. The manufacturer shall conduct all welding in accordance with the
requirements of his process record, after his process of welding has been approved.
(l) Number, type, and size of test welds. The test specimens shall be prepared in accord
ance with the requirements of section, 56.20–3. One test specimen shall º, prepared for
each process and welding position which will be encountered.
(F–156)
(m) Base metal and its preparation. The base material and its preparation for welding
shall comply with the manufacturer's process record. For all test welds, the dimensions of
the base material shall be such as to provide sufficient material for the test specimens called for.
CONTRACTOR'S NAME
ADDRESS
PROCESS :NATE
MATERIAL (BASE METAL

(FILLER METAL
For Gas Welding For Arc Welding

Type of Flame Type of Current
If D. C., state polarity.
IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS OF THIS WELD
DLAM.
PASS
ER HEAT
OF
I INPUT I DATA Filler TEMPFº
DEG, - REMARKS
METAL
In above space
indicate edge
preparation
and relative
position of
each pass as
deposited.
•Give degree of preheat, if any. Indicate temperature of

weld metal just prior to the deposition of each succeed
ing pass.
Cleaning of Passes
Treatment of-Defects
Peening.
(Temp.
Heat Treatment (Time - f weld
Name of welder
(Cooling Name of Recorder
FIGURE W-34.—Manufacturer's record of process.
(F–157)
PART 57—SUPPLEMENTARY DATA AND REQUIREMENTS
Sec. Sec.
57.21-1 Scope. 57.21-17 Installation of refrigerating machinery.
57.21–2 Forms and affidavits. 57.21-18 Brazed unfired pressure vessels.
57.21–3 Fusible plugs. 57.21–19 Material.
57.21-4 Fusion welding repairs. 57.21—20 Computations.
57.21–5. Furnace repairs. 57.21–21 Detail requirements.
57.21–6 Stayed furnaces and combustion chambers. 57.21–22 Head joints.
57.21-7 Renewal of plate in stayed surface. 57.21–23 Hydrostatic test.
57.21–8 Bagged or blistered sheets. 57.21–24 Rules for construction of cast-iron boilers.
57.21–9 Radius of dished heads. 57.21–25 Manufacturers' certification.
57.21–10 Allowable load on stays and staybolts of various diameters. 57.21–26 Material.
57.21–11 Standard practice for hydrostatic tests of boilers and ap- 57.21–27 Washout openings.
purtenances to determine pressure rating. 57.21–28 Flanged connections.
57.21–12 Physical characteristics of metal. 57.21–29 Threaded openings.
57.21–13 Requirements for fuel oil. 57.21–30 Hydrostatic tests.
57.21–14 Request for increase of pressure. 57.21–31 Marking.
57.21–15 Inspection of boilers of foreign-built vessels admitted to 57.21–32 Installation.
American registry. 57.21–33 Fittings and appliances.
57.21-16 Life of new boiler installation.
Section 57.21-1 Scope. This part includes all official forms, miscellaneous require
ments, specifications, repairs, and data not covered by the preceding parts.
57.21–2 Forms and affidavits. (a) All boilers shall be certified to by the manufac
turer i.Form NCG 935. Form NCG 935A shall be used for the certification of Class B
materials.
[Form NCG 935)

AFFIDAVIT OF MANUFACTURER OF MARINE BOILERS
U. S. CoAST GUARD.
(Title) (Name of company)
boiler manufacturer, located at ---------(City and state) ; that I am authorized to make this affidavit,
ty and State
and that boiler No. -------------------- (U. S. Coast Guard No. ------) of our manufacture being
furnished for installation on the vessel - - - - - - - - - ---------- at ------------------------------------
(City and State)
is in all respects constructed in accordance with the requirements of the Rules and of the Com #jºns
mandant, U. S. Coast Guard, applicable thereto.
(Signature) ------------------------------------------
Subscribed and - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - to before me this ---------------- day of ---------------- , 19--.
(Sworn or affirmed)
(Signature) ------------------------------------
[srall
[Form NCG 935 A]
AFFIDAVIT OF MANUFACTURER OF MATERIALS OR APPLIANCES ON WESSELS SUBJECT
TO THE RULES AND REGULATIONS OF THE COMMANDANT, U. S. COAST GUARD
State of ---------------------- ; County of ------------------------.
On this ---------- day of ------------------, 19.----, I, the undersigned -----------------------
(Name)
- - - - - - - - - - - -- - , hereby certify that I am the -------------- of the ---------------------------------,
(Title) (Name of company)
located at --------------------------------- , that I am authorized to make this affidavit; and that any
(City and State)
-- -- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - of our manufacture furnished directly or through agents or dealers for use on vessels
(Material or appliance) - - -
subject to inspection by the Coast Guard will comply with all requirements of the rules and regulations
prescribed by the Commandant applicable thereto.
(Signature) --------------------------------------.
Subscribed and ---------------- to before me this -------- day of --------------------, 19----.
(Sworn or affirmed)
[srall (Signature) ------------------------------------
(F–159)
57.21–3 Fusible plugs—(a) Definitions. Water side plugs are fusible plugs which are
inserted from the water side of the plate or tube. Fire side plugs are fusible plugs inserted
from the fire side of the plate, flue, or tube to which they are attached.
(b) Requirements. Fusible plugs intended for use in boilers installed on steam vessels
subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) Casings. The casings of fusible plugs shall be designed as in figures S-1 and S-2,
and shall be made of bronze, in accordance with the requirements of sections 51.20–1–51.20–
10 grades B or C. The bore of the casing shall be tapered continuously and evenly from the
water end of the plug to within 1 inch of the fire end where fire side plugs are used, and to
within 3% inch of the fire end where water side plugs are used, at which point the diameter
of the bore shall be not less than % inch and the tapered section shall be without recess,
thread, or cavity from the water end. From the point where the bore is % inch, the taper
shall be reversed so as to leave an opening on the fire side of not less than %s inch. The
secſ. 77ru. Avg

Warea’sſor Füsſed & A. are
FIGURE S-1.
5ech. 77%ru. Pog

Pare-stor Firsteia: Piva,
FIGURE S-2.
Approved type of fusible plugs with standard pipe threads.
bore of the plug shall be filled from the water end to the point of least diameter of the bore
with a tin ń.which shall be carefully alloyed to the casing. The over-all length of the
fire side plugs shall be not less than 2% inches, and that of the water side plugs not less than
2 inches.
(2) Fillings. Fusible plugs shall be filled from the water end to the point of least
diameter of the casing with a filling of tin, as follows:
Percent
Pure tin---------------------------------------- minimum- - 99.3
- - - - - - - -
Copper------------------------------------------------ maximum-- 0.5

Lead------------------------------------------------------ do---- 0.1
Total impurities-------------------------------------------- do---- 0.7
NoTE: Fusible plugs are not required and will not be permitted where the maximum steam temperature to which they are exposed exceeds
4.25° F.
(F–160)
SUPPLEMENTARY DATA AND REQUIREMENTS [57.21–4]
(c) Tests. Fusible plug manufacturers who desire to have their product approved
for marine service shall submit samples from each heat to the Commandant for test, as
follows: One sample plug for chemical analysis plus an additional plug for physical test
taken at random from each heat for examination and test for each 500 plugs or fraction
thereof. The samples furnished shall bear the same number for any one heat and shall be
representative of the heat from which the sample was poured. The fillings shall be tested
for tightness by striking the small end three blows equivalent to two foot-pounds of energy
per blow. If these tests reveal a loose filling, the entire lot of plugs shall be rejected. Next
the filling of one test plug from each lot shall be melted out of the casing by a ring burner and
caught in a clean graphite crucible to be used as a sample for chemical analysis. The inside
of the casing must show that the tin filling was properly alloyed to the casing. Evidence
of improper or incomplete alloying will cause rejection of the entire lot represented. When
more than two test plugs from the same heat are submitted, the melting point of the tin
from the plug representing each lot will be determined and the tin showing the lowest melting
point will be analyzed.
(d) Rejections. The Coast Guard reserves the right to reject any lot of fusible plugs for
failure to conform to these requirements, or for any other defect which might .. them
unsafe or inoperative.
(e) Marking of fusible plugs. The name or initials of the manufacturer shall be stamped
on the face of the casing for identification, and all plugs shall be numbered in accordance
with the number of the heat from which the plugs were filled. For instance, the first pouring
shall be number 1, and all plugs filled from this heat shall be numbered 1; the next pouring
shall be number 2, and all the plugs filled from this heat shall be numbered 2, etc. The heat
number shall be plainly stamped on the large end of the filling with numbers not less than %,
inch in height. -
(f) Forwarding of samples. In transmitting samples of fusible plugs to the Com

mandant the fusible plugs and the letters of transmittal shall be addressed as follows: “The
Commandant (OMI), U. S. Coast Guard, Washington, D. C.” and one letter of transmittal
shall be required for each heat, in which the following information shall be stated:
(1) Number of heat.
(2) Number of fusible plugs manufactured from one heat.
(3) Number of samples of fusible plugs from one heat forwarded.
(4) Name of manufacturer or initials stamped on casing of plug.
(g) Manufacturer's affidavit. Manufacturers of fusible plugs shall submit an affidavit
on approved form requesting permission to manufacture fusible plugs for use on vessels
subject to the jurisdiction of th. Coast Guard. This affidavit must be executed by some
person having authority to make the statements contained therein.
57.21–4 Fusion welding repairs. (a) Repairs to marine boilers or unfired pressure
vessels by means of fusion welding may be permitted provided such welding conforms to the
requirements of part 56 in the following particulars, viz.: That the welding operators are
qualified in accordance with the provisions of section 56.20–3 and that the quality of the
welds shall conform with the requirements of section 56.20–6. Repair welding shall be
limited in its application to those cases where the stress is carried by other construction which
conforms to the requirements of this subchapter, and where the safety of the boiler or pressure
vessel is not dependent upon the strength of the welds. It shall be the duty of firms and cor
orations, and also the engineer in charge of the vessel, to notify the Officer in Charge, Marine
spection, giving the location of the vessel, the nature of the proposed repairs, and the date
ºtime at which the work will beign. No repairs by any process of fusion welding shall be
permitted before an inspection is made by an authorized inspector and the proposed method
of repair sanctioned by him, except in cases where no inspector is available in such cases the
chief engineer may communicate with the nearest Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection,
advising of the nature of the proposed repairs, and if permission is granted by the inspectors
the repairs may be made and a written report signed by the chief engineer shall be submitted
to the inspectors who sanction them.
(b) If, in the opinion of the inspector, a hydrostatic test is necessary to prove the in
tegrity of the welded repairs, such a test shall Y. applied when the work is completed, the
hydrostatic pressure applied to be not more than 10 percent in excess of the maximum
. working pressure.
(F–161)
(c) The following examples of the application of fusion welding will serve to illustrate
where such work should be accepted or rejected. No repairs by welding of any kind, except
where welding is specifically sanctioned by the rules in this subchapter or where specified
herein, shall be permitted on any part or parts of a boiler, its appurtenances or a pressure
vessel subject to a pressure in excess of 30 pounds per square inch.
(d) Definition. Staybolted surface within the meaning of the rules in this subchapter
is a surface which lies between rows of stays or staybolts.
(e) Fusion welds will be permitted in staybolted surfaces or surfaces adequately stayed
by other means, so that should the welds fail, the parts would be held together by the stays.
(f) Fusion welding of cracks and fractures, in cast-iron heating boilers or unfired
pressure vessels shall be referred to an authorized inspector.
(g) Cracks in girth seams, extending from the calking edge of the plate to the rivet hole,
may be fusion welded, provided the cracks are properly prepared to permit fusion through the
entire thickness of the plate.
(h) Cracks extending from rivet hole to rivet hole shall not be repaired by welding where
the plate is subject to tensile stress.
(i) Cracks in a staybolted surface may be repaired by welding.
(j) ë. lengthwise cracks not exceeding 20 inches in length in corrugated
furnaces, may be repaired by welding.
(k) Wherever practicable, cracks shall be prepared for welding by veeing out the crack
on both sides of the plate in order to form a double V-weld.
(l) Cracks in the shells or drums of power boilers, except as otherwise specified herein,
shall not be welded.
(m) It shall not be permissible to reinforce or build up by fusion welding the heads of
rivets or staybolts that have deteriorated. Such rivets or staybolts shall be removed.
(n) Çiğ. edges of girth seams may be built up by fusion welding to the original thick
ness under the following conditions: The thickness of the original metal to be built up between
rivet holes and calking edge, shall not be less than one-fourth of the diameter of the rivet hole,
and the portion of the calking edge to be thus reinforced shall not exceed 30 inches in length
in a º: direction. In all repairs to girth seams by fusion welding, the rivets shall be
removed over the portions to be welded for a distance of at least 6 inches beyond the repaired
portion. After repairs are made the rivet holes shall be reamed before the rivets are re-driven.
(o) Where leaks occur in riveted joints or connections, they shall be carefully investigated
to determine the cause. Such leaks may be made tight by seal welding the edge, if, in the
judgment of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, this will make a satisfactory repair.
(p) It shall not be permissible to build up or reinforce a grooved or corroded area of
unstayed internal surfaces by means of fusion welding, except that widely scattered pit holes
may be built up by fusion welding. -
(q) Where external corrosion has reduced the thickness of flat plates around hand
holes to an extent of not more than 40 percent of the original thickness and for a distance
not exceeding 2 inches from the edge of the hole, the plate may be built up by fusion welding.
(r) Where stayed sheets have corroded to a depth not exceeding 40 percent of their
original thickness, they may be reinforced or built up by fusion welding. Where the stay
bolts are fitted with riveted heads, it will be necessary to renew all staybolts in the rein
forced area in accordance with the provisions of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1 to 52.8–5,
but where the staybolts are fitted with nuts, the nuts may be removed and after reinforcing
has been applied, collars may be welded around the staybolts in lieu of the nuts. Such
reinforced area shall not exceed 400 square inches nor more than 30 inches in one direction.
Two such areas in any one plate may be reinforced, provided that the distance between the
reinforced surfaces is not less than 30 inches.
(s) When the corroded portion of a staybolted surface exceeds 400 square inches, it shall
be permissible to repair the same by cutting out the defective portion and replacing it with
a new plate, the edges of the new plate to be welded in position. In such cases, new staybolts
shall be fitted in accordance with the requirements of sections 52.7–1 to 52.7–3, 52.8–1
to 52.8–5.
(t) Flat tube sheets in fire-tube boilers which have corroded or where cracks exist in
the ligaments, may be repaired by fusion welding.
(F–162)
(u) Unreinforced openings in the shells or drums of boilers or pressure vessels, the
diameter of which does not exceed the maximum diameter of an unreinforced opening in
accordance with figures C–1 and C-2, may be closed by the use of a patch or plate inside
the drum or shell and sealed against leakage by fusion welding. Such plates shall have a
diameter at least 2 inches larger than the diameter of the hole and must have a thickness
equal to the thickness of the plate to which it is attached. It shall not be permissible to
insert such patches in the .. or head flush with the surrounding plate.
(v) Boiler tubes intended for use in the repair of fire-tube boilers may be re-ended or
H. provided the re-ending is done by means of the electric resistance butt welding or
ammer weld methods.
(w) Portions of tube sheets which have deteriorated may be renewed by replacing
the wasted portion with a new section. The ligaments between the tube his may be
joined by means of fusion welding and stay tubes or other approved means of relieving
the stress on the repaired section may be installed if, in the judgment of the Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, it is necessary to do so.
(z) Where leaks develop around staybolts which are otherwise in good condition, the
nuts may be replaced with a beveled collar formed around the end of the stay by means
of fusion welding. In such cases, the depth of the collar measured on the stay and the
... measured on the plate, shall be equal to one-half the diameter of the staybolt. (See
fig. C–19.)
(y) Any method of repairs by means of fusion welding not covered by the rules in this
subchapter, shall be referred to the Commandant, and may be authorized by him if, in his
opinion, it meets with the obvious intent of the rules in this subchapter.
57.21–5 Furnace repairs. (a) Corrugated and plain cylindrical furnaces or flues.
Where corrugated or plain furnaces or flues are distorted to a difference of 1% inches in di
ameter (that is, 1%-inch deviation from a true circle), they shall be forced back to a true
circular shape, and the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, may require strong-backs or
other approved means of support to hold the furnace from future collapse if in his opinion
such action is necessary.
(b) Where the distortion is in excess of 1% inches, the furnace shall be forced back to
practically a true circle and/or adequately stayed as found necessary in the judgment of
the inspector.
(c) Where the distortion does not exceed 1% inches it will not be necessary to force
the furnace back to a true circle if the working pressure is reduced in the ratio of 1% percent
for each one-tenth of an inch that the furnace is out of round. However, if the maximum
distortion does not exceed 1 inch and the length of the distorted area is not more than three
corrugations, or the maximum distortion does not exceed three-fourths of an inch for a
greater length it will not be necessary to reduce the pressure or make repairs unless such
should be considered by the inspector to be necessary.
(d). Where cracks appear in furnaces, such cracks may be repaired by fusion welding
as provided in section 57.21–4.
(e) When it becomes necessary to rivet a patch to a furnace or other part of the heating
surface, the riveted patch shall be placed on the water side of the plate in order not to form
a pocket in which sediment may collect. -
(f) Method for repairing furnace crowns. Furnaces which have become distorted, not
in excess of the limitations provided in paragraph (c), may be repaired by pumping back the
distorted section to as nearly a true circle as possible and reinforcing the same by means
of a ring fusion welded to the distorted corrugation, as shown in figure S-2-A, the welding
work to be done by qualified welding operators using approved welding rods or electrodes.
57.21–6 Šišeš furnaces and combustion chambers. (a) Where the plate forming
the walls of stayed furnaces or combustion chambers becomes bulged between staybolts,
it shall be permissible to repair the same by inserting an ...; staybolt in the center
of such space supported by the four staybolts.
(b) cks in the stayed surface of furnaces or combustion chambers may be repaired
by approved fusion welding, as specified in section 57.21–4. -
(c) Where it is desired to apply a riveted º to the wall of a stayed furnace or com
bustion chamber, the defective portion of the plate shall be cut away until solid material is
(F–163)
* wº
ww. |M *A º
::
:
|
# ,
#3 •
# #
#: ; #
N
\ sº
w
N ##
#:
#/ #
# #
(F–164)
reached, the patch shall be riveted on the water side, and the staybolts renewed, the same
to extend through the new plate.
57.21–7 Renewal of plate in stayed surface. When it becomes necessary to renew
wrapper sheets (in whole or in part), in combustion chambers of fire tube boilers, it shall be
permissible to make such repairs if the following specifications are complied with:
(a) The wrapper sheet shall be cut away between two rows of staybolts where the thick
ness of the material is approximately the same as in the original construction.
(b) Where the edges of the plate are riveted to the lower tube sheet and the back con
nection head the plate shall be removed by cutting out the rivets.
(c) The edges of the plate where they have been cut off shall be chipped or ground to
a bevel to insure good penetration of the weld, and the ends of the new plate shall be treated
in the same manner.
(d) The new plate shall be riveted to the flanges of the tube sheets and back connection
heads, and the ends may be butt welded, after which the staybolts shall be renewed.
57.21–8 Bagged or blistered sheets. (a) When the shell plates of cylindrical boilers
which are exposed to the radiant heat of the fire become bagged or blistered, it shall be
the duty of the chief engineer in charge of the vessel to notify the Officer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, for examination before raising steam on the boiler.
(b) Where the shell plate is bagged due to overheating, the Officer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, may, if in his judgment it is practicable, permit the same to be driven back to
its original position.
(c) Where the shell plate has blistered, bagged, or bulged to such an extent that there
is an appreciable thinning of the plate, it shall be the duty of the Officer in Charge, Marine
Inspection, to have the defective portion cut away and the shell repaired by fitting a patch
of steel plate conforming to the requirements of sections 51.2–1–51.2–10 in place of the
defective portion, care being taken that the riveting schedule of the is so arranged i.
as to give the plate sufficient strength to withstand the allowable stress placed on it in service.
57.21–9 Radius of dished heads—(a) Formula. The following formula shall be used
to determine the radius of the dished heads:
H Oz
R-3+äff
where
R=radius of dish, in inches.
C=chord, or distance, straight across between two points on the inner surface of the
head, in inches (see note).
H=distance from the middle point, of chord C to the inner surface of the head,
measured at right angles to the chord, in inches.
joinsNote: The and
the flange distance C should
the dished be taken
portion of theashead as É.
largewill practicable,
included in
butthe
small
measurements.
enough so that #.
(Seeno portion gºn
of the
S-3 and rounded surface at A which
(b) Tolerances for ellipsoidal heads. Heads of ellipsoidal form shall be checked for their
conformity to the true elliptical shape. The manufacturer of such heads shall furnish the
FIGURE S-4.-True semi-elliptical template points for measurement of tolerances of ellipsoidal heads.
inspector with a template made of wood or metal which must be made as nearly exact, true
semielliptical, as practicable. The total tolerance at points A or B in figures S-3 and S-4
shall not exceed 1% percent of the inside diameter of the head.
619428°–45–13 (F–165)
57.21–10 Allowable load on stays and staybolts of various diameters. The allowable
loads based on the net cross-sectional areas of staybolts with V threads, are computed from
the following formulas. The use of Whitworth threads with other pitches is
The formula for the diameter of a staybolt at the bottom of a V thread is as f lows: ...sible
D— (PX1.732)=d
where
D= diameter of staybolt over the threads, in inches.
P=pitch of threads, in inches.
d=diameter of staybolt at bottom of threads, in inches.
1.732=constant.
When United States threads are used, the formula becomes as follows:
D–(PX1.732X0.75)=d
Tables S-1 and S-2 give the allowable loads on net cross-sectional areas for staybolts
with W threads having 12 and 10 threads per inch.
TABLE S-1-ALLowABLE LoADs on STAYBoLTs WITH V THREADs, 12 THREADs PER INch
--
|
.
Diameter at
Net sectional
Maximum stress, Maximum *Maximum stress, Maximumndstress, *
--
Outside diameter of stay-
bolts, inches ºmºor"
*es | area
thrºat bottom
*of 6
,000 pounds per 7,500 pounds per 8,000
º ;" º #" 8 º #"r º: jºr
n
3.
4.
4-------- 0.7500 0.6057 0.288 1,728 2, 160 2, 304 2, 592

0.8125 0. 6682 0.351 2, 106 2,632 2,808 3, 159
0.8750 0.7307 0.419 2, 514 3, 142 3,352 3,771
0.9375 0.7932 0.494 2,964 3,705 3,952 4,446
1. 0000 0.8557 0. 575 3, 450 4, 312 4, 600 5, 175
1. 0625 0. 9182 0.662 3,972 4, 965 5, 296 5, 958
1. 1250 0. 9807 0. 755 4, 530 5, 662 6,040 6, 795
1. 1875 1. 0.432 0.855 5, 130 6, 412 6,840 7,695
1. 2500 1. 1057 0. 960 5, 760 7, 200 7,680 8, 640
1. 3125 1. 1682 1. 072 6,432 8,040 8,576 9,648
1. 3750 1. 2307 1. 190 7, 140 8,925 9, 520 -º 10,710
1.4375 1.2932 1. 313 7, 878 9, 849 10, 504 - 11, 817
1. 5000 1. 3557 1.444 8, 664 10,830 11, 552 12, 996
TABLE S-2-ALLowABLE LoAds on STAYBolts WITH V THREADs, 10 THREADS PER INCH
Diameter at Net sectional Maximum stress, Maximum stress, Maximum stress. Maximum stress
Outside diameter of stay- in area at bottom of Flºod pounds per'I'goo - -
bolts, inches º *** thrºw º - º :* 'º" º
1%-------- 1. 2500 1. 0.768 0.911 5, 466 6, 832 7, 288 8, 199

1%------- 1. 3125 1. 1393 1.019 6, 114 7,642 8, 152 9, 171
1%-------- 1. 3750 1. 2018 1. 134 6, 804 8,505 9,072 10, 206
1%------- 1. 4375 1. 2643 1. 255 7, 530 9,412 10,040 11, 295
1%-------- 1. 5000 1. 3268 1. 382 8, 292 10, 365 11,056 12,438
# -------- 1. 5625 1. 3893 1.515 9,090 11,362 12, 120 13, 635
1. 6250 1. 4518 1. 655 9, 930 12, 412 13, 240 14, 895
(F–166)
TABLE S-3.−ALLowABLE LoAds on Round BRACEs or STAY Rods
Allowable stress, in pounds per square inch, net cross-sectional area

Net cross
Manuºlº; circular “tº 6,000 7,500 8,000 9,000 10,000
- square inches
Allowable load, in pounds, on net cross-sectional area
1---------- 1. 0000 0. 7854 4, 712 5, 890 6, 283 7,068 7, 854

1%------- 1. 0625 0. 8866 5, 320 6, 649 7,092 7, 979 8, 866
1%-------- 1. 1250 0. 9940 5, 964 7, 455 7, 952 8,946 9, 940
1%6-------- 1. 1875 1. 1075 6, 645 8,306 8,860 9, 967 11,075
1%-------- 1. 2500 1. 2272 7, 362 9, 204 9, 817 11,044 12, 272
1%s-------- 1. 3125 1. 3530 8, 118 10, 147 10,824 12, 177 13, 530
#: - - - - - - - 1. 3750 1. 4849 8, 909 11, 136 11, 879 13, 364 14, 849
1%6-------- 1. 4375 1. 6230 9, 738 12, 172 12, 984 14, 607 16, 230
1%-------- 1. 5000 1. 7671 10, 602 13, 253 14, 136 15, 903 17, 671
1%s------- 1. 5625 1. 91.75 11, 505 14, 381 15, 340 17, 257 19, 175
1%-------- 1. 6250 2. 0739 12, 443 15, 554 16, 591 18, 665 20, 739
1%6------- 1. 6875 2. 2365 13,419 16, 773 17, 892 20, 128 22, 365
1%-------- 1. 7500 2. 4053 14,431 18,039 19, 242 21, 647 24, 053
1%6------- 1. 8125 2. 5802 15,481 19, 351 20, 641 23, 221 25, 802
1%-------- 1. 8750 2. 7612 16, 567 20, 709 22,089 24,850 27, 612
1*%------- 1.9375 2. 9483 17, 689 22, 112 23, 586 26, 534 29,483
2. 0000 3. 1416 18, 849 23, 562 25, 182 28, 274 31, 416
2. 1250 3. 5466 21, 279 26, 599 28, 372 32,019 35, 466
2. 2500 3. 9761 23, 856 29, 820 31, 808 35, 784 39,761
2. 3750 4. 4301 26, 580 33, 225 35, 440 | 39, 870 44,301
2. 5000 4. 9087 29,452 36,815 39, 269 44, 178 49, 087
2. 6250 5. 4119 32,471 40, 589 43, 295 48,707 54, 119
2. 7500 5. 9396 35, 637 44, 547 || 47,516 53, 456 59, 396
2.8750 6. 4918 38, 950 48, 688 51, 934 58,426 64, 918
3. 0000 7. 0686 42, 411 53,014 56, 548 63, 617 70,686
57.21–11 Standard practice for hydrostatic tests of boilers and appurtenances to

determine pressure rating. Where it is necessary to test a boiler structure, pressure vessel,
or appurtenance, or any pressure part thereof, to determine a pressure rating in accordance
with the provisions of section 52.1–15 the following procedure shall be adhered to as closely
as practicable: -
(a) Materials. The structure shall be made from material conforming to the require
ments of the appropriate sections of part 51.
(b) Workmanship. The dimensions and minimum thickness of the structure to be
tested shall not vary materially from those actually used. If possible, the structure to be
tested should be selected at random from a quantity of such intended for use.
(c) Preparation for test. (1) It is necessary to test only the weakest point of the
structure but several points should be checked to make certain that the weakest one is
.
CineCKe01.
The less definite the location of the weakest point, the more points should be
(2) The movement of the reference points may be measured with reference to a fixed
surface, or two reference points may be located on opposite sides of a symmetrical structure
and the total deformation between those two points measured.
(3) Indicating micrometer gages accurate to 0.001 inch are most suitable for measuring
deformation of the structure at the reference points although any form of accurate microm
eter may be used.
(4) A hand-test pump is satisfactory as a source of hydrostatic pressure. Either a
test gage or a reliable gage which has been calibrated with a test gage should be attached
to the structure.
(5) The maximum hydrostatic pressure that must be provided for will vary from two
to three times the expected maximum allowable working pressure for carbon-steel structures.
(6) The location of the weakest point of the structure may be determined by applying
a thin coating of plaster of paris or similar material, and noting where the surface coating
starts to break off under hydrostatic test. The coating should be allowed to dry before
the test is started.
(F–167)
y (d) Hydrostatic tests. (1) The first application of hydrostatic pressure should be
approximately the expected maximum allowable working pressure, or the tests should be
arranged with a view to making not less than 10 applications of pressure in approximately
equal increments between the initial test pressure and the final test pressure.
(2) When each increment of pressure has been applied, the valve between the pump
and the structure under test should be closed and the pressure gage watched to see that
the pressure is maintained and no leakage occurs. The total deformation at the reference
points should be measured and recorded and the hydrostatic pressure also recorded. The
pressure should then be released and each point checked for any permanent deformation
which should be recorded. Only one application of each increment of pressure is necessary.
The pressure should be increased by substantially uniform increments, and readings taken
until the elastic limit of the structure has obviously been exceeded.
57.21–12 Physical characteristics of metal. (a) The tests should be made with a view
to ascertaining the following physical properties of the metal:
(1) Tensile strength.
(2) Proportional limit.
(b) After the test is completed, if it is deemed necessary, coupons may be cut from the
specimen tested, and machined to standard 3% by 2 inch gage-length specimens. (See fig.
M-2.) These coupons should be representative of the metal at the weakest sections of the
structure, and their axes should preferably be parallel to the direction of greatest stress.
The coupons must not be cut out of the specimen with a gas torch.
(c) Plotting curves. A single cross-section sheet .# be used for each reference point
of the structure. A scale of 1 inch=0.01 inch deformation, and a scale of at least 1 inch
equals the approximate test pressure increments has been found satisfactory. Plot two
curves for each reference point, one showing total deformation under pressure and one show
ing permanent deformation when the pressure is removed.
(d) Determining proportional limit of pressure parts: In determining the proportional
limit of pressure lº the following ºff. shall be employed:
(1) Locate the proportional limit on each curve of total deformation as the point at
which the total deformation ceases to be proportional directly to the hydrostatic pressure.
Draw a straight line that will pass through the average of the points that lie approximately
in a straight line. The proportional limit will occur at the value of hydrostatic pressure
where the average curve through the points deviates from the straight line.
(2) In pressure parts such as headers, where a series of similar weak points occur, the
average hydrostatic pressure corresponding to the proportional limits of the similar points
may be used.
(3) The proportional limit obtained from the curve of total deformation may be checked
from the curve of permanent deformation by locating the point where the permanent de
formation begins to increase regularly with further increases in pressure. Permanent deform
ations of a low order that occur prior to the point actually corresponding to the proportional
limit of the structure, resulting from the equalization of stresses and irregularities in the
material, may be disregarded.
(4) It should be made certain that the curves show the deformation of the structure and
not slip or displacement of reference surfaces, gages, or the structure.
(e) Determining maximum allowable working pressure: (1) Having determined the pro
portional limit of the weakest point of the structure, the maximum allowable working pres
sure may be determined by the formula:
W HXS
EX5
where
W=maximum allowable working pressure.
H=hydrostatic pressure at the proportional limit of the pressure part.
S=average tensile strength of material.
E= average proportional limit of the material.
(2) As an alternate method of determining the maximum allowable working pressure,
eliminating the necessity of cutting coupons for tensile tests, the proportional limit of the
material may be considered as two-fifths of its tensile strength. The maximum allowable
(F–168)
working pressure may then be taken as one-half of the hydrostatic pressure corresponding
to the proportional limit of the pressure part.
(f) A re-test should be allowed on an additional structure if errors or irregularities are
obvious in the results.
57.21–13 Requirements for fuel oil. (a) Flash point. Oil to be used as fuel on vessels
subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard shall have a flash point of not less than 150°F.
(closed cup test).
(b) It shall be the duty of the chief engineer to make an entry in the log of each supply
of fuel oil received on board, stating the quantity received, the name of the vendor, the name
of . oil producer, and the flash point (closed cup test) for which it is certified by the
(c) It
PIt OOlucer. shall be the further duty of the chief engineer to draw and seal at the time the
supply is received on board, a half-pint sample of each lot of fuel oil, such sample to be
preserved until that particular supply of oil is exhausted.
57.21–14 Request for increase of pressure. When a certain maximum allowable
working pressure has been fixed by an Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, for a particular
boiler installation, no increase of pressure shall be granted, unless such increase is justified by a
careful check up of the test reports of the ..f. in the construction of the boiler and
the design as shown by the approved blueprints together with the condition of the boiler or
boilers at the time the request is made. #. no case shall it be permissible to increase the
maximum allowable working pressure unless such increase is sanctioned by the Commandant.
57.21–15 Inspection of boilers of foreign-built vessels admitted to American registry.
(a) Where foreign-built vessels are admitted to American registry the Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, shall endeavor to secure blueprints from which the boilers were construc
ted and a record of the chemical and physical properties of the material entering into the con
struction of the boilers. Before a certificate of inspection of a vessel is issued by any Officer
in Charge, Marine Inspection, the following requirements shall be complied with:
(b) The blueprints if available shall be calculated to determine the maximum allowable
working pressure in accordance with the rules in this subchapter, and the test reports of the
material shall be carefully checked to determine whether the material used in the con
struction of the boilers is safe.
(c) The boiler or boilers shall be measured in order to obtain accurate data, which data
shall be embodied in the report of the inspector making the examination. All plates shall
be drilled and gaged by the inspector to determine the actual thickness, and upon the thick
ness thus obtained the working pressure shall be based. The furnaces shall be trammed to
ascertain if there is any distortion. The safety valves and mountings shall be thoroughly
examined to determine if they are in good working condition and that the capacity of the same
is ample to insure safety.
(d) Each section .#
the steam pipe shall be drilled and gaged, and, where bends occur
in the piping, they shall be drilled in the outer wall of the bends to determine the thickness
thereof.
(e) When the inspection is completed and steam is raised on the boilers, an accumulation
test shall be conducted, where required, in accordance with the provisions of Section 52.14–3
to establish the fact that the safety valves have ample relieving ..º.
(f) Where blueprints of the boilers and test reports of the material entering into their
construction cannot be obtained, the maximum allowable working pressure shall be based
on the actual thickness of material as found and an assumed tensile strength not to exceed
60,000 pounds, together with the general condition of the boilers, provided that the maximum
working pressure thus obtained .. not exceed in any case the maximum working pressure
:
Operated.
y the certificate issued by the government under whose flag the vessel formerly
p 57.21–16 Life of new boiler installation. The life of a new boiler installation, within
the meaning of the rules in this subchapter, shall begin with the date of the issuance of the
first certificate of inspection to the vessel in which such boiler or boilers are installed.
57.21–17 Installation of refrigerating machinery. Where refrigerating machines are
installed in which anhydrous ammonia is used as a refrigerant, such machines shall be located
in a well-ventilated, isolated compartment, preferably on the deck, but in no case shall it
be permissible to install such machine in the engine-room space unless it can be so vented
(F–169)
and isolated as to eliminate any hazard from gas escaping to the engine room. Absorption
machines using a solution of aqua ammonia and machines using carbon anhydride (CO, gas)
are exempt from this requirement, provided the maximum charges that might be released
in the event of breakage do not exceed 300 pounds.
57.21–18 Brazed unfired pressure vessels. (a) Unfired pressure vessels may be con
prºvided the temperature to which such vessels are subject in
structed with brazed joints
service does not exceed 406° F.
(b) Manufacturers of such vessels will be required to file with the Commandant an
affidavit on Form NCG 935A setting forth that the material used and the brazing process
will be in conformity with these rules.
57.21–19 Material. Steel plates used for the shells and heads of brazed unfired pressure
vessels shall conform to one of the grades specified in sections 51.2–1 to 51.2–10, sections
51.21–1 to 51.21–13, or in sections 51.22–1 to 51.22–11.
57.21–20 Computations. The maximum allowable working pressure of brazed unfired
pressure vessels shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of § 52.2–3 for
cylindrical shells, using a factor of safety of 5 and a joint efficiency of 0.9, and in accordance
with the requirements of § 52.5–3 for dished heads.
57.21–21 Detail requirements. Longitudinal joints may be of the lap type for material
not exceeding % inch and for heavier material the double butt strap joint shall be used.
The width of the overlap in a lap joint shall be at least equal to 8 times the thickness of the
plate and an aggregate of 16 times the thickness in the double butt strap construction, one
half on each side of the abutting plate edges. The laps or straps shall be held closely in
position, metal to metal, by stitch riveting or other efficient means. The brazing material
used shall be such as to produce a shearing strength in the joint of at least 10,000 pounds
per square inch.
57.21–22 Head joints. Heads shall be fitted into the shells with a light driving fit,
the overlap being at least equal to 4 times the thickness of the shell plate.
57.21–23 Hydrostatic test. (a) All brazed pressure vessels shall be subjected to a
hydrostatic test equal to one and one-half times the maximum allowable working pressure,
and when subjected to this pressure shall be given a thorough hammer or impact test.
This impact test shall consist of striking the plate at 6-inch intervals on both sides of the
brazed joint and for the full length of all the brazed joints. The weight of the hammer
in pounds shall approximately equal the thickness of the shell in tenths of an inch, but shall
not exceed 10 pounds. The plate shall be struck with a sharp swinging blow, and the edges
of the hammer shall be rounded so as to prevent defacing of the plates.
(b) Following this test, the pressure shall be raised to not less than twice the maximum
allowable .#.. and shall be held for a period of time sufficient to enable the
inspector to carefully examine all joints and connections.
57.21–24. Rules for construction of cast-iron boilers. Cast-iron heating boilers may
be used on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard if constructed in accordance
with the following rules in this part.
Such boilers shall in no case be used for a maximum allowable working pressure exceeding
15 pounds per square inch and shall be used exclusively for heating purposes.
57.21–25 anufacturers’ certification. Manufacturers desiring to construct cast-iron
boilers for use on vessels subject to the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard shall submit an affidavit
on Form NCG 935A, certifying that such boilers will comply with all of the requirements
of the rules in this subchapter.
57.21–26 Material. The material used in the construction of cast-iron heating boilers
shall ºm to the requirements of sections 51.18–1 to 51.18–10 for grade B or grade
C material. -
57.21–27 Washout openings. All cast-iron heating boilers shall be provided with
washout openings to permit the removal of any sediment that may accumulate therein.
Washout openings may be used for return pipe connections and the washout plug placed in a
tee so that the plug is directly opposite and as close as possible to the opening in the boiler.
57.21–28 Flanged connections. Flanged pipe connection openings in boilers shall
conform to the American Standard given in table P-13 for the corresponding pipe size, and
shall have the corresponding drilling for bolts or studs.
(F–170)
SUPPLEMENTARY DATA AND REQUIREMENTS [57.21–32)
57.21–29. Threaded openings. Pipe connections if threaded shall be tapped into

material having a minimum thickness as specified in table S-4.
TABLE S-4.—MINIMUM THICKNESs of MATERIAL For THREADED Conn Ections to BoILERs
Minimum
thickness
of material
Size of pipe connections (inches): required
% and under------------------------------------------- inch_ _ %g
1 to 2%, inclusive-------------------------------------- do---- %c
3 to 3%, inclusive--------------------------------------- do - . . . %
4 to 5, inclusive---------------------------------------- do---- %
6 to 8, inclusive---------------------------------------- do---- 1
9 to 12, inclusive--------------------------------- do----
-- - - - - 1%
57.21–30 Hydrostatic tests. (a) The completed boiler shall be subject to a hydro
static test pressure not less than 60 pounds to the square inch. In the event of any defects
developing, the defective portion may be replaced and the boiler retested, but defective
sections shall not be repaired unless the same are first examined by a duly authorized in
spector and the method of repair is sanctioned by him.
(b) It is not required that duly authorized inspectors shall make a shop inspection of
:* jºu boiler. Such inspection shall be made by the manufacturers and certified
to by them.
57.21–31 Marking. Manufacturers shall stamp the completed boiler in an accessible
location where the stamp marks will not be obliterated. In . a name plate shall be
placed outside of the covering, giving the name of the manufacturer, the serial number of
the boiler, and the letters, U. S. C. G. Std.
57.21–32 Installation. (a) Provisions shall be made for the expansion and contraction
of steam mains to boilers by providing substantial anchorage at suitable points, so that there
shall be no undue strain transmitted to the boiler.
(b) When feed or make-up water is introduced from a pressure line, it shall be con
nected to the piping system and not directly to the boiler.
(c) When a stop valve is used in the supply-pipe connection of a single boiler, there
shall be one used in the return-pipe connection. It is recommended that no stop valves
be placed in the supply and return pipe connections of a single boiler installation.
(d) A stop valve shall be used in each supply and return pipe connection of two or more
boilers connected to a common system.
h § Provision
the boiler.
shall be made for cleaning the interior of the return piping at or close to
(f) When stop valves are used they shall be properly designated substantially as in
dicated below by tags of metal or other durable material fastened to them.
Šipº Valve—Number ( )
Do Not Close Without Also Closing
Return Valve—Number ( ).
Return Valve—Number ( )
Do Not Close Without Also Closing
Supply Valve—Number ( ).
(g) When a valve is placed in the top connection from a hot-water supply boiler to a
storage tank, an additional connection without valve shall be made between the boiler and
top of storage tank.
(h) Connections for safety valves. Every boiler shall have proper outlet connections for
the required safety valves, independent of any other connection outside the boiler. A steam
equalizing pipe between boilers is not to be considered as a connection outside of the boiler
in applying the requirements of this paragraph. The area of the opening is to be at least
ual to the aggregate area based on the nominal diameters of all of the safety valves with
j, it connects. A screwed connection may be used for attaching a safety valve.
(F–171)
[57.21–33) MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
57.21–33 Fittings and appliances. (a) Safety valves. (1) Each steam boiler shall be
provided with one or more safety valves of the spring pop type adjusted and sealed to dis
charge at a pressure not to exceed 15 pounds per square inch. The minimum diameter of
a safety valve shall not be less than % inch, nor the maximum greater than 4% inches.
(2) When two or more safety valves are used on a boiler, they may be single, twin, or
duplex valves.
(3) Safety valves shall be connected to the boilers independent of other connections
and be attached directly or as close as possible to the boiler without any unnecessary inter
vening pipe or fitting except the Y-base forming a part of the twin valve or a steam equalizing
pipe between boilers. A safety valve shall not be connected to an internal pipe in the boiler.
Safety valves shall be connected so as to stand upright with the spindle vertical.
(4) No shut-off of any description shall be placed between the safety valve and the boiler,
nor on discharge pipes between such valves and the atmosphere.
(5) When a discharge pipe is used its area shall be not less than the area of the valve
or aggregate area based on the nominal diameters of the valves with which it connects, and
the discharge pipe shall be fitted with an open drain to prevent water from lodging in the
upper part of the valve or in the pipe. When an elbow is placed on a safety valve discharge
pipe, it shall be located close to the valve outlet or the pipe shall be securely anchored and
supported. The safety valves shall be so located and piped that there will §s no danger of
scalding attendants.
(6) Each safety valve, three-fourths inch or over, used on a steam-heating boiler, shall
have a substantial lifting device by which the valve may be raised from its seat at least
% inch when there is no pressure on the boiler.
(7) Each safety valve shall be plainly marked by the manufacturer in such a way that
the markings will not be obliterated in service, by stamping or casting on the casing or body
of the valve, or by stamping or casting on a plate securely fastened to the casing, the letters
U. S. C. G. Std., the manufacturer's name or º, and the pressure at which it is
set to blow. All safety valves shall be .."
so that they cannot be reset to relieve at
a higher pressure than the maximum allowable working pressure of the boiler. The seats
and disks of safety valves shall be made of nonferrous material.
(8) The diameter of seat shall determine the nominal diameter of safety valve as given
in table S–5. The pipe thread at the inlet shall not be less than the nominal valve size.
TABLE S-5.-MINIMUM ALLowABLE SIzEs of SAFETY WALVES For STEAM HEATING Ro11, ERs
Safety valve - Safety valve
- Area of grate - Area of grate

º
i
Area gº
Disch t hº
Di
Area 3:tº:h
inch
es... er nour S are feet
me Square
re inch
inches . our Sq ſeet
ºf | **is * | a_ gºtº "ºn | *f;
. 1104 30 1. 5 || 2%------------ 4. 9087 1, 435 19
. 1963 60 2 3------------- 7. 0686 2,070 24
. 4418 130 3 3%------------ 9. 6211 2,810 29
. 7854 230 4 4------------- 12, 5660 3, 675 34
. 2272 360 6. 5 || 4%------------ 15. 9040 4, 650 39
. 7671 515 9, .
1 Capacity of safety valve based on 33% percent over pressure, valve set to relieve at 15 pounds per square inch.
Note: The foregoing table is based upon the following formulas: alve. inch
Where grate does not exceed 4 square feet Diameter of safety valve, inch=grate area (square feet)
4
Diameter of safety valve, inch=grate area (square feet)+0.6
Where grate area exceeds 4 square feet 10
If liquid or gaseous fuel is used a grate area should be assumed equal to that which would be required if coal were used for fuel.
(9) The minimum size of safety valve or valves for each boiler shall be governed by
the amount of the grate area as given in table S–5. In determining the minimum size of safety
valves for double-grate down-draft boilers, the effective grate area shall be taken as the
area of the upper grate plus one-eighth of the area of the lower grate.
The safety valve capacity for each steam boiler shall be such that the safety valve or
valves will discharge all the steam that can be generated by the boiler without allowing the
}. to rise more than 5 pounds above the maximum allowable working pressure of
e DOller.
(F–172)
SUPPLEMENTARY DATA AND REQUIREMENTS (57.21–33)
When the size of boiler exceeds the values given in table S–5, safety valves whose
combined capacities equal the rated capacity of the boiler shall be selected.
(10) When a hot-water supply is heated indirectly by steam in a coil or pipe, the pres
sure of the steam used shall not exceed the safe working pressure of the hot-water tank, and a
water-relief valve of at least 1 inch in diameter, set to relieve at or below the maximum
allowable working pressure of the tank, shall be used.
(b) Steam gages. (1) Each steam boiler shall have a steam gage connected to its
steam space or to its water column, or its steam connection, by means of a siphon or equiva
lent device exterior to the boiler and of sufficient capacity to keep the gage tube filled with
water and so arranged that the gage cannot be shut off from the boiler except by a cock with
T or lever handle, placed in the pipe near the gage. The handle of the cock shall be parallel
to the pipe in which it is located when the cock is open.
(2) #. scale on the dial of a steam boiler gage shall be graduated to not less than 30
pounds. The gage shall be provided with effective stops for indicating pointer at the zero
point and at the maximum pressure point. The travel of the pointer from zero to 30 pounds
pressure shall be at least 3 inches.
(3) Steam-gage connections shall be of nonferrous composition when smaller than 1-inch
pipe and longer than 5 feet between the gage and point of connection of pipe to boiler, and
also when smaller than %-inch pipe and shorter than 5 feet between the gage and point of
connection of pipe to boiler.
(4) On a compound gage, effective stops shall be set at the limits of the gage readings on
both the pressure and vacuum sides.
(c) Bottom blow-off. Each boiler shall have a blow-off pipe connection fitted with a
valve or cock not less than %-inch pipe size connected with the lowest water space practicable.
(d) Water-gage glasses. Each steam boiler shall have one or more water-gage glasses,
with the lower fitting provided with a valve or pet cock to facilitate cleaning.
(e) Gage cocks. Each steam boiler shall have two or more gage cocks located within the
range of the visible length of the water glass.
Water-column pipes. The minimum size pipes connecting the water column of a
steam boiler shall be 1 inch. Water-glass, fittings or gage cocks may be connected direct
to the boiler. No connections, except for combustion regulator, drain or steam gage, shall
be attached to the water column or the piping connecting a water column to a boiler. If the
water column or gage glass is connected to the boiler by pipe and fittings, a crosstee, or
uivalent, in which a .. valve and piping may be attached, shall be placed in the water
piping connection at every º turn to facilitate cleaning.
ter fuel supply cut-off. It is recommended that on all automatically fired
steam or vapor-steam boilers, a low-water fuel-supply cut-off be installed in such location
that it automatically shuts off the fuel supply when the surface of the water falls to the
lowest safe water line.
(h) Fusible plugs. None required.
(F–173)
PART 58—BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS
Sec. Sec.
SUBPART A–BoILER PLATE: INSTALLATIONS MADE OR Con- 58.9 Riveted joints.
TRACTED FOR PRIOR TO JULY 1, 1935 58. 10 Butt straps.
58.01 Stamps. 58. 11 Woodwork from boilers.
58.02 Tests and inspection. 58. 12 Angle stiffeners for curved surfaces.
58.03 Boilers built since February 28, 1872. 58. 13 Furnaces.
58.04 Chemical properties, steel plates. 58. 14 Flues.
58.05 Physical properties, steel plates. 58. 15 Tubes.
58.06 Physical properties, iron plates. 58. 16 Stays.
58.07 Tension tests. 58. 17 Tops of combustion chambers and back connections.
58.010 Foreign-built boilers. 58. 18 Flat surfaces.
58. 19 Name plates.
SUBPART B–Boilers AND AttachMENTs: INSTALLATIONs 58.20 Fusible plugs.
MADE or CoNTRACTED For PRIok to JUly 1, 1935 58.21 Gage cocks and water glass.
58.22 Steam gages.
58.1 Drawings of boilers. 58.23 Safety valves.
58.2 Cylindrical shells. 58.24 Water tube and coil boilers.
58.3 Heads. 58.25 Welding and reinforcing.
58.4. Manholes, handholes, etc. 58.26 Feed water.
58.5 Donkey boilers. 58. 27 Main steam pipe.
58.6 Drilling to determine thickness. 58.28 Cast steel, semisteel, ferrosteel, etc., proposed to be used in
58.7 Hydrostatic pressure. the manufacture of valves, fittings, and other appliances.
58.8 Steam chimneys. 58.29 Installations of fuel-oil systems.
SUBPART A–BoILER PLATE: INSTALLATIONs MADE OR CoNTRACTED FOR PRIOR To JULY 1,

1935
Section 58.01 Stamps. Every iron or steel plate intended for the construction or
repair of boilers to be used on steam vessels shall be stamped by the manufacturer in the
following manner, at two diagonal corners, at a distance of about 18 inches from the edges.
Plates to be used in externally fired boilers the thickness of which shall not exceed one
half inch for steamers navigated under the provisions of Title LII, Revised Statutes, sections
4399–4500, which will be subject to tensile strain in said boilers, shall be tested and inspected
by an inspector duly authorized under the provisions of said title, and such plates shall not
be stamped until they have been tested by the inspector, and each of such plates shall then
be stamped by the manufacturer in the presence of the inspector with the name of the manu
facturer, the place where manufactured, and the minimum number of thousand pounds
tensile stress it will bear to the sectional square inch as has been determined by the test.
Plates to be used in the construction or repair of boilers other than the externally fired
boilers as described in above paragraphs, for steamers navigated under provisions of Title
LII, Revised Statutes, sections 4399–4500, which shall be subject to tensile strain in said
boilers shall be tested and inspected by an inspector duly authorized under provisions of said
title and such plates shall be stam ...?by the manufacturer before same are tested with the
name of the manufacturer, the place where manufactured, and the minimum number of
pounds the plate will bear to the sectional square inch, expressed in thousands.
Inspectors testing iron or steel plate at the mills where same is manufactured shall allow
the mills to shear any plate into butt straps or heads before the coupon from the plate is
tested, and they shall accept the statement of the manufacturer that the coupon presented
to the inspector for testing was taken from the plate from which the butt straps or heads
were cut, and if the coupon meets all the requirements of sections 58.01–58.010 the inspector
shall stamp, in one place where it is most likely to be left legible after working into the boiler,
all heads and butt straps cut from the plate.
All plates which conform to the physical, chemical, and other requirements prescribed
by the rules in this subchapter shall |. stamped by the inspector near the manufacturer's
stamp, with the official stamp of the Coast Guard, and with the initials of his name and a
serial number.
58.02 Tests and inspection. Plates may be tested and inspected at the mills for
repairs to marine boilers or to be carried in stock, the report of such test to be in duplicate,
one copy to be furnished through the District Coast Guard Officer to the Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, in the district where the purchaser of such material is located, and the
other to the purchaser, who shall deliver a copy of the same to the parties using the material,
(F–175)
[58.03] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
who, in turn, shall submit the same to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in the dis
trict where the material is to be used, before being assembled in the boiler. Steamers
carrying such repair material to be used in emergencies shall carry the record of each sheet
of such material on board.
58.03, Boilers built since February 28, 1872. Boilers built since February 28, 1872,
of material stamped and tested according to the requirements of section 4430, Revised
Statutes (46 U. S. C. 408), and having a record ... the office of the Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, in the district where the boiler was built or intended to be used, may
be used for marine purposes, notwithstanding that such boilers may have been used for other
* if in
S8.ie.
the judgment of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, they are deemed
58.04 Chemical properties, steel plates. Steel plates shall be made by the open-hearth
process, except that steel for plates to be used in the manufacture of boiler tubes may be
made by the Bessemer process.
Open-hearth steel shall contain not more than 0.04 percent of phosphorus nor more than
0.05 percent of sulphur.
The manufacturer shall furnish the inspector, with each order tested, a certificate
stating the process by which the steel was manufactured and a copy of the analysis of each
melt. The analysis may, if deemed expedient by the Commandant, be verified at the expense
of the manufacturer. -
58.05 Physical properties, steel plates. All steel plates tested shall show an elongation
of at least 20 percent measured in a gage length of 8 inches.
58.06 Physical properties, iron plates. The tensile strength shall be not less than
45,000 pounds per square inch. The elongation shall be not less than 15 percent. The
reduction of area shall be not less than 15 percent for 45,000 pounds tensile strength, and for
each increase of 1,000 pounds tensile strength up to 55,000 pounds, an addition of 1 shall be
made to the required percentage of reduction of area. The bend test specimen shall bend
cold through 90° around a curve the radius of which is not greater than one and one-half
times the thickness of the specimen. -
58.07 Tension tests. All tension test specimens shall be milled to the form as shown
in figure 1, with the following dimensions: Length at least 16 inches, ends from 1% to 3%
inches wide by about 3 inches in length, and parallel section at center 1 to 1% inches wide by
9 inches in length. The percentage of elongation shall be measured in a gage length of 8
inches. :
Where specimens are to be tested on the testing machines of the Coast Guard, they
shall be 1 inch wide at parallel section in center, and shall not exceed 2 inches in width on
the ends. -
All bend test specimens shall be at least 12 inches in length and from 1 to 3% inches in
width, and the full thickness as rolled. The edges may be planed. The corners shall not
be rounded, but the sharpness may be removed with a fine file. After bending, the specimens
shall show no cracks or flaws on the outside of the bent portion.
=N- -
_y-
i
t |
4–4 best º intºs *—-------. Sinehes-------—s K--es”-
-
-/
-
;
t
S.
:
-
FIGURE 1.
TEST SPECIMENS FOR STEEL PLATES
Two tension tests and one cold-bend test shall be made from each plate as first rolled
from a billet, slab, or ingot, the tensile test specimens to be taken from two diagonal corners
: i. #. and a cold-bend specimen to be taken transversely from the middle of the top
of the plate. -
The bend test specimen shall bend cold 180° around a pin without showing any sign of
cracking or other injurious defects on the outside of the bent portion, as follows: For plates
under 1 inch in thickness the diameter of the pin shall be ..f.
one and one-half times the
(F–176)
BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS (58.3]
thickness of the plate; for plates 1 inch and over, up to and including 1% inches in thickness,
the diameter of the pin i. be equal to three times the thickness of the plate, and for all
plates over 1% inches in thickness the diameter of the pin shall be equal to four times the
thickness of the plate.
The finished material shall be free from all injurious defects, and shall have a good and
workmanlike finish.
All measurements of test specimens and material shall be made by any standard Ameri
can gage, and record of tests shall be submitted on Form 934.
58.010 . Foreign-built boilers. Boilers of foreign-built vessels admitted to American
registry shall be inspected in the same manner as boilers on American vessels.
The working steam pressure shall be determined by the application of the hydrostatic
pressure in the ratio as required by the laws of the United States and by a close observation
of the general condition of the boiler.
The working steam pressure under which the boilers are being operated shall be accepted
as the basis for determining the allowable working pressure where it is not practicable or
possible to secure a record of the tests of the plates entering into the construction of the boiler.
SUBPART B–BoILERS AND ATTACHMENTs: INSTALLATIONs MADE or ContRACTED For PRIoR
To JULY 1, 1935
58.1 Drawings of boilers. The manufacturer of any boiler to be used for marine
urposes shall furnish the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, of the district where such
É. or boilers are to be inspected duplicate blueprints or tracings fully descriptive of
same in detail for his approval, one of which shall be kept on file in the inspection office
and the other returned to the manufacturer. Where more than one boiler is made from a
similar design, a drawing of which is on file in the inspection office, if made at a different
date, a reference to such drawing on file is all that shall be required. The manufacturer
shall* furnish the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, an affidavit on either Form 935
or 936.
It shall be theº of every Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, to make, for every new
boiler inspected in his district, all computations required by the rules and regulations, and any
other necessary computations, from data obtained from blueprints or tracings, boiler manu
facturers’ affidavits, tensile test reports, and from other reliable sources. A record of such
computations in full shall be made on letter sheets and filed with blueprints or tracings of
boiler, the first sheet of such computations to be headed with a general description of boiler
and with the vessel file number.
58.2 Cylindrical shells. The working steam pressure allowable on cylindrical shells
of boilers constructed of plates inspected as i. by the rules in this subchapter when
single riveted, shall not produce a strain to exceed one-sixth of the tensile strength of the
iron or steel plates of which such boilers are constructed; but where the longitudinal laps of
the cylindrical parts of such boilers are double riveted, and the rivet holes for such boilers
have been fairly drilled instead of punched, an addition of 20 percent to the working pressure
provided for single riveting shall be allowed.
The pressure for any dimension of boilers shall be ascertained by the following rule, viz:
Multiply one-sixth of the lowest tensile strength found stamped on the plates in the
cylindrical shell by the thickness—expressed in inches or parts ºp an inch—and divide by
the radius or half diameter, also expressed in inches, and the result will be the pressure allow
able per square inch of surface for single riveting, to which add 20 percent where the longi
tudinal laps of the cylindrical parts of such boiler are double riveted, when all the rivet
holes of such boiler, including steam and mud drums, have been fairly drilled and no part
of such holes has been punched. The pressure allowed shall be based on the plate whose
tensile strength multiplied by its thickness gives the lowest product.
Centers or guide holes not to exceed 75 percent of the diameter of the full-size finished
hole for tubes, and stays may be punched. The remainder shall be cleanly cut, drilled, or
reamed to full size. Holes not to exceed 4 inches in diameter in plates five-eighths of an
inch thick and under may be punched to within 94 inch of the full diameter of the finished
hole; the remainder shall be cleanly cut, drilled, or reamed to full size.
58.3 Heads. All plates used as heads, when new and made to practically true circles,
. º described below, shall be allowed a steam pressure in accordance with the following
Ormula:
(F–177)
CONVEX HEADS
- TXS
P=-fi
where
P=Steam pressure allowable in pounds.
T=thickness of plate in inches.
S=one-fifth of the tensile strength.
R=one-half of the radius to which the head is bumped.
CONCAVE HEADS
For concave heads the pressure allowable shall be eight-tenths times the pressure
allowable for convex heads.
Note:–To find the radius of a sphere of which the bumped head forms a part, square the radius of head, divide this by the height of bump
required; to the result add height of bump, which will equal diameter of sphere, one-half of which will be the required radius.
ExAMPLE
...
Required, the working pressure of a convex head of a 54-inch radius; material, 60,000
º: tensile strength and one-half of an inch thick. Substituting values and solving,
We naVe
P _0.5X12,000 =222 pounds.

27
º pressure allowable on a concave head of the same dimensions would be 222×0.8=177
To avoid
pOunois. grooving the flanging shall be well rounded at the bend. -
Bumped heads may contain a manhole opening flanged inwardly, when such flange is
turned to a depth of three times the thickness of material in the head.
Material used in the construction of all bumped heads shall possess the physical and
chemical qualities prescribed by the Commandant for all plates subject to tensile strain,
as required by section 4430, Revised Statutes (46 U. S. C. 408).
FLAT. HEADS OF WIROUGHT-IRON OR STEEL PLATE
Where flat heads do not exceed 20 inches in diameter they may be used without being
stayed, and the steam pressure allowable shall be determined by the following formula:
_CXT
TTA
where - P=steam pressure allowable in pounds.
- T=thickness of material in sixteenths of an inch.
A=one-half the area of head in inches.
C=112 for plates seven-sixteenths of an inch and under.
C=120 for plates over seven-sixteenths of an inch.
Provided, The flanges are made to an inside radius of at least 1% inches.
ExAMPLE
Required the working pressure of a flat head 20 inches in diameter and three-fourths
of an inch thick. Substituting values, we have
_120×144
P= 157 =110 pounds.
Requirements for heads (applicable only to Rivers).
All heads employed in the construction of cylindrical externally fired boilers for steamers
navigating the Red River of the North and rivers whose waters flow into the Gulf of Mexico
shall have a thickness of material as follows:
For boilers having a diameter—
Over 32 inches and not over 36 inches, not less than % inch.
Over 36 inches and not over 40 inches, not less than ãº inch.
Qver 40 inches and not over 48 inches, not less than % inch.
Over 48 inches, not less than % inch.
(F–178)
BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS [58.8]
The heads of steam and mud drums of such boilers shall have a thickness of material
of not less than half an inch.
58.4 Manholes, handholes, etc. Manhole openings in front head of externally fired
boilers, under the flues, as required by section 4434, Revised Statutes of the United States
(46 U. S. C. 412), shall be of dimensions of not less than 8 by 12 inches in the clear. (Appli
cable to rivers only.)
All boilers built on and after August 1, 1914, shall have a manhole opening above the
flues or tubes of not less than 10 by 16 inches, 11 by 15 inches, or of an equal area, in the clear,
and shall have such other manhole openings in other parts of the boiler as may be required
by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, when considering blueprints or tracings sub
mitted to him for approval of sufficient dimensions to allow easy access to the interior of the
boiler for the purpose of inspection and examination.
When holes exceeding 6 inches in diameter are cut in boilers for pipe connections, man
hole and handhole plates, such holes shall be reinforced, either on the inside or outside of
boiler, with reinforcing wrought-iron or steel rings, which shall be securely riveted or properly
fastened to the boiler, such reinforcing material to be rings of sufficient width and thickness
of material to fully compensate for the amount of material cut from such boilers, in flat sur
faces; and where such opening is made in the circumferential plates of such boilers, the
reinforcing ring shall have a sectional area equal to at least one-half of the sectional area of
the opening parallel with the longitudinal seams of such portion of the boiler. On boilers
C ing 75 pounds or less steam pressure a cast-iron stop valve, properly flanged, may be
used as reinforcement to such opening. When holes are cut in any flat surface of such
boilers and such holes are flanged inwardly to a depth of not less than 1% inches, measuring
from the outer surface, the reinforcement rings may be dispensed with.
When reinforcing rings as described above are made of wrought iron or steel, the material
shall not be required to be tested.
Seamless forged steel nozzles may be used for reinforcing holes cut in boilers when the
amount of material in the flange of the saddle that is secured to the boiler is equal to the
amount of material removed from the boiler. -
No connection between shell of boiler and mud drum shall exceed 9 inches in diameter,
and the flange of the mud-drum leg shall consist of an equal amount of material to that cut
out of the shell of boiler.
58.5 Donkey boilers. Donkey boilers shall be inspected in the same manner as the
main boilers.
58.6 Drilling to determine thickness. The shell of any boiler which has reached the
age of 10 years shall, at the first annual inspection thereafter, and at such subsequent periods
as the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, or District Coast Guard Officer may deem
necessary, be drilled near the water line and at such other points in the shell as may be
necessary to determine as nearly as possible the thickness of material, which ascertained
.."
allowed.
together with the general condition of the boiler, shall govern the steam pressure
58.7 Hydrostatic pressure. The hydrostatic pressure applied to boilers which can be
satisfactorily examined internally shall be in the proportion of 125 pounds to the square
inch to 100 pounds to the square inch of the steam pressure allowed; types of boilers which
due to design cannot be examined internally shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure in
the proportion of 150 pounds to the square inch to 100 pounds to the square inch of the steam
pressure allowed. The inspector, after applying the hydrostatic test, shall thoroughly
examine every part of the . The hydrostatic pressure shall also be applied to the
main steam pipe up to the throttle.
In the application of the hydrostatic pressure to boilers, inspectors shall require such
arrangements as will guard against main and auxiliary stop valves being subjected to hydro
static pressure on one side at the same time that steam pressure is exerted on the opposite
side.
Steamers ongoing out of service or laying up in winter quarters and beginning the annual
inspection may have the hydrostatic pressure applied to boilers at any time preceding the
date of the final completion of the inspection, so that, however, in no instance shall the vessel
be navigated to exceed 12 months without the application of the hydrostatic pressure.
58.8 Steam chimneys. When steam chimneys constructed of flues subject to external
pressure have a thickness of not less than seven-sixteenths of an inch, and the flue is heated
only with the waste gases, and the temperature does not exceed 600°F., the working pressure
(F–179)
(58.9) MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
shall be determined by the rules for plain furnaces or flues, corrugated furnaces, and Adamson
type. When flues are strengthened with tee irons, angle irons, or bowling rings the working
pressure shall be determined by formula for plain furnace flues. When angle or tee bars are
used they shall have a thickness of leaf of at least two-thirds that of plate and a depth of at
least one-fourth of pitch. Said tee bars shall be substantially riveted to flue. All rivet
holes in tees shall be drilled, holes shall be staggered, distance from center of rivet holes to
edge of tees shall be not less than 1.5 times diameter of rivet holes, and percentage of plate
section shall be not less than rivet section. Bowling rings may be used, as they increase the
strength and provide for expansion of flue. For ... carrying a steam pressure of over
60 pounds and not over 100 pounds per square inch the flue may be braced with socket bolts
in lieu of tee rings. Such bolts shall have heads and the ends shall be threaded for nuts,
with plate washers or equivalent on the inside of flue. Pitch of stays and bolts and the
maximum stress in pounds allowable per square inch of cross-sectional area for stays and
bolts shall be determined by section 58.16.
If a greater working stress is desired on ſlues than that permitted by the formula for
flues strengthened with bowling rings or tee irons, the flue may º:
braced to shell and may be
deemed a flat surface, and . be stayed in strict accordance with the rules for stays.
Drainpipes shall be fitted to steam chimneys in which water is liable to collect. Steam
chimneys that are arranged to be disconnected from main boiler shall be provided with a
safety valve not less than 3 inches in diameter and with a steam gauge, and shall be provided
with manholes to enable inspectors to examine every portion of the interior.
58.9 Riveted joints. The diameter of rivets, rivet holes, distance between centers of
rivets, and distance from centers of rivets to edge of lap for different thicknesses of plates
for single and double riveting shall be determined by the following rules.
The following formulas, equivalent to those of the British Board of Trade, are given for
the determination of the pitch, distance between rows of rivets, diagonal pitch, maximum
pitch, and distance from centers of rivets to edge of lap of single and double riveted lap
joints, for both iron and steel boilers: -
Let p-greatest pitch of rivets in inches.

m=number of rivets in one pitch. -
pa-diagonal pitch in inches.

d=diameter of rivets in inches.
V=distance between rows of rivets in inches.
E=distance from edge of plate to center of rivet in inches.
TO DETERMINE THE PITCH
Iron plates and iron rivets: 2
p–4 ×ojºxºla.
Example, first, for single-riveted joint: Given, thickness of plate (T)=% inch, diameter
of rivet (d)=% inch. In this case n=1. Required the pitch.
Substituting in formula, and performing operation indicated.
pital-º-207 inche.
Example for double-riveted joint: Given, t-}, inch and d=% inch. In this case n=2.
Then—
18/ Y2
Pitch= (*#-ass, inches.
For steel plates and steel rivets:
_23×dºx 0.7854×n
==******d.
Example for single-riveted joint: Given, thickness of plate=% inch, diameter of rivet=
*% inch. In this case n=1.
15 -
Pitch= 28X% +i-2,071 inches.
(F–180)
Example for double-riveted joint: Given, thickness of plate=% inch, diameter of rivet=
% inch. n=2. Then—
7/\2 x
Pitch_23X(%).<0.7854X2+7
28X% +5=2.85 inches.
FOR DISTANCE FROM CENTER OF RIVET TO EDGE OF LAP
_32.<d.
TT2
Example: Given, diameter of rivet (d)=% inch; required the distance from center of
rivet to edge of plate.
7
E-º-1312 inches, for single or double riveted lap joint.

FOR DISTANCE BETWEEN ROWS OF RIVETS
The distance between lines of centers of rows of rivets for double, chain-riveted joints
(W) shall not be less than twice the diameter of rivet, but it is more desirable that V should
not be less than 4d-H 1. -
2
Example under latter formula: Given, diameter of rivet=% inch, Then—
y_(4×%)+1
2
=2.25 inches.
For ordinary, double zigzag riveted joints:

_V(TID-E4d)
V= 10 T(p+4d).
Example: Given, pitch=2.85 inches, and diameter of rivet=% inch, Then—

v_V(IDX2.85 E4X.) (2.85-H4X%)
= 1.487 inches.
10
DIAGONAL PITCH
For double, zigzag riveted lap joint. Iron and steel:

6p-H4d
Example: Given, pitch=2.85 inches, and d=% inch. Then—

7/
,-ºxº-axº =2.06 inches.
MAXIMUM PITCHES FOR RIVETED LAP JOINTS
For single-riveted lap joints:

Maximum pitch=(1.31XT)+1%.
For double-riveted lap joints:
Maximum pitch=(2.62XT)+1%.
Example: Given, a thickness of plate=% inch, required the maximum pitch allowable.
For single-riveted lap joint:
Maximum pitch=(1.31X%)+1%=2.28 inches.
For double-riveted lap joint:
Maximum pitch=(2.62X})+1%=2.935 inches.
619428°–45—14 (F–181)
[58.10) MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
To determine the pitch of rivets from the above formulas, use the diameter and area of
the rivet holes. The diameter of the rivets is the diameter of the driven rivet.
Any riveted joint shall be allowed when it is constructed so as to give an equal percentage
of strength to that obtained by the use of the formula given.
58.10 Butt straps. Where butt straps are used in the construction of marine boilers,
the straps for single butt strapping shall in no case be less than the thickness of the shell
plates; and where double butt straps are used, the thickness of each shall in no case be less
than five-eighths the thickness of the shell plates.
58.11 Woodwork from boilers. Externally heated boilers shall have a clear space
hº. the boiler and the woodwork of not less than 6 inches at the sides and 4 inches at
the top.
Internally heated boilers shall have a clear space between the boiler and the woodwork
of not less than 4 inches at the sides and 4 inches at the top.
All woodwork or other ignitible substance approaching within 12 inches of the boiler or
smokestack (unless such boiler or smokestack is covered with good nonconducting material)
shall be suitably sheathed with metal over noncombustible material, and it shall be the
duty of the inspectors to see that all woodwork or other ignitible substance in or around the
fireroom is properly protected by metal or asbestos sheathing.
All boilers hereafter placed in wooden steamers shall have a clear space of at least 8
inches between the underside of the cylindrical shell and the floor or keelson; and on all other
º ereof.
the boilers shall be so placed as to permit of proper inspection of the underside
All water-tube or coil boilers shall have a clear space of not less than 4 inches between
the back end of boiler and bulkhead. All other boilers shall have a clear space of not less
than 2 feet between the back end of boiler and bulkhead.
58.12 Angle stiffeners for curved surfaces. Where rounded bottoms of combustion
chambers are stiffened with single angle-iron stiffeners, such angles shall have a thickness
of leaf eight-tenths that of the plate and a depth of at least one-half pitch. Where stiffened
with j, angle irons or tee bars, such angles or tee bars shall have a thickness of leaf at
least two-thirds that of plate and a depth of at least one-fourth of pitch. Said angles or tee
bars shall be substantially riveted to the plate supported. Where th. bottoms of combustion
chambers are strengthened by angles or tee irons, the same shall be on the water side of the
combustion chambers, as shown in the sketches in this section.
Where rounded tops of combustion chambers are stiffened with single or double angle
iron stiffeners or tee bars, such angles or tee bars shall be of thickness and depth of leaf not
less than specified for rounded bottoms of combustion chambers. , Said angles or tee bars
shall be supported on thimbles and riveted through with rivets not less than 1 inch in diam
eter and spaced not to exceed 6 inches between centers.
Working pressure allowed on rounded surfaces supported by angle irons or tee bars
shall be determined by the following formula:
- _900XT.
Working pressure--Exiſ
Where T=thickness of plate in sixteenths of an inch.

P=pitch of angle or tee stiffeners, in inches.
D=diameter of curve to which plate is bent, in inches.
ExAMPLE
Given T=% of an inch. P=7 inches. D=51 inches.

Substituting values in formula and solving,
Working pressure —º-204 pounds per square inch.
PREssurE PERMIssi BLE ON RoundED BOTTOM OF COMBUSTION CHAMBERs, ANGLEs BEING
OMITTED, AND TUBE SHEETs
_50(300T-2L)
P=*f, *.
(F–182)
Where P=working pressure in pounds.

T=thickness of bottom plate of combustion chamber, in inches.
L=extreme length of plate forming bottom of combustion chamber, in inches.
D=twice outside radius of bottom of combustion chamber, in inches.
Required working pressure on bottom plate of a combustion chamber, angles being
omitted: Thickness of plate, 0.82 of an inch; extreme length of plate, 33 inches; twice the
radius of bottom of combustion chamber, 50 inches. Substituting and solving:
P _50X(300X0.82–2X33) 180 pounds
50
T=
PXD-- 100L
I5,000 T
Pressure allowable on tube sheets where combustion chambers are not suspended from
the shell of the boiler shall be determined by the following formula:
p_(D–d).TX37,000
WXD
Where P=working pressure in pounds.
D=least horizontal distance between tube centers in inches.
d=inside diameter of tubes in inches.
T=thickness of tube plate in inches.
W=extreme width of combustion chamber in inches.
Required the working pressure of a tube sheet supporting a crown sheet braced by crown
bars. Horizontal distance between centers, 4% inches; inside diameter of tubes, 2.782 inches;
thickness of tube sheets, eleven-sixteenths of an inch; extreme width of combustion chamber,
34% inches, measured from outside of tube plate to outside of back plate; material, steel.
Substituting and solving: -
P= (4.125–2.782)×0.68752(27,000
- 34.25)(4.125 =176 pounds pressure.
The compressive stress on tube plates, as determined by the following formula, shall
not exceed 13,500 pounds per square inch, when pressure on top of combustion chamber is
supported by vertical plates of such chamber. *.
o_{XPX%
~3 (DEd).T.
Where
O=stress on tube sheet.
P=working pressure in pounds.
D=least horizontal distance between tube centers in inches.
d=inside diameter of tube in inches.
W=extreme width of combustion chamber in inches.
T=thickness of tube sheet in inches.
Sling stays may be used in lieu of girders in all cases: Provided, however, That when
such sling stays are used, girders or screw stays of the same sectional area shali be used for
securing the bottom of combustion chamber to the boiler shell.
When girders are dispensed with and the top and bottom of combustion chambers are
secured by sling stays or º: the sectional area of such stays shall conform with the re
quirements of section 58.16.
The following drawings show an excellent practice of constructing combustion chambers
with and without sling stays. (See illustrations on pp. 184–188.)
(F–183)
:
soumfbuisctieont chambers
be
should
hangers
cDiameter
of
weight
carry
to
furnaces
tubes
the
one-half
and
chamber combustion without
separate
for
remarks
These
there
and
bottom
at
shell
the
to
secured
not
are
they
when coimilar
full
get
backplate
and
sheet
tube
the
case
this
sIn
in
bload
a
to
manner
hanging
oiler
mpres ive
backplate.
and
sheet
tube
on
load
1.-Full
No.
-
considered.
buoyancy
of
effect
No
boiler.
in
is
water
no
when
-
T
|
º
stays.
screw
small
the
bend
to
liable
fore
º
-
stays.
-
i
---
---
- -
| —
ITTTT)
-
-------
: : :i: ==
i
sheet.
tube
off
taken
load
compressive
whole
2.-Nearly
No.
por
unsupported
on
load
the
half
that
except
backplate,
and
sheet
tube
off
compressive
full
take
stays
hanging
Top
stays.
last
respectively,
by
half
other
the
and
backplate,
and
sheet
tube
b
taken
be
will
stays
B eyond
marked
tions
when
required
would
what
from
reduced
materially
be
may
backplate
and
sheet
tube
of
thickness
The
bottom
the
at
load
to
stayed
well
is
chamber
combustion
that
providing
load,
compressive
full
take
backplate
and
angles.
and
plates
of
girders
or
stays
screw
by
#
:
"-
++++++++ -
++++++++++++++ -
++++ 4
#H#++++ ++++
; +
+
4 +
+-4.
######
sheet.
tube
off
taken
load
compressive
whole
3.-Nearly
No.
back
and
sheet
tube
off
load
compressive
full
take
stays
hanging
Top
on
the
half
that
º:
except
late,
backplate,
and
sheet
tube
the
by
taken
be
will
stays
B eyond
last
bmarked
the
by
portions
half
other
and
respectively,
stays. and
plates
of
girders
or
stays
screw
top
whether
the
as
stays,
area
bottom
The
sectional
same
of
be
must
angles,
the
bottom
having
without
shown
as
stays
top
built
be
should
boiler
no
and
braces,
strength.
equal
of
stays
[58.12]
·
·ųons puensqųw onqºnouºKaºetſ øq pinoqs erojauoqq puw ºpeoſ [[ng qø3 onwidsſøeq pure qºoqs aqn. L-‘º ‘o ！1
BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS
----
----
|- -+ +-+3
**！！！！！
+*}*4 + + + + + + + +
(F–187)
+ + +-+-+ + + + + + +
+ + ++ +++ + + + +
---- +-+-+-+-+
--*- + + + + + +№
:
topb reduced
as
area
sectional
same
the
be
must
angles,
and
plates
girders
or
stays
screw
of
whether
stays,
bottom
The material y
may
of
thickness
the
case
this
In
sheets
tube
when
required
be
would
what
from
compres ive
part
take
each
sheets
5.-Tube
No.
part.
other
of
care
taking
stays
hanging
the
load,
fºl.ºn
º
+ ++
+ ++4+
4
-} +...++
+ ++ 4
+ -º-
+" ++
+ +
+ +++
+ +,+
+ +,+ 4
+
+*
+ +
+ + + + + + ++++
compres ive
full
take
together
load.
races.
;
58.13, Furnaces. The tensile strength of steel used in the construction of corrugated
or ribbed furnaces shall not exceed 67,000 and be not less than 54,000 pounds; and in all
other furnaces the minimum tensile strength shall be not less than 58,000 and the maximum
not more than 67,000 pounds. The minimum elongation in 8 inches shall be 20 percent.
All corrugated furnaces having plain parts at the ends not exceeding 9 inches in length
(except flues especially provided for), when new, and made to practically true circles, shall
be allowed a steam pressure in accordance with the following formula:
_CXT
P=ºff}
LEEDs SUSPENSION BULB FuRNACE
CXT
P=-p
where
P=pressure in pounds.
T=thickness in inches, not less than five-sixteenths of an inch.
D=mean diameter in inches.
O=17,300, a constant, determined from an actual destructive test under the super
vision of the Commandant, when corrugations are not more than 8 inches from
center to center and not less than 2% inches deep.
MoRIson CoRRUGATED TYPE
_CXT
P=*f;
where
C=15,600, a constant, determined from an actual destructive test under the super
vision of the Commandant, when corrugations are not more than 8 inches from
center to center and the radius of the outer corrugations is not more than one
half of the suspension curve.
[In calculating the mean diameter of the Morison furnace, the least inside diameter plus
2 inches may be taken as the mean diameter, thus—
Mean diameter=least inside diameter-H2 inches.]
DEIGHToN CoRRUGATED TYPE
_CXT
P=*f;
where
P=pressure in pounds. -

C=15,600, a constant, when corrugations are not more than 8 inches from center to
center and not less than 1% inches deep.
Fox TYPE
_CXT
P= }=
(F–189)
(58.13] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
where
T=thickness in inches, not less than five-sixteenths.
O=14,000, a constant, when corrugations are not more than 8 inches from center to
PURVES TYPE
_CXT
--D-
where
T=thickness in inches, not less than seven-sixteenths.
D=least outside diameter in inches.
C= 14,000, a constant, when rib projections are not more than 9 inches from center to
BROWN TYPE
_CXT
P=*f;
where
T=thickness in inches, not less than five-sixteenths.
D=least outside diameter in inches.
C=14,000, a constant (ascertained by an actual destructive test under the super
vision of the Commandant), when corrugations are not more than 9 inches from
center to center and not less than 1% inches deep.
PLUG For CoRRUGATED AND RIBBED FURNAcEs
The thickness of corrugated and ribbed furnaces shall be ascertained by actual measure
ment. The manufacturer shall have said furnaces drilled for a three-eighths inch pipe tap
and fitted with a screw plug that can be removed by the inspector when taking this measure
ment. For the Brown and Purves furnaces the holes shall be in the center of the second flat;
for the Morison, Fox, and other similar types, in the center of the top corrugation, at least as
far in as the fourth corrugation from the end of the furnace.
TYPE HAVING SECTIONs 18 INCHEs LoNG
_CXT
P=-i,
where
T=thickness in inches, not less than seven-sixteenths.
C=10,000, a constant, when corrugated by sections not more than 18 inches from
center to center and not less than 2% inches deep, measuring from the least inside
to the greatest outside diameter of the corrugations and having the ends fitted
one into the other and substantially riveted together, provided that the plain
parts at the ends do not exceed 12 inches in length.
ADAMsoN TYPE
When plain horizontal flues are made in sections not less than 18 inches in length, and
not less than five-sixteenths of an inch thick, and flanged to a depth of not less than three
(F–190)
times the diameter of rivet holes plus the radius at furnace wall (inside diameter of furnace),
*
C8,Ole.
of the flanges shall be as near the thickness of the body of the plate as practi.
l The radii of the flanges on the fire side shall be not less than three times the thickness of
p ate.
The distance from the edge of the rivet hole to the edge of the flange shall be not less
than the diameter of the rivet hole, and the diameter of the rivets before driven shall be at
least one-fourth inch larger than the thickness of the plate.
The depth of the ring between the flanges shall be not less than three times the diameter
of the rivet holes, and the ring shall be substantially riveted to the flanges. The fire edge of
the ring shall terminate at or about the point of tangency to the curve of the flange, and the
thickness of the ring shall be not less than one-half inch.
The pressure allowed shall be determined by the following formula:
ADAMson FURNACES IN SECTIONS OF NoT LEss THAN 18 INCHES IN LENGTH
P–%;" [(1875× T)—1.03 ×D]

where
P=working pressure in pounds per square inch.
D=outside diameter of furnace in inches.
L=length of section in inches.
T=thickness of plate in sixteenths of an inch.
EXAMPLE
Given a furnace 44 inches in diameter, 48 inches in length, and one-half of an inch

thick. Substituting values in formula, we have
P–% [as 75x8)– (1.03 ×48)]–1300 (150–49.44)=131 pounds

SPHERICAL-Top FURNACEs
Thickness and working pressure of furnaces of 20 inches in diameter and over, when º
are portions of spheres and made in one plate, shall be determined by the following formula:
r_PXR
T-ſº-0.12
where
T=thickness of plate in inches when constructed of one plate.
R=radius of curvature in inches.
%=efficiency percent of riveted joint when end of furnace is constructed of more than
one plate, the thickness will be 96 T.
ExAMPLE
Required the thickness of a spherical convex furnace made in one sheet. Working
pressure, 125 pounds per square inch; radius of curvature, 34 inches. Substituting values,
125X34
T=
idjojt 0.12=0.545.
If the end of the furnace is constructed of more than one plate and efficiency percent of
riveted joint is 75,
_0.545_
T=#=0.72 of an inch. -
Solving for P, we have

- P= (T-0.12)× 10,000.
R
(F–191)
Required the working pressure when end of furnace is constructed of a single plate.
Thickness, 0.545 of an inch; radius of curvature, 34 inches. Substituting values and solving,
P= (sº-ºxº-º: pounds.
PLAIN CIRCULAR RIVETED FLUEs, FURNACEs, AND CoNE Tops MADE IN SECTIONs of Not
LEss THAN 18 INCHES IN LENGTH AND NOT LESS THAN FIVE-SIXTEENTHS of AN INCH
THICK
Cylindrical riveted flues and furnaces made in sections of not less than 18 inches in
length fitted one into the other and substantially riveted, combustion chambers for vertical
submerged tubular boilers in the shape of a frustum of a cone, constructed to a practically
true circle, shall be allowed a steam pressure according to the following formula:
–*}; [(1875× T)– (1.03 ×D]
where
D-oº: 1InclineS.
iameter of furnaces in inches, or outside mean diameter of cone top in
L=length of section or flue in inches.
T=thickness of furnace or cone top in sixteenths of an inch, not to be less than five
sixteenths of an inch.
When diameter of plain furnaces and flues used in vertical type of boilers or mean
diameter of cone tops exceed 42 inches, they shall be deemed a flat surface and must be
stayed in accordance with rules governing flat surfaces. If a greater working pressure than
iven by formula is desired for mean diameters under 42 inches, the flues or cone tops shall
É. substantially stayed for such additional pressure.
ExAMPLE
Given a furnace 26 inches in diameter, 28 inches in height, and five-sixteenths of an

inch thick. A steam pressure of 175 pounds is desired. **
Substituting values in formula,

_51.5
26 [as ºxs)–(1.08×28)]–128 pounds.
175–128.5, an excess of 46.5 pounds, therefore furnace shall be braced.
Substituting 46.5 for working pressure, W. P. in formula,
Working pressure, W. P–2.É.

Solving for Pº,
112×52
P2= 46.5
P=V60.21 =7.7
Pitch of 7.7×7.7=59.29 area.
To determine size of stay bolt. Area multiplied by pressure per square inch equals
total stress on stay. Thus, 59.29}{46.5=2,756.985 pounds’ pressure on the plate. us,
2,756.985 divided by 6,000=0.4594 area of stay ić.
practically thirteen-sixteenths of an
inch stay bolt taken at root of thread.
58.14 Flues.
PLAIN, LAPwFLDED STEEL FLUEs, 7 To 18 INCHES DIAMETER
Working pressures and corresponding minimum thicknesses of wall for long, plain, lap
(F–192)
welded and seamless steel flues, 7 to 18 inches diameter, subjected to external pressure only,
shall be determined by the following table and formula: -
Working pressure in pounds per square inch
Outside diameter of flue 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Thickness of flue in inches. Safety factor, 5

| !
Inches:
7---------------- 0. 152 0. 160 0. 168 0.177 0. 185 0. 193 0. 201
8---------------- . 174 . 183 . 193 . 202 . 211 . 220 . 229
9---------------- . 196 . 206 . 217 . 227 . 237 . 248 . 258
10--------------- . 218 . 229 | . 241 . 252 . 264 . 275 . 287
11--------------- . 239 . 252 . 265 . 277 , 290 . 303 . 316
12--------------- . 261 . 275 . 289 . 303 . 317 F . 330 . 344
13--------------- . 283 . 298 . 313 . 328 . 343 . 358 . 373
14-------------- . 301 . . 320 . 337 . 353 . 369 . 385 . 402
15.--------------- . 323 . 343 . 361 . 378 . 396 . 413 . 430
16------------ - - - . 344 . 366 . 385 .404 . 422 . 440 . 459
17--------------- . 366 . 389 . 409 . 429 . 448 . 468 . 488
18--------------- . 387 . 412 . 433 .454 . 475 . 496 . 516
|
Thicknesses in this table were calculated by formula:

T_1(FXP)+ 1,386]D
86,670
where
D=outside diameter of flue in inches.
T=thickness of wall in inches.
F=factor of safety.
This formula is applicable to lengths greater than six diameters of flue, to working pres
sures greater than 100 pounds, to outside diameters of from 7 to 18 inches, and to tempera
tures less than 650°F.
ExAMPLE
Required the thickness of a flue 10 inches in diameter; working pressure, in pounds per
square inch, 200; factor of safety, 5. Substituting and solving:
T_[(5×200)+1386]10 =0.275 of an inch.
86,670
To determine working pressure, diameter and thickness being given:
p_(TX86,670)-(1,386×D)
- DXF
where
T=thickness of wall in inches.
F=factor of safety.
ExAMPLE
Required the working pressure of a flue 12 inches outside diameter, 0.375 of an inch
thick; factor of safety is 5.
Substituting and solving:
P= (0.375X86,670) — (1,386X12)
- 12X5 =264.4 pounds pressure.
(F–193)
WORKING PRESSURE ALLOWABLE ON RIVETED FLUES OVER 6 AND NOT OVER 18 INCHES IN
DIAMETER, MADE IN SECTIONS, AND SUBJECTED TO ExTERNAL PRESSURE ONLY
When flues are constructed of plates made in sections and efficiently riveted together,
not less than 24 inches in length, minimum thickness, 0.25 of an inch, over 6 and not exceed
ing 18 inches in diameter, the working pressure shall be determined by the following formula:
8,100XT
P=*;
where
T=thickness in inches.
ExAMPLE
Required the working pressure of a flue 13 inches outside diameter 0.33 of an inch thick.
Substituting values and solving:
P _8,100X0.33
13 =205 pounds.
WoRKING PRESSURE ALLowABLE ON RIVETED, SEAMLEss, or LAPw ELDED FLUES OVER 18 AND
Not OvKR 28 INCHES IN DIAMETER, MADE IN SECTIONs, AND SUBJECTED To ExTERNAL
PRESSURE ONLY
The working pressure allowable on riveted, seamless, or lapwelded flues over 18 inches
in diameter up to and including 28 inches in diameter, made in sections not less than 24 inches
in length, efficiently riveted together, sections not to exceed 3% times the diameter of the
flue, when subjected to external pressure only, shall be determined by the following formula:
P–% [as ºx1)– (LX 108)
where
L=length of flue in inches, not to exceed 3% diameters of flue.
T=thickness of wall in sixteenths of an inch.
ExAMPLE
Required the working pressure of a flue 19 inches outside diameter, 0.4375 of an inch
thick, length 66 inches.
P-[*(1875x7)–(68×103)]–171 pounds pressure.

When lapwelded or seamless flues over 5 inches in diameter are used in externally fired
boilers over 20 feet in length, they may be allowed to be made in two pieces joined together
(a) by a standard screw-pipe coupling or sleeve, or (b) by swelling the end § one section of
the flue sufficiently to permit it to lap over the other section not less than 4 inches and be
double riveted, or (c) by butting the two sections of the flue together and fitting a band or
butt strap not less than 8 inches in length equally divided over the joint of the two sections,
and of a thickness not less than the thickness of the flue, and double riveted to each section.
When any of the above methods are used on more than one flue in a boiler, the couplings or
sleeves shall not be allowed to come opposite, and the distance measured between any such
flues and between any such flues ...?the shell shall be made by measuring between the
plates in the flues and the plates in the shell. It shall be the duty of the inspectors to see
that the flues are well screwed into the couplings or sleeves, so as to have the ends of flues
as near together as is practicable.
(F–194)
Inspectors are required at each annual inspection to carefully inspect the flues of eve
boiler and subject them to the hammer test where possible or practicable in order that deteri
oration of material may be detected. If such test indicates thin material, the doubtful
place shall be drilled and the material carefully gaged in order that the safe pressure may be
determined; or if the flue is found to deviate from the form of a practically true circle, the
pressure shall be reduced accordingly. The efficiency and workmanship of the riveted seams
shall also be carefully observed at all inspections.
The Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, in determining the distance between the flues
and the shells of ºil; fired boilers, under provisions of section 4434, Revised Statutes of
the United States (46 U. S. C. 412), shall take the measurements from the plate in the flue
to the plate in the shell."
58.15 Tubes. Lapwelded and seamless tubes, used in boilers whose construction was
commenced after June 30, 1910, having a thickness of material according to their respective
diameters, shall be allowed a working pressure as prescribed in the following table, provided
they are deemed safe by the inspectors. Where heavier material is used, pressure may be
allowed as prescribed in first formula, under the heading “Flues,” for determining the work
ing pressure of lapwelded flues. Any length of tube is allowable.
FxAMPLE -
Thickn Maximum Thicknes: Maximum

Outside diameter (Inches) of †† ºil. Outside diameter (inches) of . ºil.
Inch Pounds Inch Pounds

2------------------------ 0.095 427 || 3%---------------------- 0. 120 308
2%---------------------- . 095 380 || 3% - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . 120 282
2%---------------------- . . 109 392 || 4------------------------ . 134 303
2%---------------------- . . 109 356 || 4% - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . 134 238
8----------------------- ... 109 327 || 5---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . 148 235
3%---------------------- . 120 332 || 6------------------------ . 165 199
LAPWELDED BoILER TUBEs UP To AND INCLUDING 4 INCHES IN DIAMETER
All lapwelded tubes shall be made of charcoal iron, or mild steel made by any process.
American ingot iron, manufactured by the American Rolling Mill Co., Middletown,
Ohio, shall be accepted as meeting the provisions for lapwelded tubes.
SURFACE INSPECTION
Tubes shall be free from defective welds, cracks, blisters, scale, pits, and sand marks.
TESTS
The following tests shall be made before shipment by the manufacturer:

A test piece 2 inches in length cut from a tube shall stand being flattened by hammering
until the sides are brought parallel and separated by a distance not greater than one-third
#. *
e Oenol.
diameter of the tube, without showing cracks or flaws, the weld being 45° from
A second tube shall have a flange turned over at right angles to the body of the tube and
shall have a width equal to three-eighths of an inch. Tubes less than 3 inches in diameter
shall only be required to have a flange turned equal to one-eighth of the diameter of the
tube. This test shall not be applied to threaded stay tubes.
All the work shall be done cold.
Each tube shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 1,000 pounds per square inch
and shall be struck near both ends while under pressure with a 2-pound hammer or its
equivalent without showing signs of weakness or defects.
All steel tubes, except those made of open-hearth steel, shall have the ends properly
annealed by the manufacturer before shipment.
All tubes shall stand expanding, flanging over on the tube plate, and beading without
flaws, cracks, or opening at the weld, except threaded stay tubes.
1 The last four lines of $ 58.14 apply only to rivers.
(F–195)
(58.16] MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
LAPwFLDED BoILER TUBEs ovKR 4 INCHES UP To AND INCLUDING 30 INCHEs IN DIAMETER
All lapwelded boiler tubes over 4 inches in diameter, up to and including 30 inches in
diameter, shall be made of wrought iron or mild steel, made by any process.
American ingot iron, manufactured by the American Rollin ill Co., Middletown,
Ohio, shall be accepted as meeting the provisions for lapwelded j
A test piece, 2 inches in length, cut from a tube, shall stand being flattened by ham
mering * the sides are brought parallel and separated by a distance not greater than
one-third the outside diameter of the tube, without showing cracks or flaws, with the weld
being 45° from the bend.
ach tube shall stand an internal hydrostatic pressure of 500 pounds per square inch
and shall be struck near both ends while under pressure with a 2-pound hammer or its
equivalent without showing signs of weakness or defects.
All steel tubes except those made of open-hearth steel shall have ends properly annealed
by the manufacturer before shipment.
All tubes shall stand drilling, riveting, and calking, and work necessary to install them
into the tube head without showing any weakness or defects.
SEAMLEss STEEL BoILER TUBEs
MATERIAL
The steel shall be made by the open-hearth process.

SURFACE INSPECTION
Tubes shall be free from all surface defects. The defects to be particularly avoided in
seamless tubes are tears, snakes, checks, slivers, scratches, laps, pits, rings, and sinks.
All seamless steel cold-drawn tubes shall be annealed as a final process. One or more
tubes shall be selected at random from each charge of annealing furnace, and coupons cut
from same for testing.
(a) A piece 3 inches long cut from the first tube shall stand being flattened by hammering
until the sides are brought parallel and separated by a distance not greater than one-third
the outside diameter of the tube, without showing cracks or flaws.
(b) A flange shall be turned all around the end of the tube to a width equal to three
eighths of an inch beyond the outside body of the tube. Tubes less than 3 inches in diameter
shall only be required to have a flange turned equal to one-eighth of the diameter of the
tube. This test shall not be applied to threaded stay tubes.
Tests (a) and (b) shall be done cold.
Where hot-finished tubes are furnished, the tubes shall pass the same manipulating
tests as cold-drawn tubes and shall be subject to the same conditions as to gage, but do not
have to be annealed.
Each tube shall be subjected to an internal hydrostatic pressure of 1,000 pounds per
square inch without showing signs of weakness or defects.
All tubes, except threaded stay tubes, shall stand expanding, flanging over on the tube
plate, and beading without flaw or crack,
All tubes shall be carefully gaged and shall not be less than the specified thickness.
No tube increased in thickness by welding one tube inside of another shall be allowed
for use, but the ends of boiler tubes may be welded on for the purpose of making repairs or
new tubes may be welded for the purpose of making them longer: Provided, That such
welding is not made by any process of autogenous welding.
STATEMENT or CERTIFICATE of MANUFACTURER of BoILER TUBEs
When the manufacturers of boiler tubes file with the Commandant a certificate duly
sworn to that all tubes manufactured by them will stand the tests and meet all the require
ments of the foregoing rule, they shall be accepted by inspectors of the Coast Guard and no
other affidavit j be required.
58.16 Stays. The maximum working pressure in pounds allowable per square inch
of cross-sectional area for stays used in the construction of marine boilers where same are accu
(F–196)
BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS !ss.16]
rately fitted normal to supported surfaces and properly secured shall be ascertained by the
following formula:
P
_AXC
TTa,
where
A=least cross-sectional area of stay in inches.
a=area of surface supported by one stay in inches.
C=a constant.
C=9,000 for tested steel stays 1 inch and upward in diameter when such stays are
not forged or welded. The ends may be upset to a sufficient diameter to allow
for the depth of the thread. The diameter shall be taken at the bottom of
the thread, provided it is the least diameter of the stay. All such stays after
being upset shall be thoroughly annealed.
C=8,000 for a tested Huston or similar type of brace, the cross-sectional area of
which exceeds 5 square inches.
C=7,000 for such tested braces when the cross-sectional area is not less than 1.227
and not more than 5 square inches, provided such braces are prepared at one
heat from a solid piece of plate without welds.
O=7,500 for wrought-iron stays 1 inch and upward in diameter when made of the
best quality of refined iron. The ends may be upset to allow for the depth
of the thread. The diameter shall be taken at the bottom of the thread,
provided it is the least diameter of the stay. Such stays may be welded.
C=6,000 for welded crowfoot stays when made of best º of refined wrought
iron, and for all stays not otherwise provided for when made of the best quality
of refined iron or of steel without welds. -
EXAMPLE
Required the working pressure of a stay 1 inch in diameter, pitched 6 inches by 6 inches
center to center.
(1X1X0.7854) ×6,000
Working pressure= 6X6 =130.9 pounds.
Stay bolts and º made of the best quality of refined wrought iron may be welded.
The lengthening of steel stays by welding shall not be allowed.
To DETERMINE THE AREAs of DIAGONAL AND GUssFT STAYs
Multiply the area of a direct stay required to support the surface by the slant or diagonal
length of the stay; divide this product by the length of a line drawn at right angles to surface
supported to center of palm of diagonal stay. #. quotient shall be the required area of the
diagonal stay.
A. _ax L
––.
Where
A=sectional area of diagonal stay.
a=sectional area of direct stay.
L=length of diagonal stay.
l=length of line drawn at right angles to boiler head or surface supported to center
of palm of diagonal stay.
Given diameter of direct stay=1 inch, a H0.7854, L=60 inches, l-48 inches, substituting
and solving,
A _0.7854X60
48 =0.981 sectional area.
619428°–45—15 (F–197)
Diameter=1.11 inches=1% inches.

The sectional area of gusset stays, when constructed of triangular right-angled web
plates secured to single or double angle bars along the two sides at right º: shall be de
termined by formula for diagonal stays, and shall be not less than 10 percent greater than
would be necessary for a diagonal bolt stay.
The diameter of a screw stay shall be taken at the bottom of the thread, provided it is
the least diameter of the stay.
For all stays the least sectional area shall be taken in calculating the stress allowable.
All screw stay bolts shall be drilled at the ends with a three-sixteenths-inch hole to at
least a depth of one-half inch beyond the inside surface of the sheet. Stays through laps
or butt straps may be drilled with larger hole to a depth so that the inner end of said larger
hole shall not be nearer than the thickness of the boiler plates from the inner surface of the
boiler. Hollow-rolled screw stay bolts may be used.
Flexible stay bolts that are made with a ball in socket on one end, the socket screwed
into the outside sheet and covered with a removable cap and bolt screwed into the inside
sheet and riveted over, may be used for staying flat surfaces without being drilled with a
telltale hole.
Holes for screw stays shall be tapped fair and true, and full thread.
The ends of stays which are upset to include the depth of thread shall be thoroughly
annealed after being upset.
The sectional area of pins to resist double shear and bending, accurately fitted and
secured in crowfeet, sling, and similar stays, shall be at least equal to eighth-tenths of the
required sectional area of the brace. Breadth across each side and depth to crown of eye
shall be not less than 0.35 of diameter of pin. In order to compensate for inaccurate dis
tribution the forks shall be proportioned to support two-thirds of the load, thickness of
forks to be not less than 0.66 of the diameter of pin.
The combined sectional area of rivets used in securing tee irons and crowfeet to shell,
said rivets being in tension, shall be not less than the required sectional area of brace. To
insure a well-proportioned rivet point, rivets shall be of sufficient length to completely fill
the rivet holes and form a head equal in strength to the body of the rivet. All rivet holes
shall be drilled. Distance from center of rivet hole to edge of tee irons, crowfeet, and
similar fastenings shall be so proportioned that the net sectional areas through sides at rivet
holes shall equal the required rivet section. Rivet holes shall be slightly countersunk in
order to form a fillet at point and head.
When sling stays are connected by pins to angles secured to shell (see figs. 1 and 2 in
section 58.12), said angles shall be of sufficient depth to resist shear. Section to resist shear
shall be determined by the following formula:
A=DX2T
—4
D=#.
where - -
º A=sectional area of pin.

D=depth from edge of pinhole to end of leg.
2T=thickness of two angles.
EXAMPLE
Diameter of sling stay, 2 inches. Diameter of pin, 1.6 inches. Thickness of angle,
seven-eighths of an inch. Required the depth from edge of pinhole to end of leg. -

_0.7854×1.6×1.6
D= 2X0.875 =1.15 inches.
Minimum diameter of rivets shall be found as follows:
Minimum diameter= V0.75545<I2,000XN

load
Where N equals aumber of rivets. Rivets shall be staggered in each leaf.

(F–198)
TESTs of BARs For STAYs AND BRACEs
All steel bars to be used as stays or braces in marine boilers and allowed a stress of 7,000,
8,000, or 9,000 pounds per square inch of section, tested by the United States inspectors
at the mills where the material is manufactured, shall be tested in the following manner:
There shall be taken from each heat two pieces for tensile tests and two pieces for bending
tests. The full-size bars within the capacity of the testing machine may be used for tensile
tests. Where the full size of the bar is too large for the capacity of the testing machine, the
bar may be reduced in size to meet, such capacity. To facilitate and insure accurate tests,
all bars for tensile and bending tests may be reduced in size. The minimum tensile strength
of each test piece shall be not less than 58,000 pounds per square inch of section and each
test piece that has been reduced in size shall show an elongation of at least 28 percent in
2 inches. Where the full size of the bar has been used for testing, the test piece shall show
an elongation of at least 25 percent in 8 inches. When the tensile strength of the test piece
is more than 63,000 pounds, per square inch of section, each test piece that has been reduced
in size shall show an elongation of at least 26 percent in 2 inches. Where the full size of
, the bar has been used for testing, each test piece shall show an elongation of at least 22 per
cent in 8 inches. The pieces for the bend test shall be bent cold to a curve, the inner radius
of which is equal to one and one-half times the diameter of the bar without flaws or cracks.
Should any such test bar fail in either the tensile or bending test, no bars from such heat shall
be allowed to be used in the construction of any marine boiler. Where a heat of steel bars
has been passed by an inspector, separate lots of bars from such heat may be furnished to
different boiler manufacturers upon a certificate from the mill that the bars were made from
such accepted heat.
Boiler manufacturers desiring to use tested stays or braces shall be required to furnish
the inspectors with the following form of affidavit, duly filled in:
[Form 937]
STATE or ------------. County of—-----------.
I hereby certify that I am the ------------------------------ of the steam boiler works named
(State “owner” or name position)
---------------- , situated at ----------------, in the State of ----------------, and that the lot or
lots of steel bars from which the test bars were taken and tested by the inspector on the ---------- day
of -------------------- , 19--, and allowed for use in the steam boiler to be constructed for the steamer
-------------------- , and to be allowed a strain not to exceed -------- pounds per square inch of section
as a working steam pressure, will be used in the construction of the boiler-- for the steamer -------------- y
and no material for any braces, stays, or stay bolts required to be made of tested material and to carry a
strain equal to -------- pounds per square inch of section will be used as braces, stays, or stay bolts in the
construction of the boiler-- for the said steamer unless tested by the inspector and approved by him in
accordance with the requirements of law.
(Signature) ---------------------------------- y
Subscribed and ---------------- to before me this ------------ day of ------------------------ 2
(Sworn or affirmed)
19--.
[NOTARY's seal.] (Signature) ----------------------------------
58.17 Tops of combustion chambers and back connections. Formula for girders over
back connection and other flat surfaces:
-
Working pressure= (W–P)xDX

__ CXd"XT
where
W=extreme width of combustion box in inches.
#Eğ. of supporting bolts in inches.
D=distance between girders from center to center in inches.
L=length of girder in feet between supports.
d=depth of girder in inches.
T=thickness of girder in inches.
O=550 when the girder is fitted with 1 supporting bolt.
C=825 when the girder is fitted with 2 or 3 supporting bolts.
C=990 when the girder is fitted with 8 or more supporting bolts.
(F–199)
EXAMPLE
Given, W=34 inches, P=7.5 inches, D=7.75 inches, L=2.927 feet, d-7.5 inches,
T=2 inches, C+825, then, substituting in formula,
- __825×7.5X7.5X2
Working Pressure=(34–75)x775×255;X7.75X2.927.T 154.3 pounds.
58.18 Flat surfaces. All stayed surfaces formed to a curve the radius of which is
over 21 inches, excepting surfaces otherwise provided for, shall be deemed flat surfaces.
The maximum stress allowable on flat plates supported by stays shall be determined
by the following formula: Tz
X
Working pressure= %
Where P=pitch of stays in inches when equally spaced in both directions.
When pitches of stays are unequal, A*-ī-B”
-
== .is to be taken instead of P*.

-
Where
A=the pitch of stays in inches in one row.
B=distance in inches between two rows of stays.
T=thickness of plates in sixteenths of an inch. -
C= 112 for screw stays with riveted heads, plates seven-sixteenths of an inch thick
and under.
C=120 for screw stays with riveted heads, plates above seven-sixteenths of an
inch thick.
C=120 for screw stays with nuts, plates seven-sixteenths of an inch thick and under.
C=125 for screw stays with nuts, plates above seven-sixteenths of an inch thick
and under nine-sixteenths of an inch.
C=135 for screw stays with nuts, plates nine-sixteenths of an inch thick and above.
O=160 for stays with washers or doubling strips which have a thickness of at least
0.5 of the thickness of the plate and a diameter of at least 0.5 of the greatest
pitch of the stay, riveted to the outside of the plates, and stays having one nut
inside of the plate and one nut outside of the washer or doubling strip. For
T take 72 percent of the combined thickness of the plate and washer or plate
and doubling strip.
O=175 for stays with ºuble nuts, having one nut on the inside and one nut on the
outside of the plate, without washers or doubling plates.
C=200 for stays fitted with doubling plates which have a thickness equal to at
least 0.5 of the thickness of the plate reinforced, and covering the full area
braced (up to the curvature of the flange, if any), riveted to either the inside
or outside of the plate, and stays having one nut outside and one inside of the
plates. Washers or doubling plates to be substantially riveted. For T take
72 percent of the combined thickness of the two plates.
O=200 for stays with plates stiffened with tees or angle bars having a thickness of
at least two-thirds the thickness of plate and depth of webs at least one-fourth
of the greatest pitch of the stays, and substantially riveted on the inside of the
plates, and stays having one nut inside bearing on washers fitted to the edges
of the webs that are at right angles to the plate. For T take 72 percent of
the combined thickness of web and plate.
58.19 Name plates. There shall be fastened to each boiler a plate containing the
name of the manufacturer of the material, the place where manufactured, the tensile strength,
the name of the builder of the boiler, when and where built.
The date of the building of the boiler or boilers shall be determined by the month and
ear of issue of the first certificate of inspection which covers the boiler or boilers in question:
‘rovided, That the boiler or boilers have not been used for any purpose previous to the in
spection.
58.20 Fusible plugs. Fusible plugs for use in boilers of steam vessels under the
§. made of a bronze casing with the bore tapering con
jurisdiction of the Coast Guard shall
tinuously and evenly from end to end, and filled from end to end with tin not less than 99.3
(F–200)
BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS [58.20)
percent pure and to contain not more than 0.1 percent zinc, 0.1 percent lead, or 0.5 percent
copper, and in no case shall it contain more than 0.7 percent total impurities. The small
end of the bore may be countersunk not more than one-fourth of an inch in depth and width,
but no recess, thread, or cavity other than this countersink shall be allowed.
Fusible plugs, except those which are hereafter provided for, shall have an external
diameter of not less than three-fourths of an inch pipe tap, and the filling shall be at least
one-half of an inch in diameter at the smaller end, and shall have a larger diameter at the
opposite end of the plug: Provided, however, That all fusible plugs fitted in boilers carrying
a steam pressure exceeding 150 pounds to the square inch may be reduced at the smaller
end of the filling to five-sixteenths of an inch in diameter.
Every boiler other than boilers of the water-tube type shall be fitted with at least two
fusible plugs as described above, and located as follows:
Upright boilers shall be fitted with two fusible plugs of an external diameter of not less
than three-eighths of an inch pipe tap, the filling to be at least one-fourth of an inch in
diameter at the smaller end and shall have a greater diameter at the opposite end. The
fusible º shall be located in separate tubes not more than 2 inches below the lowest
gauge cock. -
Externally heated cylindrical boilers, with flues, shall have one plug in the top of the
upper flue, not more than 4 feet from the back end of the flue, and shall also have a plug
fitted to the shell of the boiler immediately below the fire line, and not less than 4 feet from
the front end: Provided, however, That when the flues are not more than 6 inches in diam
eter fusible plugs of not less diameter than three-eighths of an inch pipe tap may be used
in such flues.
Fire-box, scotch, and other types of shell boilers not specially provided for, having a
combustion chamber common to all furnaces, shall have two plugs fitted to the crown sheet
of the combustion chamber at or near the center of the crown sheet and not more than 12
inches apart.
Double-end boilers with separate combustion chambers, each of which combustion
chambers is common to all furnaces in its own end of the boiler, shall have two plugs fitted
to the crown sheet of each combustion chamber at or near the center of the crown sheet,
and not more than 12 inches apart.
Boilers fitted with a separate combustion chamber for each individual furnace shall be
fitted with a fusible plug in the center of the crown sheet of each combustion chamber.
Boilers of types not herein provided for shall be fitted with at least two fusible plugs
of such dimensions and located in such parts of the boiler as will, in the judgment of the
Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, best meet the purposes for which they are intended.
Fusible plugs shall be renewed at each annual inspection, but in cases where the plugs
were installed or renewed not more than 6 months prior to the annual inspection, they may
be allowed until the next following annual inspection or for a period not to exceed 18 months.
In such cases, however, the inspector shall satisfy himself at the annual inspection that the
plugs are in such condition as to warrant their continued use until the next annual inspec
tion, after which the plugs shall be renewed at each and every annual inspection.
Fusible plugs ift be so fitted that the smaller end of the filling is exposed to the fire,
**
are fitted.
be at least 1 inch higher on the water side than the plate or flue in which they
Notwithstanding anything which may be contained in this rule, fusible plugs shall be
so fitted that the end of the filling on the water end of the plug is not less than 1 inch above
the dangerous low-water level.
Each manufacturer of fusible plugs shall number all plugs in accordance with the num
ber of the heat from which the plugs were filled. For instance, the first pouring shall be
number 1, and all plugs filled from this heat shall be numbered 1; the next pouring shall
be number 2, and all the plugs filled from this heat shall be numbered 2, etc.
The heat number ºf be plainly stamped on each end of filling with numbers not less
than one-twelfth inch in height.
Manufacturers of fusible plugs shall furnish the Commandant a sample plug from each
heat for examination and test, but where more than 250 plugs are poured from the same heat,
a sample plug shall be furnished for each 250 plugs or fraction thereof. The samples fur
nished shall bear the same number for any one heat and shall represent the heat from which
the sample is poured.
-
(F–201)
In transmitting samples of fusible plugs to the Cemmandant, the fusible plugs and the
letters of transmittal shall be addressed as follows: “The Commandant (OMI), U.S. Coast
Guard, Washington, D. C.”
One letter of transmittal shall be required for each heat.
In letter of transmittal the following information shall be stated:
Number of heat.
Number of fusible plugs manufactured from the heat.
Number of samples of fusible plugs from the heat transmitted.
Name of manufacturer or initials stamped on casing of plug.
Manufacturers of fusible plugs shall stamp on the larger end or face of the casing their
name or initials for identification and shall file with the Commandant a certificate duly
sworn to that such plugs are filled with tin of the character required by this subpart and
made in accordance therewith.
Following is a general form of affidavit to be followed by manufacturers of fusible plugs:
STATE OF ---------------- , County of ----------------.
I hereby certify, on this ------------ day of ------------------ , 194----, that I am --------------
(State owner or name position)
State of ------------ ; that all fusible plugs furnished for use in boilers of steam vessels under the jurisdiction
of the Coast Guard by the said manufactory will be filled with tin of the character required, and will be made
in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Commandant governing the manufacture of fusible plugs
and that I am authorized to make this certificate.
(Signature of manufacturer)
Subscribed and - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - to before me this ---------------- day of --------------------,
194 (Sworn or affirmed)
(Signature) -----------------------º-; ; .---------------

[NotARY's seal] Notary Public.
The certificate shall be executed by some person having authority to make the statements
contained therein.
On receipt of a properly executed affidavit by the Commandant, the inspectors of the
Coast Guard and the merchant marine generally shall be notified.
58.21 Gage cocks and water glass. All boilers, except flash boilers, shall be supplied
with at least one reliable water gage and at least three gage cocks attached directly to each
boiler. . When the gage glass and gage cocks are connected to the boilers by a water column
there shall be three additional gage cocks inserted in the head or shell of boiler. The lower
gage cock in boilers more than 48 inches in diameter shall be not less than 4 inches above the
top of the flues, tubes, or combustion chambers. In boilers less than 48 inches in diameter
the lower gage cock shall be not less than 2% inches above the top of the flues, tubes, or
combustion chambers. A gage glass shall be considered a reliable water gage, and a float
such as used on western river steamers shall be considered on such boilers as a reliable water
gage: Provided, That when water-tube boilers have an efficient water column connected
to the steam drum of said boiler at the top and the water manifold at the bottom, and such
water column has a gage glass and three gage cocks fitted to same, and also is fitted with a
valve or stopcock, both at top and bottom where the column is connected to the boiler, no
gage cocks i. be required in the head or shell of the drums of such water-tube boilers.
Double-end boilers shall have at least three gage cocks and one water glass at each end.
In vertical boilers of the water-tube type the location of the lowest gage cock shall be
determined by the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.
58.22 Steam gages. All boilers or sets of boilers shall have attached to them at
least one gage that will correctly indicate a pressure of steam equal to 80 percent of the
hydrostatic pressure applied by the inspectors.
58.23 Safety valves. After June 30, 1928, no type of safety valve shall be used on
any vessel coming under the jurisdiction of this service that has not been approved by the
Commandant. -
The manufacturers of safety valves shall file an affidavit with the Commandant that
the safety valves manufactured by them will be in all respects in accordance with the blue
prints and specifications on file in the office of the Commandant, and shall permanently attach
a name plate to the valves that shall show the name of the manufacturer, the pressure the
casing is guaranteed to stand, diameter, seat area, serial number, and capacity.
(F–202)
Before any safety valve is put into service it shall be subjected to a pressure of one and
one-half times the pressure it is to be subjected to when in actual service.
Safety valves when fitted either to the shell of boiler or steam drum may be fitted with
internal dry pipes when made of standard steam pipe or of riveted material equal in thickness,
and when the combined openings in the dry pipe equal in area at least one and one-half times
the opening of the valve.
he areas of all safety valves on boilers contracted for or the construction of which
commenced on or after June 1, 1904, shall be determined in accordance with the following
formula and table: W
Formula: a =0.2074X F
where
a=area of safety valve, in square inches, per square foot of grate surface.
W=pounds of water evaporated per square foot of grate surface per hour.
P=absolute pressure per square inch=working gage pressure--15.
From which formula the areas required per square foot of grate surface in the following
table are found by assuming the different values of W and P.
The figures (a) in table multiplied by square feet of grate surface give the area of safety
valve or valves required.
When this calculation results in an odd size of safety valve, use next larger standard size.
EXAMPLES
Boiler pressure=75 pounds per square inch (gage).

2 furnaces: Grate surface=2 (No.)>{5 feet 6inches (long)}{3 feet (wide)=33 square feet.
Water evaporated per pound of coal=8 pounds.
Coal burned per square foot grate surface per hour=12% pounds.
Evaporation per square foot grate surface per hour=8X12%=100 pounds. Hence
W=100 and gage pressure=75 pounds.
From table the corresponding values of a is 0.230 square inch.
Therefore area of safety valve–33X0.23=7.59 square inches.
For which the diameter is 3% inches nearly.
Boiler pressure=215 pounds.
6 furnaces: Grate surface=6 (No.)>{5 feet 6 inches (long)}{3 feet 4 inches (wide)=110
square feet.
Water evaporated per pound coal= 10 pounds.
Coal burned per square foot grate surface per hour=30 pounds.
Evaporation per square foot grate surface per hour=10X30=300 pounds.
Hence W-300, gage pressure=215, and a =0.270 (from table).
Therefore area of safety valve-110X0.270=29.7 square inches, which is too large for
one valve. Use two.
#–1485 square inches. Diameter=4% inches.

To determine the area of a safety valve for boiler using oil as fuel or for boilers designed
for any evaporation per hour.
Divide the total number of pounds of water evaporated per hour by any number of
pounds of water evaporated per square foot of grate surface per hour (W) taken from, and
within the limits of, the table. This will give the equivalent number of square feet of grate
: for boiler for estimating the area of valve. Then apply the table as in previous
examples.
EXAMPLE
Required the area of a safety valve for a boiler using oil as fuel, designed to evaporate
8,000 pounds of water per hour, at 175 pounds gage pressure.
Make W-200.
8,000
#=40, the equivalent grate surface, in square feet.
(F–203)
For gage pressure=175 pounds and W-200, from table, a-0.218 square inch. 0.218X
40=8.72 square inches, the total area of safety valve required for this boiler, for which the
diameter is 3%, inches nearly.
Any spring-loaded safety valve constructed so as to give an increased lift by the operation
of steam after being raised from its seat, or any spring-loaded safety valve constructed in
any other manner, so as to give an effective area equal to that of the afore-mentioned spring
loaded safety valve, may be used in lieu of the common lever-weighted valve on all boilers
on steam vessels, and each spring-loaded valve shall be supplied with a lever that will raise
the valve from its seat a distance of not less than that equal to one-eighth of the diameter
of the valve opening; but in no case shall any spring-loaded safety valve be used in lieu of the
lever-weighted safety valve without first having been approved by the Commandant.
The valves shall be so arranged that each boiler shall have at least one separate safety
valve, unless the arrangement is such as to preclude the possibility of shutting off the com
munication of any boiler with the safety valve or valves employed. This arrangement shall
also apply to lockup safety valves when they are employed.
The use of two safety valves may be allowed on any boiler, provided the combined
area of such valves is equal to that required by rule for one such valve. Whenever the area
of a safety valve, as found by the rule of this section, will be greater than that corresponding
to 4% i. in diameter, two or more safety valves, the combined area of which shall be
equal at least to the area required, shall be used.
Where escape pipes for safety valves are installed after July 1, 1926, the area of the
escape pipes ji be at least equal to the area of the outlet furnished with the safety valve,
and in no case shall the area be less than the area of inlet. The fitting shall be as short and
straight as possible, and so arranged as to avoid undue stress upon the valve. Where the
escape pipe is used for two or more safety valves, the area of the escape pipe shall equal the
combined areas of all the safety valves.
Where safety valves are used with beveled seats, the seats shall have an angle of
inclination of 45° to the center lines of their axes. Flat-seat safety valves may be used under
the formula and table under the heading “Safety valves” in this part. The discharge
capacity of a flat-seat valve shall be 1.4 times that allowed for a bevel-seat valve.
Hereafter no safety valves having a set-screw arrangement on top of the valve casing,
designed to hold the valve down while the hydrostatic pressure is being applied, shall be
allowed. On such valves now in use, inspectors shall require the set screws to be taken out
and the hole permanently closed. This does not apply to any safety valve whose form of
ºlon is such that the hole for the set screw or bolt is securely closed when the valve
is locked.
(F–204)
;
represent
figures
(These
hour
surface
grate
of
foot
square
pounds
ein
pwater
X
pound
per
burned
coal
vWounds
a)p=oproautniedosn
RATEs
AND
PRESSURES
DIFFERENT
FoR
SURFACE
GRATE
Foot
SQUARE
PER
REQUIRED
WALves
SAFETY
of
AREA
or
TABLE *
|
*
|
* evaporation
rate
above
at
surface
grate
of
foot
per
required
inches
square
in
area
the
a,
give
below
figures
The
|
*
|
4321130
.
|
__|_
_
145
|_-----
43 _
29
58
87
15
44
72
01
30
|_ 4321135
.
|
-_|_
!
-----
38 ||
66
94
22
49
77
04
32
60
87
15
|_
150 .21140
43.294
.
-155
- |321
214
-01
34
60
87
41
68
48
75
- |- - |- - ||
321160
.
- - | -89
45
30
56
81
07
33
59
85
11
37
63
|- -| - | - - _ 51 -
321150
.
|
_|_
165
76
01
26
52
78
|_ 21155
.292
3|
.
_|_
_
170
22 _
46
71
95
19
44
68
17
41
66
|_
|- 321175
.
|
_|_
18 _
42
66
89
13
36
60
84
08
31
55
|_ 321180
.
|
|_
_.346
65 _
15
38
61
84
07
30
54
77
00
23
|_ 170
||
1185 12 _
32.247
.
_|
|_
35
57
79
02
24
69
91
14
36
|_ 321175
.
|
.306
_|_
190
09 _
31
53
75
96
18
40
62
84
28
|_ 321180
.
|
_|_
195
06 _
28
49
70
91
13
34
55
77
98
19
|_ 21200
.|
_.85 ||
|_
310
04
24
45
66
87
07
28
49
70
90
|_ 321190
.
-205 - |- |- |- |- - .297
- |- 03
01
21
42
62
82
02
23
43
63
83 210- - 277
.
.|
|- |-57
10
95
99
19
38
58
78
98
17
37
- |- - |- -
*
|
*
hour
surface
grate
of
foot
square
per
P.Gage
829
765
0.702
638
574
510
0.
447
0,
0.383
0.319
||
50
65 | 270
7654355
.96|
55
14
74
33
92
52
11
697654.60
.276
332
387
442
97 |
52
08
63
18
75 280
654365
.59 |
11
63
15
66
18
70
22
74 44 |
6543270
.
85
92
41
90
38
87
36
85
34 3275
54.322
.
90
30 |
76
68
14
60
06
52
98 543280
.
95
18 |
62
05
49
92
36
79
23
67 5438285
.
100
07 |
49
90
32
73
14
56
97
38 1105
543290
.97 |
36
76
16
55
94
34
73
13 111088 |
43295
.26
64
01
39
77
14
52
89 1324
100
43.2115
.80 |
16
52
88
60
96
32
68 4321120
.05 |
72
07
41
76
11
45
79
14
48 4321110
.
125
66 .
99
32
65
98
64
97
31 21115
3,
4|60 .
130
92
23
55
87
19
51
83
15 53 .
21120
307
..
3|
135
84
15
46
76
37
68
98 .321140
|385
48
77
07
37
66
96
25
55
-
| 120
260
240
220
100
140
200
180
160
Ation
Evapor
:.
pressure sºrs
per
*
inch
i
MARINE ENGINEERING REGULATIONS
09.2 * | 284 " | 8ZZ " | 0 IZ * | 26 I - | †8I *IZI " | 89 I " | 9ýI ' | Z8I * | 8II * | 901 * | Z60 * | 620 " | 990 - || 008 | g18
†g， *IýØ ” | ZZZ " | ÞIZ * | IOZ “18I º† 2. I º09 I ºDiffI º#8I * | 0ZI * | 20 I •860 º080 º190 °96%018
89Z "gïº, " | 184 " | LIZ ' | #0Z º06I ºALI *89 I º6ýI •98.I ' | ZZI •60 I º960 ºZ80 º890 °06Z908
89Z "6ý Z " | 98Z " | IZZ * | 20， º£6I º61. I º99 I ºIgI " | 88I º†ZI *0II º960 º£80 *690 °98%008
| 0 IZ "96 I
(F–206)
298 "€gz ' | 88Z * | †ZZ " ºZ8I º69 I º#g I •I#I *ZZI " | Z II º860 º†80 °0/0 º08%96Z
IZZ " | 192 " | ZŤAZ " | 8ZZ " | † IZ "00Z ”98.I º&ZI "19 I º£ff I •6ZI * | # II •00I º980 ºZAĻ0 º9.1%06%
92% " | 292 " | Diff'， ' | 88Z " | 8IZ "#0Z º68 I º91.I º09 I º9ýI *I8I º9 II •ZOI º180 °820 º0/498Z
I8Z º99Z " | IgZ " | 284 " | ZZZ º20Z. "Z6I º81. I º89 I •8$ I * | 88I º8II •#OI *680 º†20 °99Z08%
98Z ºIZZ " | 99Z " | I†Z " | 9ZZ "IIZ º96 I ºI8I *99 I ºIg I •98.I ºIZI *gOI *060 °9.10 °09%9.12
I6Z º914 " | 192 " | 9 #2 " | 08Z ºgIZ ' | 66I º#8I º69 I •ºg I •88 I •8ZI " | 10I ºZ60 °140 "99%0/4
86Z "Z8Z " | 99Z " | 09Z " | 98Z º6IZ "80Z "88 I •ZZI •19 I ºI#I •gŻI •0II º†60 °8.10 °09%99%
808 " | 182 " | IZZ " | 99Z " | 0ý Z º†ZZ "80Z ºZ6I º9.1. I º09 I º†† I •8ZI * I ZII •960 º080 *gýz09%
608 º86Z * | ZZZ " | 192 - | ††Z º8ZZ "IIZ º96I º61. I º89 I º9ýI •08 I •# II •860 °I80 *0#299，
g18 º66Z * I Z8Z * | 99Z " | 67Z º88Z ，9 IZ "66 I •88 I •19 I " | 6ýI *£8 I •ALI I " | 00I º880 º98%09%
ZZ8 º908 " | 88Z " | IZZ * | #92 º18% "0&& "80Z "98.I º01. I ºZgI •98.I º6II •Z0I º980 “08ZgŤ Z
6.Zº ºII.8 * | #6Z " | 92Z " | 69Z " | Zſº, ºgº， º10% º06I º8.LI *99 I " | 88I ºIZI *†OI *980 “9220ý，
988 º8I8 * | 008 ” | Z8Z * | #9Z "Alſº, º6ZZ "ZIZ '#6I º92. I º69 I •I#I •#ZI •90 I " | 880 º0&&98%
£ý8 *928 " | 208 " | 68Z " | 02Z º89Z "98， º9 IZ "86 I •08I ºZ9I *†† I •9ZI *80I º060 º9. IZ08Z
098 °Z88 * | ÞI8 * | g6Z ' | 91Z º89Z "Oýz ·IZZ º80% º#8I º99 I * | ſſ I •6ZI •0II ºZ60 °0IZ9%
898 º0ý8 * | IZ8 " | Z08 - || 88Z ，#9Z "gį， º9ZZ "80Z º68 I º02. I ºIg I •Z8I º£II •†60 °90%0ZZ
998 ’0 | 1，8 °0|| ZZ8 '0|| 808 '0| 68Z '0 || 69Z "0 | 0gŻ | 86 I ’0 || 84, I ’0 || #9 I ’0 || 98 I ’0 || 9II ’0 || 960 ’0 || 00Z | gIZ
"OĮºz 0ZIZ '0
uoſquJode.ao jo øger øaoqu ſº ooejuns øyerº jo ſooj øjenbs uod pouȚnbou soqouſ ørenbs ug gøre øqą ºd øapº woſoq sounºg øqī,
qoq; | }}
089 | 098 || 0：2 | 028 ||
008|08%09%0%0，00：081091|0 #1|0：1oor
| ºſſº | ";}
einssºudÈË
Inoq rød øoejuns øquº jo noo; ouen.bs 1øđe3eb};
pouinq twoo spunod x teoo punod rođ poqwođgaº uønea spunođ=(AA) inoq loď oovjuns ønerº jo ſooj oranbs loď spunod uſ uoņwuođeAo quæsoidai sarnºg osoq：L
[58.23]
ponuņuoO—NoI LvhoàvAGI
ao sa LvłI (INv sagnssahā. LNghºa-IIGI hox govaans alvaſo ao Loo）a av nosaga qaſhinbaſſ sa ATvAx Lºðv S no vagy HO ſatig vùL
LEvK.R SAFETY WALves
All common lever safety valves to be hereafter applied to the boilers of steam vessels
shall be constructed in material, workmanship, and principle according to the requirements
for a safety valve referred to in this section. When this construction of a safety valve is
applied to the boilers of steamers navigating rough waters, the link may be connected direct
with the spindle of the valve: #. always, That the fulcrum or points upon which
the lever rests are made of steel, knife, or sharp-edged, and hardened; in this case the short
end of the lever shall be attached directly to the valve casing. In all cases the link requires
but a slight movement not exceeding one-eighth of an inch.
REQUIREMENTS IN Construction of LEveR SAFETY WALves
All the points of bearing on lever shall be in the same plane.

The distance of the fulcrum shall in no case be less than the diameter of the valve
p The
opening. length of the lever shall not exceed the distance of the fulcrum multiplied by ten.
The width of the bearings of the fulcrum shall be not less than three-fourths of 1 inch.
The length of the fulcrum link shall be not less than 4 inches.
The lever and fulcrum link shall be made of wrought iron or steel and the knife-edged
fulcrum points and bearings for the points shall be made of steel and hardened. But the
chambers arºl saddle flanges of this and all other types of safety valves attached to boilers
may be made of cast iron or other suitable ..º.
The valve, valve seat, and bushing for the stem or spindle shall be made of composition
( metal) when the valve is intended to be attached to a boiler using salt water; but when
the valve is to be attached to a boiler using fresh water and generating steam of a high
pressure the parts named, with the exception of the bushings for the spindle, may be made of
cast iron.
The valve shall be guided by its spindle, both above and below the ground seat and above
the lever, through supports either made of composition (gun metal) or bushed with it.
The spindle shall fit loosely in the bearings or supports.
When the valve is intended to be applied to the boilers of steamers navigating rough
waters, the fulcrum link may be ...ºf directly with the spindle of the valve; providing
always that the knife-edged fulcrum points are made of steel and hardened, and that the verti
cal movement of the valve is unobstructed by any lateral movement.
In all cases the weight shall be adjusted on the lever to the pressure of steam allowed
in each case by a correct steam gage attached to the boiler. e weight shall then be
securely fastened in its position ; the lever marked for the purpose of facilitating the
replacing of the weight should it be necessary to remove the same, and in no case shall a
line or any other device be attached to the lever or weight except in such a manner as will
enable the engineer to raise the valve from its seat.
58.2% water-tube and coil boilers. *Duplicate blueprints or drawings of water-tube
and coil boilers, with their specifications, shall be submitted for approval to the Commandant
(under sec. 4429 R. S.), and the design approved by the Commandant, before the boilers
will be allowed to be used on any vessel coming under the jurisdiction of the Coast Guard.
After the approval of the design by the Commandant, 60 certified sets of the blueprints or
drawings º be furnished the Commandant for the use of the inspectors. The blueprints
or drawings necessary to comply with the foregoing provisions shall be supplied by the
manufacturers. Manufacturers shall furnish Officers in Charge, Marine Inspection, of
districts where boilers are to be installed an affidavit certifying that the boilers are con
structed in accordance with the specifications approved by the Commandant.
The working pressure allowable on cylindrical shells of water-tube or coil boilers, when
such shells have a row or rows of pipes or tubes inserted therein, shall be determined by the
following formula; Provided, That the working pressure allowable on such shells shalf also
be determined by the rule for cylindrical shells of boilers constructed of inspected plates,
contained in section 58.2, and the lower working pressure allowable by the two rules shall be
taken.
- (D–d) XTXS
P-º-º:
(F–207)
Where
P=working pressure allowable in pounds.
D=distance in inches between the tube or pipe centers in a line from head to head.
d=diameter of hole in inches.
S=one-fourth of the tensile strength of the plate.
R=radius of shell in inches.
n=number of tube holes in a pitch. When tubes on any one row are pitched un
equally, ma must be substituted in the formula for d.
Where rows of tubes are pitched diagonally, each diagonal ligament shall not be less
than three-fifths of each longitudinal ligament.
EXAMPLE
Required the working pressure of a cylindrical shell having holes 1 inch in diameter,
spaced 2 inches from center to center, in a line from head to head; material, one-half of an
inch thick; diameter of shell, 20 inches; tensile strength of plate, 60,000 pounds.
Substituting values, we have
_(2– 1)×0.5X15,000
P 2X10 =375 pounds.
e
PoRCUPINE-TYPE BoILERs
The formula for determining pressure on boilers of the so-called porcupine and similar
types shall be as follows:
Multiply the vertical distance between the centers of the horizontal rows of tubes in
inches by one-half the diameter of shell of boiler in inches, which gives the area upon which
the pressure is exerted to break a diagonal ligament, then find the sectional area of the
ligament at its smallest part and multiply by one-sixth the tensile strength of the material.
This result divided by the area upon which the strain is exerted gives the working pressure
per square inch, which is as follows: #= W, the working pressure, in which E equals
width of ligament in inches, F thickness of material in inches, T one-sixth of the tensile
strength, C distance between vertical centers, and D one-half the inside diameter of the shell
or central column.
For the boiler proposed, 30 inches diameter, five-eighths inch thick, tensile strength
60,000 pounds, 1.219 inches would be width of ligament, 0.625 thickness of plate, 10,000
one-sixth of tensile strength, 3% =3.6875 inches, distance of vertical centers; 15 inches,
one-half the diameter of shell, would be as follows: 1,219 multiplied by 0.625, this product
multiplied by one-sixth the tensile strength, 10,000, equals 7,618.75. This product, divided
by the product of 3.6875, distance between vertical centers, multiplied by 15, one-half the
diameter, equals 55.3125, gives 137.7, as pressure allowed.
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
All coil and pipe boilers hereafter made, when such boiler is completed and ready for
inspection, shall be subjected at the first inspection to a hydrostatic pressure at a ratio of
150 pounds to a steam pressure of 100 pounds.
The use of malleable-iron or cast-steel manifolds, tees, return bends, or elbows in the
construction of pipe generators shall be allowed, and the pressure of steam shall not be
restricted to less than one-half the hydrostatic pressure applied to pipe generators unless a
weakness should develop under such test as would render it unsafe in the judgment of the
inspector making such inspection.
DRUMS AND HEADs
All drums attached to coil, pipe, sectional, or water-tube boilers not already in use or
actually contracted for, to be built for use on a steam vessel, and their building commenced
at or before the date of the approval of this rule, shall be required to have the heads of
wrought iron or steel or cast steel flanged and substantially riveted to the drums or secured
(F–208)
by bolts and nuts of equal strength with rivets, in all cases where the diameters of such
drums exceed 6 inches.
Drums and water cylinders constructed with a bumped head at each or either end, any
º: in the shell or heads to be reinforced as required by the rules of the Commandant,
the circumferential and horizontal seams to be welded and properly annealed after such
welding is completed, and when tested with a hydrostatic pressure of at least double the
amount of the steam pressure allowed may be used for marine purposes.
CoPPER AND BRAss TUBEs
Seamless copper or brass tubes not exceeding three-fourths of an inch in diameter may
be used in the construction of water-tube boilers or generators when liquid fuel is used.
There may also be used in their construction, copper or brass steam drums not exceeding 14
inches in diameter, of a thickness of material not less than five-eighths of an inch, and copper
or brass steam drums 12 inches in diameter and under having a thickness of material of not
less than % inch. All tubes and drums referred to in this paragraph shall be made
from ingots or blanks drawn down to size without a seam. Water-tube boilers or generators
so constructed may be used for marine purposes with none other than liquid fuel.
58.25 Welding and reinforcing. No repair work by any welding process other than
fusion welding shall be allowed on main boilers or unfired pressure vessels until coupons
showing the character of the work proposed to be done by the applicant shall have been
tested and submitted, together with an explanation and report of the test, to the Officer in
Charge, Marine Inspection, of the district where the work is to be done. The Officer in
Charge, Marine Inspection, shall then satisfy himself whether or not such process can be
used with safety on the boilers or unfired pressure vessels of steam vessels.
In every case where repairs are to be made by these processes on boilers or unfired
ressure vessels of steam vessels subject to the inspection of the Coast Guard, the engineer
in charge and the parties making the repairs are required to notify the Officer in Charge,
Marine Inspection, giving full detailed description of the repairs to be made, the location
of the vessel, and the time the repairs are to be begun, so that inspection may be had, if
practicable, prior to and during the time the work is being done, which reports must be
confirmed in writing to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection.
The application for permission to use these processes on boiler or unfired pressure vessel
repairs of any particular vessel implies a guaranty on the part of the applicant that the
work shall, in material, flux, and workmanship, be equal to that of the samples furnished.
Repairs to marine boilers and unfired pressure vessels by means of fusion welding may
be permitted provided such welding conforms to the requirements of section 57.21–4.
58.26 Feed water. Feed water shall not be admitted into any marine boiler at a
temperature less than 100°F., and every such boiler, excepting donkey boilers, shall, after
October 31, 1909, have an independent auxiliary feed appliance for supplying said boiler
with water in addition to the usual mode employed, which auxiliary feed shall enter the
boiler through an opening and a fitting which are entirely independent of the fitting and
opening for the main feed.
58.27 Main steam pipe. The thickness of and pressure allowed on main steam pipe
constructed of riveted iron or steel plates that have been stamped and tested as required by
section 4430, Revised Statutes (46 U.S.C. 408), shall be determined in the same manner as
required by section 4433, Revised Statutes (46 U.S.C. 411), to determine the pressure allow
able on boilers.
The thickness of and steam pressure allowable on all lapwelded or solid-drawn steam
pipe of wrought iron or steel shall be determined by the following formulas:
T_PX D +0.125
- 10,000
p_(T-0.12%)x10,000
——D—
where
P=pressure of steam allowable in pounds.
T=thickness of pipe.
D=diameter of pipe.
(F–209)
ExAMPLE
Given P=200 pounds pressure. D=5 inches in diameter. Substituting and solving
for Ty T_2003
+0.125=0.225 inch.
10,000
Substituting and solving for P,
P= (0.225–0.125) x10,000
––– =200 pounds.
WELDED STEAM AND WATER PIPEs
From 4 inch inside diameter up to and including 30 inches inside diameter.

def The pipe shall be made of wrought iron or mild steel, smooth, straight, and free from
efectS.
Threaded pipe of standard thickness shall be avoided as far as possible. In steam pipes
it is a very serious matter and shall not be allowed in any case on standard pipe over 5
inches in diameter.
All pipe over 2 inches in diameter shall be lapwelded.
TESTS

One-eighth inch, inside diameter up to and including 3% inches inside diameter shall be
tested before shipment to 600 pounds per square inch hydrostatic pressure and not subject
to * other test.
or all diameters greater than 3% inches inside:
For steel. A test piece 2 inches in length cut from a pipe shall stand being flattened by
hammering until the sides are brought parallel with the curve on the inside at the ends not
greater than one-third the outside diameter of the pipe without showing cracks or flaws,
the weld being 45° from the curve.
For iron. A test ring three times the thickness in length cut circumferentially from
lapwelded wrought-iron pipe shall be crushed down to an inner diameter of one-third the
outside diameter of the pipe. Wrought-iron pipe will not stand this test without fracture,
but no lapwelded wrought-iron pipe shall be *...
where the break is short or crystalline
or shows evidence of defective material or bad welding, and in every case the fiber of the iron
shall be shown.
Pulling tests shall be made from every 50 pieces furnished, or fraction thereof, and shall
show the following results:
For Bessemer steel. Tensile strength, not less than 50,000 pounds per square inch.
Elongation in 8-inch specimen, not less than 20 percent.
or open-hearth steel. Tensile strength, not less than 45,000 pounds per square inch.
For iron. Tensile strength, 40,000 to 48,000 pounds per square inch. Elastic limit,
22,000 to 30,000 pounds. Elongation in 8-inch specimen, not less than 12 percent.
All pipe from 4-inch diameter up shall be tested before shipment to not less than 500
pounds per square inch hydrostatic pressure.
SEAMLESs STEEL STEAM AND WATER PIPEs
MATERIAL
The steel shall be made by the open hearth process.

SURFACE INSPECTION
Pipe shall be free, inside and outside, from all surface defects that would materially
weaken it or form starting points of corrosion. The defects to be especially avoided are
snakes, checks, slivers, laps, pits, etc. Pipe shall be smooth and straight.
(F–210)
TESTS

A test piece, 2 inches in length, cut from a pipe, shall stand being flattened by hammering
until the sides are brought parallel with the curve on the inside at the ends not greater than
one-third the outside diameter of the pipe without showing cracks or flaws.
Pulling tests shall be made from every 50 pieces furnished, or fraction thereof, and shall
show the following results:
Tensile strength, not less than 48,000 pounds per square inch.
The name or brand of the manufacturer shall be legibly rolled in raised characters or
stamped on the outer surface of each pipe.
WELDED AND SEAMLEss STEAM AND WATER PIPEs Join ED BY MEANs of FUSION WELDING
Fusion butt welding may be used to join bilge, ballast, fuel-oil overflow, fuel-oil transfer
and vent, pipes, fire and flushing mains, fresh water distribution, brine piping,, and drain
suctions from fuel-oil tanks. Heating coils in fuel-oil tanks may also be joined by fusion
welding, provided butt welds are used and the welds protected by a sleeve, fillet welded at
the ends of the wall of the pipe. In all cases, such welding ºfcomply with the require
ments of Part 56.
STATEMENT or CERTIFICATE of MANUFACTURER of STEAM AND WATER PIPEs
When the manufacturers of steam and water pipes file with the Commandant a cer
tificate duly sworn to that all such pipes manufactured by them will stand all the tests
and meet all the requirements of the foregoing rule, they shall be accepted by inspectors of
the Coast Guard, and no other affidavit will be required. -
Seamless steel pipe or tubing made by the open-hearth process may be used for shells
in the construction of steam and water drums for boilers when the inside diameter of such
drums does not exceed 24 inches, provided that the material conforms to the following
physical requirements: -
Tensile strength, minimum 48,000 pounds per square inch.

Yield point, minimum 26,500 pounds per square inch.
Elongation in 2 inches, minimum 40 percent.
Welded steel pipe of material made by the open-hearth process may be used in the con
struction of such d; shells, provided that the joints are made by the hammer-weld process
and the material conforms to the following physical requirements:
#. wrought-iron pipe may be used in the construction of such drum shells, provided
the joints are made by the hammer-weld process and the material conforms to the following
physical requirements:
Where welded drums are used, the joint shall be so located as not to be in contact with
the products of combustion, and shall not be pierced for tube holes.
anufacturers furnishing such piping or tº:for the construction of steam or water
drums shall submit a certification that the material furnished conforms to the physical
requirements specified in the preceding paragraphs.
The maximum allowable working pressure and minimum thickness of such drums shall
be computed from the following formulas:
P _SXTXE _PXRXF
T=-&f=
T RXF
where -
P=maximum allowable working pressure in pounds per square inch.

T=thickness of shell in inches.
(F–211)
S=minimum tensile strength of material in pounds per square inch.

R=inside radius of shell in inches.
F=factor of safety, which is 6.
E=efficiency of joint or ligament between tube holes, whichever is the least.
NotE: Where seamless piping or tubing is used, the value of E shall equal 1, except in cases where the
shell is pierced for tube holes, in which case the value of E shall equal the percentage of strength of the
ligament between the tube holes as compared with the solid plate.
Where reinforcing plates are used to strengthen the shell at the point where the tube enters, they shall
be riveted to the shell and the value of E shall be determined in the following manner:
(a) The efficiency of the plate section or ligament between tube holes, or
(b) The shearing strength of the rivets securing the plate to the shell, whichever value is the least.
Where welded piping is used for drum shells as specified in preceding paragraphs, the value of E shall
be taken as 0.7, except where the shell is pierced for tube holes and the strength of the ligament falls below
70 percent, in which case the value of E shall be the percentage of strength of the ligament between the tube
holes as compared with the solid plate.
Where reinforcing plates are used to strengthen the shell of such welded drums at the point where
the tube enters, and the efficiency of the ligament between tube holes or the shearing strength of the
rivets securing the reinforcing plate to the shell falls below 70 percent of the strength of the solid plate,
the value of E shall be determined in the following manner:
(a) The efficiency of the plate section or ligament between tube holes, or
(b) The shearing strength of the rivets securing the plate to the shell, whichever value is the least.
When pipe is used for steam lines where flanges are riveted on and calked, the ends of the pipe shall be
properly annealed before drilling or riveting the flanges on.
FLANGES AND ConnECTIONS FoR WRought-IRoN AND HomogFNEoUs–STEEL FEED AND

STEAM PIPE
The terminal and intermediate flanges of all wrought-iron and homogeneous-steel

feed and steam pipe over 2 inches in diameter, other than on pipe or coil boilers or steam
generators, ..I.' be made of wrought iron, homogeneous steel, malleable iron having a
tensile ºnal of not less than 30,000 pounds per square inch of section, or equivalent
material.
All such flanges shall have a depth through the bore of not less than one-half of the
diameter of the pipe to which the flange is attached.
The bore shall increase slightly toward the face of the flange, and the end of the pipe
shall be enlarged to fit the bore of the flange and shall be substantially beaded over or out
ward into a recess in the face of the flange. -
Flanges on extra heavy lapwelded steam pipe up to and including 5 inches diameter
may be attached with screw threads and the joints in bends may be made with extra heavy
.. elbows or equivalent material.
Feed and steam pipe up to and including 3 inches diameter may be connected at inter
mediate joints by being screwed into flanges or extra heavy fittings.
Flanges of cast iron, semisteel, or ferrosteel, having a tensile strength of not less than
20,000 pounds per square inch of section, may be employed in connecting extra heavy la
welded pipe by screw threads. Such flanges shall be extra heavy and have a depth throug
the bore of not less than the United States standard length of thread for the pipe to which
the flange is attached plus depth of counterbore. The thickness of the flange, excluding
hub, shall be not less than three-tenths of the diameter of the pipe plus 0.25 of an inch.
The pipe shall fit snugly in the counterbore, which shall be not less than one-fourth the
diameter of the pipe in depth.
Flanges of wrought iron or steel grooved in the bore to a depth equal to the thickness
of the material in the pipe shall be allowed for use on all steam and feed pipe when the end
of the pipe has been thoroughly annealed and expanded into the flange by approved
machinery.
Flanges with hubs projecting not less than 1% inches from the back of the flange may
be shrunk on lºſ or riveted-iron or steel or seamless-drawn steel steam pipes over
5% inches diameter where the pipe is brought to a true and parallel circle at the end and
beaded over into a recess at the face of the flange, or flared to an angle of approximately
20°, or the bore of the flange may be tapered and the pipe expanded into the bore.
Flanges of cast steel, wrought iron, or homogeneous steel, equal in strength to the pipe
to which it is attached, may be riveted to the pipe.
Flanges may be secured to pipe by expanding the pipe by proper and .
machinery
and flaring the end of the pipe to an angle not exceeding 20°, taken in the direction of the
(F–212)
length of the pipe, and having a depth of flare equal to at least one and one-half times the
thickness of the pipe.
Flanges of cast steel, forged steel, or wrought iron may be used in any process of expand
º the pipe into grooves in the bore of the flange and flaring the end of the pipe to an angle
Of 20°.
Flanges welded to lapwelded steam pipes of iron or steel may be used when the manu
facturer furnishes an affidavit that the pipe has been properly annealed after all work requir
ing fire has been finished.
All flange connections made by the process of expanding, welding, or shrinking shall
be º to a hydrostatic test of twice the working pressure without showing signs of
Weakness.
FLANGEs on CoPPER PIPE
The flanges of all copper steam and feed pipe over 3 inches diameter shall be made of
brass or bronze composition, forged-iron, or steel or open-hearth steel castings. The end
of the pipe shall be flanged over or outward to a width of not less than twice the thickness
of the pipe and to a radius of not more than the thickness of the pipe, and the flange securely
brazed or riveted to the pipe. If the pipe is properly formed with a full reinforced taper
through the flange, the riveting or brazing may be dispensed with. The thickness of flanges
shall be not less than four times the required thickness of the pipe plus 0.25 of an inch.
Any form of expanded, grooved, and flared joint will be allowed for copper pipe under
the same regulations, restrictions, and tests applying to iron or steel pipe.
All flange joints shall be fitted with such number of bolts or rivets as will make the joint
equal in strength to all other parts of the pipe.
Any form of joint which, in the judgment of the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection,
is equal in strength and efficiency to the flange connections required by this rule shall be
allowed on any and all classes of pipe. º
CoPPER PIPE
No copper pipe constructed after June 30, 1905, shall have any bend whose radius is
less than one and one-half times the diameter of the pipe and such pipe shall be so led and
flanges so placed that they may be readily taken down if required. Such pipes shall be
protected by iron casings when run through coal bunkers, and shall be clear of the coal
chutes. The thickness of material, according to the working pressure, shall be determined
by the following formula:
_PXD
T= 8,000 +0.0625
where
P=working pressure.
D=inside diameter of pipe in inches.
EXAMPLE
Required the thickness of material of a 5-inch copper pipe for a working pressure of 175
pounds per square inch.
Substituting values, we have
T_175X5
T 8,000
+0.0625=0.171 inch
Provided, however, That all copper #: subject to pressure and installed for use on steam
vessels after July 1, 1911, shall have a thickness of material according to the working pressure,
to be determined by the following formula:
_PXD +0.0625
TT6,000
where
P=working pressure.
D=inside diameter of pipe in inches.
6194.8°–45–16 (F–213)
EXAMPLE,
Required the thickness of material of a 5-inch copper pipe for a working pressure of 175
pounds per square inch.
Substituting and solving, we have
_175X5
T= 6,000 +0.0625=0.208
SLIP Joints
The wearing surface of the male pipe in all slip joints made after June 30, 1908, for use
in steam pipes shall be made of copper or composition, and shall be of sufficient length and
80 ...? as to prevent accidental withdrawal from the packing box. . When made of
composition, same shall be of not less than 95 percent copper, tin, and zinc, possessing a
tensile strength of not less than 30,000 pounds to the square inch. It may be used for sizes
up to and including 12 inches in diameter, and for all pressures not exceeding 300 pounds
per square inch.
he minimum thickness of such fittings shall be determined by the following formula:
_PXD
T= 1000+022
where
D= diameter in inches.
58.28 Cast steel, semisteel, ferrosteel, etc., proposed to be used in the manufacture of
valves, fittings, and other appliances. tº: of any size or character and for
any pressure and for any temperature may be used for any and all steam and feedpipe
connections, and for valves, cocks, and all appliances subject to steam or water pressure,
when made by regular processes and by manufacturers who stamp such fittings and appliances
with their trade-mark or identifying stamp and who guarantee the castings to possess the
following physical characteristics: Tensile strength, minimum, 50,000; maximum, 78,000
pounds per square inch; elastic limit, minimum, not less than 45 percent of tensile strength;
elongation in 2 inches, minimum, 25 percent. There shall be taken from each heat an
annealed coupon or coupons, for the purpose of determining the physical tests, and the
manufacturers shall furnish coupons to the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, for tests
when so required. All steel castings shall be thoroughly annealed.
The minimum thickness of steel fittings shall be determined by the following formula:
_PXD
T-7,000 +0.188
where
D= diameter in inches.
Cast iron, semisteel, or ferrosteel, possessing a tensile strength of not less than 22,000
unds to the sectional square inch, may be used in the construction of valves and fittings
}. pressures not exceeding 300 pounds when such valves and fittings of 3 inches diameter or
over are stamped with the trade-mark or identifying stamp of the manufacturer, and made
in accordance with the following formula:
PXD
T 3,000 +0.25
where
T=thickness of casting in inches.
P=pressure of steam allowable in pounds.
D=internal diameter of the largest opening contained in the cylindrical part of the
casting.
la The above materials may also be used in the construction of manhole and handhole
plates.
(F–214)
BOILER PLATE; BOILERS AND ATTACHMENTS [58.281
The headers of superheaters may be made of semisteel (so-called) in which the constituent
part of high-grade uniform steel thereof shall be not less than 25 percent and that the material
shall have a tensile strength of not less than 28,000 pounds per square inch. The material
shall be soft and close-grained and the castings shall be tight under a hydrostatic pressure
of 850 pounds per square inch.
Malleable iron possessing a tensile strength of not less than 30,000 pounds to the sec
tional square inch may be used in the construction of valves and fittings up to and including
6 inches in diameter, and for pressures not exceeding 300 pounds. Such valves and fittings
of 3 inches diameter or over shall be extra heavy, the ãº beaded or banded, and the valves
and fittings stamped with the trade-mark or identifying stamp of the manufacturer.
Hard brass, bronze, and other compositions, of which 95 percent is copper, tin, and
zinc, possessing a tensile strength of not less than 30,000 pounds to the square inch, may
be used in the construction of all valves and fittings up to º including 12 inches in diameter.
All such fittings of 3 inches in diameter or over shall be stamped with the trade-mark or
identifying stamp of the manufacturer.
WALVES
Each and every valve for marine service shall have the trade-mark of the manufacturer
cast or stamped on the chamber. All such valves of 2 inches diameter and over shall be
subjected by the manufacturer before shipment to a hydrostatic pressure of three times
the working pressure which the manufacturer guarantees them to stand without distortion,
and shall also be stamped with such working pressure and also the letters “M. S.” which
shall plainly indicate that the valve has met the test and requirements for marine service.
All valves of over 2 inches diameter, without regard for the service for which they are
intended, installed after April 30, 1917, shall have bolted bonnets. Valves of 2 inches diam
eter or less connected directly to the boiler shall be of cast steel, hard brass, or bronze.
Screwed bonnets on cast-iron valves of any size and for any character of service are positively
prohibited. On all boilers built after July 1, 1896, a stopcock or valve shall be placed between
all check valves and boiler, and between all steam and water pipes and boiler. When
interdeck superheaters are used in connection with water-tube boilers of approved design,
and the fittings and pipes between the drum of the boilers and the header of the superheaters
are made of seamless steel and of a thickness in accordance with the rules to withstand any
pressure sustained by any part of the boiler, such fittings connecting with pipes of steam
drum or superheater shall be either steel forgings or steel castings. The stop valve may be
attached to the discharge end of the superheater: Provided, That this section shall not apply
to safety valves that have been approved by the Commandant.
PIPE FITTINGS
The term “pipe fittings” refers to all hollow cylindrical fittings, and does not apply to
flanges or valves.
All pipe fittings of more than 3 inches internal diameter shall be subjected by the
manufacturer to a test of three times the pressure to which they will be subjected in service.
Where the thickness of the material in the boiler or drum, or the heads thereof, is not
less than one-half inch, or where such boiler, drum, or head thereof has been reinforced b
having a pad or flange riveted on the same, to make the thickness not less than one-h
inch, pipes or fittings of 2 inches in diameter or under may be screwed directly into the same.
Where steam or feed pipes of 2 inches in diameter or under are screwed into the boiler, the
stop valve shall be connected to the boiler by as short a nipple as it is possible to use, nipples
to be of extra-heavy thickness.
All boiler connections of over 2 inches in diameter, except the connections for safety
valves, shall be permanently flanged and attached directly to the boiler by bolts, studs, or
rivets.
Where the connecting point on the boiler is of circular form, distance pieces shall be
allowed in order to square the point of attachment of the flanged fittings.
Flanged distance pieces of not more than 8 inches between flanges may be allowed be
tween stopcocks or valves and the boiler when necessary to care for and conveniently handle
the valves, when such distance pieces are constructed of wrought material of sufficient thick
ness and strength to withstand any pressure to which they may be subjected and securely
riveted to the boiler.
(F-215)
Cast-steel flanged fittings, when conforming strictly with the requirements for steel
castings, may be used for the purpose of connecting main and auxiliary stop valves and other
steam outlets, including safety valves, distance from axis of outlets of such fittings to point
of connection with boiler to be as short as practicable. -
Valves and fittings of 3 inches and under may be connected by screw threads at their
intermediate joints in pipe lines, but at point of connection with boiler all valves and fittings
over 2 inches diameter shall be flanged and properly secured by bolts, studs, or rivets, and
no fitting shall be of greater length than specified by the “Manufacturers' Standard.”
Cast nozzles ...i. be used when exposed to the direct action of the fire.
All sea valves or cocks secured to the skin of the vessel by bolts and connected to the
engines or boilers by pipes shall be arranged so as to be accessible at all times, so that if a
leak or defect occurs it can be reached. All parts of said valves except the chamber shall
be made of brass or bronze when used on wooden-hull vessels navigating salt water; but in
the case of vessels of iron or steel the brass or bronze bolts may be dispensed with.
ALLOWABLE TEMPERATURES
Cast iron, malleable iron, semisteel, and ferrosteel may be used in connection with
temperatures up to and including 450° F.
Hard brass, bronze, and other compositions, of which 95 percent is copper, tin, and
zinc, may be used in connection with temperatures up to and including 470° F., but this
temperature may be increased to 550° F. when the manufacturer of the valves or fittings
stamps them with the temperature they are guaranteed to stand without disintegration.
This paragraph will also apply to any composition meeting the above physical requirements
and stamped in accordance therewith.
For temperatures exceeding 550°F. no valves or fittings other than steel or of a com
position whose tensile strength has been demonstrated to exceed 50,000 pounds per sectional
square inch with an elongation of 10 percent in a length of 2 inches shall be allowed. Such
valves and fittings shall be stamped as above required.
The manufacturer of valves and fittings shall file with the Commandant a certificate
duly sworn to that all valves and fittings furnished by him for use on steam vessels comply
with the requirements of the foregoing rule.
After July 1, 1911, the Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection, shall refuse to allow the use
of any valves or fittings on steam vessels until notified by the Commandant that such cer
tificate is on file in his office. This shall not apply to valves and fittings installed previous
to July 1, 1911.
EvAPORATORs, FEED-WATER HEATERs, SEPARATORs, AND STEAM TRAPs MADE of CAST

IRoN AND SUBJECT To BoILER PRESSURE
When evaporators, feed heaters, separators, and steam traps are constructed of cast
iron possessing a tensile strength of not less than 20,000 pounds per square inch, the shells
being cylindrical and ends flat or convex, the castings sound and of uniform thickness, the
working pressure shall not exceed that found by the following formulas:
Flat surface: Cylindrical shell:
p_20,000XT"
T D2
P_3,500XT
p%
T_ _ ]|PXD: T_{XP
20,000 3,500
where P=working pressure per square inch in pounds.
Provided (1), That the thickness of ends of evaporators, feed heaters, and separators
shall be not less than three-eighths of an inch. (2), That to the resultant thickness obtained
by the formula given above there shall be added, for cylinders having an inside diameter
of 1 inch to 6 inches, inclusive, one-fourth of an inch; for cylinders having an inside diameter
of over 6 inches to 15 inches, inclusive, one-eighth of an inch.
D=diameter inside in inches. When the pressure is to be determined for a part of a
flat surface which is a square, or rectangle in the flat-surface formula, the value of
(F–216)
D used shall be the diagonal of the square or rectangle, and when the ends are
bolted to the shell the value of D used shall equal the diameter of the bolt circle.
All flanges shall be substantial, and there shall be a good fillet all around the root, and
when the ends and shell are cast solid there shall be a good and substantial fillet inside all
around.
The bolts or studs for the ends or doors shall not have a greater stress than 6,000 pounds
per square inch, and the size of bolts or studs shall be not less than three-fourths of an inch in
diameter. ...
EvaporatoRs
Evaporators shall be provided with an efficient safety valve of approved type, set to
blow at the maximum pressure to which the evaporator will be subjected in service, and it
shall be the duty of the engineer in charge of the vessel to see that such valve blows off at
least once in 30 days.
58.29 Installations of fuel-oil systems. Repairs, partial replacements, and tests of
|ſ
systems installed prior to July 1, 1935, shall conform to the following rules:
OCEAN AND COASTWISE
The construction of fuel-oil tanks separate from the hull shall conform to the following
requirements: Plating for such tanks shall be not less than five-sixteenths of an inch in
thickness; seams where the plates are joined shall be double-riveted; all rivet holes shall be
fairly drilled, or punched three-fourths diameter and reamed to size; rivet holes shall be spaced
not to exceed four diameters; and, where practicable, the tanks shall be caulked inside and
out. -
Where double bottoms are used for the storage of fuel oil, such double bottoms shall be
subdivided with one or more longitudinal water-tight bulkheads, except the narrow tanks at
the forward and after ends of the vessel. This requirement shall also apply to fuel-oil deep
tanks which shall also be fitted with the necessary swash plates. The hatch covers on deep
tanks which are used for fuel oil shall be made of steel or iron plating and be fitted oiltight.
Fuel-oil tanks in ’tween-deck spaces overhanging the boiler space or adjoining the ship's
sides abreast of the boilers shall be avoided as far as practicable, but where found to be
necessary, they shall be subdivided into compartments not exceeding 20 feet in length.
The test for fuel-oil tanks that do not form a part of the structure of the hull shall be a
hydrostatic test of 15 pounds to the square inch, and all other tanks shall be tested with a
pressure that will not be exceeded in practice. f
Deep tanks, peak tanks, settling tanks, and tanks separate from the hull used for the
storage of fuel .# shall be fitted with internal gate valves where the suction pipe or pipes
penetrate the tank, the valves to be fitted with mechanical appliances so arranged that they
may be operated from an accessible place on a deck outside of the machinery space. Double
bottom fuel-oil tanks shall be fitted with a gate valve on the tank top where the suction pipe
penetrates it, or, where the suction pipe leads under the tank tops, the valve shall be placed
where the pipe enters the machinery space.
No openings are to be cut in the bottoms, ends, or sides of fuel-oil tanks except for suc
tion and heater connections.
The vent pipes from all fuel-oil tanks shall have a net cross-sectional area equal to that
of the filling pipes and shall be led from the top of the tank to the open air in a space where
no danger will result from the discharge of oil vapor; the discharge ends to be fitted with
U-bends and a gauze diaphragm, which can be easily removed for cleaning. Where it is
necessary to use bends in the piping, such bends shall not exceed 45° from the vertical.
Where vent pipes pass through cargo spaces they shall be protected against damage.
All pipes over 2 inches in diameter shall be ...” to fuel-oil tanks by flanges, or
flanged flºº riveted to the tanks. º pipes for such tanks shall extend through the
top of the tank to deck, and such pipes shall be led to the bottoms of the tanks and fitted
with U-bends extending upward at least 12 inches above the bottoms; or in lieu of the U-bends
the pipes may be led to within one-half of the diameter of the pipes from the bottoms of the
tanks.
Sounding pipes or other reliable apparatus shall be fitted to fuel tanks for use in deter
mining the oil ſevel in each tank. Sounding pipes shall be led up through the deck and dºwn
to within one diameter of the bottom of the tank, and shall not be perforated. Such PP”
610428°–45–17 (F–217)
passing through cargo spaces shall be protected against damage. Sounding pipes in the
machinery spaces that do not extend up through a deck shall be fitted with a valve or stop
cock that will close automatically to prevent oil overflow.
The piping between the service pumps and the stop valve at the burners, when the pres
sure exceeds 15 pounds per square inch, shall be extra-heavy seamless piping and shall be
in sight above the floor or platform. The connections on such piping shall be made with
extra-heavy flanges or extra-heavy fittings of forged or cast steel, bronze, or malleable iron.
Valves on pipe lines conveying hot oil shall be extra heavy and shall be of the locked-bonnet,
bolted-bonnet, or union-nut-bonnet type.
The piping, including connections, shall be tested in place to a hydrostatic test pressure
equal to three times the designed maximum working pressure, but in no case less than 150
pounds. All other piping for use in conveying fuel oil together with valves, and fittings,
shall be suitable for a pressure of 125 pounds and all such pipe and fittings between the gate
valve within the tank and the pumps shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 250 pounds.
When it is desired to change a low-pressure system to a high-pressure system, it will be
necessary to apply a hydrostatic test pressure to the piping and connections from pumps to
burners equal to three times the working pressure.
All oil heaters shall be tested to double the working pressure. Continuous pipe or pipes
shall be carried through the heads or ends of the heaters, and all joints shall be made on the
outside to eliminate the danger of oil being pumped into the boilers in the event of failure
of the joints: Provided, however, That this requirement does not apply when the water of
condensation from the heaters is led to an observation tank or is not used for boiler-feed water.
Heaters may be installed in double-bottoms, if so desired, when vessels are ºrating in cold
waters and may be placed in the most convenient location for heating the oil.
Fuel-oil pumps supplying oil to the burners, also oil strainers, shall be in duplicate, and
the discharge of each pump shall be fitted with an efficient relief valve that will return sur
plus oil to the suction side of the pumps.
Where fuel-oil tanks are fitted in wooden vessels, lead pans or lining shall be placed
under the tanks, the lead to be of a gage weighing not less than 8 pounds per square foot,
this precaution being made to prevent oil from getting into the bilges of the vessel.
Throttle valves on fuel-oil pumps shall be arranged so that they may be operated from
some accessible point outside of the pump-room or fireroom inclosure.
Dampers in funnels or uptakes on oil-burning steamers shall be fitted with a locking
device in open position.
§º. drip pans shall be installed to catch the drip from burners, fuel-oil pumps,
* or any º: place where necessary to prevent oil from reaching the bilges of the
WeSSel.
The boiler room and funnel casings shall be insulated so as to prevent the spread of fire
to woodwork or other combustible material adjacent to the casings in the event of an oil
fire taking place in the fireroom.
GREAT LAKES; BAYS, SOUNDS, AND LAKES OTHER THAN THE GREAT LAKES; RIVERs
For fuel-oil installations on vessels navigating the waters of the Great Lakes; bays,
sounds, and lakes other than the Great Lakes; and rivers; the following two paragraphs
apply in lieu of the first four undesignated paragraphs following the heading “Ocean and
oastwise.”
The fuel-oil tanks on all inland steamers subject to the rules and regulations of the
Commandant shall be constructed of material of such thickness and workmanship as, in the
judgment of the inspector in whose district the installation is made, is safe.
All pipe connections on fuel-oil tanks and cargo-oil tanks, except the connection or con
nections on the top of such tank, shall be protected by an internal gate valve operated by
an extension rod leading to an accessible point in an open space on a deck outside the engine
and fireroom casing, so that the flow of oil may be immediately shut off in case of the failure
or rupture of any of the pipes or connections.
The third and subsequent paragraphs of the rules for fuel-oil installations on vessels
navigating the waters of the Great Lakes; bays, sounds, and lakes other than the Great
Lakes; and rivers; are identical with the fifth and subsequent paragraphs, respectively, of the
rules for fuel-oil installations on vessels navigating the oceans .."coastwise.
(F–218)
IN DE X
[Parts 50 to 57, inclusive: Rules applicable to installations built or contracted for on or after July 1, 1937*]
Section Section
Access openings.---------- 52.5–3, 52.6–1, 52.6–3 Ash-ejector piping----------------------
55. 19–11
Accumulation tests of safety valves------ 52.14–3 Ash pits------------------------------ 53.17–2
Adamson furnaces--------------------- 52.11–1 Attachment of piping to flanges--- 55.19–8, 55.19–9
Adamson furnaces, formula for--- - - - - - - - - 52.11–2 Attachments to boilers------------------ 52.15–1
Adjustment of safety valves----- 52.14–3, 52.14–5 Auxiliary and donkey boilers, installation-- 53.17–4
Admission of inspectors to boiler shops.--- 51.1–4 Auxiliary boilers, definition of- - - - - - - - - - - 52.1–1
Affidavit, manufacturer, re boiler- 52.1–6, 57.21–2 design and construction-- - - - - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ 52.1–8
re miscellaneous equipment- - - - - - - - - - - - 57.21–2 Auxiliary piping-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–5, 55.19–6
Allowable load on stays and staybolts - - - 57.21–10 Auxiliary stop valves, definition of - - - - - - - 52.15–1
Allowable working pressures, boilers and installation-------------- - - - - - - - - - - 52.15–14
pressure vessels: Back connection, bottom plate - 52.10–1, 52.10–3
Cylindrical shells (steel plates)--- - - - - - - 52.2–3 crown bar--------------------------- 52.10–3
Cylindrical shells (steel or bronze Back pitch of rivets- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.3—3
castings)-------------------- 52.2–3, 52.16–4 Bagged or blistered sheets----- - - - - - - - - - - 57.21–7
Cylindrical shells (cast iron) -- - - - - - - - - 52.2–3 Base metal and its preparation (welded
Heads (steel plates) - - - - - - - - - - - - - __ 52.5–3 piping)----------------------------- 56.20–19
Heads (steel castings)-------- - - 52.5–3, 52.13–4 Basis and application of rules------------ 50.1
Alloy-steel bolting material-- - - 51.16–1, 51.16–8 Bell mouthing------------------------- 52.12–1
Alteration of boiler design--- - - - - - - - - - - - -
52.1–1 Bend tests:
Alternative materials (boiler) - - - - - - - - - - - -
51.1–18 brass pipe--------------------------- 51.13–9
Alternative methods of construction- - - - - - 52.1–13 copper pipe-------------------------- 51.14–7
Analyses, chemical: fusion welding:
Alloy-steel bolting material- - - - 51.1–5, 51.16–4 test results, Class I----------------- 56.20–4
Boiler tubes---------- 51.9–3, 51.9a–4, 51.10–4 testresults, Class II---------------- 56.20–6
Brass pipe-------------------------- 51.13–4 testresults, Class III--------------- 56.20–7
Bronze castings-------------- 51.1–5, 51.20–3 testresults, piping----------------- 56.20–3
Class A materials-------------------- 51.1—5 testspecimens, plate---------------- 56.20–3
Copper pipe------------------------- 51.14–4 test *. piping-------------- 56.20–3
Steel castings------------------------ 51. 1–5 marine boiler plate------------------- 51.2–5
Steel forgings------------------------ 51. 1–5 rivet iron--------------------------- 51.8–5 i
Steel plates---------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1–5 rivet steel--------------------------- 51.7–5
Steel pipe- - - - - - - - 51.11–2, 51.11a–3, 51.11b-3 steel castings------------------------ 51.17–8
Annealing----------------------------- 51.1–16 steel pipe------------------- 51.11–6, 51.118–6
Alloy-steel bolting material - 51.16–3, 51.16a–4 steel plates------------------- 51.21–9, 51.22–7
Boiler tubes------------------------- 51.10–3 wrought-iron bars for stays------- 51.6–6, 51.6–8
Brass pipe-------------------------- 51.13–3 wrought-iron pipe - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.12–4
Copper pipe------------------------- 51.14–7 Bilge and ballast piping, general require
Malleable iron castings.------ - - - - - - - - - - 51.19–3
Steel castings------------------------ 51.17–3
Steel forgings------------------------ 51.15–5
Steel pipe--------------------------- 51.11–2
ment----------------------------- 55.19–12
through deep tanks or settling tanks---- 55.19–5
Bilge suctions------------------------- 55.19–12
Blow-off valves------------------------ 52.15–7
i
Steel plates------------ - - - - - 51.1–16, 51.21–3 Boiler inspection-------- 54.18–1, 54.18–2, 54.18–3
Annual inspection, boilers and main steam Boiler mountings and attachments, defi
pipes--------------- 54.18–3, 54.18–4, 54.18–5 nitions---------------------------- 52.15–1
Engine-room signals- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
54.18–7 materials and workmanship- - - - - - - - - - - 52.15–2
Fire-fighting equipment--- - - - - - - - - - - - -
54. 18–6 Boilers, affidavits of manufacturer------ - - 52.1–6
Inspectors not to accept statements.----- 54.18–13 attachments to---------------------- 52.15–2
Mountings and attachments -- - - - - - - - - - 54.18—5 auxiliary and donkey, design and con
Tank-tops and bilges----------------- 54.18—6 struction-------------------------- 52.1–8
Aº. boiler design-------------------
aterial---------------------------- 51.1–11
51.1–5 cast-iron for heating purposes--------- 57.21–24
certification for duplicate boilers------- 52.1–7
Appliances and appurtenances----------- 52.16–1 computation of pressure parts--------- 52.1–3
Approval of safety valve installation------
52.14–2 computations and factors of safety----- 52.2–3
Approved types of joints--- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
52.3–1 conditions for approval--------------- 52.1–4
Appurtenances and appliances----------- 52.16–1 cylindrical shells--------------------- 52.2–3
Appurtenances, materials for------------ 51.1–3 definitions of.----------------------- 52.1–1
Area of circular segment, formula for-----52.7–2 drawings or blue prints--------------- 52.1–2
Area of dry pipes---------------------- 52.14–4 externally fired type------------------ 52.2–7
Area of escape pipes-------------------- 52.14–4 forge-welded shells------------------- 52.2–5
Area of safety valves - - - - - - - - - -52.14–3
- - - - - - - - low-pressure for heating--------------- 52.1–8
Areas, curved (combustion chambers)----- 52.7–3 materials and workmanship-------- - - - 52.1–9
Areas to be stayed--------------------- 52.7–2 of foreign vessels--------- - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.1–12
*Index for rules applicable to installations built or contracted for prior to July 1, 1935, may be found on page F-228.
(F–219)
INDEX
Boilers—Continued. Section Computations—Continued. Section

seamless shells----------------------- 52.2–4 capacity of safety valves-------------- 52.14–3
shop inspection---------------------- 52.1–10 combustion chambers------ - - - - - - - - - - - 52.10–3
Bolting, flanges and fittings.------------- 55. 19–9 corrugated or ribbed furnaces---------- 52.11–3
materials and purposes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.16a–1 curved tube sheets----------- - - - - - - - - 52.9–2
requirements- 52.15–2, 52.16–5, 55.19–3, 55.19–9 cylindrical headers------------------- 52.13–4
Brass pipe, specifications -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.13 dished heads------------------------- 52.5–3
temperature limitations- 51.13–1, 55.19–3, 55.19–6 domes and steam chimneys------------ 52.4–3
Brazed unfired pressure vessels--- - - - - - - - 57.21–18 flat heads--------------------------- 52.5–3
Brinell hardness tests, alloy-steel bolting flat stayed surfaces------------------- 52.7–3
material------------------ 51.16–6, 51.16a–6 longitudinal riveted joints-- - - - - - - - - - - - 52.3–3
for boiler tubes-- - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.9a–11, 51.10–9 maximum openings in shells or drums -- 52.6–4
Bronze castings, specifications- - - - - - - - - - - 51.20 power piping------------------------ 55.19–6
temperature limitations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.20–1 shells of evaporators, separators, etc.---- 52.16–4
Butt-strap joints, computations -- ... -- 52.3–4 stays and staybolts------------------- 52.8–4
Cargo vessels, bilge and ballast piping---- 55.19–12 steel boiler tubes--------------------- 52.12–3
Castings, bronze, specifications for------- 51.20 thickness of valves and fittings--------- 55.19–4
gray iron, specifications for------------ 51.18 tube sheets fire tube boilers------------ 52.10–3
malleable iron, specifications for - - - - - - - 51.19 Conditions for approval of boilers-------- 52.1–4
steel, specifications for--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.17 Connections welded to pressure vessels---- 56.20–12
Cast-iron boilers, construction of . . . . . 57.21–24– Copper pipe, brazed------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6
57.21–33 seamless------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7
Cast-iron flanges, prohibited for class I pip Copper pipe, flanges------------ 55.19–8, 55.19–11
ing--------------------------------- 55. 19–8 Corrugated furnaces-------------------- 52.11–1
Cast-iron heating boilers---------------- 57.21–14 Corrugated furnaces, fusion welded repairs- 57.21–5
Cast- or forged-steel flanges----- 55.19–8, 55.19–11 Cracks, fusion welded repairs------------ 57.21–4
Cast-steel heads for pressure vessels- - - - - - 52.5 Crown bars, combustion chambers - - - - - - - 52.10–3
Calking edges, fusion welded repairs------ 57.21–4 Crushing tests, boiler tubes------- 51.9–7, 51.9a–8
Certification for duplicate boilers--------- 52.1–7 Curved bottom plate without reinforcement- 52.10–3
Certification of manufacturers, cast-iron Curved bottom plate with reinforcement-- 52.10–3
boilers------------------------------ 57.21–25 Curved surfaces not entirely self-supporting- 52.7–3
Check analysis, boiler tubes------------- 51.9–4, Curved tube sheets, definition of--------- 52.9–1
51.9a–5, 51.10–5 Cylindrical furnaces-------------------- 52.11–1
Chemical analyses. (See Analyses.) Cylindrical furnace repairs-------------- 57.21–5
Chemical composition, alloy-steel bolting Cylindrical shells----------------------- 52.2
material------------------ 51.16–4, 51.16a–5 Cylindrical shells, pierced for tubes--- - - - - 52.2–6
boiler tubes----------- 51.9–3, 51.9a–4, 51.10-4 Cylindrical surfaces, not self-supporting--- 52.4–3
brass pipe--------------------------- 51. 13–4 Dampers------------------------------ 53.17–3
bronze castings---------------------- 51.20–3 Dangerous places, protection of---------- 54.18–8
copper pipe------------------------- 51.14–4 Decisions of inspectors------------------ 52.1–16
gray iron castings-------------------- 51.18–3 Definition of terms- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50.2
marine steel boiler plates-------------- 51.2–2 Definitions, boiler and pressure vessel terms- 52.1–1
rivet iron---------------------------- 51.8–2 boiler mountings and attachments.------ 52.15–1
rivet steel--------------------------- 51.7–3 boiler tubes------------------------- 52.12–1
staybolt iron------------------------ 51.6–4 combustion chambers----------------- 52.10–1
staybolt steel------------------------ 51.4–3 cylindrical shells--------------------- 52.2–1
steel castings------------------------ 51.17–4 domes and steam chimneys--- - - - - - - - - - 52.4—1
steel forgings--------------------- – 51.15–6 evaporators, heaters, separators, etc.---- 52.16–2
steel pipe----------- 51.11–3, 51.11a–3, 51.11b-3 fusion welding terms------------------ 56.20–2
steel plates------------------- 51.21–4, 51.22–3 eads------------------------------- 52.5–1
wrought-iron pipe- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.12–1a openings and reinforcements----------- 52.6–1
wrought-iron bars for stays------. . . . . . 51.6–4 piping terms------------------------- 55.19–2
Circularity-------------------- 56.20–16, 57.21–5 safety valves------------------------ 52.14–1
Circumferential joints-- - - - - - - - - - - - 52.3–5, 52.3–6 stayed surfaces - - - - - - - 52.7–1.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Circumferential joints, welded------ __ _ _ 52.3–6 stays and reinforcements -- - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.8–1

56.20–4, 56.26-16 superheaters, economizers, etc - - - - - - - - - 52.13–1
Class A materials, tested.------- - - - - - - - - - 51.1–4 tube sheets and ligaments.------------- 52.9–1
Class B materials, certified-------------- 51.1–6 wrought iron----------- 51.6–2, 51.8–1, 51.12–1
Classification of materials--------------- 51.1–3 Design of boilers----------------------- 52.1–4
Classification of piping----- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–1 Design of safety valves----------------- 52.14–2
Class I piping, flange standards---------- 55. 19–8 Design of welded piping----------------- 56.20–19
Class II piping------------------------ 55.19–11 Detail requirements, openings, and rein
Class II piping, flange standards--------- 55.19–11 forcements-------------------------- 52.6–2
Class I power piping-------------------- 55. 19–6 Determination of pressure rating, pressure
Class I welding------------------------ 56.20–4 parts of boilers----------------------- 52.1–15
Class II welding----------------------- 56.20–6 Diagonal stays, formula for-------------- 52.8–4
Class III welding-------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–7 Diagram of efficiency of ligaments-------- 52.9–2
Coefficients for flat stayed surfaces------- 52.7–3 Diagram of ligaments for curved tube sheet- 52.9–2
Combustion chambers, fusion welded re Diagram, maximum diameter of unrein
irs-------------------------------- 57.21-6 forced openings---------------------- 52.6–4
Computations and factors of safety, cylin Dimensions of steel companion flanges---- 55.19–8
drical shells- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ------ 52.2–3 Dished heads-------------------------- 52.5
Computations, boiler pressure parts------ Dished heads, concave, attached by fusion
52.1–3
brazed joints------------------------ 57.21–20 welding------------------ 56.20–10, 56.20–11
butt joints-------------------------- convex, attached by fusion welding----- 56.20–11
(F–220)
INDEX
Section Externally fired boilers—Continued. Section

Distortion-------------------- 56.20–16, 57.21–5 maximum thickness of shell plates------ 52.2–7
Domes and steam chimneys------------- 52.4 spacing of flues----------------------- 52.11–4
Donkey boiler------------------------- 52.1–8 Extra strong wrought iron pipe---------- 51.12–8
Donkey boilers, installation of ---- 52.1–8, 53.17–4 Eyes for connections of sling stays------- 52.8–4
Double-ended boilers, fusible plugs------- 52.15–9 Factor of safety, definition of------------ 52.1–1
water indicators---------------------- 52.11–11 Factors of safety----------------------- 52.2–3
Double-welded butt joint, definition of---- 56.20–2 Feed valve, definition of ---------------- 52.15–1
Drawings and blueprints, boiler design---- 52.1–2 Feed valves, requirements for------------ 52.15–6
piping systems----------------------- 55.19–2 Feed-water heater, definition of - - - - - - - - - 52.16–2
superheaters, economizers------------- 52.13–2 Feed-water piping---------------------- 55.19–6
Drain pipes for steam chimneys---------- 52.4–4 Fillet weld, definition of ---------------- 56.20–2
Drains, superheater headers------------- 52.13–5 Filling and sounding connections (emer
Drifting of rivet holes------------------ 52.3–2 gency tanks) ------------------------ 55.19–14
Drilling of boilers---------------------- 54.18–4 Filling pipes, fuel oil, shut-off valves----- 55.19–15
Drilling of rivet holes.------- 52.3–2, 52.5–2, 52.8–3 Filling pipes for oil tanks--------------- 55.19–15
Drum forgings (Deleted). Fillings for fusible plugs----------------- 57.21–3
Drums and shells, fusion welded-- 56.20–1, 56.20–4 Fire-fighting equipment, inspection of - - - - 54.18—6
Dry pipes---------------------- 52.14–4, 52.15–8 Fire prevention inspection--------------- 54.18—6
Duplicate boilers, certification of --------- 52.1–7 Fittings and appliances, cast-iron boilers- 57.21–13
Economizers, definition of--------------- 52.13–1 Fittings for connecting superheaters------ 52.13–3
Edges of flanges------------------------ 52.5–2 Fittings, pipe, manufacturer's affidavit---- 55.19–3
Edges of manholes, inspection of--------- 54.18–4 Fit-up of work for fusion welding--------
56.20–6
Edges of plates, riveted joints----------- 52.2–2 Flange standards, steel----------------- 55. 19–8
Edges of stayed surfaces, tolerances for cast-iron---------------------------- 55.19–11
itch of stays------------------------ 52.8–4 Flange tables, cast iron companion flanges 55.19–11
Edges of unreinforced openings- - - - - - - - - - 52.5–3 Flange tables, steel companion flanges---- 55.19–8
Edges of welded plates------------------ 56.20–9 Flange tests, boiler tubes--------- 51.9–5, 51.9a–7
Efficiency of riveted joints--------------52.3–3 Flanged connections, cast-iron boilers- - - - 57.21–28
domes and steam chimneys------------ 52.4 Flanged edges, allowable distance-------- 52.7–3
furnaces and flues-------------------- 52.11–4 Flanged fittings for bulkheads----------- 55.19–5
Electrical equipment, installation of piping Flanged-in manholes------------------- 52.5–3
in relation to------------------------ 55.19–5 Flanges cast integral with shells or heads- 52.16–3
Electric fusion welding rules------------- 56.20 Flanges for reinforcing manholes--------- 52.6–3
Electric-resistance-welded pipe, where per Flanges of heads, attachment to shell by
mitted.------------------------------ 55.19–3 fusion welding----------------------- 56.20–9
Electric-resistance-welded boiler tubes---- 5##". Flanges on boiler heads----------------- 52.5–2
Flanges on cylindrical furnaces---------- 52.11–4
definition of------------------------- 52.12–1 Flanges, pipe, manufacturer's affidavit---- 55.19–3
thickness of ------------------------- 52.12–3 Flat heads, unstayed, definition of - - - - - - - 52.5–1
Ellipsoidal heads, tolerances for---------- 57.21–9 Flat stayed surfaces-------------------- 52.7–2
Ellipsoidal openings-------------------- 52.6–4 Flat tube sheets----------------- 52.9–1, 52.10–3
Elliptical openings.--------------------- 52.6 Flattening tests, boiler tubes------------ 51.9–6
Elliptical openings, fusion welded construc 51.9a–6, 51.10 ºf
tion-------------------------------- 56.20–12 iron rivet heads---------------------- 51.8–8
Emergency bilge pumps----------------- 55.19–12 steel rivet heads--------------------- 51.7–7
Emergency bilge suction, Diesel engine in steel pipe----------- 51.11–6, 51.11a–7, 51.11b-7
stallation---------------------------- 55.19–13 Flexible staybolts, definition of ---------- 52.8–1
Ends of sounding pipes----------------- 55.19–16 telltale holes not required.------------- 52.8–5
Ends of tubes, fire tube and water tube Flues and furnaces, inspection of -------- 54.18–4
boilers------------------------------ 52.12–2 Flues, definition of--------------------- 52.11–1
Engine room bilge pumps-------------- 55.19–13 seamless, or lapwelded, table of thick
Engine room signals-------------------- 54.18–7 DeSS---------------------- - - - - - - - - 52.11–3
Escape pipes, area of ------------------- 52.14–4 seamless, welded, or riveted, material
Etch tests, charcoal iron boiler tubes----- 51.9–9 for------------------------------- 52.11–2
wrought iron bars-------------------- 51.6–7 Foreign-built vessels admitted to Ameri
Evaporators, definition of--------------- 52.16–2 can registry, inspection of boilers---- 57.21–15
safety valves------------------------ 52.16–7 Foreign-built vessels, boilers and pressure
Examination of fusible plugs, annual in vessels of ------------------ 52.1–11, 52.1–12
spection----------------------------- 54.18–5 Forged fittings for stays-------------- - - 52.10–4
Examination of radiographs.------------- 56.20–6
Examination of stop valves and mountings- 54.18—5
Forged nozzles for reinforcing openings- - - 52.6–3
Excess weld metal---------------------- 56.20–5 Forged fittings, tube turns, etc.---------- 55.19–11
Existing vessels, reboilered.-------------- 50.1 Forged steel valves and fittings.---------- 55.19–3
Exographs.---------------------------- 56.20–5 Forge welded shells--------------------- 52.2–5
Expanding of tubes, definition of -- - - - - - - - 52.12–1 Formulae, Adamson ring or plain furnace- 52.11–3
Experimental determination of pressure bilge suction------------------------- 55.19–13
rating------------------------------ 52.1–15 Class I piping----------------------- 55.19–6
Exposure of X-ray films---------------- 56.20–5 computing maximum allowable working
Externally fired boilers, circumferential pressure of boiler shells-------------- 52.2–3
joints-----------------------------
definition of-------------------------
float gauges------------------------
52.3–5
52.1–1
52.15–11
computing required thickness of boiler
shells-----------------------------
computing strength of ligament-------- 52.2–3
52.2–3 |
longitudinal joints-------------------- 52.3—3 corrugated or ribbed furnaces---------- 52.11–3
manhole openings-------------------- 52.6 crown bars or girders------------- ---- 52.10–3
(F–221)
INDEX
Formulae—Continued. Section Section

curved reinforced bottom plate- - - - - - - - 52.10–3 Gamma-ray method of photography-- - - - - 56.20–5
curved tube sheets------------------- 52.9–2 Gasoline tanks-------------|--|--|-- - - - - 55.19–14
curved unreinforced bottom plate------ 52.10–3 General requirements (welded piping) - - - - 56.20–19
cylindrical headers------------------- 52.13–3 Girders, definition of-------------------- 52.8–1
depth of manhole flange--------------- 52.6–4 Girders or crown bars------------------- 52.8
determining area of segment of a circle.-- 52.7–2 Grade A, malleable iron castings-- - - - - - - -
51.19–2
determining working pressure and re Grade B, malleable iron castings---------51.19–12
quired thickness of stayed surfaces---- º Grades A and B boiler tubes------------- 51.9
Grades A and B staybolt steel----------- 51.4
determining self-supporting areas------- 52. 7–2 Grades A and B steel plates for welding--- 51.22
diagonal stays----------------------- 52.8–4 Grades A, B, and alloy-steel bolting
direct stays-------------------------- 52.8–4 material---------------------------- 51.16
dished heads, maximum allowable work Grades A, B, and C bronze castings- - - - - - 51.20
ing pressure----------------------- 52, 5–3 Grades A, B, and C gray iron castings.---- 51.18
efficiency of riveted joints- - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.3—3 Grades A, B, and C rivet steel----------- 51.7
flat heads, maximum allowable working Grades A, B, and Fl steel forgings.-------- 51.15
Pressure--------------------------- 52.5–3 Grades A, B, and Pl steel pipe---- - - - - - - - 51.11
flat surfaces of headers---------------- 52.13–4 Grades A, B, C, and D electric-resistance
flat tube sheets----------------------- 52.10–3 welded boiler tubes----------- - - - - - - - - 51.9a
flues, seamless or welded-- - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.12–3 Grades A, B, C, D, E, F, and G marine
maximum allowable working pressure on boiler steel plate------------ - - - - - - - - - 51.2
dished heads----------------------- 52.5–3 Great Lakes vessels, bilge piping-- - - - - - 55.19–12
maximum distance of stay on a tangent Guards over exposed machinery parts-- 54.18–8
from curved surface---------------- 52.7–3 Gusset stays, definition of--------------- 52.8–1
maximum unreinforced opening-------- 52.6–4 Handhole openings--------------------- 52.6–1
required thickness of dished heads------ 52.5–3 Head and girth joints, brazed vessels-- - - - 57.21–21,
required thickness of flat heads- - - - - - - - 52.5–3 57.21–22
staggered tubes---------------------- 52.10–3 Headers, definition of ------------- - - - - - 52.13–1
thickness of butt straps--------------- 52.3–4 Headers or fittings for superheaters, econo
thickness of lapwelded tubes----------- 52.12–3 mizers, etc.-------------------------- 52.13
thickness of seamless and electric-resist Heads attached by fusion welding-- - - - - - - 56.20–9
ance welded tubes---------- - - - - - - - - 52.12–3 dished heads, concave to pressure- - - - - - 56.20–9
Foundation for boilers------------------ 53.17–1 dished heads, convex to pressure------- 56.20–9
Fracture tests, welded, wrought iron pipe- 51.12–3 Heating coils, fuel-oil tanks--- - - - - - - - - - 55.19–15
Fuel-oil discharge piping---------------- 55.19–6 Heating surfaces of boilers, re safety valve
Fuel-oil heaters, definition of------------ 52.16–2 capacity---------------------------- 2.14–3
Fuel-oil requirements------------------- 57.21–13 Heat-treatment------------------------ 51.1—16
Fuel-oil service piping---------- 55.19–3, 55.19–15 alloy-steel bolting material - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.16–3
Fuel-oil settling tanks--------- - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–15 marine boiler steel plate--------------- 51.2–1
Fuel-oil tanks, heating coils, welded con steel castings------------------------ 51.17–3
nections, sounding pipes--------------- 55.19–15 steel forgings------------------------ 51.15–5
Fuel-oil vent pipes--------------------- 55.19–15 steel plates (flange and firebox quality) -- 51.21–3
Furnace, definition of ------------------- 52.11–1 Heavy oil tanks----------------------- 55.19–14
repairs------------------------------ 57.21–5 High temperature, definition of---------- 50.2
Furnaces, Adamson ring type, working pres Holes in welded joints--------- 55.19–6, 56.20–12
sure and thickness------------------ 52.11–3 Hollow staybolts, definition of ----------- 52.8–1
Adamson ring type, specifications for--- 52.11-4 H. R. T. boilers, fusible plug location-- - - 52.15–9
and combustion chambers, repairs------ 57.21–6 Hydrostatic and hammer tests, fusion weld
corrugated or ribbed, working pressure 108--------------------------------- 56.20–14
.# thickness---------------------- 52.11–3 Hydrostatic tests, boilers-------- 54.18–2, 54.18–4
corrugated or ribbed, gaging of - - - - - - - - 52.11–4 boiler tubes--------- 51.9–8, 51.9a–12, 51.10–10
requirements for materials------------- 52.11–2
riveted, minimum efficiency of joint---- 52.11-4 §...]”.
brazed pressure vessels- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.13–10
57.21–18
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
thickness of, maximum and minimum--- 52.11-4 cast-iron boilers- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57.21–30

Fusible plugs.-------------------------- 57.21–3 copper pipe-------------------------- 51.14–9
cast-iron boilers---------------------- 57.21–33 iron pipe---------------------------- 51.12–7
definition of------------------------- 52.15–1 steel castings------------------------ 51.17–7
marking----------------------------- 57.21–3 steel forgings------------------------ 51.15–8
specifications for location - - - - --------- 52.15–9 steel pipe----------- 51.11–7, 51.11a–8, 5.iiib–8
Fusion welded connections--------------- 56.20–12 to determine pressure ratings---------- 57.21–11
stress relief------------------------- 56.20–13 welded piping----------------------- 56.20–19
Fusion welding, Class I----------------- 56.20–4 Identification markers for X-ray films---- 56.20–5
Class II----------------------------- 56.20–6 Increase of boiler pressure-------------- 57.21–14
Class III---------------------------- 56.20–7 Independent fuel piping and tanks (emer
definition of------------------------- 56.20–2 gency units)---------------------- 55.19–14
for boiler construction---------------- 52.3–6 filling and sounding connections- - - - - - - 55.19–14
repairs------------------------------ 57.21–4 gasoline tanks----------------------- 55.19–14
Gage cocks---------------------------- 52.15–11 construction----------------------- 55.19–14
cast iron boilers---------------------- 57.21–33 installation------------------------ 55.19–14
Gages, glass, water-------------------- 52.15–11 tests------------------------------ 55.19–14
PreSSllTel----- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.15–11 heavy oil tanks---------------------- 55.19–14
steam pressure, inspection of --------- 54.18—5 construction----------------------- 55.19–14
water, inspection of------------------- 54.18—5 installation------------------------ 55.19–14
Gags, safety valve---------------------- 52.14–5 tests------------------------------ 55.19–14
(F–222)
INDEX
Independent fuel piping and tanks—Cont. Section Joints —Continued. Section

outage------------------------ - - - - - -
riveted—continued.
for domes and steam chimneys------- 52.4–3
material of.----------------------- 52.3–2
pierced for tubes------- 52.3–3, 52.8–4, 52.9–2
Independent power bilge pumps reinforcing of openings-------------- 2.6–4
Individual welding operators' qualification thickness of butt straps------------- 52.3–4
tests-------------------------------- 56.20–3 types of, test requirements.------------ 56.20–4
Inland vessels, bilge and ballast piping--- 55.19–12 welded------------------------------ 52.3–6
Inspection and rejection of welded wrought Lap joints, welded construction-- 56.20–7, 56.20–10
iron pipe---------------------------- 51.12–9 iapweided and seamless steel boiler tubes- 52.12
Inspection for fire prevention------------ 54.18—6 Lapwelded and seamless steel pipe---- 51.11, 51.11a
Inspection, boilers and equipment-------- 54.18—2 Lapwelded boiler tubes, table of thickness- 52.12–3
boilers and main steam pipe----------- 54. 18–4 Lapwelded iron boiler tubes, materials---- 52.12–2
boilers of foreign-built vessels---------- 52.1–11 Lapwelded steel boiler tubes, materials---- 52.12–2
boilers of foreign-built vessels under Lapwelded steel or iron pipe, temperature
American registry----------------- 57.21–15 limitations------------------ 55.19–3, 55.19–6
boilers under construction------------- 52.1–10 Lapwelded tubes, definition of------------ 52.12–1
class A material---------------------- 51.1–4 Layout and dimensions (welded piping)--- 56.20–19
dangerous places--------------------- 54.18–8 Lead pipe, where not permitted.---------- 55.19–13
engine room signals------------------- 54.18–7 Leeds suspension bulb furnace------------ 52.11–4
existing boiler installation------------- 54. 18–4 Lever safety valve, definition of----------- 52.14–1
foreign-built pressure vessels----------- 52.1–11 renewal prohibited.-------------------- 52.14–2
fusible plugs------------------------- 54.18—5 Longitudinal joints, classes I, II, and III:
malleable iron castings---------------- 51.19 riveted joints------------------- _ _ _ _ _ 52.3—3
mountings and attachments----------- 54.18–5 welded vessels--------------- 56.20–9, 56.20–10
operation on trial trip--------------- 54.18–11 Low and moderate temperature, definition
quarters--------------------------- 54.18–10 of---------------------------------- 50.2
rivet iron--------------------------- 51.8–10 Macro-etch tests for steel forgings------- 51.15–12
safety valves on reduced pressure lines-- 54.18–5 Magnaflux (paramagnetic powder)-------- 56.20–9
sea chests, sea valves, strainers, etc.----- 54.18–9 Main and auxiliary steam piping, hydro
unfired pressure vessels-------------- 54.18–12 static tests before installation-- 55.19–10, 55.19–11
water columns, test cocks, and water Main and auxiliary stop valve, type and
gageS----------------------------- 54.18–5 description------------------- 52.15–1, 52.15–4
welding in shops.-------------------- 56.20–19 Main boiler, definition of --------------- 52.1–1
wrought iron pipe-------------------- 51.12–9 Main circulating pumps, bilge injection-- 55.19–13
Inspection openings, boiler shells--------- 52.6–1 Main steam pipes, tests and inspection---- 54.18–4
Inspector, definition of------------------ 50.2 Main stop valve, definition of ----------- 52.15–1
Inspectors' decisions-------------------- 52.1–16 Malleable iron, temperature limitations-- 51.19-1,
Inspectors not to accept statements----- 54.18–13 51.19–11, 55.19–7
Installation, boilers--------------------- 53.17 uses of ----------------------------- 55.19–3
cast-iron heating boilers.I.I.I.I.I.I.I. 57.21–32 Manhole cover plates------------------- 52.6–3
donkey boilers----------------------- 53.17–4 Manhole opening, externally fired boiler--- 52.6–2
piping------------------------------ 55.19–5 Manhole or access openings in dished heads. 52.5–3
refrigeration machinery-------------- 57.21–17 Manholes, elliptical form, dimensions of -- 52.6–1
safety valves------------------------ 52.14–4 for steam chimneys------------------- 52.4–4
Intakes of filling pipes----------------- 55.19–15 Manifolds----------------------------- 52.15–5
Internal-combustion engines (bilge-pump definition of------------------------- 52.15–1
suctions)--------------------------- .19–13 oil transfer and filling systems-------- 55.19–15
Internally fired fire-tube boiler, definition of 52.1–1 Manufacture, steel, process of - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1–12
Joining of steel stays------------------- 52.8–5 Manufacturer's affidavit, boilers or pressure
Jointed stays-------------------------- 52.8–3 vessels------------------------ 52.1–6, 57.21–2
Joint efficiency, class I welding----------- 56.20–4 fusible plugs------------------------- 57.21–3
class II welding---------------------- 56.20–6 materials and appliances-------------- 57.21–2
class III welding--------------------- 56.20–7 Manufacturer's certification, cast-iron boil
Joints, back pitch of rivets-------------- 52.3–3 erS------------------------------ 57.21–25
brazed, for unfired pressure vessels---- 57.21–18 piping, valves, fittings, flanges, etc.----- 55.19–2
circumferential, riveted.--------------- 52.3–5 steel plate (flange and firebox quality) -- 51.22
relative strength of.---------------- 52.3–5 steel plates for welding--------------- 51.22–11
circumferential, welded-------------- 56.20–10 Manufacturer's guarantee of safety valve
stress relieving-------------------- 56.20–13 capacity---------------------------- 52.14–3
test plates----------------- 56.20–4, 56.20–9 Manufacturer's record of process (welded
drilling of rivet holes----- 52.3–2, 52.5–2, 52.8–3 - º - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–19
fitting of P. and butt straps-------- 52.3–2 Marine boiler steel plate------------------ 51.2
for Class I piping------------ 55.19–8, 56.20–19 Marking, boiler tubes------------------- 51.9–16,
forge-welded------------------------- 52.2–5 51.9a–18, 51.10–18
for welded test plates----------------- 56.20–4 bronze castings--------------------- 51.20–10
longitudinal------------------------- 52.3—3 cast-iron boilers---------------------- 57.21–31
classes I, II, and III, welded------- 56.20–10 fusible plugs------------------------- 57.21–3
externally fired boilers-------------- 52.3–3 heaters, evaporators, separators, etc - - - - 52.16–6
fitting up------------------------ 56.20–16
riveted, butt straps pierced for tube holes 52.3–4 malleable iron castings-------- 51.19–9, 51.19–17
distance from rivet holes to calking marine boiler steel plate--------------- 51.4–10
edge---------------------------- 52.3–3 steel bars and shapes----------------- 51.5—10
efficiency of—---------------------- 52.3–3 steel forgings----------------------- 51.15–14
(F–223)
INDEX
Marking—Continued. Section Section

steel pipe--------------------------- 51.11–9, Number of tests, boiler tubes - 51.9–11, 51.9a–14,
51.11a–17, 51.11b-16 51.10–12
steel plates (flange and firebox quality) — 51.21–12 brass pipe-------------------------- 51.13–11
steel plates for welding--------------- 51.22–10 bronze castings---------------------- 51.20–7
wrought-iron bars-------------------- 51.6–10 copper pipe------------------------- 51. 14–10
wrought-iron pipe------------------- 51.12–10 malleable-iron castings---------------- 51.19–5
Materials, alternative-------------------- 51.1–17 marine boiler steel plate--------------- 51.2–7
boiler construction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1–3, 52.1–9 rivet iron--------------------------- 51.8–6.
boiler mountings and attachments------ 52.15–2 rivet steel--------------------------- 51.7–7
butt straps-------------------------- 52.3–2 staybolt steel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
51.4–7
cast-iron boilers- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57.21–26 steel bars and shapes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.5–7
class A, inspection of - - - - - - - - - - ------- 51.1–4 steel castings------------------------ 51.17–9
class B, certification of---------------- 51.1–6 steel forgings------------------------ 51.15–10
classification of---------------------- 51.1—3 steel pipe---------- 51.11–8, 51.11a–10, 51.11b-10
cylindrical shells--------------------- 52.2–2 steel plates (flange and firebox quality) -- 51.21–9
domes and steam chimneys------------ 52.4—2 steel plates for welding---------------- 51.22—7
flanges, class I piping----------------- 55. 19–8 wrought-iron bars for stays--------- - - - 51.6–8
flanges, class II piping--------------- 55. 19–11 wrought-iron pipe-------------------- 51.12–6
forge welded shells------------------- 52.2–5 welds (piping)--------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–19
headers or fittings-------------------- 52.13–3 Nuts, carbon and alloy-steel for high-tem
heads------------------------------- 52.5–2 perature service--------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.16a
heaters, evaporators, separators, etc.-- 52.16–3 Nuts for screwed stays----- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.8–2
pipes, valves, fittings, flanges, etc.------ 55.19–3 Nuts, minumum thickness of, for screw
reclassification of --- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1—17 stays------------------------------- 52.8–5
stays and reinforcements – 51.4, 51.5, 51.6, 52.8–2 Oil, fuel oil settling tanks--- - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–15
steel, for brazed vessels--------------- 57.21–19 fuel, requirements for- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57.21–13
stock plates------------------------- 51.1–14 service piping----------------------- 55. 19–15
tested, forms and affidavits------------ 57.21–2 Oil transfer and filling systems - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–15
welded construction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–8 Openings, elliptical, in shells of boilers -- - - 52.6–2
workmanship and finish--- - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1–15 Openings for fusion welded connections---- 56.20–12
Maximum allowable diameter of unrein Openings, handhole------------- - - - - - - - - 52.6
forced opening in a head- - - - - - - - - - - - 52.6–4 in externally fired boilers.-- - - - - - - - - - - - 52.6–2
Maximum allowable fiber stress on piping- 55.19–6 in shells or heads of boilers- - - - - - - - - - - - 52.6–1
Maximum allowable pitch of rivets------- 52.3–3 reinforced by fittings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.6–3
Maximum allowable stress, bolting------- 52.16–5 unreinforced, formula for---- - - - - - - - - - - 52.6–4
Maximum allowable working pressure, class . Operators, welding, definition of - - - - - - - - - 56.20–2
I piping--------------------------- 55.19–6 qualification of----------------------- 56.20–3
curved tube sheets------------------- 52.9–2 Outage (emergency fuel tanks) - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–14
cylindrical cast shells----------------- 52.16–4 Overflow pipes------------ - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–15
definition of--------------------- 50.2, 52.1–1 Paramagnetic powder--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–19
flat surfaces of castings.--------------- 52.16–4 Penetrameter-------------------------- 56.20–5
stayed curved surfaces---------------- 52.7–3 Permissible variations and dimensions,
steam chimney linings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.4–3 wrought-iron pipe-------------------- 12–8
unstayed dished heads- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.5–3 Permissible variations in diameter, rivet
Maximum diameter of unreinforced open steel----------------------------- 51.7–8
ings-------------------------------- 52.6–4 staybolt steel------------------------ 51.4–8
Mºd, of attachment of flanges to piping Permissible variations in dimensions and
class I piping------------------------ 55.19–8 weight, boiler tubes---------- 51.9–14, 51.10–16
Methods of attaching flanges to class II Permissible variation in gage, steel bars
piping------------------------------ 55.19–11 and shapes-------------------------- 51.5–8
Micrographic tests, rivet iron------------ 51.8–7 Permissible variations in thickness and
Minimum area, brace pins--------------- 52.8–4 weight, marine boiler steel plate------ 51.2–8
Minimum size of safety valves for cast-iron steel plates (flange and firebox quality) — 51.21–10
boilers--------------------------- 57.21–33 steel plates for welding---------------- 51.22—8
thickness of bronze and steel fittings and Physical properties and tests, rivet iron-- - 51.8–8
valves---------------------------- 55.19–4 Pipe, attachment by screwed threads- - - - - - 55.19–8
thickness of cylindrical shells - - - - - - - - - - 52.2–3 attachment by Wan Stone flanges------- 55. 19–8
thickness of material for threaded connec 55. Ig-li
tions----------------------------- 57.21–29 attachment to flange by fusion weld-- - - - 55.19–3,
thickness of nuts for screwed stays - - - - - 52.8–5 55.19–8, 55.19–10, 55.19–11, 56.20–19
thickness of reinforcing rings or flanges -- 52.6–4 attachment to high hub flanges - - - - - - - - 55. 19–8
Modifications in elongation, marine boiler brazed copper---------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6
steel plate------------------------- 51.2–4 copper, attached to flange by beading
steel bars and shapes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.5–4 the end over- - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–8, 55.19–11
steel plates (flange and firebox quality) -- 51.21–6 attachment to flanges - - - - - - 55.19–8, 55.19–11
steel plates for welding---------------- 51.22—4 copper or brass connected by braze-weld
wrought-iron bars-------------------- 51.6–5 method.--------------------------- 55. 19–8
Mountings and attachments, inspection of 54.18—5 copper, stress relief- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55. 19–10
temperature limitations------------- 55.19–3,
tion-------------------------------- 57.21–16 55.19–6, 55.19–7
New boilers, tests and inspection of -- - - - 54. 18–2 use of loose flanges----- - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–11
Nondestructive tests, X-ray, examination of drilled for gaging-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–10
welds------------------------------- 56.20–5 electric-resistance-welded-------- 55.11b, 55.19–3
(F-224)
INDEX
Pipe—Continued. Section Piping—Continued. Section

fittings, fºrmissible materials, Class I- - - 55.19–3 welded—continued.
Class II--------------------------- 55.19–3 types of welded joints to be used - - - - - 56.20–19
forged-steel welding---------------- 55.19–3 || Pitch of stays - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.7–3
soldered fittings-------------------- 55.19–3 || Pitch of tube holes, curved tube sheet - - - 52.9–2
flanges, dimensional standards, steel -- - - , 55.19–8 || Plain furnace----------- 52.11–1, 52.11–2, 52.11–3
cast iron------------------- 55.19–11 || Porosity of welds, radiographs - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–5
- - - - - - -
forged steel-------------- 55.19–8, 55.19–11 || Preparation of plates for welding--- - - - - - - 56.20–9

material------------------ 55.19–8, 55.19–11 | Pressure gages------------------------ 52.15–10
screwed threads- - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–8, 55.19–11 || Pressure, hydrostatic, for welded vessels - 56.20–14
lap-welded steel or wrought iron, tem- limitations, class II welding- - - - - - - - - - 56.20–6
perature limitations---------------- 55.19–6 limitations, class III welding - - - - - - - 56.20–7
ead-------------------------------- 55.19–3 || Process, submerged melt electric welding_- 56.20–2
maximum diameter, threaded, when Process of manufacture, alloy-steel bolting
attached directly to boiler--- - - - - - - - - 52.15–2 material----------------- – 51.16–2, 51.16a–2
means for draining-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55. 19–3 boiler tubes------------ 51.9–2, 51.9a–2, 51.10–2
screwed into boilers, minimum number of brass pipe-------------------- . . . . 51.13–2
threads----------------------- _ _ _ _ 55.19–10 copper pipe-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---- __ 51. 14–2
seamless brass----------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6 gray-iron castings---------------- - - - - - 51.18–2
seamless brass, temperature limita- malleable-iron castings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51. 19–2
tions----------------------- 55.19–6, 55.19–7 rivet steel----------------------------- 51.7–2
seamless copper--------- - - - - - - 55.19–3, 55.19–6 staybolt steel-------------------------- 51.4–2
seamless steel -- - - - - - - - 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7 steel bars and shapes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.5–1
suction, for engine rooms------------- 55.19–13 steel castings------------------------- 51.17–2
for main circulating pumps--------- 55. 19–13 steel forgings------------------------- 51.15–2
for passenger vessels--- - - - - - - - - - - - - 55. 19–13 steel pipe- - - - - - - - - - 51.11–2, 51.11a–2, 51.11b-2
welded, pierced with holes ----- - - - - - - - 55.19–6 steel plates (flange and fire-box quality) - – 51.21–2
wrought-iron or steel, stress relief- - - - - 55.19–10 steel plates for welding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.22–2
Pipes, for bending --------------------- 51.11–5, Process of steel manufacture - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1–12
51.11a–6, 51.12–4, 51.13–9, 51.14–7, 51.19–6 | Protection of woodwork from boiler--- - - - - 53.17–2
bilge suction, diameters of ---------- 55.19–13 | Pumping arrangements.----------------- 55.19–13
lead, where prohibited - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–13 | Pumping units, fuel oil--------- - - - - - - - - 55.19–15
overflow--------------------------- 55.19–15 | Pumps, bilge----------------- 55.19–12, 55.19–13
seamless steel, temperature limita- Purves ribbed furnace--- 52.11–1, 52.11–2, 52.11–3
tions----------------------- 55.19–6, 55.19–7 | Qualification of welding operators----- - - - - 56.20–3
sounding for tank - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–16 | Qualification of welding process (piping) - , 56.20–19
through watertight bulkheads, fittings-- 55.19–5 || Quench bend tests, iron rivets------------- 51.8–4
vent----------------------- 55.19–14, 55.19–15 steel rivets---------------------------- 51.7–5
Piping, auxiliary, connections to more than Radiographs of welded joints------------- 56.20–5
one boiler-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–5 || Radius of dished heads, formula for------- 57.21–9
bilge and ballast-------------------- 55.19–12 || Reannealing, malleable-iron castings- - - - - - 51.19–7
bilge suction------------------------ 55.19–13 || Reboilering of existing vessels--------------- 50.1
blow-off, discharge------------------ 55.19–10 | Reclassification of boiler materials - - - - - - - - 51.1–17
thickness of ---------------------- 55.19–6 || Reduced pressure lines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–5
class I, formula for thickness-- - - - - - - - - - 55.19–6 | Reduced section tension test specimens---- 56.20–4,
class II, thickness of - - - - - ---------- 55.19–11 56.20–6
connections (emergency fuel tanks) ---- 55.19–14 || Refrigerating machinery, installation of - - - 57.21–17
definitions--------------------------- 55.19.2 | Reinforced fusion-welded connections III 56.20–12
feed-water and blow-off, extra strength Reinforcement of curved plate for back con
required. ------------------- _ _ _ 55.19–6 nections----------------------------- 52.10–3
fuel-oil service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–6, 55.19–15 Reinforcement of ligaments - - - ------------ 52.9–3
general requirements- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–2 || Reinforcement of welded joints - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–10
hangers and supports----------. - - - - 55.19–5 || Reinforcements for shell openings - - - - - - - - - - 52.6–3
holes for gaging--------------- ----- 55.19–10 || Reinforcements for strengthening plates----- 52.8–1
location of sea cocks and other fittings-- 55.19–13 | Reinforcing rings for Adamson furnaces - - - - 52.11-4
main and auxiliary, hydrostatic shop Rejection of fusible plugs.--------- - - - - - - - - 57.21–3
test -- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -55.19–10
-- - - - - - - | Rejections, boiler material - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.1–10
manufacturer's affidavits--------- - - - - - 55.19–3 brass pipe--------------------------- 51.13–14
near switchboards ------------- - - - - - 55. 19–5 copper pipe------------------------- 51.14–10
oil filling and transfer systems- - - - - - - - 55.19–15 malleable-iron castings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 51.19–10
oil service---------------------- _ _ _ _ 55.19–15 rivet iron---------------------------- 51.8–11
power, class I---...-------------------- 55.19–6 | Relief valve, definition of.---------- 52.14–1 - - - - - -
reduced pressure lines, reducing valves-- 55.1%-3 || Renewal of plate in stayed surfaces- 57.21–4, 57.21–7
systems----------------------------- *** | Repairs and replacements---------------- 52.1–14
welded: Request for increase of pr 57.21–14
base material and its preparation-- - - 56.20–19 equi ease of pressure---------- -
- - -
design of piping----------- - - - - - - - - 56.20–19 Requirements for fuel oil---------------- 57.21–13
general requirements --- - 56.20–19 | Retests---------------------------------- 51.1—9
hydrostatic tests -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–19 || Retests, boiler tubes--- 51.9–12, 51.9a–15, 51.10–13
layout and dimensions of piping- - - - 56.20–19 steel castings------------------------ 51.17–10
manufacturer's record of process--- - 56.20–19 steel forgings-------------------_s , :- 51.15–11
number, type, and size of test welds-- 56.20–19 | Riveted flues-------------------- 52.11–2, 52.11–3
qualification of welding processes-- - - 56.20–19 || Riveted joints- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52.3
radiographic and other tests-- - - - - - - 56.20–19 butt strap.----------------------------- 52.3-4
stress relieving-------------------- 56.20–19 circumferential------------------------ 52.3–5
(F–225)
INDEX
Riveted joints—Continued. Section Staybolts—Continued. Section

longitudinal--------------------------- 52.3—3 nuts for------------------------ 52.8–2, 52.8–5
Riveted patches------------------------ 57.21–5 riveted.------------------------- 52.8–2, 52.8–5
Rivets for connecting braces and stays----- 52.8–4 solid-------------------------------- 52.8–1
Rivets for stays------------------------- 52.8–2 welded collar for--------------------- 52.8–5
Round bar stays------------------------- 52.8–2 Stayed areas--------------------------- 52.7–2
Rules for construction of cast-iron boilers. 57.21–24 Stayed furnaces, fusion welded repairs---- 57.21–6
Safe end boiler tubes, definition of -------- 52.12–1 Stayed plates, riveted to a flange---------
Safety valves, accessories---------------- 52.14–2 Stayed surfaces- ----------------------
accumulation tests-------------------- 52.14–3 distance between tubes and adjacent
adjustment of.----------------------- 52.14–5 stays-----------------------------
approval of.------------------------- 52.14–2 fusion welded repairs----------
bodies, definition of------------------- 52.14–1 Stays and reinforcements---------------- 2.8
capacity of -------------------------- 52.14–3 Stays and staybolts, allowable loads------ 57.21–10
computations for--------------------- 52.14–3 Stays, coefficients for------------------- 52
definition of-------------------------- 52.14–1 combustion chambers, upper corners of - 52.7–3
for cast-iron heating boilers------------ 57.21–33 crowfoot---------------------------- 52.8–1
installation of------------------------ 52.14–4 curved surfaces---------------------- 52.7–3
installed on heaters and evaporators---- 52.16–6, diagonal---------------------------- 52.8–1
52.16–7 formula for------------------------ 52.8–4
instructions to chief engineers----------- 52.14–5 required area for------------------- 52.8–4
lever type-------------------- 52.14–1, 52.14–2 distance permissible from shell--------- 52.7–2
definition of----------------------- 52.14–1 doº--------------------------------- 52.8–1
manufacturer's guarantee - - ----------- 52.14–3 ends or connections--- - - - - 52.8–1, 52.8–2, 52.8–3
marking by manufacturer------------- 52.14–6 formula for--------------------- 52.7–3, 52.8–4
material of.------------------------- 52.14–2 girder or bridge---------------- 52.8–1, 52.10–3
on reduced pressure lines-------------- 54.18—5 gusset------------------------- 52.8–1, 52.8–2
pressure loaded, pilot actuated, definition required area of.------------------- 52.8–4
of-------------------------------- 52.14–1 head to head------------------------ 52.8–1
seals-------------------------------- 52.14–5 jointed------------------------------ 52.8–3
spring loaded, definition of ------------ 52.14–1 eyes and pins---------------------- 52.8–4
tests------------------------- 52.14–3, 52.14–5 palms, lugs, or flange connections for- - - 52.8–4
Salinometer cocks-------------- 52.15–1, 52.15–12 sling type--------------------------- 52.8–1
Sanitary pumps----------------------- 55.19–13 special tolerances--------------------- 52.8–4
Scope (emergency fuel tanks) ----------- 55.19–14 telltale holes-------------------- 52.8–1, 52.8–5
Screwed bonnet valves------------------ 55. 19–3 welded------------------------------ 52.8–2
for fuel oil systems------------------- 55.19–15 Stay tubes----------------------- 52.8–1, 52.8–2
Screwed threads, diameter limitations----- º,
5.19–
definition of------------------- 52.8–1, 52.12–1
method of securing------------------- 52.8–3
Screw staybolts, telltale holes----- 52.8–1, 52.8–5 Steam chimney fittings----------------- 52.4–4
Screw stays--------------------------- 52.8–1 Steam chimneys and domes - - - ---------- 52.4 .
Sea chests, sea valves and strainers, inspec Steam gages for cast iron heating boilers-- 57.21–3
tion of------------------------------ 4.18–9 Steam pipes, means for draining--------- 55.
Sea cocks and other fittings------------- 55.19–13 Steam whistles, steam supply------------ 55.19–5
Seamless brass pipe, temperature limita Steel castings-------------------------- 51.17
tions----------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7 Steel flange standards------------------- 55.19–8
Seamless copper pipe, temperature limita Steel, forged or cast (valve materials)----- 55.19–3
tions----------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7 steel'or iron pipe, required thickness of 55.16-11
Seamless shells------------------------- 52.2–4 Steel stays, not permitted to be welded---
Seamless steel boiler tubes, definition of -- 52.12–1 Stiffeners------------------------------ 52.8–2
table of thickness-------------------- 52.12–3 Stock plates for repairs----------------- 51.1–14
Seamless steel pipe------ 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7 Stop valves-------------------- 52.15–1, 52.15–4
Seamless steel piping, temperature restric Stress relief of flanges after welding------ 55. 19–10
tions----------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7 Stress relieving of welded joints- - - ------ 56.20–19
Separate combustion chambers, definition Structural shapes for reinforcements - - - - - 52.10–2
of---------------------------------- 52.10–1 Structural stiffeners-------------------- 52.10–1
Separators, steam---------------------- 52.16–2 Striking plates for sounding pipes-------- 55.19–16
Service fuel oil pipes------------------ 55.19–15 Stud bolts for boiler connections--------- 52.15–2
Shell joints, approved types------------- 52.3–1 Stud bolts for bolting flanges------------ 55.19–9
Signals,º room to bridge----------- 54.18–7 Stuffing boxes on deep tank bulkheads---- 55.19–5
Single-welded butt joints---------------- 56.20–2, Submerged melt electric welding process-- 56.20–2
56.20–9, 56.20–10 Suctions for bilge pumps---------------- 55.19–13
Sounding pipes------------------------ 55.19–16 Superheaters, definition of -------------- 52.13–1
Specifications for fusible plugs.----------- 57.21–3 etail requirements.------------------ 52.13–5
Stamping of boiler plate---------------- 51.1–13 safety valves for--------------------- 52.13–5
Standard hydrostatic test for pressure Syphons for bilges--------------------- 55.19–12
rating------------------------------ 57.21–11 Tables of allowable loads on staybolts---- 57.21–10
Statutory requirements.----------------- 51.1–1 Telltale hole, definition of --------------- 52.8–1
Stay bars and stay tubes, upset for thread Temperature limitations, brass pipe------ 55.19–3,
ing--------------------------------- 52.8–1
stºolis, alignment of holes in cylindrical 55.19–6, 55.19–7
shells----------------------------- 52.8–3 bronze castings---------------------- 51.20–1,
flexible------------------------------ 52.8–1 51.15–2, 52.16–3, 55.19–7
hollow ---------------------------- 52.8–1 copper pipe------ - - - - - 55.19–3, 55.19–6, 55.19–7
maximum length of.------------------ 52.8–5 for piping-------------------- 55.19–6, 55.19–7
(F–226)
INDEX
Temperature limitations—Continued. Section Section

general------------------------------ 50.1 Unreinforced openings, maximum diameter
steel bolting -- 52.15–2, 52.16–5, 55.19–3, 55.19-9 of---------------------------- --- 52.6–4
welded piping----------------------- 56.20–19 in shells or drums, may be closed.------- 57.21–4
Tensile properties, alloy-steel bolting ma Unstayed heads------------------------ 52.5–1
terial----------------------------- 51.16–5 Valves and cocks, location of------------ 55. 19–10
boiler tubes------------------ 51.9a–9, 51.10–6 Valves and fittings, bronze- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–3
bronze castings---------------------- 51.20–5 bronze, temperature limitations-------- 51.20–1
grav iron castings-------------------- 51.18–4 52.15–2, 52.16–3, 55.19%
malleable iron castings-------- 51.19–3, 51.19–13 malleable or cast iron, temperature limi
marine boiler steel plates-------------- 51.2–3 tations------------ 51.19–1, 51.19–11, 55.19–7
rivet iron--------------------------- 51.8–3 manufacturer's test------------------- 55.19–3
rivet steel--------------------------- 51.7–4 Valves and mountings, inspection of - - - - - 54.18—5
steel castings------------------------ 51.17–5 Valves, blow-off-------------- - - - - - - - - - - 52.15–7
steel forgings------------------------ 51.15–7 bolted bonnets----------------------- 55. 19–3
steel pipe---------- 51.11–4, 51.11a–5, 51.11b-6 cast-iron---------------------------- 55. 19–3
steel plates (flange and firebox quality) -- 51.21–5 cast-iron boilers--------------------- 57.21–32
steel plates for welding---------------- 51.22—4 design of--------------------------- 55.19–10
wrought iron bars for stays------------ 51.6–3 direction of closure- - - - - - - - --- 52.15–4, 55.19–3
wrought iron pipe-------------------- 51.12–2 feed-------------------------------- 52.15–6
Tension tests, boiler material------------ 51.1–7 rising stem type---------------------- 55.19–3
welded joints------------------------ 56.20–4 safety, cast iron boilers--------------- 57.21–13
Test cocks, definition of----------------- 52.15–1 sea and strainers--------------------- 54.18–9
Test plates, class III vessels-------------56.20–7 steel-------------------------------- 55.19–3
class II vessels----------------------- 56.20–6 stop, main and auxiliary-------------- 52.15–4
class I vessels------------------------ 56.20–4 union bonnet---------------- 55.19–3, 55.19–15
longitudinal joints-------------------- 56.20–4 Van Stone flanges-------------- 55.19–8, 55.19–11
circumferential joints----------------- 56.20–4 Went pipes---------------------------- 55.19–15
Test reports, boiler material------------- 51.1—8 Wents (emergency fuel tanks) -- - - - - - - - - - 55.19–14
Test results, minimum requirements.------ 56.20–4, Vertical boilers, fusible plugs in- - - - - - - - - - 52.15–9
56.20–6 Water column, definition of -- - - - - - - - - - - - 52.15–1
welded material---------------------- 56.20–8 Water column pipes-------------------- 57.21–33
Test welds (piping)-------------------- 56.20–19 Water gage glasses--------------------- 57.21–33
Tests and inspection of new boilers------- 54.18—2 Water indicators----------------------- 52.15–11
Tests and inspection of used boilers------ 54.18–3 Welded head attachments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–12
Tests, bend and transverse-------------- 56.20–4 Welded joints------------------ 52.3–6, 56.20–10
Tests of finished rivets, steel------------- 51.7–7 Welded pipe pierced with holes - - - - - - - - - - 55.19–6
Tests of fusible plugs.------------------- 57.21–3 Welder, definition of -------------------- 56.20–2
Tests, standard hydrostatic, for pressure Welding. Class I----------------------- 56.20–4
parts----------------------------- 57.21–11 class II----------------------------- 56.20–6
X-ray------------------------------- 56.20–5 class III---------------------------- 56.20–7
details of.------------------------- 56.20–5 fusion, rules for---------------------- part 56
Test specimens, boiler tubes------------- 51.9–10, inspection of.----------------------- 56.20–15
51.9a–13, 51.10–11 necks and nipples--------------- - - - - - 56.20–12
bronze castings---------------------- 51.20–6 operators, qualification test------------ 56.20–3
gray iron castings.-------------------- 51.18–7 preparation for---------------------- 56.20–9
malleable iron castings- - - - - - - 51.19–4, 51.19–14 Welding procedure, test plates---- 56.20–4, 56.20–6
marine boiler steel plate--------------- 51.2–6 Welding repairs------------------------ 57.21–4
rivet iron--------------------------- 51.8–5 Welding rods and electrodes, approval of - 56.20–3
rivet steel--------------------------- 51.7–6 Welds for attaching dished heads- 56.20–9, 56.20–10
staybolt steel------------------------ 51.4–6 Workmanship and finish, alloy-steel bolting
steel bars and shapes----------------- 51.5–6 material-------------------------- 51.16–7
steel castings------------------------ 51.17–8 bronze castings---------------------- 51.20–8
steel forgings------------------------ gray iron castings-------------------- 51.18–10
steel pipe---------- malleable iron castings-------- 51.19–8, 51.19–16
steel plates (flange and firebox quality) -- 51.21–8 rivet iron---------------------------- 51.8–9
steel plates for welding---------------- 51.22–6 rivet steel--------------------------- 51.7–9
Threaded openings, cast iron boilers----- 57.21–29 steel forgings------------------------ 51.15–13
Throat, welded joint, definition of-------- 56.20–2 Workmanship and material, boiler mount
Through stay, definition of-------------- 52.8–1 ings------------------------------ 52.15–2
Tin fillings, fusible plugs.---------------- 57.21–3 boiler tubes------------------------- 52.12–2
Tolerances for ellipsoidal heads- - - - - - - - - - 57.21–9 evaporators, heaters, separators, etc. --- 52.16–3
Treatment of defects, bronze castings----- 51.20–7 heads------------------------------- 52.5–2
Tube holes in cylindrical shells----------- 52.9–2 reinforcements----------------------- 52.6–3
Tube sheets----------------------- 52.9, 52.10–3 safety valves------------------------ 52.14–2
Tubes, boiler and superheater------------ 52.12 Workmanship, brass pipe--------------- 51.13–12
boiler, table of thicknesses------------- 52.12–3 stays and braces---------------------- 52.8–3
Types of welded joints- 56.20–4, 56.20–10, 56.20–19 steel castings------------------------ 51.17–11
Unfired pressure vessels---------------- 54.18–12 X-ray films, requirements for- - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–5
brazed joints------------------------ 57.21–18 X-ray, test of welded joints- - - - - - - - - - - - - 56.20–5
Unreinforced openings in heads---------- 52.5–3 Y base for safety valves----------------- 52.14–5
(F-227)
IND E X
(Part 58: Rules applicable to installations built or contracted for prior to July 1, 1935"]
Affidavits of manufacturer of: Section Boilers—Continued.
Fusible plugs.------------------------ 58.60 Cone tops---------------------------
Lapwelded steam pipes flanged - - - - - - - - 58.27 Convex heads of ---------------------
Marine steam boilers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.1 Copper tubes in----------------------
Constructed of material tested at mill- 58.02 Cylindrical shells of ------------------
Using steel braces----------- - - - - - - - 58. 16 Date of building of ------------------
Safety valves------------------------ 58.23 Diagonal stays, area of - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Steam and water pipes---------------- 58.27 Distance of, from woodwork-----------
Steel boiler plate (certificate) - - - - - - - - - - 58.01 Donkey-----------------------------
Tubes for boilers--------------------- 58. 15 Drawings and specifications for------
Valves and fittings.------------------- 58.28 Drillings of, to determine thickness. ---- 58.6
American ingot iron-------------------- 58.15 Drums of --------------------------- 58.24
American Rolling Mill Co--------------- 58.15 Feed water for----------------------- 58.26
Angle stiffeners for curved surfaces-- - - - - - 58.12 Fittings of, material for. -------------- 58.28
Annealing of: Flat heads of. ------------------------ 58.3
Steam pipe-------------------------- 58.27 Flat surfaces in, stress allowable on----- 58.18
Tubes------------------------------ 58.15 Flues of ---------------------------- 58.14
Attachment of valves to fuel-oil tanks---- 58.29 Foreign-built, admission of, to American
Back connections of boilers.------------- 58. 17 registry--------------------------- 8.010
Bending test, steel and iron boiler plate--- 58.07 Furnaces of. See flues.
Blue prints: Fusible plugs in---------------------- 58.20
Boilers inspected.--------------------- 58.1 Gage cocks of ----------------------- 58.21
Boilers, pipe------------------------- 58.1 Girders used in - - - ------------------- 58.17
Boiler plates: Handholds-------------------------- 58.4
Certificate of manufacturer of steel----- 58.01 Heads of --------------------------- 58.3
For repairs or stock, testing of, at mill-- 58.02 Holes in—
§:
ron—
for determining thickness of ----- 58.07 Drilling of-------------- 58.2, 58.4, 58.6, 58.28
For pipe connections--------------- 58.4
Bending test of -------------------- 58.07 Reinforcing of--------------------- 58.4
Requirements for- - - - - ------------- 58.06 Hydrostatic tests of ---------------- 58.7, 58.24
Joints in, formula for pitch of rivets for. 58.9 Malleable-iron fittings in----------- 58.24, 58.28
Reports on----------------------- 58.01, 58.02 Manholes in shells of ----------------- 58.4
Requirements for - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.01 Manufacturer's affidavits regarding----- 58.1
Stamping of------------------------- 58.01 Mud drums of.---------------------- 58.3
Steel, requirements for--- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.05 Name plates for---------------------- 58.19
Test specimens for steel -- - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.07 Porcupine type, formula for determining
Testing of-------------------- - - - - - - - 58.02 preSSure On------------------------ 58.24
At mills--------------------------- 58.02 Pressure allowable on---------- - - - - - - - 58.2
Tests of, record of.---------------- 58.02, 58.07 Punching holes in -------------------- 58.2
Boiler shells: Rings in---------------------------- 58.4
Connection of, with mud drum - - - - - - - - 58.4 Riveted joints---------------------- 58.2, 58.9
Cylindrical, pressure allowable on------ 58.2 Safety valves for. See Safety valves.
Boiler space, fuel-oil tanks overhanging or Sea cocks connected with------------- 58.28
abreast of--------------------------- 58.29 Staybolts of ---------------------- 58.16, 58.18
Boiler tube sheet, compressive stress allow Stays of L
able on----------------------------- 58. 12 Manufacturer's affidavit regarding- > - 58.16
Boiler tubes: Requirements for------------------ 58.16
Affidavit of manufacturer of.---------- 58.15 Steam gages of.---------------------- 58.22
Lapwelded, test pressure on----------- 58.15 Stop valves on--------------------- 58.7, 58.28
Seamless steel, inspection, testing, and Superheaters, headers of -------------- 58.28
gaging of-------------------------- 58.15 Tees ------------------------------- 58.8
oilers: Thickness of, drilling, to determine----- 58.6
Angle stiffeners for curved surfaces-- - - - 58.12 Tube sheet of, stress, allowable on------ 58.12
Back connections of - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58. 17 Tubes of. See tubes.
Blueprints of -------------------- 58.1, 58.24 Used for other than marine purposes--- 58.03
Bumped heads of ------------------ 58.3, 58.24 Vertical----------------------------- 58.13
Butt straps of ----------------------- 58.10 Water gage of ----------------------- 58.21
Cast steel and iron in -- - - - - - 58.24, 58.27, 58.28 Water tube—
Check valves------------------------ 58.28 Affidavit of manufacturer of -- - - - - - - 58.24
Coil-------------------------------- 58.24 Copper and brass tubes and drums in- 58.24
Combustion chambers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58. 17 Drawings for---------------------- 58.24
Computation of strength of, record of -, - 58. 1 Drums, pipe----------------------- 58.24
Concave heads of -------------------- 58.3 Hydrostatic test of ----------------- 58.24
*Index for rules applicable to installations built or contracted for after July 1, 1935, may be ſound on page F-219.
(F-228)
INDEX
Boilers—Continued. Section Section

Water tube—Continued. Feed pipe, joints, flanges, etc., of.-------- 58.27
Pressure allowable on--------------- 58.24 Feed water heaters, pressure allowable on-- 58.28
Woodwork near, protection of.--------- 58.11 Ferrosteel----------------------------- 58.28
Bolts: Fittings of boilers---------------------- 58.28
Hollow-rolled, stay------------------- 58.16 Flanges on steam and water pipes-------- 58.27
Stay, requirements for---------------- 58. 16 Flat heads of boilers-------------------- 58.3
Braces: Flat-seat safety valves------------------ 58.23
Crowfeet for------------------------- 58.16 Flat surfaces, stress allowable on-- 58.3, 58.16, 58.17
Stress, allowable on--- 58.17 Flexible staybolts---------------------- 58. 16
Brass for fittings----------------------- 58.28 Flues:
Bronze for fittings---------------------- 58.28 Bracing of--------------------------- 58.14
Brown furnace------------------------- 58.13 Corrugated, thickness of, measurement of 58.13
Bulkhead— Drilling of--------------------------- 58.14
Space between water-tube boiler and - - - 58.11 Inspection of------------------------ 58.14
Bumped heads of boilers---------------- 58.3 Pressure allowable on, formulas for----- 58. 14
Butt straps on boilers, requirements for--- 58.10 Adamson type--------------------- 58.13
Cast iron and steel, use of, in boilers, pipes, Brown type----------------------- 58.13
and connections-- - - - - - - - - - - 58.24, 58.27, 58.28 Cone-shaped----------------------- 58.13
Certificate of manufacturer of: Corrugated.------------------------ 58.13
Fusible plugs.------------------------ 58.20 Deighton type--------------------- 58.13
Lapwelded steam pipe---------------- 58.27 Fox type-------------------------- 58.13
Marine steam boilers- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.1 Having sections 18 inches long------- 58.13
Constructed of material tested at the Leeds suspension bulb type---------- 58.13
mill---------------------------- 58.1 Morison corrugated type------------ 58.13
Using steel braces------------------ 58.16 Plain circular riveted.--------------- 58.13
Steam and water pipes---------------- 58.27 Plain lapwelded-------------------- 58.14
Steam boiler plates------------------- 58.01 Purves type----------------------- 58.13
Tubes for boilers--------------------- 58.15 Ribbed type----------------------- 58.13
Valves and fittings------------------- 58.28 Riveted, in sections---------------- 58.13
Chimneys, steam----------------------- 58.8 Seamless, in sections---------------- 58.14
Cocks: Spherical top type-------------- 58.12, 58.13
Gage 58.21 Used for steam chimney------------ 58.8
Sea 58.28 Vertical type---------------------- 58.13
Sto 58.28 Requirements for------------- 58.8, 58.13, 58.14
Combustion chambers------------- - - 58.12, 58.17 Steam chimney, pressure allowable on-- 58.8
Compositions made of copper, tin, and zinc- 58.28 Test of ----------------------------- 58.14
Concave heads------------------------- 58.3 Foreign-built boilers, admission of, to Amer
Cone tops, formula for pressure allowableon- 58.13 ican registry------------------------- 58.010
Connections of fuel-oil service piping----- 58.29 Fox type of flue------------------------ 58.13
Construction of fuel-oil tanks: Fuel-oil heaters:
On inland steamers------------------- 58.29 Joints in coils------------------------ 58.29
On ocean and coastwise steamers------- 58.29 Test of----------------------------- 58.29
Separate fron the hull---------------- 58.29 Water of condensation, observation tanks
Convex heads-------------------------- 58.3 for------------------------------- 58.29
Copper F. use of, in marine boilers----- 58.27 Fuel-oil pumps:
Copper tubes, use of, in marine boilers---- 58.24 Throttle valves---------------------- 58.29
Corrugated furnaces-------------------- 58.13 To be in duplicate------------------- 58.29
Crowfeet, rivets for--------------------- 58.16 Fuel-oil service piping:
Cylindrical shells of boilers, pressure allow Connections of.---------------------- 58.29
able on----------------------------- 58.2 Test of----------------------------- 58.29
Dampers in funnels--------------------- 58.29 Valves------------------------------ 58.29
Date of building of boiler--------------- 58.19 Fuel-oil strainers to be in duplicate------- 58.29
Deighton furnace---------------------- 58.13 Fuel-oil tanks:
Diagonal stays, areas of.---------------- 58.16 Abreast of boilers-------------------- 58.29
Donkey boiler, requirements for---------- 58.5 Attachment of pipes to--------------- 58.29
Double bottoms: In 'tween decks---------------------- 58.29
Gate valve at tank top---------------- 58.29 In wooden vessels-------------------- 58.29
Used of for storage of fuel-oil---------- 58.29 Internal gate valves in—
Drawings of: Inland steamers-------------------- 58.29
Boilers---------------------------- 58.1, 58.24 Ocean and coastwise steamers------- 58.29
Combustion chambers---------------- 58.12 Openings in bottom, ends, or sides of --- 58.29
Drilling of: Overhanging boilers------------------ 58.29
Holes for stays and tubes------------- 58.2 Sounding pipes----------------------- 58.29
Old boilers-------------------------- 58.2 Test of----------------------------- 58.29
Rivet holes, when required.------------ 58.2 Went pipes-------------------------- 58.29
iriſis: Guide holes for III-IIII 58.4 Furnaces, pressure allowable on-- - - - - - - - - 58.13
Drip pans under burners, etc.------------ 58.29 Steel for, tensile strength and elongation
Drums and heads---------------------- 58.24 required-------------------------- 58.13
Electric welding------------------------ 58.25 See flues.
Engineers, duty of, safety valve on evapora Fusible plugs:
tor--------------------------------- 58.28 Requirements for - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.20
Evaporators: Gage cocks on boilers------------------- 58.21
Safety valve required on- - - - - - - - - ----- 58.28 Gages:
Steam pressure allowable on----------- 58.28 oiler plate, thickness of.------------- 58.09
(F–229)
INDEX
Gages—Continued. Section Pipes—Continued. Section

Steam, on boilers--------------------- 58.22 Steam—Continued.
Water, on boilers--------------------- 58.21 Lapwelded, annealing of ------------ 58.27
Girders, boiler, formula for pressure on- - - 58.17 Lapwelded, hydrostatic test of ------ 58.27
Guide holes for drills------------------- 58.2 Slip joints for---------------------- 58.27
Gusset stays--------------------------- 58. 16 Welded, requirements and tests for--- 58.27
Handholes in boilers-------------------- 58.4 Water, welded----------------------- 58.27
Headers of superheaters----------------- 58.28 Pitch of rivets, formulas to determine----- 58.9
Heads, boilers: Plugs, fusible, in boilers----------------- 58.20
Pressure allowable on----------------- 58.3 Porcupine-type boilers, pressure allowable
Requirements for------------------ 58.3, 58.24 On---------------------------------- 58.24
Water tube-------------------------- 58.24 Pumps, fuel-oil------------------------ 58.29
Heaters, feed-water--------------------- 58.28 Punching holes in boilers---------------- 58.2
Holes in boilers------------------ 58.2, 58.4, 58.28 Reinforcing:
Hollow stay bolts---------------------- 58.16 Electric process---------------------- 58.25
Houston braces, pressure allowable on---- 58.16 Holes in boilers---------------------- 58.4
Hydrostatic test: Oxyacetylene process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58.25
Boilers------------------------------ 58.7 Repairs, boiler plates for-- - - - - - - - - - - - 58.01, 58.02
Flange connections------------------- 58.27 Reports, of boiler material tested - - - - - 58.01, 58.02
Lapwelded steam pipe---------------- 58.27 Ribbed furnaces----------------------- 58.13
Main steam pipe--------------------- 58.7 Rings, reinforcing, note tested.----------- 58.4
Superheaters, headers of ------------- 58.28 Riveted flues-------------------------- 58.13
Tubes------------------------------ 58. 15 Riveted joints, rules for----------------- 58.9
Installations of fuel-oil systems: Rivet holes in boilers:
Inland steamers---------------------- 58.29 Drilling of, etc.----------------------- 58.2
Ocean and coastwise steamers - - - - - - - - - 58.29 Formulas for------------------------ 58.9
Internal gate valves in fuel-oil tanks: Rivets, pitch of, formula for determining-- 58.9
Inland steamers---------------------- 58.29 Subpart A-Boiler plate- - - - - ----------- 58.01
Ocean and coastwise steamers--------- 58.29 Subpart B–Boilers and attachments.----- 58.1
Hºlation of boiler rooms and funnel casings
Iron :
58.29 Safety valves:
Area of ----------------------------- 58.23
Cast, use of, in boilers, pipes, and connec Cast-steel fittings for----------------- 58.28
tions----------------------------- 58.28 Flat-seat.---------------------------- 58.23
Malleable, fittings of, in boilers, etc.- - - - 58.28 How fitted to boiler--------------- 58.23, 58.28
Plates, requirements for--------------- 58.06 Lever------------------------------- 58.23
Joints: On evaporators---------------------- 58.28
In coils of fuel-oil heaters------------- 58.29 On steam chimneys------------------- 58.8
Of steam and feed pipes--------------- 58.27 Spring loaded ----------------------- 58.23
Riveted lap, formulas for pitch of rivets in- 58.9 Screw stays--------------------------- 58.16
Slip, in steam pipe------------------- 58.27 Sea cocks----------------------------- 58.28
Lapwelded pipe------------------------ 58.27 Seamless flues------------------------- 58.14
Lapwelded tubes----------------------- 58. 15 Seamless steel steam and water pipes----- 58.27
Leeds type furnace--------------------- 58.13 Seamless tubes------------------------- 58.15
Lever safety valve--------------------- 58.23 Semisteel------------------------------ 58.28
Low-pressure fuel-oil systems------------ 58.29 Separators, pressure allowable on--------- 58.28
Manholes in boilers--------------------- 58.4 Sheathing for smokestack--------------- 58.11
Main steam pipe----------------------- 58.27 Sling stays------------------------- 58.12, 58.16
Malleable iron for valves---------------- 58.28 Slip joints in steam pipes- - - ------------ 58.27
Manufacturer's standard---------------- 58.28 Smokestacks, sheathing for-------------- 58.11
Morison type furnace------------------- 58.13 Sounding pipes in fuel-oil tanks.---------- 58.29
Mud drum, connection of, with boiler----- 58.4 Spherical top furnaces------------------ 58.13
Name plate on boiler------------------- 58.19 Spring loaded safety valves-------------- 58.23
Nozzles: Stamps on boiler plate:
Cast-------------------------------- 58.28 Inspector's-------------------------- 58.01
Reinforcing-------------------------- 58.4 Manufacturer's---------------------- 58.01
Observation tanks for water of condensation. 58.29 Statement of manufacturers of:
Ocean and coastwise steamers, installations Boiler plate------------------------- 58.04
of fuel-oil systems on----------------- 58.29 Boiler tubes------------------------- 58.15
Openings in bottom, sides, or ends of fuel- - Steam and water pipes. --------------- 58.27
oil tanks---------------------------- 58.29 Staybolts, boiler, requirements for-------- 58.16
Oxyacetylene welding------------------- 58.25 sº boiler:
Pipe fitting---------------------------- 58.28 iagonal and gusset------------------ 58.16
Pipes: Drilling of--------------------------- 58.16
Cast iron and steel in fittings of ------- 58.28 Holes for---------------------------- 58. 16
Connections of, holes for-------------- 58.4 Hollow----------------------------- 58.16
Copper, requirements for-------------- 58.27 Pins for----------------------------- 58. 16
Feed, joints, flanges, etc., of ----------- 58.27 Pitch of.---------------------------- 58. 18
Fittings of.------------------------- 58.28 Requirements for------------ 58.16, 58.17, 58.18
Holes for, in boilers, reinforcement of - 58.4, 58.28 Stress allowable on---------- 58.16, 58.17, 58.18
Lapwelded-------------------------- 58.27 Steam and water pipes, requirements for-- 58.27
Main steam, thickness of and pressure Steam chimney, pressure allowable on, for
allowable on----------------------- 58.27 mulas for--------------------------- 58.8
Seamless---------------------------- 58.27 Steam gages--------------------------- 58.22
Steam: Steam pipe. See pipe.
Joints, flanges, etc., of -------------- 58.27 Steam traps--------------------------- 58.28
(F–230)
INDEX
Steel, cast, use of in boilers, pipes, and con- Section Tubes—Continued. Section
nections-------------------------- 58.24, 58.28 Statement of manufacturer of --------- 58.15
Steel plates, requirements for--------- 58.04, 58.05 Welding of-------------------------- 58.15
Stiffeners, angle iron-------------------- 58.12 Use of double-bottom tanks for storage of
Stock, boiler plate for------------------- 58.02 fuel-oil------------------------------ 58.29
Stop valves on boilers---------------- 58.7, 58.28 Valves:
Strainers for fuel-oil systems------------- 58.2 Affidavit of manufacturers of valves and
Straps, butt--------------------------- 58.10 fittings---------------------------- 58.28
Superheaters, headers of ---------------- 58.28 Check------------------------------ 58.28
Temperatures of valves and fittings - - - - - - 58.28 Marking of-------------------------- 58.28
Test specimens for steel plates----------- 58.07 Material of.------------------------- 58.28
Tests: Sea--------------------------------- 58.28
Of fuel-oil service piping-------------- 58.29 Stamps on-------------------------- 58.28
Of fuel-oil tanks--------------------- 58.29 Stop, on boilers-------------------- 58.7, 58.28
Throttle valves of fuel-oil pumps--- - - - - - - 58.29 Throttle, on fuel-oil pumps--- - - - - - - - - - 58.29
Trade-marks on valves and fittings------- 58.28 Valves and fittings, requirements for------ 58.28
Traps, steam-------------------------- 58.28 Vents for fuel-oil tanks----------------- 58.29
Tube sheets, stress allowable on---------- 58.12 Vertical furnaces----------------------- 58.13
Tubes: Water gages on boilers------------------ 58.21
American ingot iron for--------------- 58.15 Water of condensation from fuel-oil heaters- 58.29
Annealing of------------------------- 58.15 Water-tube and coil boilers-------------- 58.24
Copper and brass, in water tube boilers- 58.24 Welded pipe--------------------------- 58.27
Holes for---------------------------- 58.2 Welding:
Inspection of------------------------ 58.15 By elctric, oxyacetylene, and other proc
Lapwelded, material, inspection and tests eSSes------------------------------ 58.25
Of-------------------------------- 58.15 Of drums of water-tube boilers--------- 58.25
Material for---------------------- 58.04, 58.15 Of tubes---------------------------- 58.15
Seamless steel, material, tests and gag Wooden vessels, fuel-oil tanks in--------- 58.29
ing of----------------------------- 58.15 Woodwork near boilers, protection of- - - - - 58.11
(F–231)
|-= =====
Date Due
Lºs -º
Lilliºl
e T
II. | DE
7
Fº S
3
ITEM C
013 3

Marine Engineering Regulations and Mater

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Marine Engineering Regulations and Mater

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Acerca de este libro

Acerca de la Búsqueda de libros de Google

Materials, Construction, Installation, Inspection, and

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE

UNITED STATES CoAst GUARD HEADQUARTERs,

SUBCHAPTER F-MARINE ENGINEERING

CHAPTER I—CoAst GUARD: INSPECTION AND NAvigATION

SUBCHAPTER F-MARINE ENGINEERING

PART 50–GENERAL PROVISIONS

Sec. GENERAL LAP-WELDED AND SEAMLess Steel AND LAP-WELDED

Sec. CARBON AND ALLOY-STEEL NUTS FOR HIGH TEMPERA

(a) Name and location of manufacturer's works.

51.1–14 Stock plates. Plates may be ordered to be carried in stock ashore or on

Carbon, max., percent:

51.2–3 Tensile properties—(a) Grades A and B.

Tensile strength, psi----------------------------------------- 55,000 to 65,000 60,000 to 70,000

* See section 51.2–4 (a) (1) and (3).

Tensile strength, psi------ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65,000 to 77,000 70,000 to 82,000

****.*.*. 1,550,000- 1,550,000

* See section 51.2–4 (b) § and (3).

Tensile strength, psi----------------------- 65,000 to 77,000 || 70,000 to 82,000 75,000 to 87,000

* See section 51.2–4 (c) (1) and (3).

Ratio of pin diameter to thickness of specimen

1 inch and under------------------------------------- % 1 1% 2

Grade E Grade F Grade G

1 inch and under------------------------------------------------ 1 1% 2

NotE: In substantial agreement with A. S. T. M. Designation A 31–40. Tested material—Class A.

Carbon, maximum, percent-----------------------------------------|--------------- - 0.27

Tensile strength, psi----------------------------------------- 45,000 to 55,000 58,000 to 68,000

Variations from size, inches | Out of round

% inch and under---------------------------------------------- 0 005 0.005 0.008

51.5–4 Modifications in elongation. For material over 3% inch in thickness, a deduc

% inch and under------------------------------------------------------ % 1%

Diameter Variation in diameter

Over #. Under Over §

- - --- %. 0.007 0.007 0.010

WRoughT-IRoN BARs For STAYS AND STAY Bolts

(c) Etch-test specimens shall be of the full section of material as rolled.

Grade A Grade B Grade O

Carbon, maximum percent----------------------------------|------------ 0.27 0.17

Grade A Grade B Grade C

Tensile strength, psi------------------------ 45,000 to 55,000 || 58,000 to 68,000 75,000 to 90,000

% inch and under-------------------------------------------------- 0.022 under 0.020 over

Specified size of rivets Permissible variations in diameter of head

plus Ac inch minus 942 inch plus 942 inch.

FIGURE M-3.−The FIGURE M-4.—The

Carbon, percent----------------------------------------------- 0.08 to 0.18 0.03 maximum

Outside diameter of tube (inches)

2% and under------------- 15 percent of outside diameter- - - - - - 12.5 percent of outside diameter.

Over 3% to 6-------------- 10 percent of outside diameter------ 10 percent of outside diameter.

A =Outside diameter of tubes less % inch.

D=Outside diameter of tube plus 342 inch.

FIGURE M-5.-Flaring Tool and Die Block for Flange Test.

Height of crushed section, inches

Wall thickness of tubes, inches

0.135 and under------------------------------------------------------- %, or until out- 1%

51.9–8 Hydrostatic test. (a) Prior to upsetting, swaging, expanding, bending, or

Outsid --> Wall thickness, percent a, “

(including out of * |catiºnal

Over Under Over º: Over §: Over # Over §: Over §: Over §:

4 and under--- - - - - - - - - - - - - %4 %2 40 || 0 | 35 | 0 || 33 || 0 || 28 || 0 | 16 | 0 || 346 0

Under 1-------------------| 0, 004 || 0.004 20 0 12 0 | }. 0

• Permissible variations in length apply to tubes before bending.

****... 1,550,000- 1,550,000